Heidenhain Manual

Users Manual
HEIDENHAIN
Conversational
Programming
iTNC 530
NC software
606 420-02
606 421-02
606 424-02
English (en)
12/2011
Controls of the TNC

Keys on visual display unit
Key
Program/file management, TNC functions

Key
Function
Function
Select or delete programs and files,

external data transfer
Split screen layout
Define program call, select datum and

point tables
Toggle the display between machining

and programming modes
Select MOD functions
Soft keys for selecting functions on

screen
Display help text for NC error messages,

call TNCguide
Shifts between soft-key rows
Display all current error messages

Alphanumeric keyboard
Key
Show calculator
Function
File names, comments
Navigation keys
DIN/ISO programming
Key
Function
Move highlight
Machine operating modes

Key
Go directly to blocks, cycles and

parameter functions
Function
Manual Operation
Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed

Electronic Handwheel
Feed rate
Spindle speed
100
100
smarT.NC
50
150
50
150
Positioning with Manual Data Input

0
F %
S %
Program Run, Single Block

Cycles, subprograms and program section repeats
Program Run, Full Sequence
Key
Function
Define touch probe cycles
Programming modes
Key
Function
Define and call cycles
Programming and Editing

Test Run
Enter and call labels for

subprogramming and program section
repeats
Program stop in a program
Coordinate axes and numbers: Entering and editing
Tool functions
Key
Function
Define tool data in the program
Call tool data
Programming path movements

Key
Function
...
...
Select coordinate axes or

enter them into the program
Numbers
Decimal point / Reverse algebraic sign
Function
Approach/depart contour
Polar coordinate input / Incremental

values
FK free contour programming
Q-parameter programming /
Q-parameter status
Straight line
Save actual position or values from

calculator
Circle center/pole for polar coordinates

Circle with center
Circle with radius
Circular arc with tangential connection
Chamfering/corner rounding
Special functions / smarT.NC

Key
Key
Function
Show special functions
smarT.NC: Select next tab on form
smarT.NC: Select first input field in
previous/next frame
Skip dialog questions, delete words

Confirm entry and resume dialog
Conclude block and exit entry
Clear numerical entry or TNC error
message
Abort dialog, delete program section
About this Manual
About this Manual

The symbols used in this manual are described below.
This symbol indicates that important information about the
function described must be considered.
This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the

following risks when using the described function:
Danger to workpiece
Danger to fixtures
Danger to tool
Danger to machine
Danger to operator
This symbol indicates that the described function must be

adapted by the machine tool builder. The function
described may therefore vary depending on the machine.
This symbol indicates that you can find detailed

information about a function in another manual.
Would you like any changes, or have you found

any errors?
We are continuously striving to improve documentation for you.
Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail
address: tnc-userdoc@heidenhain.de.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
TNC Model, Software and Features

This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of
the following NC software numbers.
TNC model
NC software number
iTNC 530, HSCI and HeROS 5
606 420-02
iTNC 530, HSCI and HeROS 5
606 421-02
iTNC 530 Programming

Workstation, HeROS 5
606 421-02
The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC. The export
versions of the TNC have the following limitations:
Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes
HSCI (HEIDENHAIN Serial Controller Interface) identifies the new
hardware platform of the TNC controls.
HeROS 5 identifies the operating system of HSCI-based TNC controls.
The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his
machine by setting machine parameters. Some of the functions
described in this manual may therefore not be among the features
provided by the TNC on your machine tool.
TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include:
Tool measurement with the TT
Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the
features of your machine.
Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer

programming courses for the TNCs. We recommend these courses as
an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing
information and ideas with other TNC users.
Users Manual for Cycle Programming:
All of the cycle functions (touch probe cycles and fixed
cycles) are described in a separate manual. Please contact
HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this Users Manual.
ID: 670 388-xx
smarT.NC user documentation:

The smarT.NC operating mode is described in a separate
Pilot. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of
this Pilot. ID: 533 191-xx.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Software options
The iTNC 530 features various software options that can be enabled
by you or your machine tool builder. Each option is to be enabled
separately and contains the following respective functions:
Software option 1
Cylinder surface interpolation (Cycles 27, 28, 29 and 39)
Feed rate in mm/min for rotary axes: M116
Tilting the machining plane (Cycle 19, PLANE function and 3-D ROT
soft key in the Manual operating mode)
Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane
Software option 2
5-axis interpolation
Spline interpolation
3-D machining:
M114: Automatic compensation of machine geometry when
working with swivel axes
M128: Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning
with tilted axes (TCPM)
FUNCTION TCPM: Maintaining the position of the tool tip when
positioning with tilted axes (TCPM) in selectable modes
M144: Compensating the machines kinematic configuration for
ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block
Additional parameters for finishing/roughing and tolerance
for rotary axes in Cycle 32 (G62)
LN blocks (3-D compensation)
DCM Collision software option
Description
Function that monitors areas defined by the

machine manufacturer to prevent collisions.
Page 396
DXF Converter software option
Description
Extract contours and machining positions

from DXF files (R12 format).
Page 268
Additional dialog language software

option
Function for enabling the conversational
languages Slovenian, Slovak, Norwegian,
Latvian, Estonian, Korean, Turkish, Romanian,
Lithuanian.
Description
Page 680
Description
Function for superimposing coordinate

transformations in the Program Run modes,
handwheel superimposed traverse in virtual
axis direction.
Page 416
AFC software option
Description
Function for adaptive feed-rate control for

optimizing the machining conditions during
series production.
Page 427
KinematicsOpt software option
Description
Touch-probe cycles for inspecting and

optimizing the machine accuracy.
Users Manual for

Cycles
3D-ToolComp software option
Description
3-D radius compensation depending on the

tools contact angle for LN blocks.
Page 427
Extended Tool Management software

option
Description
Tool management that can be changed by the

machine manufacturer using Python scripts.
Page 200
Interpolation Turning software option
Description
Interpolation turning of a shoulder with cycle

290.
Users Manual for

Cycles
CAD Viewer software option
Description
Opening of 3-D models on the NC control.
Page 285
Remote Desktop Manager software

option
Description
Remote operation of external computer units

(e.g. a Windows PC) via the user interface of
the TNC
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Global Program Settings software option
Page 712
Cross Talk Compensation software option

(CTC)
Description
Compensation of axis couplings
Machine Manual
Position Adaptive Control (PAC) software

option
Description
Changing control parameters
Machine Manual
Load Adaptive Control (LAC) software

option
Description
Dynamic changing of control parameters
Machine Manual
10
Feature content level (upgrade functions)

Along with software options, significant further improvements of the
TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level (FCL)
upgrade functions. Functions subject to the FCL are not available
simply by updating the software on your TNC.
All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge
when you receive a new machine.
Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n, where n

indicates the sequential number of the feature content level.
You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the
FCL functions. For more information, contact your machine tool
builder or HEIDENHAIN.
FCL 4 functions
Description
Graphical depiction of the protected

space when DCM collision monitoring is
active
Page 400
Handwheel superimposition in stopped

condition when DCM collision
monitoring is active
Page 399
3-D basic rotation (set-up

compensation)
Machine Manual
FCL 3 functions
Description
Touch probe cycle for 3-D probing
Users Manual for

Cycles
Touch probe cycles for automatic datum

setting using the center of a slot/ridge
Users Manual for

Cycles
Feed-rate reduction for the machining of

contour pockets with the tool being in
full contact with the workpiece
Users Manual for

Cycles
PLANE function: Entry of axis angle
Page 484
User documentation as a
context-sensitive help system
Page 164
smarT.NC: Programming of smarT.NC

and machining can be carried out
simultaneously
Page 124
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
11
FCL 3 functions
Description
smarT.NC: Contour pocket on point

pattern
smarT.NC Pilot
smarT.NC: Preview of contour

programs in the file manager
smarT.NC Pilot
smarT.NC: Positioning strategy for

machining point patterns
smarT.NC Pilot
FCL 2 functions
Description
3-D line graphics
Page 156
Virtual tool axis
Page 601
USB support of block devices (memory

sticks, hard disks, CD-ROM drives)
Page 134
Filtering of externally created contours
Page 441
Possibility of assigning different depths

to each subcontour in the contour
formula
Users Manual for

Cycles
Touch-probe cycle for global setting of

touch-probe parameters
Users Manual for

Touch Probe Cycles
smarT.NC: Graphic support of block

scan
smarT.NC Pilot
smarT.NC: Coordinate transformation
smarT.NC Pilot
smarT.NC: PLANE function
smarT.NC Pilot
Intended place of operation

The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance
with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for use primarily
in industrially-zoned areas.
Legal information
This product uses open source software. Further information is
available on the control under
U
U
U
Programming and Editing operating mode

MOD function
LEGAL INFORMATION soft key
12
New functions 606 42x-01 since the predecessor versions 340 49x-05
New functions 606 42x-01 since the

predecessor versions 340 49x-05
Opening and Editing of externally created files is new (see
Additional tools for management of external file types on page
139)
New functions in the task bar added (see Soft-key row on page
92)
Enhanced functions for configuration of the Ethernet interface (see
Configuring the TNC on page 651)
Improvements regarding Functional Safety FS (option):
General information on Functional Safety FS (see General
Information on page 560)
Explanation of terms (see Explanation of terms on page 561)
Checking the axis positions (see Check axis positions on page
562)
Activating feed-rate limitation (see Activating feed-rate
limitation on page 564)
Improvements regarding the general status view of a TNC with
functional safety (see Additional Status displays on page 564)
The new HR 520 and HR 550 FS handwheels are supported (see
Traversing with electronic handwheels on page 548)
New software option 3-D ToolComp: 3-D tool radius compensation
depending on the tools contact angle on blocks with surface normal
vectors (LN blocks, see "3-D tool radius compensation depending on
the tools contact angle (3D-ToolComp software option)", page 515)
3-D line graphics is now also possible in full-screen mode (see 3-D
Line Graphics (FCL2 Function) on page 156)
A file selection dialog for selecting files in different NC functions and
in the table view of the pallet table is available now (see Calling any
program as a subprogram on page 291)
DCM: Saving and restoring of fixture situations
DCM: The form for test program generation now also contains icons
and tooltips (see Check the position of the measured fixture on
page 408)
DCM, FixtureWizard: Touch points and probing sequence are shown
more clearly now
DCM, FixtureWizard: Designations, touch points and measuring
points can be shown or hidden as desired.(see Operating
FixtureWizard on page 405)
DCM, FixtureWizard: Chucking equipment and insertion points can
now also be selected by mouse click
DCM: A library with standard chucking equipment is available now
(see Fixture templates on page 404)
DCM: Tool carrier management (see Tool Holder Management
(DCM Software Option) on page 413)
In the Test Run mode, the working plane can now by defined
manually (see Setting a tilted working plane for the test run on
page 626)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
13
In Manual mode the RW-3D mode for position display is now also
available (see Position Display Types on page 663)
Entries in the tool table TOOL.T (see Tool table: Standard tool data
on page 176)
New DR2TABLE column for definition of a compensation table for
tool radius compensation depending on the tools contact angle
New LAST_USE column, into which the TNC enters the date and
time of the last tool call
Q parameter programming: QS string parameters can now also be
used for jump addresses of conditional jumps, subprograms or
program section repeats (see "Calling a subprogram", page 289, see
"Calling a program section repeat", page 290 and see "Programming
If-Then decisions", page 315)
The generation of tool usage lists in the Program Run modes can be
configured in a form (see Settings for the tool usage test on page
197)
The behavior during deletion of tools from the tool table can now be
influenced via machine parameter 7263 see "Editing tool tables",
page 183
In the positioning mode TURN of the PLANE function you can now
define a clearance height to which the tool is to be retracted before
tilting to tool axis direction (see Automatic positioning:
MOVE/TURN/STAY (entry is mandatory) on page 486)
The following additional functions are now available in the expanded
tool management (see Tool management (software option) on
page 200):
Columns with special functions are also editable now
The form view of the tool data can now be exited with or without
saving changed values
The table view now offers a search function
Indexed tools are now shown correctly in the form view
The tool sequence list includes more detailed information now
The loading and unloading list of the tool magazine can now be
loaded and unloaded by drag and drop
Columns in the table view can be moved simply by drag and drop
Several special functions (SPEC FCT) are now available in the MDI
operating mode (see Programming and Executing Simple
Machining Operations on page 604)
There is a new manual probing cycle that can be used to
compensate workpiece misalignments by rotating the rotary table
(see Workpiece alignment using 2 points on page 586)
New touch probe cycle for calibrating a touch probe by means of a
calibration sphere (see User's Manual for Cycle Programming)
14
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
KinematicsOpt: Better support for positioning of Hirth-coupled axes

(see User's Manual for Cycle Programming)
KinematicsOpt: An additional parameter for determination of the
backlash in a rotary axis was introduced (see User's Manual for
Cycle Programming)
New Cycle 275 for Trochoidal Slot Milling (see Users Manual for
Cycle Programming)
In Cycle 241 "Single-Fluted Deep-Hole Drilling" it is now possible to
define a dwell depth (see User's Manual for Cycle Programming)
The approach and departure behavior of Cycle 39 "Cylinder Surface
Contour" can now be adjusted (see User's Manual for Cycle
Programming)
15
New Functions with 606 42x-02

New function for opening 3-D data (software option) directly on the
TNC (see "Open 3-D CAD data (software option)" page 285)
Improvement of Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM):
Chucking equipment archives can now be activated (see Loading
fixtures under program control on page 412) and deactivated
(see Deactivating fixtures under program control on page 412)
under program control
The display of stepped tools has been improved
When you select tool carrier kinematics, the TNC now displays a
graphical preview of the carrier kinematics (see Assigning the
tool-carrier kinematics on page 186)
Extension of the functions for multiple axis machining:
In manual mode, you can now also travel the axes again when
TCPM and Tilt Machining Plane are active at the same time
You can now also change tools when M128/FUNCTION TCPM is active
File management: archiving of files in ZIP archives (see "Archive
files" page 137)
The nesting depth for program calls has been increased from 6 to 10
(see Nesting depth on page 293)
smarT.NC-UNITs can now be inserted anywhere in plain-language
programs (see smartWizard on page 447)
There is now a search function based on tool names available in the
tool selection pop-up window (see Search for tool names in the
selection window on page 193)
Improvements in pallet machining:
The new column FIXTURE has been added to the pallet table to be
able to activate fixtures automatically (see "Pallet Operation with
Tool-Oriented Machining" page 528)
The new workpiece status SKIP has been added to the pallet table
(see "Setting up the pallet level" page 534)
If a tool sequence list is created for a pallet table, the TNC now
also checks that all the NC programs of the pallet table are
available (see Calling tool management on page 200)
The new host computer operation was introduced (see Host
computer operation on page 675)
The SELinux security software is available (see SELinux security
software on page 93)
16
Improvements to the DXF converter:

Contours can now also be extracted from .H files (see Data
transfer from plain-language programs on page 284)
Preselected contours can now also be selected in the tree
structure (see Selecting and saving a contour on page 274)
A snap function facilitates contour selection
Extended status display (see Basic settings on page 270)
Adjustable background color (see Basic settings on page 270)
Display can be changed between 2-D and 3-D (see Basic
settings on page 270)
Improvements to the global program settings (GS):
All the form data can now be set and reset under program control
(see Technical prerequisites on page 418)
Handwheel superimposition value VT can be reset when tool is
changed (see Virtual axis VT on page 426)
If the Swapping Axes function is active, it is now permitted to
position to machine-based positions on the axes that have not
been swapped
Using the new SEL PGM function you can assign variable program
names via QS string parameters call them with CALL SELECTED (see
Define program call on page 446)
Improvements to the tool table TOOL.T
Using the FIND ACTIVE TOOL NAMES soft key you can check
whether identical tool names are defined in the tool table (see
"Editing tool tables" page 183)
The input range of the delta values DL, DR and DR2 have been
increased to 999.9999 mm (see "Tool table: Standard tool data"
page 176)
The following additional functions are now available in the expanded
tool management (see Tool management (software option) on
page 200):
Importing of tool data in CSV format (see Import tool data on
page 205)
Exporting of tool data in CSV format (see Export the tool data
on page 206)
Marking and deleting of selectable tool data (see Delete marked
tool data on page 207)
Inserting of tool indices (see Operating the tool management
on page 202)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
17
New cycle 225 Engraving (see Users Manual for Cycle

Programming)
New cycle 276 Contour Train (see Users Manual for Cycle
Programming)
New cycle 290 Interpolation Turning (software option, see Users
Manual for Cycle Programming)
In the thread milling cycles 26x a separate feed rate is now available
for tangential approach to the thread (see Users Manual for Cycle
Programming)
The following improvements were made to the KinematicsOpt
cycles (see Users Manual for Conversational Programming):
Newer, faster optimization algorithm
It is no longer necessary to run a separate measurement series for
position optimization after angle optimization
Return of the offset errors (change of machine datum) to the
parameters Q147-149
More plane measuring points for ball measurement
Rotary axes that are not configured are ignored by TNC when
executing the cycle
18
Changed functions 606 42x-01 since the predecessor versions 340 49x-06
Changed functions 606 42x-01 since

the predecessor versions 340 49x-06
Q-parameter programming: In the FN20 function WAIT FOR you can
now enter 128 characters (see FN 20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC
synchronization on page 335)
In the calibration menus for touch probe length and radius, the
number and name of the active tool are also displayed now (if the
calibration data from the tool table are to be used, MP7411 = 1, see
"Managing more than one block of calibrating data", page 580)
During tilting in the Distance-To-Go mode, the PLANE function now
shows the angle actually left to be traversed until the target position
(see Position display on page 471)
The approach behavior during side finishing with Cycle 24 (DIN/ISO:
G124) was changed (see User's Manual for Cycle Programming).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
19
Changed functions with 606 42x-02
Changed functions with 606 42x-02

Tool names can now be defined with 32 characters (see Tool
numbers and tool names on page 174)
Improved and simplified operation by mouse and touchpad in all
graphics windows (see Functions of the 3-D line graphics on page
156)
Various pop-up windows have been redesigned
If you do a Test Run without calculating the machining time, the TNC
generates a tool usage file nevertheless (see Tool usage test on
page 197)
The size of the Service ZIP files has been increased to 40 MB (see
Generating service files on page 163)
M124 can now be deactivated by entering M124 without T (see Do
not include points when executing non-compensated line blocks:
M124 on page 374)
The PRESET TABLE soft key has been renamed to DATUM
MANAGEMENT
The SAVE PRESET soft key has been renamed to SAVE ACTIVE
PRESET
20
Table of Contents
First Steps with the iTNC 530

Introduction
Programming: Fundamentals,
File Management
Programming: Programming Aids
Programming: Tools
Programming: Programming Contours
Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files
or Plain-language Contours
Programming: Subprograms and Program
Section Repeats
Programming: Q-Parameters
Programming: Miscellaneous Functions
Programming: Special Functions
Programming: Multiple Axis Machining
Programming: Pallet Editor
Manual Operation and Setup
Test Run and Program Run
MOD Functions
Tables and Overviews
Industrial PC 6341 with Windows 7 (Option)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1 First Steps with the iTNC 530 ..... 51

1.1 Overview ..... 52
1.2 Machine Switch-On ..... 53
Acknowledge the power interruption and move to the reference points ..... 53
1.3 Programming the First Part ..... 54
Select the correct operating mode ..... 54
The most important TNC keys ..... 54
Create a new program/file management ..... 55
Define a workpiece blank ..... 56
Program layout ..... 57
Program a simple contour ..... 58
Create a cycle program ..... 61
1.4 Graphically Testing the First Program ..... 64
Selecting the correct operating mode ..... 64
Select the tool table for the test run ..... 64
Choose the program you want to test ..... 65
Select the screen layout and the view ..... 65
Start the program test ..... 65
1.5 Tool Setup ..... 66
Prepare and measure tools ..... 66
The tool table TOOL.T ..... 66
The pocket table TOOL_P.TCH ..... 67
1.6 Workpiece Setup ..... 68
Clamp the workpiece ..... 68
Align the workpiece with a 3-D touch probe system ..... 69
Set the datum with a 3-D touch probe ..... 70
1.7 Running the First Program ..... 71
Choose the program you want to run ..... 71
Start the program ..... 71
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
23
2 Introduction ..... 73
2.1 The iTNC 530 ..... 74
Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational, smarT.NC and ISO formats ..... 74
Compatibility ..... 74
2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard ..... 75
Visual display unit ..... 75
Sets the screen layout ..... 76
Operating panel ..... 77
2.3 Operating Modes ..... 78
Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel ..... 78
Positioning with Manual Data Input ..... 78
Programming and Editing ..... 79
Test Run ..... 79
Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block ..... 80
2.4 Status Displays ..... 81
General status display ..... 81
Additional status displays ..... 83
2.5 Window Manager ..... 91
Soft-key row ..... 92
2.6 SELinux security software ..... 93
2.7 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels ..... 94
3-D touch probes ..... 94
HR electronic handwheels ..... 95
24
3 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management ..... 97

3.1 Fundamentals ..... 98
Position encoders and reference marks ..... 98
Reference system ..... 98
Reference system on milling machines ..... 99
Polar coordinates ..... 100
Absolute and incremental workpiece positions ..... 101
Setting the datum ..... 102
3.2 Creating and Writing Programs ..... 103
Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational ..... 103
Define the blank: BLK FORM ..... 103
Creating a new part program ..... 104
Programming tool movements in conversational format ..... 106
Actual position capture ..... 108
Editing a program ..... 109
The TNC search function ..... 113
3.3 File Management: Fundamentals ..... 115
Files ..... 115
Show externally created files on the TNC ..... 117
Data backup ..... 117
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
25
3.4 Working with the File Manager ..... 118

Directories ..... 118
Paths ..... 118
Overview: Functions of the file manager ..... 119
Calling the file manager ..... 121
Selecting drives, directories and files ..... 122
Creating a new directory (only possible on the drive TNC:\) ..... 125
Creating a new file (only possible on the drive TNC:\) ..... 125
Copying a single file ..... 126
Copying files into another directory ..... 127
Copying a table ..... 128
Copying a directory ..... 129
Choosing one of the last files selected ..... 129
Deleting a file ..... 130
Deleting a directory ..... 130
Marking files ..... 131
Renaming a file ..... 133
Additional functions ..... 134
Working with shortcuts ..... 136
Archive files ..... 137
Extract files from archive ..... 138
Additional tools for management of external file types ..... 139
Data transfer to or from an external data medium ..... 144
The TNC in a network ..... 146
USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2 function) ..... 147
26
4 Programming: Programming Aids ..... 149

4.1 Adding Comments ..... 150
Function ..... 150
Entering comments during programming ..... 150
Inserting comments after program entry ..... 150
Entering a comment in a separate block ..... 150
Functions for editing of the comment ..... 151
4.2 Structuring Programs ..... 152
Definition and applications ..... 152
Displaying the program structure window / Changing the active window ..... 152
Inserting a structuring block in the (left) program window ..... 152
Selecting blocks in the program structure window ..... 152
4.3 Integrated Pocket Calculator ..... 153
Operation ..... 153
4.4 Programming Graphics ..... 154
Generating / not generating graphics during programming ..... 154
Generating a graphic for an existing program ..... 154
Block number display ON/OFF ..... 155
Erasing the graphic ..... 155
Magnifying or reducing a detail ..... 155
4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function) ..... 156
Function ..... 156
Functions of the 3-D line graphics ..... 156
Highlighting NC blocks in the graphics ..... 158
Block number display ON/OFF ..... 158
Erasing the graphic ..... 158
4.6 Immediate Help for NC Error Messages ..... 159
Displaying error messages ..... 159
Display HELP ..... 159
4.7 List of All Current Error Messages ..... 160
Function ..... 160
Show error list ..... 160
Window contents ..... 161
Calling the TNCguide help system ..... 162
Generating service files ..... 163
4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function) ..... 164
Function ..... 164
Working with the TNCguide ..... 165
Downloading current help files ..... 169
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
27
5 Programming: Tools ..... 171

5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data ..... 172
Feed rate F ..... 172
Spindle speed S ..... 173
5.2 Tool Data ..... 174
Requirements for tool compensation ..... 174
Tool numbers and tool names ..... 174
Tool length L ..... 174
Tool radius R ..... 174
Delta values for lengths and radii ..... 175
Entering tool data into the program ..... 175
Entering tool data in the table ..... 176
Tool-carrier kinematics ..... 186
Using an external PC to overwrite individual tool data ..... 187
Pocket table for tool changer ..... 188
Calling tool data ..... 191
Tool change ..... 194
Tool usage test ..... 197
Tool management (software option) ..... 200
5.3 Tool Compensation ..... 208
Introduction ..... 208
Tool length compensation ..... 208
Tool radius compensation ..... 209
28
6 Programming: Programming Contours ..... 213

6.1 Tool Movements ..... 214
Path functions ..... 214
FK free contour programming ..... 214
Miscellaneous functions M ..... 214
Subprograms and program section repeats ..... 214
Programming with Q parameters ..... 214
6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions ..... 215
Programming tool movements for workpiece machining ..... 215
6.3 Contour Approach and Departure ..... 219
Overview: Types of paths for contour approach and departure ..... 219
Important positions for approach and departure ..... 220
Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection: APPR LT ..... 222
Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point: APPR LN ..... 222
Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection: APPR CT ..... 223
Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour: APPR LCT ..... 224
Departing on a straight line with tangential connection: DEP LT ..... 225
Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point: DEP LN ..... 225
Departure on a circular path with tangential connection: DEP CT ..... 226
Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line: DEP LCT ..... 226
6.4 Path ContoursCartesian Coordinates ..... 227
Overview of path functions ..... 227
Straight line L ..... 228
Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines ..... 229
Corner rounding RND ..... 230
Circle center CCI ..... 231
Circular path C around circle center CC ..... 232
Circular path CR with defined radius ..... 233
Circular path CT with tangential connection ..... 235
6.5 Path ContoursPolar Coordinates ..... 240
Overview ..... 240
Zero point for polar coordinates: pole CC ..... 241
Straight line LP ..... 241
Circular path CP around pole CC ..... 242
Circular path CTP with tangential connection ..... 243
Helical interpolation ..... 244
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
29
6.6 Path ContoursFK Free Contour Programming ..... 248

Fundamentals ..... 248
Graphics during FK programming ..... 250
Converting FK programs into HEIDENHAIN conversational format ..... 251
Initiating the FK dialog ..... 251
Pole for FK programming ..... 253
Free programming of straight lines ..... 253
Free programming of circular arcs ..... 254
Input possibilities ..... 254
Auxiliary points ..... 258
Relative data ..... 259
30
7 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files or Plain-language Contours ..... 267
7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option) ..... 268
Function ..... 268
Opening a DXF file ..... 269
Basic settings ..... 270
Layer settings ..... 271
Specifying the reference point ..... 272
Selecting and saving a contour ..... 274
Selecting and storing machining positions ..... 277
Zoom function ..... 283
7.2 Data transfer from plain-language programs ..... 284
Application ..... 284
Open plain-language file ..... 284
Define a reference point; select and save contours ..... 284
7.3 Open 3-D CAD data (software option) ..... 285
Operate CAD viewer ..... 286
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
31
8 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 287

8.1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 288
Labels ..... 288
8.2 Subprograms ..... 289
Operating sequence ..... 289
Programming notes ..... 289
Programming a subprogram ..... 289
Calling a subprogram ..... 289
8.3 Program Section Repeats ..... 290
Label LBL ..... 290
Programming a program section repeat ..... 290
Calling a program section repeat ..... 290
8.4 Separate Program as Subprogram ..... 291
Calling any program as a subprogram ..... 291
8.5 Nesting ..... 293
Types of nesting ..... 293
Nesting depth ..... 293
Subprogram within a subprogram ..... 294
Repeating program section repeats ..... 295
Repeating a subprogram ..... 296
8.6 Programming Examples ..... 297
32
9 Programming: Q-Parameters ..... 303

9.1 Principle and Overview ..... 304
Calling Q-parameter functions ..... 307
9.2 Part FamiliesQ Parameters in Place of Numerical Values ..... 308
Function ..... 308
9.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations ..... 309
Function ..... 309
Overview ..... 309
Programming fundamental operations ..... 310
9.4 Trigonometric Functions ..... 311
Definitions ..... 311
Programming trigonometric functions ..... 312
9.5 Circle Calculations ..... 313
Function ..... 313
9.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters ..... 314
Function ..... 314
Unconditional jumps ..... 314
Programming If-Then decisions ..... 315
Abbreviations used: ..... 315
9.7 Checking and Changing Q Parameters ..... 316
Procedure ..... 316
9.8 Additional Functions ..... 317
Overview ..... 317
FN 14: ERROR: Displaying error messages ..... 318
FN 15: PRINT: Output of texts or Q parameter values ..... 322
FN 16: F-PRINT: Formatted output of text and Q-parameter values ..... 323
FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ: Read system data ..... 327
FN 19: PLC: Transfer values to the PLC ..... 334
FN 20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC synchronization ..... 335
FN 25: PRESET: Setting a new datum ..... 337
9.9 Entering Formulas Directly ..... 338
Entering formulas ..... 338
Rules for formulas ..... 340
Programming example ..... 341
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
33
9.10 String Parameters ..... 342

String processing functions ..... 342
Assigning string parameters ..... 343
Chain-linking string parameters ..... 344
Converting a numerical value to a string parameter ..... 345
Copying a substring from a string parameter ..... 346
Copying system data to a string parameter ..... 347
Converting a string parameter to a numerical value ..... 349
Checking a string parameter ..... 350
Finding the length of a string parameter ..... 351
Comparing alphabetic priority ..... 352
9.11 Preassigned Q Parameters ..... 353
Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107 ..... 353
WMAT block: QS100 ..... 353
Active tool radius: Q108 ..... 353
Tool axis: Q109 ..... 354
Spindle status: Q110 ..... 354
Coolant on/off: Q111 ..... 354
Overlap factor: Q112 ..... 354
Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program: Q113 ..... 355
Tool length: Q114 ..... 355
Coordinates after probing during program run ..... 355
Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 ..... 356
Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles: rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC ..... 356
Measurement results from touch probe cycles (see also Users Manual for Touch Probe Cycles) ..... 357
9.12 Programming Examples ..... 359
34
10 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions ..... 367

10.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP ..... 368
10.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant ..... 369
Overview ..... 369
10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data ..... 370
Programming machine-referenced coordinates: M91/M92 ..... 370
Activating the most recently entered datum: M104 ..... 372
Moving to positions in a non-tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane: M130 ..... 372
10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior ..... 373
Smoothing corners: M90 ..... 373
Insert rounding arc between straight lines: M112 ..... 373
Do not include points when executing non-compensated line blocks: M124 ..... 374
Machining small contour steps: M97 ..... 375
Machining open contours corners: M98 ..... 377
Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103 ..... 378
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution: M136 ..... 379
Feed rate for circular arcs: M109/M110/M111 ..... 380
Calculating the radius-compensated path in advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120 ..... 381
Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run: M118 ..... 383
Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140 ..... 384
Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141 ..... 385
Delete modal program information: M142 ..... 386
Delete basic rotation: M143 ..... 386
Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148 ..... 387
Suppress limit switch message: M150 ..... 388
10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines ..... 389
Principle ..... 389
Output the programmed voltage directly: M200 ..... 389
Output voltage as a function of distance: M201 ..... 389
Output voltage as a function of speed: M202 ..... 390
Output voltage as a function of time (time-dependent ramp): M203 ..... 390
Output voltage as a function of time (time-dependent pulse): M204 ..... 390
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
35
11 Programming: Special Functions ..... 391

11.1 Overview of Special Functions ..... 392
Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions ..... 392
Program defaults menu ..... 393
Functions for contour and point machining menu ..... 393
Functions for contour and point machining menu ..... 394
Menu of various conversational functions ..... 394
Menu of programming aids ..... 395
11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option) ..... 396
Function ..... 396
Collision monitoring in the manual operating modes ..... 398
Collision monitoring in Automatic operation ..... 399
Graphic depiction of the protected space (FCL4 function) ..... 400
Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation ..... 401
11.3 Fixture Monitoring (DCM Software Option) ..... 403
Fixture templates ..... 404
Setting parameter values for the fixture: FixtureWizard ..... 404
Placing the fixture on the machine ..... 406
Editing fixtures ..... 407
Removing fixtures ..... 407
Check the position of the measured fixture ..... 408
Manage fixtures ..... 410
11.4 Tool Holder Management (DCM Software Option) ..... 413
Tool-holder templates ..... 413
Set the tool holder parameters: ToolHolderWizard ..... 414
Removing a tool holder ..... 415
11.5 Global Program Settings (Software Option) ..... 416
Technical prerequisites ..... 418
Activating/deactivating a function ..... 419
Basic rotation ..... 421
Swapping axes ..... 422
Superimposed mirroring ..... 423
Additional, additive datum shift ..... 423
Axis locking ..... 424
Superimposed rotation ..... 424
Feed rate override ..... 424
Handwheel superimposition ..... 425
36
11.6 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC) ..... 427

Defining the AFC basic settings ..... 429
Recording a teach-in cut ..... 431
Activating/deactivating AFC ..... 434
Log file ..... 435
Tool breakage/tool wear monitoring ..... 437
Spindle load monitoring ..... 437
11.7 Generate a Backward Program ..... 438
Function ..... 438
Prerequisites for the program to be converted ..... 439
Application example ..... 440
11.8 Filtering Contours (FCL 2 Function) ..... 441
Function ..... 441
11.9 File Functions ..... 442
Defining file functions ..... 442
11.10 Defining Coordinate Transformations ..... 443
Overview ..... 443
TRANS DATUM AXIS ..... 443
TRANS DATUM TABLE ..... 444
TRANS DATUM RESET ..... 445
Define program call ..... 446
11.11 smartWizard ..... 447
Insert UNIT ..... 448
Edit UNIT ..... 449
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
37
11.12 Creating Text Files ..... 450

Opening and exiting text files ..... 450
Editing texts ..... 451
Deleting and re-inserting characters, words and lines ..... 452
Editing text blocks ..... 453
Finding text sections ..... 454
11.13 Working with Cutting Data Tables ..... 455
Note ..... 455
Applications ..... 455
Table for workpiece materials ..... 456
Table for tool cutting materials ..... 457
Table for cutting data ..... 457
Data required for the tool table ..... 458
Working with automatic speed / feed rate calculation ..... 459
Data transfer from cutting data tables ..... 460
Configuration file TNC.SYS ..... 460
11.14 Freely Definable Tables ..... 461
Creating a freely definable table ..... 461
Editing the table format ..... 462
Switching between table and form view ..... 463
FN26: TABOPEN: Opening a freely definable table ..... 464
FN 27: TABWRITE: Writing to a freely definable table ..... 465
FN28: TABREAD: Reading a freely definable table ..... 466
38
12 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining ..... 467

12.1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining ..... 468
12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1) ..... 469
Define the PLANE function ..... 471
Position display ..... 471
Reset the PLANE function ..... 472
Defining the machining plane with space angles: PLANE SPATIAL ..... 473
Defining the machining plane with projection angles: PROJECTED PLANE ..... 475
Defining the machining plane with Euler angles: EULER PLANE ..... 477
Defining the working plane with two vectors: VECTOR PLANE ..... 479
Defining the machining plane via three points: PLANE POINTS ..... 481
Defining the machining plane with a single, incremental spatial angle: PLANE RELATIVE ..... 483
Tilting the working plane through axis angle: PLANE AXIAL (FCL 3 function) ..... 484
Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function ..... 486
12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the Tilted Plane ..... 491
Function ..... 491
Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis ..... 491
Inclined-tool machining via normal vectors ..... 492
12.4 TCPM FUNCTION (Software Option 2) ..... 493
Function ..... 493
Define TCPM FUNCTION ..... 494
Mode of action of the programmed feed rate ..... 494
Interpretation of the programmed rotary axis coordinates ..... 495
Type of interpolation between the starting and end position ..... 496
Reset TCPM FUNCTION ..... 497
12.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes ..... 498
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C: M116 (software option 1) ..... 498
Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126 ..... 499
Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360: M94 ..... 500
Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes: M114 (software option 2) ..... 501
Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM): M128 (software
option 2) ..... 503
Exact stop at corners with nontangential transitions: M134 ..... 506
Selecting tilting axes: M138 ..... 506
Compensating the machines kinematics configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block: M144
(software option 2) ..... 507
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
39
12.6 Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Software Option 2) ..... 508

Definition of a normalized vector ..... 509
Permissible tool forms ..... 510
Using other tools: Delta values ..... 510
3-D compensation without tool orientation ..... 511
Face milling: 3-D compensation with and without tool orientation ..... 511
Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation with workpiece orientation ..... 513
3-D tool radius compensation depending on the tools contact angle (3D-ToolComp software option) ..... 515
12.7 Contour Movements Spline Interpolation (Software Option 2) ..... 519
40
13 Programming: Pallet Editor ..... 521

13.1 Pallet Editor ..... 522
Selecting a pallet table ..... 524
Leaving the pallet file ..... 524
Pallet datum management with the pallet preset table ..... 525
Executing the pallet file ..... 527
13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining ..... 528
Selecting a pallet file ..... 533
Setting up the pallet file with the entry form ..... 533
Sequence of tool-oriented machining ..... 538
Leaving the pallet file ..... 539
Executing the pallet file ..... 539
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
41
14 Manual Operation and Setup ..... 541

14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off ..... 542
Switch-on ..... 542
Switch-off ..... 545
14.2 Moving the Machine Axes ..... 546
Note ..... 546
Moving the axis using the machine axis direction buttons ..... 546
Incremental jog positioning ..... 547
Traversing with electronic handwheels ..... 548
14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M ..... 558
Function ..... 558
Entering values ..... 558
Changing the spindle speed and feed rate ..... 559
14.4 Functional Safety FS (Option) ..... 560
General Information ..... 560
Explanation of terms ..... 561
Check axis positions ..... 562
Overview of permitted feed rates and speeds ..... 563
Activating feed-rate limitation ..... 564
Additional Status displays ..... 564
14.5 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 565
Note ..... 565
Preparation ..... 565
Workpiece presetting with axis keys ..... 566
Datum management with the preset table ..... 567
14.6 Using the 3-D Touch Probe ..... 573
Overview ..... 573
Selecting probe cycles ..... 574
Recording measured values from the touch-probe cycles ..... 574
Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables ..... 575
Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table ..... 576
Storing measured values in the pallet preset table ..... 577
14.7 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 578
Calibrating the effective length ..... 578
Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment ..... 579
Displaying calibration values ..... 580
Managing more than one block of calibrating data ..... 580
14.8 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 581
Basic rotation using 2 points: ..... 583
Determining basic rotation using 2 holes/studs: ..... 585
Workpiece alignment using 2 points ..... 586
42
14.9 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 587

Overview ..... 587
Datum setting in any axis ..... 587
Corner as datum using points that were already probed for a basic rotation ..... 588
Corner as datumwithout using points that were already probed for a basic rotation. ..... 588
Circle center as datum ..... 589
Center line as datum ..... 590
Setting datum points using holes/cylindrical studs ..... 591
Measuring workpieces with a 3-D touch probe ..... 592
Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges ..... 595
14.10 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1) ..... 596
Application, function ..... 596
Traversing the reference points in tilted axes ..... 598
Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system ..... 598
Datum setting on machines with rotary tables ..... 599
Datum setting on machines with spindle-head changing systems ..... 599
Position display in a tilted system ..... 599
Limitations on working with the tilting function ..... 599
Activating manual tilting ..... 600
Setting the current tool-axis direction as the active machining direction (FCL 2 function) ..... 601
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
43
15 Positioning with Manual Data Input ..... 603

15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations ..... 604
Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI) ..... 604
Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI ..... 607
44
16 Test Run and Program Run ..... 609

16.1 Graphics ..... 610
Overview of display modes ..... 612
Plan view ..... 612
Projection in 3 planes ..... 613
3-D view ..... 614
Magnifying details ..... 617
Repeating graphic simulation ..... 618
Displaying the tool ..... 618
Measuring the machining time ..... 619
16.2 Functions for Program Display ..... 620
Overview ..... 620
16.3 Test Run ..... 621
16.4 Program Run ..... 627
Running a part program ..... 628
Interrupting machining ..... 629
Moving the machine axes during an interruption ..... 631
Resuming program run after an interruption ..... 632
Mid-program startup (block scan) ..... 633
Returning to the contour ..... 636
16.5 Automatic Program Start ..... 637
16.6 Optional Block Skip ..... 638
Erasing the / character ..... 638
16.7 Optional Program-Run Interruption ..... 639
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
45
17 MOD Functions ..... 641

17.1 Selecting MOD Functions ..... 642
Selecting the MOD functions ..... 642
Changing the settings ..... 642
Exiting the MOD functions ..... 642
Overview of MOD functions ..... 643
17.2 Software Numbers ..... 644
17.3 Entering Code Numbers ..... 645
17.4 Loading Service Packs ..... 646
17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces ..... 647
Setting the RS-232 interface ..... 647
Setting the RS-422 interface ..... 647
Setting the OPERATING MODE of the external device ..... 647
Setting the baud rate ..... 647
Assignment ..... 648
Software for data transfer ..... 649
17.6 Ethernet Interface ..... 651
Connection possibilities ..... 651
Configuring the TNC ..... 651
17.7 Configuring PGM MGT ..... 657
Changing the PGM MGT setting ..... 657
Dependent files ..... 658
17.8 Machine-Specific User Parameters ..... 659
17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space ..... 660
Rotate the entire image ..... 662
17.10 Position Display Types ..... 663
17.11 Unit of Measurement ..... 664
17.12 Selecting the Programming Language for $MDI ..... 665
17.13 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks ..... 666
46
17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse Limits, Datum Display ..... 667
Working without additional traverse limits ..... 667
Find and enter the maximum traverse ..... 667
Datum display ..... 668
17.15 Displaying HELP Files ..... 669
Selecting HELP files ..... 669
17.16 Displaying Operating Times ..... 670
17.17 Checking the Data Carrier ..... 671
Performing the data carrier check ..... 671
17.18 Setting the System Time ..... 672
Selecting appropriate settings ..... 672
17.19 TeleService ..... 673
Calling/exiting TeleService ..... 673
17.20 External Access ..... 674
17.21 Host computer operation ..... 675
17.22 Configuring the HR 550 FS Wireless Handwheel ..... 676
Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel holder ..... 676
Setting the transmission channel ..... 677
Selecting the transmitter power ..... 678
Statistics ..... 678
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
47
18 Tables and Overviews ..... 679

18.1 General User Parameters ..... 680
Input possibilities for machine parameters ..... 680
Selecting general user parameters ..... 680
List of general user parameters ..... 681
18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces ..... 696
RS-232-C/V.24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices ..... 696
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices ..... 697
RS-422/V.11 interface ..... 698
Ethernet interface RJ45 socket ..... 699
18.3 Technical Information ..... 700
18.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery ..... 710
48
19 Industrial PC 6341 with Windows 7 (Option) ..... 711

19.1 Introduction ..... 712
Functionality ..... 712
Specifications of the IPC 6341 ..... 712
End User License Agreement (EULA) for Windows 7 ..... 713
Switch to Windows interface ..... 713
Exiting Windows ..... 713
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
49
50
First Steps with the

iTNC 530
1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
This chapter is intended to help TNC beginners quickly learn to handle
the most important procedures. For more information on a respective
topic, see the section referred to in the text.
The following topics are included in this chapter
Machine Switch-On
Programming the First Part
Graphically Testing the Program
Tool Setup
Workpiece Setup
Running the First Program
52
1.2 Machine Switch-On
1.2 Machine Switch-On

Acknowledge the power interruption and move
to the reference points
Switch-on and crossing the reference points can vary
depending on the machine tool. Your machine manual
provides more detailed information.
U
Switch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC starts
the operating system. This process may take several minutes. Then
the TNC will display the message Power interruption.
U Press the CE key: The TNC converts the PLC
program
U
Switch on the control voltage: The TNC checks

operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into
the reference run mode
Cross the reference points manually in the displayed

sequence: For each axis press the machine START
button. If you have absolute linear and angle encoders
on your machine there is no need for a reference run
The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode.
Further information on this topic
Traversing the reference marks: See Switch-on on page 542
Operating modes: See Programming and Editing on page 79
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
53
1.3 Programming the First Part

Select the correct operating mode
You can write programs only in the Programming and Editing mode:
U
Press the operating modes key: The TNC goes into

the Programming and Editing mode

Operating modes: See Programming and Editing on page 79
The most important TNC keys

Functions for conversational guidance
Key
Confirm entry and activate the next dialog

prompt
Ignore the dialog question.
End the dialog immediately.
Abort dialog, discard entries.
Soft keys on the screen with which you select
functions appropriate to the active state
Writing and editing programs: See Editing a program on page 109
Overview of keys: See Controls of the TNC on page 2
54
Create a new program/file management

U
Press the PGM MGT key: the TNC displays the file
management. The file management of the TNC is
arranged much like the file management on a PC with
the Windows Explorer. The file management enables
you to manipulate data on the TNC hard disk
Use the arrow keys to select the folder in which you

want to open the new file
Enter a file name with the extension .H: The TNC then
automatically opens a program and asks for the unit
of measure for the new program. Please note the
restrictions regarding special characters in the file
name (see File names on page 116)
To select the unit of measure, press the MM or INCH

soft key: The TNC automatically starts the workpiece
blank definition (see Define a workpiece blank on
page 56)
The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the
program. Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks.
File management: See Working with the File Manager on page
118
Creating a new program: See Creating and Writing Programs on
page 103
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
55
Define a workpiece blank

Immediately after you have created a new program, the TNC starts the
dialog for entering the workpiece blank definition. Always define the
workpiece blank as a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points,
each with reference to the selected reference point.
After you have created a new program, the TNC automatically initiates
the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data:
U
U
Spindle axis Z?: Enter the active spindle axis. Z is saved as default
setting. Accept with the ENT key
Def BLK FORM: Min-corner?: Smallest X coordinate of the workpiece
blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the
ENT key
Def BLK FORM: Min-corner?: Smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece
ENT key
Def BLK FORM: Min-corner?: Smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece
blank with respect to the reference point, e.g. -40. Confirm with the
ENT key
Def BLK FORM: Max-corner?: Largest X coordinate of the workpiece
ENT key
Def BLK FORM: Max-corner?: Largest Y coordinate of the workpiece
ENT key
Def BLK FORM: Max-corner?: Largest Z coordinate of the workpiece
ENT key
Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40
Z
MAX
Y
100
X
0
-40
100
MIN
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

3 END PGM NEW MM
Defining the workpiece blank: (see page 104)
56
NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner. This

makes it easier to find your place and reduces errors.
Recommended program layout for simple, conventional contour
machining
1 Call tool, define tool axis
2 Retract the tool
3 Pre-position the tool in the working plane near the contour starting
point
4 In the tool axis, position the tool above the workpiece, or preposition immediately to workpiece depth. If required, switch on
the spindle/coolant
5 Move to the contour
6 Machine the contour
7 Leave the contour
8 Retract the tool, end the program
Example: Layout of contour machining programs

0 BEGIN PGM BSPCONT MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X... Y... Z...
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X... Y... Z...
3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
5 L X... Y... R0 FMAX
6 L Z+10 R0 F3000 M13
7 APPR ... RL F500
Further information on this topic:
...
Contour programming: See Tool Movements on page 214
16 DEP ... X... Y... F3000 M9

17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
18 END PGM BSPCONT MM
Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs

1 Call tool, define tool axis
2 Retract the tool
3 Define the machining positions
4 Define the fixed cycle
5 Call the cycle, switch on the spindle/coolant
6 Retract the tool, end the program
Example: Cycle program layout

0 BEGIN PGM BSBCYC MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X... Y... Z...
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X... Y... Z...
Further information on this topic:
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Cycle programming: See Users Manual for Cycles
5 PATTERN DEF POS1( X... Y... Z... ) ...

6 CYCL DEF...
7 CYCL CALL PAT FMAX M13
8 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
9 END PGM BSBCYC MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
57
Program layout
58
Call the tool: Enter the tool data. Confirm each of your
entries with the ENT key. Do not forget the tool axis
Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order

to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the
ENT key
Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing

the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation
Confirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at

rapid traverse (FMAX)
Confirm the Miscellaneous function M? with the

END key: The TNC saves the entered positioning
block
Preposition the tool in the working plane: Press the

orange X axis key and enter the value for the position
to be approached, e.g. -20
Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. -20. Confirm with the
ENT key



block
Move the tool to workpiece depth: Press the orange Y

axis key and enter the value for the position to be
approached, e.g. -5. Confirm with the ENT key

Feed rate F=? Enter the positioning feed rate, e.g.

3000 mm/min and confirm with the ENT key
Miscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and

coolant, e.g. M13. Confirm with the END key: The TNC
saves the entered positioning block
10
95
10
The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5 mm.

You have already defined the workpiece blank. After you have initiated
a dialog through a function key, enter all the data requested by the
TNC in the screen header.
4
20
20
Program a simple contour
X
9
Move to the contour: Press the APPR/DEP key: The

TNC shows a soft-key row with approach and
departure functions
Select the approach function APPR CT: Enter the

coordinates of the contour starting point 1 in X and Y,
e.g. 5/5. Confirm with the ENT key
Center angle? Enter the approach angle, e.g.90, and

confirm with the ENT key
Circle radius? Enter the approach radius, e.g. 8 mm,

and confirm with the ENT key
Confirm the Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? with the

RL soft key: Activate the radius compensation to the
left of the programmed contour
Feed rate F=? Enter the machining feed rate, e.g.

700 mm/min, and confirm your entry with the END
key
Machine the contour and move to contour point 2: You

only need to enter the information that changes. In
other words, enter only the Y coordinate 95 and save
your entry with the END key
Move to contour point 3: Enter the X coordinate 95

and save your entry with the END key
Define the chamfer at contour point 3: Enter the

chamfer width 10 mm and save with the END key
Move to contour point 4: Enter the Y coordinate 5 and

save your entry with the END key
Define the chamfer at contour point 4: Enter the

chamfer width 20 mm and save with the END key
Move to contour point 1: Enter the X coordinate 5 and

save your entry with the END key
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
59
Contour departure
Select the departure function DEP CT
Center angle? Enter the departure angle, e.g. 90, and

Circle radius? Enter the departure radius, e.g. 8 mm,

Feed rate F=? Enter the positioning feed rate, e.g.

3000 mm/min and confirm with the ENT key
Miscellaneous function M? Switch off the coolant,

e.g. M9, with the END key: The TNC saves the entered
positioning block

ENT key


Miscellaneous function M? Enter M2 to end the

program and confirm with the END key: The TNC

Complete example with NC blocks: See Example: Linear
movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates on page 236
page 103
Approaching/departing contours: See Contour Approach and
Departure on page 219
Programming contours: See Overview of path functions on page
227
Programmable feed rates: See Possible feed rate input on page
107
Tool radius compensation: See Tool radius compensation on page
209
Miscellaneous functions (M): See Miscellaneous Functions for
Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant on page 369
60
Create a cycle program

The holes (depth of 20 mm) shown in the figure at right are to be drilled
with a standard drilling cycle. You have already defined the workpiece
blank.
U
Call the tool: Enter the tool data. Confirm each of your
entries with the ENT key. Do not forget the tool axis

ENT key



block
Call the cycle menu
Display the drilling cycles
Select the standard drilling cycle 200: The TNC starts

the dialog for cycle definition. Enter all parameters
requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each
entry with the ENT key. In the screen to the right, the
TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective
cycle parameter
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Y
100
90
10
10 20
80 90 100
61

62
Call the menu for special functions
Display the functions for point machining
Select the pattern definition
Select point entry: Enter the coordinates of the

4 points and confirm each with the ENT key. After
entering the fourth point, save the block with the END
key
Display the menu for defining the cycle call
Run the drilling cycle on the define pattern:

Miscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and

coolant, e.g. M13. Confirm with the END key: The TNC

ENT key


Miscellaneous function M? Enter M2 to end the

program and confirm with the END key: The TNC
Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM C200 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40
Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
5 PATTERN DEF
POS1 (X+10 Y+10
POS2 (X+10 Y+90
POS3 (X+90 Y+90
POS4 (X+90 Y+10
Define the machining positions.

Z+0)
Z+0)
Z+0)
Z+0)
6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING

Q200=2
;SETUP CLEARANCE
Q201=-20
;DEPTH
Q206=250
;FEED RATE FOR PLNGN
Q202=5
;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0
;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=-10
;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=20
;2ND SETUP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.2
;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH
Define the cycle
7 CYCL CALL PAT FMAX M13
Spindle and coolant on, call cycle
Retract in the tool axis, end program
9 END PGM C200 MM

page 103
Cycle programming: See Users Manual for Cycles
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
63
1.4 Graphically Testing the First Program
1.4 Graphically Testing the First

Program
Selecting the correct operating mode
You can test programs only in the Test Run mode:
U

the Test Run mode

Operating modes of the TNC: See Operating Modes on page 78
Testing programs: See Test Run on page 621
Select the tool table for the test run

You only need to execute this step if you have not activated a tool
table in the Test Run mode.
U
Press the PGM MGT key: the TNC displays the file
management
Press the SELECT TYPE soft key: The TNC shows a

soft-key menu for selection of the file type to be
displayed
Press the SHOW ALL soft key: The TNC shows all
saved files in the right window
Move the highlight to the left onto the directories
Move the highlight to the TNC:\ directory
Move the highlight to the right onto the files
Move the highlight to the file TOOL.T (active tool

table) and load with the ENT key: TOOL.T receives
that status S and is therefore active for the Test Run
Press the END key: Leave the file manager

Tool management: See Entering tool data in the table on page 176
Testing programs: See Test Run on page 621
64
1.4 Graphically Testing the First Program
Choose the program you want to test

U
Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file
manager
Press the LAST FILES soft key: The TNC opens a

pop-up window with the most recently selected files
Use the arrow keys to select the program that you

want to test. Load with the ENT key

Selecting a program: See Working with the File Manager on page
118
Select the screen layout and the view

U
Press the key for selecting the screen layout. The TNC
shows all available alternatives in the soft-key row
Press the PROGRAM + GRAPHICS soft key: In the

left half of the screen the TNC shows the program; in
the right half it shows the workpiece blank
Select the desired view via soft key
Plan view
Projection in three planes
3-D view

Graphic functions: See Graphics on page 610
Running a test run: See Test Run on page 621
Start the program test

U
Press the RESET + START soft key: The TNC

simulates the active program up to a programmed
break or to the program end
While the simulation is running you can use the soft

keys to change views.
Press the STOP soft key: The TNC interrupts the test
run
Press the START soft key: The TNC resumes the test
run after a break

Running a test run: See Test Run on page 621
Graphic functions: See Graphics on page 610
Adjusting the test speed:See Setting the speed of the test run on
page 611
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
65
1.5 Tool Setup
1.5 Tool Setup

Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode:
U

the Manual Operation mode

Prepare and measure tools

U
U
Clamp the required tools in their chucks

When measuring with an external tool presetter: Measure the tools,
note down the length and radius, or transfer them directly to the
machine through a transfer program
When measuring on the machine: Place the tools into the tool
changer (see page 67)
The tool table TOOL.T

In the tool table TOOL.T (permanently saved under TNC:\), save the
tool data such as length and radius, but also further tool-specific
information that the TNC needs to conduct its functions.
To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL.T, proceed as follows:
U
Display the tool table
Edit the tool table: Set the EDITING soft key to ON
With the upward or downward arrow keys you can

select the tool number that you want to edit
With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can

select the tool data that you want to edit
To leave the tool table, press the END key

Working with the tool table: See Entering tool data in the table on
page 176
66
1.5 Tool Setup
The pocket table TOOL_P.TCH

The function of the pocket table depends on the machine.
Your machine manual provides more detailed information.
In the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH (permanently saved under TNC:\) you

specify which tools your tool magazine contains.
To enter data in the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH, proceed as follows:
U
Display the tool table
Display the pocket table
Edit the pocket table: Set the EDITING soft key to ON
With the upward or downward arrow keys you can

select the pocket number that you want to edit
With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can

select the data that you want to edit
To leave the pocket table, press the END key

Working with the pocket table: See Pocket table for tool changer
on page 188
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
67
1.6 Workpiece Setup
1.6 Workpiece Setup

Workpieces are set up in the Manual Operation or Electronic
Handwheel mode
U
Press the Manual Operation operating mode key: the

TNC switches to that mode.

Manual Operation mode: See Moving the Machine Axes on page
546
Clamp the workpiece

Mount the workpiece with a fixture on the machine table. If you have
a 3-D touch probe on your machine, then you do not need to clamp the
workpiece parallel to the axes.
If you do not have a 3-D touch probe available, you have to align the
workpiece so that it is fixed with its edges parallel to the machine
axes.
68
1.6 Workpiece Setup
Align the workpiece with a 3-D touch probe

system
U
Insert the 3-D touch probe: In the Manual Data Input (MDI) operating
mode, run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis, and then return
to the Manual Operation mode (in MDI mode you can run an
individual NC block independently of the others)
U Select the probing functions: The TNC displays the
available functions in the soft-key row
U
Measure the basic rotation: The TNC displays the

basic rotation menu. To identify the basic rotation,
probe two points on a straight surface of the
workpiece
Use the axis-direction keys to pre-position the touch

probe to a position near the first contact point
Select the probing direction via soft key
Press NC start: The touch probe moves in the defined

direction until it contacts the workpiece and then
automatically returns to its starting point.

probe to a position near the second contact point

automatically returns to its starting point
Then the TNC shows the measured basic rotation
Press the END key to close the menu and then

answer the question of whether the basic rotation
should be transferred to the preset table by pressing
the NO ENT key (no transfer)

MDI operating mode: See Programming and Executing Simple
Machining Operations on page 604
Workpiece alignment: See Compensating Workpiece
Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe on page 581
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
69
1.6 Workpiece Setup
Set the datum with a 3-D touch probe

U
Insert the 3-D touch probe: In the MDI mode, run a TOOL CALL block
containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation
mode
U Select the probing functions: The TNC displays the
available functions in the soft-key row
U
Set the reference point at a workpiece corner, for

example: The TNC asks whether the prove points
from the previously measured basic rotation should
be loaded. Press the ENT key to load points
Position the touch probe at a position near the first

touch point of the side that was not probed for basic
rotation
Select the probing direction via soft key


probe to a position near the second contact point

Then the TNC shows the coordinates of the measured

corner point
Set to 0: Press the SET DATUM soft key
Press the END to close the menu

Datum setting: See Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe on
page 587
70
1.7 Running the First Program

You can run programs either in the Single Block or the Full Sequence
mode:
U
Press the operating mode key: The TNC goes into the
Program Run, Single Block mode and the TNC
executes the program block by block. You have to
confirm each block with the NC key
Press the operating mode key: The TNC goes into the
Program Run, Full Sequence mode and the TNC
executes the program after NC start up to a program
break or to the end of the program

Running programs: See Program Run on page 627
Choose the program you want to run

U
manager
Press the LAST FILES soft key: The TNC opens a popup window with the most recently selected files
If desired, use the arrow keys to select the program

that you want to run. Load with the ENT key

File management: See Working with the File Manager on page
118
Start the program

U
Press the NC start button: The TNC executes the

active program

Running programs: See Program Run on page 627
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
71

72
Introduction
2.1 The iTNC 530
2.1 The iTNC 530

HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop-oriented contouring
controls that enable you to program conventional machining
operations right at the machine in an easy-to-use conversational
programming language. They are designed for milling, drilling and
boring machines, as well as for machining centers. The iTNC 530 can
control up to 18 axes. You can also change the angular position of up
to 2 spindles under program control.
An integrated hard disk provides storage for as many programs as you
like, even if they were created off-line. For quick calculations you can
call up the on-screen pocket calculator at any time.
Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the
functions are fast and easy to use.
Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational,

smarT.NC and ISO formats
The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially
easy method of writing programs. Interactive graphics illustrate the
individual machining steps for programming the contour. If a
production drawing is not dimensioned for NC, the FK free contour
programming performs the necessary calculations automatically.
Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or
before actual machining.
The smarT.NC operating mode offers TNC beginners an especially
simple possibility to quickly and without much training create
structured conversational dialog programs. Separate user
documentation is available for smarT.NC.
It is also possible to program the TNCs in ISO format or DNC mode.
You can also enter and test one program while the control is running
another.
Compatibility
The TNC can run all part programs that were written on HEIDENHAIN
controls TNC 150 B and later. In as much as old TNC programs contain
OEM cycles, the iTNC 530 must be adapted to them with the PC
software CycleDesign. For more information, contact your machine
tool builder or HEIDENHAIN.
74
Introduction
Visual display unit

The TNC is shipped with a 15-inch color flat-panel screen. A 19-inch
color flat-panel screen is also available as an alternative.
1
1 Header
When the TNC is on, the selected operating modes are shown in
the screen header: the machining mode at the left and the
programming mode at right. The currently active mode is
displayed in the larger box, where the dialog prompts and TNC
messages also appear (unless the TNC is showing only graphics).
2 Soft keys
In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft-key
row. You can select these functions by pressing the keys
immediately below them. The lines immediately above the softkey row indicate the number of soft-key rows that can be called
with the black arrow keys to the right and left. The active soft-key
row is indicated by brightened bar.
3
4
5
6
7
91
2
6
1
31
The15-inch screen has 8 soft keys, the 19-inch screen has 10 soft
keys.
Soft-key selection keys
Shifts between soft-key rows
Setting the screen layout
Shift key for switchover between machining and programming
modes
Soft-key selection keys for machine tool builder soft keys
The15-inch screen has 6 soft keys, the 19-inch screen has 18 soft
keys.
8 Switches soft-key rows for machine tool builders
5
4
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
6
1
31
75
2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard
2.2 Visual Display Unit and

Keyboard
Sets the screen layout

You select the screen layout yourself: In the PROGRAMMING AND
EDITING mode of operation, for example, you can have the TNC show
program blocks in the left window while the right window displays
programming graphics. You could also display the program structure
in the right window instead, or display only program blocks in one large
window. The available screen windows depend on the selected
operating mode.
To change the screen layout:
Press the SPLIT SCREEN key: The soft-key row
shows the available layout options (see "Operating
Modes", page 78)
Select the desired screen layout.
76
Introduction
The TNC is delivered with different keyboards. The figures show the
controls and displays of the TE 730 (15") and TE 740 (19") keyboard
units.
1
Alphabetic keyboard for entering texts and file names, and for ISO
programming.
Dual-processor version: Additional keys for Windows operation

File management
Calculator
MOD function
HELP function
3 Programming modes
4 Machine operating modes
5 Initiation of programming dialog
6 Navigation keys and GOTO jump command
7 Numerical input and axis selection
8 Touchpad
9 smarT.NC navigation keys
10 USB connection
1
2
1
The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front
cover.
4
1
9
7
3
8
7
10
2
1
4
1
5
3
9
7
6
8
Some machine manufacturers do not use the standard

operating panel from HEIDENHAIN. Please refer to your
machine manual in these cases.
Machine panel buttons, e.g. NC START or NC STOP, are
also described in the manual for your machine tool.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
77
Operating panel
2.3 Operating Modes
2.3 Operating Modes

Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel
The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine
tool. In this mode of operation, you can position the machine axes
manually or by increments, set the datums, and tilt the working plane.
The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the
machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout (select as described
previously)
Window
Soft key
Positions
Left: positions, right: status display
Left: positions, right: active collision objects
(FCL4 function).

This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing
movements, such as for face milling or pre-positioning.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout
Window
Soft key
Program
Left: program blocks, right: status display
Left: program blocks, right: active collision
objects (FCL4 function). If this view is selected,
then the TNC indicates a collision with a red
frame around the graphics window.
78
Introduction
2.3 Operating Modes
Programming and Editing

In this mode of operation you can write your part programs. The FK
free programming feature, the various cycles and the Q parameter
functions help you with programming and add necessary information.
If desired, the programming graphics or the 3-D line graphics (FCL 2
function) display the programmed traverse paths.
Window
Soft key
Program
Left: program, right: program structure
Left: program blocks, right: graphics
Left: program blocks, right: 3-D line graphics
3-D line graphics
Test Run
In the Test Run mode of operation, the TNC checks programs and
program sections for errors, such as geometrical incompatibilities,
missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work
space. This simulation is supported graphically in different display
modes.
With the dynamic collision monitoring (DCM) software option you can
test the program for potential collisions. As during program run, the
TNC takes into account all permanent machine components defined
by the machine manufacturer as well as all measured fixtures.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout: see "Program Run, Full
Sequence and Program Run, Single Block", page 80.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
79
2.3 Operating Modes
Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run,

Single Block
In the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC
executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or
programmed stop. You can resume program run after an interruption.
In the Program Run, Single Block mode of operation you execute each
block separately by pressing the machine START button.
Window
Soft key
Program
Left: program, right: program structure
Left: program, right: status
Left: program, right: graphics
Graphics
Left: program blocks, right: active collision
objects (FCL4 function). If this view is selected,
then the TNC indicates a collision with a red
frame around the graphics window.
Active collision objects (FCL4 function). If this
view is selected, then the TNC indicates a
collision with a red frame around the graphics
window.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables
Window
Soft key
Pallet table
Left: program blocks, right: pallet table
Left: pallet table, right: status
Left: pallet table, right: graphics
80
Introduction
2.4 Status Displays
2.4 Status Displays

General status display
The status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the
current state of the machine tool. It is displayed automatically in the
following modes of operation:
Program Run, Single Block and Program Run, Full Sequence, except
if the screen layout is set to display graphics only, and
Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI).
In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode the status
display appears in the large window.
Information in the status display
Symbol
Meaning
ACTL.
Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position
XYZ
Machine axes; the TNC displays auxiliary axes in

lower-case letters. The sequence and quantity of
displayed axes is determined by the machine tool
builder. Refer to your machine manual for more
information.
FSM
The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one

tenth of the effective value. Spindle speed S, feed
rate F and active M functions.
Program run started.
Axis is locked.
Axis can be moved with the handwheel.
Axes are moving under a basic rotation.
Axes are moving in a tilted working plane.
The M128 function or TCPM FUNCTION is active.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
81
2.4 Status Displays
Symbol
Meaning
The Dynamic Collision Monitoring function (DCM)
is active.
The Adaptive Feed Function (AFC) is active
(software option).
One or more global program settings are active
(software option)
Number of the active presets from the preset table.
If the datum was set manually, the TNC displays the
text MAN behind the symbol.
82
Introduction
2.4 Status Displays
Additional status displays

The additional status displays contain detailed information on the
program run. They can be called in all operating modes except for the
Programming and Editing mode of operation.
To switch on the additional status display:
Call the soft-key row for screen layout.
Screen layout with additional status display: In the

right half of the screen, the TNC shows the Overview
status form.
To select an additional status display:

Shift the soft-key rows until the STATUS soft keys
appear.
Either select the additional status display, e.g.

positions and coordinates, or
use the soft keys to select the desired view.
With the soft keys or switch-over soft keys, you can choose directly
between the available status displays.
Please note that some of the status information described
below is not available unless the associated software
option is enabled on your TNC.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
83
2.4 Status Displays
Overview
After switch-on, the TNC displays the Overview status form, provided
that you have selected the PROGRAM+STATUS screen layout (or
POSITION + STATUS). The overview form contains a summary of the
most important status information, which you can also find on the
various detail forms.
Soft key
Meaning
Position display in up to 5 axes
Tool information
Active M functions
Active coordinate transformations
Active subprogram
Active program section repeat
Program called with PGM CALL
Current machining time
Name of the active main program
General program information (PGM tab)

Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Name of the active main program
Circle center CC (pole)

Dwell time counter
Machining time when the program was
completely simulated in the Test Run operating
mode
Current machining time in percent
Current time
Current feed rate
Active programs
84
Introduction
2.4 Status Displays
General pallet information (PAL tab)

Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Number of the active pallet preset
Program section repeat/Subprograms (LBL tab)

Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Active program section repeats with block

number, label number, and number of
programmed repeats/repeats yet to be run
Active subprogram numbers with block number in
which the subprogram was called and the label
number that was called
Information on standard cycles (CYC tab)

Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Active machining cycle
Active values of Cycle 32 Tolerance
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
85
2.4 Status Displays
Active miscellaneous functions M (M tab)

Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
List of the active M functions with fixed meaning
List of the active M functions that are adapted by

your machine manufacturer
86
Introduction
2.4 Status Displays
Positions and coordinates (POS tab)

Soft key
Meaning
Type of position display, e.g. actual position
Value traversed in virtual axis direction VT (only with
global program settings software option)
Tilt angle of the working plane
Angle of a basic rotation
Information on tools (TOOL tab)

Soft key
Meaning
T: Tool number and name
RT: Number and name of a replacement tool
Tool axis
Tool lengths and radii
Oversizes (delta values) from the tool table (TAB) and
the TOOL CALL (PGM)
Tool life, maximum tool life (TIME 1) and maximum
tool life for TOOL CALL (TIME 2)
Display of the active tool and the (next) replacement
tool
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
87
2.4 Status Displays
Tool measurement (TT tab)

The TNC only displays the TT tab if the function is active
on your machine.
Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Number of the tool to be measured
Display whether the tool radius or the tool length

is being measured
MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting
edges and the result of measuring the rotating
tool (DYN = dynamic measurement)
Cutting edge number with the corresponding
measured value. If the measured value is
followed by an asterisk, the allowable tolerance in
the tool table was exceeded The TNC displays the
measured values of up to 24 teeth.
Coordinate transformations (TRANS tab)
Soft key
Meaning
Name of the active datum table
Active datum number (#), comment from the
active line of the active datum number (DOC) from
Cycle 7
Active datum shift (Cycle 7); The TNC displays an
active datum shift in up to 8 axes
Mirrored axes (Cycle 8)
Active basic rotation
Active rotation angle (Cycle 10)
Active scaling factor/factors (Cycles 11 / 26); The
TNC displays an active scaling factor in up to 6
axes
Scaling datum
For further information, refer to the User's Manual for Cycles,

"Coordinate Transformation Cycles."
88
Introduction
2.4 Status Displays
Global program settings 1 (GPS1 tab, software option)

The TNC only displays the tab if the function is active on
your machine.
Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Swapped axes
Superimposed datum shift

Superimposed mirroring
Global program settings 2 (GPS2 tab, software option)
The TNC only displays the tab if the function is active on
your machine.
Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Locked axes
Superimposed basic rotation

Superimposed rotation
Active feed rate factor
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
89
2.4 Status Displays
Adaptive Feed Control (AFC tab, software option)

The TNC only displays the AFC tab if the function is active
on your machine.
Soft key
Meaning
No direct
selection
possible
Active mode in which adaptive feed control is

running
Active tool (number and name)
Cut number
Current factor of the feed potentiomenter in
percent
Active spindle load in percent
Reference load of the spindle
Current spindle speed
Current deviation of the speed
Current machining time
Line diagram, in which the current spindle load
and the value commanded by the TNC for the
feed-rate override are shown
90
Introduction
2.5 Window Manager
2.5 Window Manager

The machine tool builder determines the scope of function
and behavior of the window manager. The machine tool
manual provides further information.
The TNC features the Xfce window manager. Xfce is a standard
application for UNIX-based operating systems, and is used to manage
graphical user interfaces. The following functions are possible with the
window manager:
Display a task bar for switching between various applications (user
interfaces).
Manage an additional desktop, on which special applications from
your machine tool builder can run.
Control the focus between NC-software applications and those of
the machine tool builder.
The size and position of pop-up windows can be changed. It is also
possible to close, minimize and restore the pop-up windows.
The TNC shows a star in the upper left of the screen if an
application of the window manager or the window
manager itself has caused an error. In this case, switch to
the window manager and correct the problem. If required,
refer to your machine manual.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
91
2.5 Window Manager
Soft-key row
In the task bar you can choose different workspaces by mouse click.
The iTNC provides the following workspaces:
Workspace 1: Active mode of operation
Workspace 2: Active programming mode
Workspace 3: Manufacturer's applications (optionally available), e.g.
remote control of a Windows computer
In the task bar you can also select other applications that you have
started together with the TNC (switch for example to the PDF viewer
or TNCguide)
Click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to open a menu in which you can
get information, make settings or start applications. The following
functions are available:
About Xfce: Information on the Windows manager Xfce
About HeROS: Information about the operation system of the TNC
NC Control: Start and stop the TNC software. Only permitted for
diagnostic purposes
Web Browser: Start Mozilla Firefox
Diagnostics: Available only to authorized specialists to start
diagnostic functions
Settings: Configuration of miscellaneous settings
Date/Time: Set the date and time
Language: Language setting for the system dialogs. During startup
the TNC overwrites this setting with the language setting of
MP 7230
Network: Network setting
Reset WM-Conf: Restore basic settings of the Windows Manager
May also reset settings implemented by your machine
manufacturer
Screensaver: Settings for the screen saver; several are available
Shares: Configure network connections
Tools: Only for authorized users. The applications available under
Tools can be started directly by selecting the pertaining file type in
the file management of the TNC (see Additional tools for
management of external file types on page 139)
92
Introduction
2.6 SELinux security software
2.6 SELinux security software

SELinux is an extension for Linux-based operating systems. SELinux
is an additional security software package based on Mandatory
Access Control (MAC) and protects the system against the running of
unauthorized processes or functions and therefore protects against
viruses and other malware.
MAC means that each action must be specifically permitted otherwise
the TNC will not run it. The software provides additional protection to
the normal access restrictions of Linux. Specific processes and
actions are performed only if permitted by the standard functions and
SELinux access control.
The SELinux installation of the TNC is prepared to permit
running of only those programs installed with the
HEIDENHAIN NC software. You cannot run other
programs with the standard installation.
The SELinux access control in HeROS 5 is regulated as follows:
The TNC runs only those applications installed with the
HEIDENHAIN NC software.
Files concerning the security of the software (SELinux system files,
HeROS 5 boot files, etc.) may only be changed by explicitly selected
programs.
Files created anew by other programs must basically not be run.
There are only two procedures permitted to run new files:
Starting a software update
A HEIDENHAIN software update can replace or change system
files.
Starting the SELinux configuration
The configuration of SELinux is usually password-protected by
your machine tool builder. Refer here to the relevant machine tool
manual.
HEIDENHAIN basically recommends activating SELinux,
because this provides additional protection against
external access.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
93
2.7 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels
2.7 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D

Touch Probes and Electronic
Handwheels
3-D touch probes
With the various HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe systems you can:
Automatically align workpieces
Quickly and precisely set datums
Measure the workpiece during program run
Measure and inspect tools
All of the touch probe functions are described in the
Users Manual for Cycles. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if
you require a copy of this Users Manual. ID: 670 388-xx.
Note that HEIDENHAIN generally does not accept liability
for the function of the touch probe cycles unless you use
HEIDENHAIN touch probes!
TS 220, TS 640 and TS 440 touch trigger probes
These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece
alignment, datum setting and workpiece measurement. The TS 220
transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is a costeffective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently
required.
The TS 640 (see figure) and the smaller TS 440 feature infrared
transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC. This makes them
highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers.
Principle of operation: HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a
wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as
soon as the stylus is deflected. This signal is transmitted to the
control, which stores the current position of the stylus as the actual
value.
94
Introduction
TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement

The TT 140 is a triggering 3-D touch probe for tool measurement and
inspection. Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with
which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either
with the spindle rotating or stopped. The TT 140 features a particularly
rugged design and a high degree of protection, which make it
insensitive to coolants and swarf. The triggering signal is generated by
a wear-resistant and highly reliable optical switch.
HR electronic handwheels
Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by
hand. A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available.
Apart from the HR130 and HR150 integral handwheels, HEIDENHAIN
also offers the HR 520 and HR 550 FS portable handwheels. You will
find a detailed description of HR 520 in Chapter 14 of this manual (see
Traversing with electronic handwheels on page 548).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
95
96
Introduction
Programming:
Fundamentals,
File Management
3.1 Fundamentals
3.1 Fundamentals
Position encoders and reference marks
Z
The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register
the positions of the machine table or tool. Linear axes are usually
equipped with linear encoders, rotary tables and tilting axes with angle
encoders.
Y
X
When a machine axis moves, the corresponding position encoder

generates an electrical signal. The TNC evaluates this signal and
calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis.
If there is a power interruption, the calculated position will no longer
correspond to the actual position of the machine slide. To recover this
association, incremental position encoders are provided with
reference marks. The scales of the position encoders contain one or
more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are
crossed over. From that signal the TNC can re-establish the
assignment of displayed positions to machine positions. For linear
encoders with distance-coded reference marks the machine axes
need to move by no more than 20 mm, for angle encoders by no more
than 20.
With absolute encoders, an absolute position value is transmitted to
the control immediately upon switch-on. In this way the assignment
of the actual position to the machine slide position is re-established
directly after switch-on.
XMP
X (Z,Y)
Reference system
A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in
space. The position data are always referenced to a predetermined
point and are described through coordinates.
The Cartesian coordinate system (a rectangular coordinate system) is
based on the three coordinate axes X, Y and Z. The axes are mutually
perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum. A
coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these
directions. A position in a plane is thus described through two
coordinates, and a position in space through three coordinates.
Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as
absolute coordinates. Relative coordinates are referenced to any other
known position (reference point) you define within the coordinate
system. Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental
coordinate values.
98
Programming: Fundamentals, File Management
3.1 Fundamentals
Reference system on milling machines

When using a milling machine, you orient tool movements to the
Cartesian coordinate system. The illustration at right shows how the
Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes. The figure
illustrates the right-hand rule for remembering the three axis
directions: the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool
axis from the workpiece toward the tool (the Z axis), the thumb points
in the positive X direction, and the index finger in the positive Y
direction.
+Z
+Y
The iTNC 530 can control up to 18 axes. The axes U, V and W are
secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X, Y and Z, respectively.
Rotary axes are designated as A, B and C. The illustration at lower right
shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main
axes.
+X
+Z
+X
+Y
In addition, the machine tool builder can define any number of auxiliary
axes identified by lowercase letters
Z
Y
W+
C+
B+
V+
A+
U+
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
99
3.1 Fundamentals
Polar coordinates
If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates, you
also write the NC program using Cartesian coordinates. For parts
containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the
dimensions in polar coordinates.
While the Cartesian coordinates X, Y and Z are three-dimensional and

can describe points in space, polar coordinates are two-dimensional
and describe points in a plane. Polar coordinates have their datum at a
circle center (CC), or pole. A position in a plane can be clearly defined
by the:
Polar Radius, the distance from the circle center CC to the position,
and the
Polar Angle, the size of the angle between the reference axis and
the line that connects the circle center CC with the position
PR
PA2
PA3
PR
PR
10
PA1
CC
30
Setting the pole and the angle reference axis

The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the
three planes. These coordinates also set the reference axis for the
polar angle PA.
Coordinates of the pole
(plane)
Reference axis of the angle
X/Y
+X
Y/Z
+Y
Z/X
+Z
Z
X
Z
Y
X
X
100
3.1 Fundamentals
Absolute and incremental workpiece positions

Absolute workpiece positions
Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to
the datum of the coordinate system (origin). Each position on the
workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates.
Example 1: Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates
Hole 1
X = 10 mm
Y = 10 mm
Hole 2
X = 30 mm
Y = 20 mm
Hole 3
X = 50 mm
Y = 30 mm
Y
3
30
2
20
10
Incremental workpiece positions

Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed
nominal position of the tool, which serves as the relative (imaginary)
datum. When you write an NC program in incremental coordinates,
you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the
previous and the subsequent nominal positions. This is why they are
also referred to as a chain dimensions.
10
30
To program a position in incremental coordinates, enter the function

I before the axis.
Example 2: Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates
Hole 6, with respect to 5

X = 20 mm
Y = 10 mm
10
10
X = 10 mm
Y = 10 mm
Hole 5, with respect to 4
X = 20 mm
Y = 10 mm
10
Absolute coordinates of hole 4
50
10
20
20
Absolute and incremental polar coordinates

Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference
axis.
Incremental coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal
position of the tool.
Y
+IPR
PR
PR
10
PA
CC
30
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
PR
+IPA +IPA
101
A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the

workpiece, usually a corner, as the absolute datum. Before setting the
datum, you align the workpiece with the machine axes and move the
tool in each axis to a known position relative to the workpiece. Set the
display of the TNC either to zero or to a known position value for each
position. This establishes the reference system for the workpiece,
which will be used for the TNC display and your part program.
Z
MAX
If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates,

simply use the coordinate transformation cycles (see Users Manual
for Cycle Programming, Cycles for Coordinate Transformation).
If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC, set the datum at
a position or corner on the workpiece which is suitable for deducing
the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions.
MIN
The fastest, easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by
using a 3-D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN. See Setting the Datum
with a 3-D Touch Probe in the Touch Probe Cycles Users Manual.
Y
7
750
6
5
320
150
0
-150
0
Example
The workpiece drawing shows holes (1 to 4) whose dimensions are
shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X=0
Y=0. The holes (5 to 7) are dimensioned with respect to a relative
datum with the absolute coordinates X=450, Y=750. With the DATUM
SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X=450,
Y=750, to be able to program the holes (5 to 7) without further
calculations.
3000,1
3.1 Fundamentals
Setting the datum
325 450
900
950
102
3.2 Creating and Writing Programs

Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN
Conversational
A part program consists of a series of program blocks. The figure at
right illustrates the elements of a block.
The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence.
The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM, the program
name and the active unit of measure.
Block
10 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3
The subsequent blocks contain information on:

The workpiece blank
Tool calls
Approaching a safe position
Feed rates and spindle speeds, as well as
Path contours, cycles and other functions
Path function
Words
Block number
The last block of a program is identified by END PGM the program name
and the active unit of measure.
Danger of collision!
After each tool call, HEIDENHAIN recommends always
traversing to a safe position, from which the TNC can
position the tool for machining without causing a collision!
Define the blank: BLK FORM

Immediately after initiating a new program, you define a cuboid
workpiece blank. If you wish to define the blank at a later stage, press
the SPEC FCT key and then the BLK FORM soft key. This definition is
needed for the TNCs graphic simulation feature. The sides of the
workpiece blank lie parallel to the X, Y and Z axes and can be up to
100 000 mm long. The blank form is defined by two of its corner
points:
MIN point: the smallest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank form,
entered as absolute values
MAX point: the largest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank form,
entered as absolute or incremental values
You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run
a graphic test for the program!
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
103
Creating a new part program

You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation. An example of program initiation:
Select the Programming and Editing operating mode.
Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager.
Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program:
FILE NAME = OLD.H
Enter the new program name and confirm your entry
with the ENT key.
To select the unit of measure, press the MM or INCH

soft key. The TNC switches the screen layout and
initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM
(workpiece blank).
WORKING SPINDLE AXIS X/Y/Z?
Enter spindle axis, e.g. Z
DEF BLK FORM: MIN CORNER?
Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the
MIN point and confirm each of your entries with the
ENT key.
DEF BLK FORM: MAX CORNER?
Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the
MAX point and confirm each of your entries with the
ENT key.
104
Example: Display the BLK form in the NC program

0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM
Program begin, name, unit of measure
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40
Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
MAX point coordinates
3 END PGM NEW MM
Program end, name, unit of measure
The TNC generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END
block automatically.
If you do not wish to define a blank form, cancel the dialog
at Working spindle axis X/Y/Z by pressing the DEL key!
The TNC can display the graphics only if the shortest side
is at least 50 m long and the longest side is no longer
than 99 999.999 mm.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
105
Programming tool movements in conversational

format
To program a block, initiate the dialog by pressing a function key. In the
screen headline, the TNC then asks you for all the information
necessary to program the desired function.
Example of a positioning block
Start block.
COORDINATES?
10
20
Enter the target coordinate for the X axis.
Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis, and go to

the next question with ENT.
TOOL RADIUS COMP: RL/RR/NO COMP?

Enter "No radius compensation" and go to the next
question with ENT
FEED RATE F=? / F MAX = ENT
100
Enter a feed rate of 100 mm/min for this path contour;

go to the next question with ENT.
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M?
Enter the miscellaneous function M3 spindle ON.
Pressing the ENT key terminates this dialog.
The program-block window displays the following line:

3 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3
106
Possible feed rate input

Functions for setting the feed rate
Soft key
Rapid traverse, non-modal Exception: If defined

before an APPR block, FMAX is also in effect for
moving to an auxiliary point (see Important
positions for approach and departure on page
220)
Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in
TOOL CALL.
Move at the programmed feed rate (unit of
measure is mm/min or 1/10 inch/min). With
rotary axes, the TNC interprets the feed rate in
degrees/min, regardless of whether the program
is written in mm or inch
With FT, instead of a speed you define a time in
seconds (input range 0.001 to 999.999 seconds),
in which the programmed path is to be traversed.
FT is effective only blockwise
With FMAXT, instead of a speed you define a time
in seconds (input range 0.001 to 999.999
seconds), in which the programmed path is to be
traversed. FMAXT is effective only for keyboards
with a rapid traverse potentiometer. FMAXT is
effective only blockwise
Define the feed per revolution (units in mm/rev or
inch/rev). Caution: In inch-programs, FU cannot
be combined with M136
Define the tooth feed (units in mm/tooth or
inch/tooth). The number of teeth must be defined
in the tool table in the CUT. column.
Functions for conversational guidance
Key
Ignore the dialog question.

End the dialog immediately.
Abort the dialog and erase the block.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
107
Actual position capture

The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the
program, for example during
Positioning-block programming
Cycle programming
Tool definition with TOOL DEF
To transfer the correct position values, proceed as follows:
U
Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to
insert a position value.
U Select the actual-position-capture function. In the
soft-key row the TNC displays the axes whose
positions can be transferred
U
Select the axis. The TNC writes the current position of

the selected axis into the active input box
In the working plane the TNC always captures the

coordinates of the tool center, even though tool radius
compensation is active.
In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates
of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length
compensation into account.
The TNC keeps the soft-key row for axis selection active
until you deactivate it by pressing the
actual-position-capture key again. This behavior remains in
effect even if you save the current block and open a new
one with a path function key. If you select a block element
in which you must choose an input alternative via soft key
(e.g. for radius compensation), then the TNC also closes
the soft-key row for axis selection.
The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the
tilted working plane function is active.
108
Editing a program
You cannot edit a program while it is being run by the TNC
in a machine operating mode. The TNC allows you to place
the cursor in the block, but it does not save the changes
and responds instead with an error message.
While you are creating or editing a part program, you can select any
desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the
arrow keys or the soft keys:
Function
Soft key/Keys
Go to previous page
Go to next page
Go to beginning of program.
Go to end of program.
Change the position of the current block on
the screen. Press this soft key to display
additional program blocks that are
programmed before the current block.
Change the position of the current block on
the screen. Press this soft key to display
additional program blocks that are
programmed after the current block.
Move from one block to the next.
Select individual words in a block.
To select a certain block, press the GOTO key,
enter the desired block number, and confirm
with the ENT key. Or: Enter the block number
step and press the N LINES soft key to jump
over the entered number of lines upward or
downward.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
109
Function
Soft key/Key
Set the selected word to zero.

Erase an incorrect number.
Clear a (non-blinking) error message.
Delete the selected word.
Delete the selected block.
Erase cycles and program sections.
Insert the block that you last edited or
deleted.
Inserting blocks at any desired location
U Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and
initiate the dialog.
Editing and inserting words
U Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one. The plainlanguage dialog is available while the word is highlighted.
U To accept the change, press the END key.
If you want to insert a word, press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly
until the desired dialog appears. You can then enter the desired value.
110
Looking for the same words in different blocks

To use this function, set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF.
To select a word in a block, press the arrow keys
repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word.
Select a block with the arrow keys.
The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one
you selected previously.
If you have started a search in a very long program, the
TNC shows a progress display window. You then have the
option of canceling the search via soft key.
Finding any text
U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key. The TNC
displays the Find text: dialog prompt.
U Enter the text that you wish to find.
U To find the text, press the EXECUTE soft key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
111
Marking, copying, deleting and inserting program sections

The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections
within an NC program or into another NC programsee the table
below.
To copy a program section, proceed as follows:
U
U
U
Select the soft-key row containing the marking functions.

Select the first (last) block of the section you wish to copy.
To mark the first (last) block, press the SELECT BLOCK soft key. The
TNC then highlights the first character of the block and the CANCEL
SELECTION soft key appears.
Move the highlight to the last (first) block of the program section you
wish to copy or delete. The TNC shows the marked blocks in a
different color. You can end the marking function at any time by
pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key.
To copy the selected program section, press the COPY BLOCK soft
key. To delete the selected section, press the DELETE BLOCK soft
key. The TNC stores the selected block.
Using the arrow keys, select the block after which you wish to insert
the copied (deleted) program section.
To insert the section into another program, select the
corresponding program using the file manager and then
mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied
block.
U
U
To insert the block, press the INSERT BLOCK soft key.

To end the marking function, press the CANCEL SELECTION soft
key.
Function
Soft key
Switch the marking function on.

Switch the marking function off.
Delete the marked block.
Insert the block that is stored in the buffer
memory.
Copy the marked block.
112
The TNC search function

With the search function of the TNC, you can search for any text within
a program and replace it by a new text, if required.
Searching for texts
U If required, select the block containing the word you wish to find.
U Select the search function. The TNC superimposes
the search window and displays the available search
functions in the soft-key row (see table of search
functions).
+40
Enter the text to be searched for. Please note that the

search is case-sensitive
Start the search process: The TNC displays the

available search options in the soft-key row (see the
table of search options).
If required, change the search options.
Start the search process: The TNC moves to the next

block containing the text you are searching for.
Repeat the search process: The TNC moves to the

next block containing the text you are searching for.
End the search function.
Search functions
Soft key
Show the pop-up window containing the last

search items. Use the arrow keys to select a
search item and confirm with the ENT key.
Show the pop-up window containing possible
search items of the current block. Use the arrow
keys to select a search item and confirm with the
ENT key.
Show the pop-up window containing a selection
of the most important NC functions. Use the
arrow keys to select a search item and confirm
with the ENT key.
Activate the Search/Replace function.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
113
Search options
Soft key
Define the search direction

Define the end of the search: With COMPLETE,
the search starts at the current block and
continues until it reaches it again.
Start a new search.
Find/Replace any text

The find/replace function is not possible if
a program is protected
the program is currently being run by the TNC
When using the REPLACE ALL function, ensure that you
do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to
change. Once replaced, such text cannot be restored.
U
If required, select the block containing the word you wish to find.
U Select the Search function: The TNC superimposes
the search window and displays the available search
functions in the soft-key row.
114
Activate the Replace function: The TNC superimposes

a window for entering the text to be inserted.
Enter the text to be searched for. Please note that the

search is case-sensitive. Then confirm with the ENT
key
Enter the text to be inserted. Please note that the

entry is case-sensitive
Start the search process: The TNC displays the

available search options in the soft-key row (see the
table of search options).
If required, change the search options.
Start the search process: The TNC moves to the next

occurrence of the text you are searching for.
To replace the text and then move to the next

occurrence of the text, press the REPLACE soft key.
To replace all text occurrences, press the REPLACE
ALL soft key. To skip the text and move to its next
occurrence press the DO NOT REPLACE soft key.
End the search function
3.3 File Management: Fundamentals
3.3 File Management:

Fundamentals
Files
Files in the TNC
Type
Programs
In HEIDENHAIN format
In DIN/ISO format
.H
.I
smarT.NC files
Structured unit program
Contour descriptions
Point tables for machining positions
.HU
.HC
.HP
Tables for
Tools
Tool changers
Pallets
Datums
Points
Presets
Cutting data
Cutting materials, workpiece materials
.T
.TCH
.P
.D
.PNT
.PR
.CDT
.TAB
Texts as
ASCII files
Help files
.A
.CHM
Drawing data as
ASCII files
.DXF
Other files
Fixture templates
Parameterized fixtures
Dependent data (such as structure items)
Archives
.CFT
.CFX
.DEP
.ZIP
When you write a part program on the TNC, you must first enter a file
name. The TNC saves the program to the hard disk as a file with the
same name. The TNC can also save texts and tables as files.
The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can
easily find and manage your files. Here you can call, copy, rename and
erase files.
You can manage an almost unlimited number of files with the TNC, at
least 21 GB. The actual size of the hard disk depends on the main
computer installed in your machine. Please refer to the specifications.
A single NC program can be up to 2 GB large.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
115
File names
When you store programs, tables and texts as files, the TNC adds an
extension to the file name, separated by a point. This extension
indicates the file type.
PROG20
.H
File name
File type
File names should not exceed 25 characters, otherwise the TNC

cannot display the entire file name.
File names on the TNC must comply with this standard: The Open
Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition
(Posix-Standard). Accordingly, the file names may include the
characters below:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghi
jklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789._You should not use any other characters in file names in order to
prevent any file transfer problems.
The maximum limit for the path and file name together is
82 characters (see Paths on page 118).
116
Show externally created files on the TNC

The TNC features several additional tools which you can use to display
the files shown in the table below. Some of the files can also be
edited.
File types
Type
PDF files
Excel tables
pdf
xls
csv
html
Internet files
Text files
txt
ini
Image files
bmp
gif
jpg
png
For further information about displaying and editing the listed file
types, See Additional tools for management of external file types on
page 139.
Data backup
We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at
regular intervals.
The TNCremoNT data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a
simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC.
You additionally need a data medium on which all machine-specific
data, such as the PLC program, machine parameters, etc., are stored.
Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance, if necessary.
Saving the contents of the entire hard disk (>2 GB) can
take up to several hours. In this case, it is a good idea to
save the data outside of work hours, e.g. during the night.
Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded files so
that the TNC always has enough hard-disk space for
system files (such as the tool table).
Depending on operating conditions (e.g., vibration load),

hard disks generally have a higher failure rate after three to
five years of service. HEIDENHAIN therefore
recommends having the hard disk inspected after three to
five years.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
117
3.4 Working with the File Manager

Directories
To ensure that you can easily find your files, we recommend that you
organize your hard disk into directories. You can divide a directory into
further directories, which are called subdirectories. With the /+ key or
ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories.
The TNC can manage up to 6 directory levels!
If you save more than 512 files in one directory, the TNC
no longer sorts them alphabetically!
Directory names
The maximum limit for the path, including the directory name, is 82
characters (see Paths on page 118).
Paths
A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under
which a file is saved. The individual names are separated by a
backslash \.
The path, including all drive characters, directory and the
file name, including the extension, must not exceed 82
characters!
Drive designations must not include more than 8
uppercase letters.
Example
The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC:\ drive. Then, in the
AUFTR1 directory, the directory NCPROG was created and the part
program PROG1.H was copied into it. The part program now has the
following path:
TNC:\
AUFTR1
TNC:\AUFTR1\NCPROG\PROG1.H
NCPROG
The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with

different paths.
WZTAB
A35K941
ZYLM
TESTPROG
HUBER
KAR25T
118
Overview: Functions of the file manager

If you want to use the old file management system, you
must use the MOD function to switch to the old file
manager (see Changing the PGM MGT setting on page
657).
Function
Soft key
Page
Copy (and convert) individual files
Page 126
Select target directory
Page 126
Display a specific file type.
Page 122
Create new file.
Page 125
Display the last 10 files that were

selected.
Page 129
Delete a file or directory.
Page 130
Mark a file.
Page 131
Rename a file.
Page 133
Protect a file against editing and

erasure.
Page 134
Cancel file protection.
Page 134
Archive files
Page 137
Restore files from archive
Page 138
Open a smarT.NC program
Page 124
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
119
Function
Soft key
Page
Manage network drives.
Page 146
Copy a directory.
Page 129
Update the directory tree, e.g. to be able

to see if a new directory was created
while the file manager was opened.
120
Calling the file manager

management window (see figure for default setting.
If the TNC displays a different screen layout, press
the WINDOW soft key.)
The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and
directories. Drives designate devices with which data are stored or
transferred. One drive is the hard disk of the TNC. Other drives are the
interfaces (RS232, RS422, Ethernet), which can be used, for example,
to connect a personal computer. A directory is always identified by a
folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right.
Subdirectories are shown to the right of and below their parent
directories. A triangle in front of the folder symbol indicates that there
are further subdirectories, which can be shown with the /+ or ENT
keys.
The wide window on the right shows you all files that are stored in the
selected directory. Each file is shown with additional information,
illustrated in the table below.
Display
Meaning
File name
Name with max. 25 characters
Type
File type
Size
File size in bytes
Changed
Date and time that the file was last changed.

The date format can be set
Status
File properties:
E: Program is selected in the Programming
and Editing mode of operation.
S: Program is selected in the Test Run mode
of operation.
M: Program is selected in a Program Run
mode of operation.
P: File is protected against deletion and
editing.
+: Dependent files exist (structure file, toolusage file)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
121
Selecting drives, directories and files

Call the file manager.
Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the
desired position on the screen:
Moves the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.
Moves the highlight up and down within a window
Moves the highlight one page up or down within a

window.
Step 1: Select drive

Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window:
To select a drive, press the SELECT soft key, or
Press the ENT key.
Step 2: Select a directory

Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left-hand window
the right-hand window automatically shows all files stored in the
highlighted directory
122
Step 3: Select a file

Press the SELECT TYPE soft key
Press the soft key for the desired file type, or
Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files, or
4*.H
Use wild card characters, e.g. to show all files of the

file type .H that begin with 4
Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window:
Press the SELECT soft key, or
Press the ENT key
The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode from which you
called the file manager.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
123
Select smarT.NC programs

Programs created in the smarT.NC operating mode can be opened in
the Programming and Editing mode with either the smarT.NC editor
or the conversational editor. By default the TNC always opens .HU and
.HC programs with the smarT.NC editor. If you want to open the
programs in the conversational editor, proceed as follows:
Call the file manager
With the arrow keys or the soft keys you can move the highlight to an
.HU or .HC file:

and vice versa
Moves the highlight one page up or down within a

window
Shift the soft-key row.
Select the submenu for selecting the editor.
Open the .HU or .HC program with the conversational

editor.
Open the .HU program with the smarT.NC editor.
Open the .HC program with the smarT.NC editor.
124
Creating a new directory (only possible on the

drive TNC:\)
Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you
want to create a subdirectory.
NEW
Enter the new directory name, and confirm with

ENT.
CREATE \NEW DIRECTORY?

Press the YES soft key to confirm, or
Abort with the NO soft key.
Creating a new file (only possible on the drive

TNC:\)
Select the directory in which you wish to create the new file.
NEW
Enter the new file name with the file extension, and
confirm with ENT.
Open the dialog box for creating a new file.
NEW
Enter the new file name with the file extension, and
confirm with ENT
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
125
Copying a single file

U
Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy.

U Press the COPY soft key to select the copy function.
The TNC displays a soft-key row with soft keys for
different functions. You can also start the copy
process by pressing CTRL+C.
U
Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your

entry with the ENT key or OK soft key: the TNC
copies the file to the active directory or to the
selected destination directory. The original file is
retained.
Press the Target Directory soft key to call a pop-up

window in which you select the target directory by
pressing the ENT key or the OK soft key: the TNC
copies the file to the selected directory. The original
file is retained.
When the copying process has been started with ENT or

the OK soft key, the TNC displays a pop-up window with a
progress indicator.
126
Copying files into another directory

U
U
Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows.

To display directories in both windows, press the PATH soft key.
In the right window

U
Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the
files, and display the files in this directory with the ENT key.
In the left window

U
Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and press
ENT to display them.
U Call the file tagging functions
U
Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and tag
it. You can tag several files in this way, if desired
Copy the tagged files into the target directory
Additional tagging functions: see "Marking files", page 131.

If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows, the TNC
copies from the directory in which the highlight is located.
Overwriting files
If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under
the same name, the TNC will ask whether the files in the target
directory should be overwritten:
U
U
U
To overwrite all files, press the YES soft key, or

To overwrite no files, press the NO soft key, or
To confirm each file separately before overwriting it, press the
CONFIRM soft key.
If you wish to overwrite a protected file, this must also be confirmed

or aborted separately.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
127
Copying a table
If you are copying tables, you can overwrite individual lines or columns
in the target table with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key. Prerequisites:
The target table must already exist
The file to be copied must only contain the columns or lines you
want to replace.
The REPLACE FIELDS soft key does not appear when you
want to overwrite the table in the TNC with an external
data transfer software, such as TNCremoNT. Copy the
externally created file into a different directory, and then
copy the desired fields with the TNC file management.
The file extension of the externally created table should be
.A (ASCII). In these cases the table can contain any
number of lines. If you create a file of type *.T, then the
table must contain sequential line numbers beginning
with 0.
Example
With a tool presetter you have measured the length and radius of ten
new tools. The tool presetter then generates the tool table TOOL.A
with 10 lines (for the 10 tools) and the columns
Tool number (column T)
Tool length (column L)
Tool radius (column R)
U
U
Copy this table from the external data medium to any directory.
Copy the externally created table over the existing table using the
TNC file manager. The TNC asks if you wish to overwrite the
existing TOOL.T tool table:
If you press the YES soft key, the TNC will completely overwrite the
current TOOL.T tool table. After this copying process the new
TOOL.T table consists of 10 lines. The only remaining columns in
the table are tool number, tool length and tool radius
Or, if you press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key, the TNC merely
overwrites the first 10 lines of the number, length and radius
columns in the TOOL.T file. The data of the other lines and columns
is not changed.
128
Copying a directory
In order to copy directories, you must have set the view so
that the TNC displays directories in the window on the
right (see Adapting the file manager on page 135).
Please note that when copying directories, the TNC only
copies those files that are displayed by the current filter
settings.
U
U
U
Move the highlight in the right window onto the directory you want
to copy.
Press the COPY soft key: the TNC opens the window for selecting
the target directory.
Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK soft key.
The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to
the selected target directory.
Choosing one of the last files selected

Display the last 15 files selected: Press the LAST

FILES soft key.
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select:
To select the file, press the SELECT soft key, or
Press the ENT key
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
129
Deleting a file
Caution: Data may be lost!
Once you delete files they cannot be undeleted!
U
Move the highlight to the file you want to delete.

U To select the erasing function, press the DELETE soft
key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to
delete the file
U
To confirm, press the YES soft key;
To cancel deletion, press the NO soft key.
Deleting a directory
Caution: Data may be lost!
Once you delete directories they cannot be undeleted!
U
Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete.

U To select the erasing function, press the DELETE soft
key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to
delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files
130
To confirm, press the YES soft key;
To cancel deletion, press the NO soft key.
Marking files
Marking function
Soft key
Move cursor upward

Move cursor downward
Tag a single file
Tag all files in the directory
Untag a single file
Untag all files
Copy all tagged files
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
131
Some functions, such as copying or erasing files, can not only be used
for individual files, but also for several files at once. To tag several files,
proceed as follows:
Move the highlight to the first file.
To display the marking functions, press the TAG soft

key.
Mark a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key.
Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag:

Only works via soft keys. Do not use the arrow keys!
To mark further files, press the TAG FILE soft key,

etc.
To copy the tagged files, press the COPY TAG soft

key, or
Delete the tagged files by pressing END to end the

marking function, and then the DELETE soft key to
delete the tagged files.
132
Tagging files with shortcuts

U Move the highlight to the first file
U Press and hold the CTRL key.
U Use the arrow keys to move the cursor frame to other files
U Press the spacebar to tag a file.
U When you have tagged all desired files: release the CTRL key and
perform the desired file operation.
CTRL+A tags all of the files in the current directory.
If you press the SHIFT key instead of the CTRL key, the
TNC automatically tags all files that you select with the
arrow keys.
Renaming a file
U
Move the highlight to the file you want to rename.

U Select the renaming function.
U
Enter the new file name; the file type cannot be

changed.
To execute renaming, press the ENT key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
133
Additional functions
Protecting a file / Canceling file protection
U Move the highlight to the file you want to protect.
U To select the additional functions, press the MORE
FUNCTIONS soft key.
U
To activate file protection, press the PROTECT soft

key. The file now has status P.
To cancel file protection, press the UNPROTECT soft

key.
Connecting/removing a USB device

U Move the highlight to the left window.
FUNCTIONS soft key
U
Search for a USB device.
In order to remove the USB device, move the cursor

to the USB device.
Remove the USB device.
For more information: See USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2 function)
on page 147.
134
Adapting the file manager

You open the menu for adapting the file manager either by clicking the
path name or with soft keys:
U
U
U
U
U
U
Select the file manager: Press the PGM MGT key

Select the third soft-key row
Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key
Press the OPTIONS soft key: the TNC displays the menu for
adapting the file manager
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the desired setting
Activate or deactivate the desired setting with the space bar
You can adapt the file manager as follows:

Bookmarks
You can use bookmarks to manage your favorite directories. You
can add or delete the current directory to or from the list, or delete
all bookmarks. All directories that you have added appear in the
bookmark list, making them available for rapid selection
View
In the View menu item you specify the type of information the TNC
is to display in the file window
Date format
In the Date format menu you specify the format in which the TNC
displays the date in the Changed column
Settings
If the cursor is in the directory tree: specify if the TNC is to switch
windows when the right arrow key is pressed, or if the TNC is to
open any subdirectories
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
135
Working with shortcuts

Shortcuts are commands triggered by certain key combinations.
Shortcuts always perform a function that you can also trigger via soft
key. The following shortcuts are available:
CTRL+S:
Select a file (see also Selecting drives, directories and files on
page 122)
CTRL+N:
Open a dialog box in order to create a new file or directory (see also
Creating a new file (only possible on the drive TNC:\) on page 125)
CTRL+C:
Open a dialog box in order to copy selected files or directories (see
also Copying a single file on page 126)
CTRL+R:
Open a dialog box in order to rename a selected file or directory (see
also Renaming a file on page 133)
DEL key:
Open a dialog box in order to delete selected files or directories (see
also Deleting a file on page 130)
CTRL+O:
Open an Open with dialog box (see also Select smarT.NC
programs on page 124)
CTRL+W:
Switch the split screen layout (see also Data transfer to or from an
external data medium on page 144)
CTRL+E:
Show functions for adapting the file manager (see also Adapting
the file manager on page 135)
CTRL+M:
Connect USB device (see also USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2
function) on page 147)
CTRL+K:
Disconnect USB device (see also USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2
function) on page 147)
SHIFT + UP or DOWN arrow key:
Mark several files or directories (see also Marking files on page
131)
ESC key:
Cancel the function.
136
Archive files
You can use the TNC archiving function to save files and directories in
a ZIP archive. You can open the ZIP archives externally using standard
programs.
The TNC packs all the marked files and directories into the
desired ZIP archive. TNC packs TNC-specific files (e.g.
plain-language programs) in an internal format (binary
format), so you must observe the points below:
You might not be able to open packed files with an
ASCII editor on an external computer.
When transferring ZIP archives to other iTNC controls,
the version of the NC software must be identical
because otherwise the file format is different.
Follow the steps outlined below for archiving:
U
In the right half of the screen, you mark the files and directories you
want to archive
FUNCTIONS soft key
U
To create an archive, press the ZIP soft key. The TNC

will show a window for entering the archive name
Enter the desired archive name.
Confirm with the OK soft key: the TNC shows a

window for selecting the directory where you want to
store your archive
Select the desired directory and confirm with the OK

soft key
If your control is incorporated in your company network

and has write rights, you can store the archive directly on
a network drive.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
137
Extract files from archive

Follow the steps outlined below for extracting:
U
In the right half of the screen, you mark the ZIP file you want to
extract
FUNCTIONS soft key
U
To extract the selected archive, press the UNZIP soft

key. The TNC will show a window for selecting the
target directory.
Select the desired target directory
Confirm with the OK soft key and the TNC extracts the
archive
The TNC always extracts the files to the target directory

you have selected. If the archive contains directories, the
TNC creates subdirectories for them.
138
Additional tools for management of external file

types
With the additional tools you can display or edit various externally
created file types on the TNC.
File types
Description
PDF files (pdf)

Excel tables (xls, csv)
Internet files (htm, html)
ZIP archive (zip)
Page 139
Page 140
Page 140
Page 141
Text files (ASCII files, e.g. txt, ini)
Page 142
Image viewer available (bmp, jpg, gif, png)
Page 143
If you transfer files from a PC to the control by means of

TNCremoNT, you must have entered the file name
extension pdf, xls, zip, bmp gif, jpg and png in the list of
the file types for binary transmission (menu item >Extras
>Configuration >Mode in TNCremoNT).
Displaying PDF files
In order to open PDF files directly on the TNC, proceed as follows:
U
Select the directory in which the PDF file is saved
Move the highlight to the PDF file.
Press ENT: The TNC opens the PDF file in its own
application using the PDF viewer additional tool.
With the key combination ALT+TAB you can always return to the TNC
user interface while leaving the PDF file open. Alternatively, you can
also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to
the TNC interface.
If you position the mouse pointer over a button, a brief tooltip
explaining the function of this button will be displayed. More
information on how to use the PDF viewer is provided under Help.
To exit the PDF viewer, proceed as follows:
U
U
Use the mouse to select the File menu item.

Select the menu item Close: The TNC returns to the file manager
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
139
Display and edit Excel files

Proceed as follows to open and edit Excel files with the extension xls
or csv directly on the TNC:
U
Select the directory in which the Excel file is saved
Move the highlight to the Excel file
Press ENT: The TNC opens the Excel file in its own
application using the Gnumeric additional tool
user interface while leaving the Excel file open. Alternatively, you can
the TNC interface.
information on how to use the Gnumeric function is provided under
Help.
To exit Gnumeric, proceed as follows:
U
U

Select the menu item Quit: The TNC returns to the file manager.
Displaying Internet files

To open Internet files with the extension htm or html directly on the
TNC, proceed as follows:
U
Select the directory in which the Internet file is saved
Move the highlight to the Internet file
Press ENT: The TNC opens the Internet file in its own
application using the Mozilla Firefox additional tool
user interface while leaving the PDF file open. Alternatively, you can
the TNC interface.
information on how to use Mozilla Firefox is provided under Help.
To exit Mozilla Firefox, proceed as follows:
U
U

Select the menu item Quit: The TNC returns to the file manager.
140
Working with ZIP archives

To open ZIP archives with the extension zip directly on the TNC,
proceed as follows:
U
Select the directory in which the archive file is saved
Move the highlight to the archive file
Press ENT: The TNC opens the archive file in its own
application using the Xarchiver additional tool
user interface while leaving the archive file open. Alternatively, you
can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back
to the TNC interface.
information on how to use the Xarchiver function is provided under
Help.
Please note that the TNC does not carry out any binary-toASCII conversion or vice versa when compressing or
decompressing NC programs and NC tables. When such
files are transferred to TNC controls using other software
versions, the TNC may not be able to read them.
To exit Xarchiver, proceed as follows:
U
U
Use the mouse to select the Archive menu item.

Select the menu item Quit : The TNC returns to the file manager.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
141
Display or edit text files

To open and edit text files (ASCII files, e.g. with the extension txt or
ini, proceed as follows:
U
Select the directory in which the text file is saved
Move the highlight to the text file
Press the ENT key: The TNC displays a window for

selection of the editor
Press ENT to select the Mousepad application.

Alternatively, you can also open the TXT files with the
internal text editor
The TNC opens the text file in its own application

using the Mousepad additional tool.
If you open an H or I file on an external drive and save it

on the TNC drive using Mousepad, the programs are not
converted automatically to the internal control format.
Programs that are saved in this way cannot be opened or
run with the TNC editor.
user interface while leaving the text file open. Alternatively, you can
the TNC interface.
The shortcuts you are familiar with from Windows, which you can use
to edit texts quickly (STRG+C, STRG+V,...), are available within
Mousepad.
To exit Mousepad, proceed as follows:
U
U

142
Displaying Image Files

To open image files with the extension bmp, gif, jpg or png directly on
the TNC, proceed as follows:
U
Select the directory in which the image file is saved
Move the highlight to the image file
Press ENT: The TNC opens the image file in its own
application using the ristretto additional tool
user interface while leaving the image file open. Alternatively, you can
the TNC interface.
More information on how to use the ristretto function is provided
under Help.
To exit ristretto, proceed as follows:
U
U

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
143
Data transfer to or from an external data

medium
Before you can transfer data to an external data medium,
you must set up the data interface (see Setting the Data
Interfaces on page 647).
Depending on the data transfer software you use,
problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data
over a serial interface. They can be overcome by repeating
the transmission.
Select the screen layout for data transfer: press the

WINDOW soft key. In the left half of the screen the
TNC shows all files in the current directory. In the
right half of the screen it shows all files saved in the
root directory (TNC:\ ).
Use the arrow keys to highlight the file(s) that you want to transfer:
and vice versa.
If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium, move
the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred.
144
If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC, move
the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred.
To select another drive or directory: press the soft key

for choosing the directory. The TNC opens a pop-up
window. Select the desired directory in the pop-up
window by using the arrow keys and the ENT key.
Transfer a single file: Press the COPY soft key, or
To transfer several files, press the TAG soft key (in

the second soft-key row, see "Marking files", page
131)
Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key. A status window
appears on the TNC, informing about the copying progress, or
To end data transfer, move the highlight into the left

window and then press the WINDOW soft key. The
standard file manager window is displayed again.
To select another directory in the split-screen display,

press the soft key for choosing the directory. Select the
desired directory in the pop-up window by using the arrow
keys and the ENT key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
145
The TNC in a network

To connect the Ethernet card to your network, see
"Ethernet Interface", page 651.
The TNC logs error messages during network operation
see "Ethernet Interface", page 651.
If the TNC is connected to a network, the directory window displays
up to 7 additional drives in the directory window to the left (see figure).
All the functions described above (selecting a drive, copying files, etc.)
also apply to network drives, provided that you have been granted the
corresponding rights.
Connecting and disconnecting a network drive
U To select the program management: Press the PGM
MGT key. If necessary, press the WINDOW soft key
to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right.
U
To manage the network drives: Press the NETWORK

soft key (second soft-key row). In the right-hand
window the TNC shows the network drives available
for access. With the soft keys described below you
can define the connection for each drive.
Function
Soft key
Establish network connection. If the connection

is active, the TNC shows an M in the Mnt column.
You can connect up to 7 additional drives with
the TNC.
Delete the network connection.
Automatically establish network connection
whenever the TNC is switched on. The TNC
shows an A in the Auto column if the connection
is established automatically.
Do not establish network connection
automatically when the TNC is switched on.
It may take some time to mount a network device. At the upper right
of the screen the TNC displays [READ DIR] to indicate that a
connection is being established. The maximum transmission speed is
2 to 5 Mbps, depending on the type of file being transferred and how
busy the network is.
146
USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2 function)

Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with
USB devices. The TNC supports the following USB block devices:
Floppy disk drives with the FAT/VFAT file system
Memory sticks with the FAT/VFAT file system
Hard disks with the FAT/VFAT file system
CD-ROM drives with the Joliet (ISO 9660) file system
The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when
connected. The TNC does not support USB devices with other file
systems (such as NTFS). The TNC displays the USB: TNC does not
support device error message when such a device is connected.
The TNC also displays the USB: TNC does not support
device error message if you connect a USB hub. In this
case, simply acknowledge the message with the CE key.
In theory, you should be able to connect all USB devices
with the file systems mentioned above to the TNC. If you
nevertheless encounter problems, please contact
HEIDENHAIN.
The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree, so
you can use the file-management functions described in the earlier
chapters correspondingly.
Your machine tool builder can assign permanent names
for USB devices. Refer to your machine manual.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
147
To remove a USB device, proceed as follows:

U
Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager.
Select the left window with the arrow key.
Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be

removed.
Scroll through the soft-key row.
Select additional functions.
Select the function for removing USB devices. The

TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree.
Exit the file manager.
In order to re-establish a connection with a USB device that has been

removed, press the following soft key:
U
148
Select the function for reconnection of USB devices.
Programming:
Programming Aids
4.1 Adding Comments
4.1 Adding Comments

Function
You can add comments to any desired block in the part program to
explain program steps or make general notes.
If the TNC cannot show the entire comment on the
screen, the >> sign is displayed.
The last character in a comment block must not have any
tilde (~).
There are three possibilities for adding comments:
Entering comments during programming

U
Enter the data for a program block, then press the semicolon key ;
on the alphabetic keyboardthe TNC displays the dialog prompt
COMMENT?
Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END
key.
Inserting comments after program entry

U
U
Select the block to which a comment is to be added.

Select the last word in the block with the right arrow key: A
semicolon appears at the end of the block and the TNC displays the
dialog prompt COMMENT?
key.
Entering a comment in a separate block

U
U
U
Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted.

Initiate the programming dialog with the semicolon key (;) on the
alphabetic keyboard.
key.
150
4.1 Adding Comments
Functions for editing of the comment

Function
Soft key
Jump to beginning of comment.

Jump to end of comment.
Jump to the beginning of a word. Words must be
separated by a space.
Jump to the end of a word. Words must be
separated by a space.
Switch between insert mode and overwrite
mode.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
151
4.2 Structuring Programs
4.2 Structuring Programs

Definition and applications
This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in
structuring blocks. Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 37
characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent
program lines.
With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks, you can organize long
and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible manner.
This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the
program later. Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program
at any point. They can also be displayed in a separate window, and
edited or added to, as desired.
The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC in a separate file
(extension: .SEC.DEP). This speeds navigation in the program
structure window.
Displaying the program structure window /

Changing the active window
U
To display the program structure window, select the

screen display PROGRAM + SECTS.
To change the active window, press the Change

window soft key.
Inserting a structuring block in the (left) program

window
U
Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted.

U Press the INSERT SECTION soft key or the * key on
the ASCII keyboard.
U
Enter the structuring text with the alphabetic

keyboard.
If necessary, change the structure depth with the soft

key.
Selecting blocks in the program structure

window
If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by
block, the TNC at the same time automatically moves the
corresponding NC blocks in the program window. This way you can
quickly skip large program sections.
152
4.3 Integrated Pocket Calculator
4.3 Integrated Pocket Calculator

Operation
The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic
mathematical functions.
U
U
Use the CALC key to show and hide the on-line pocket calculator.
The calculator is operated with short commands through the
alphabetic keyboard. The commands are shown in a special color in
the calculator window
Mathematical function
Command (key)
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Arc sine
AS
Arc cosine
AC
Arc tangent
AT
Powers
Square root
Inversion
Calculations in parentheses
()
Pi (3.14159265359)
Display result
To transfer the calculated value into the program

U Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated
value is to be transferred
U Superimpose the on-line calculator by pressing the CALC key and
perform the desired calculation
U Press the actual-position-capture key for the TNC to transfer the
calculated value into the active input box and to close the calculator
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
153
4.4 Programming Graphics

Generating / not generating graphics during
programming
While you are writing the part program, you can have the TNC
generate a 2-D pencil-trace graphic of the programmed contour.
U
To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left

and graphics to the right, press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PGM +
GRAPHICS soft key.
U Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON. While you are
entering the program lines, the TNC generates each
path contour you program in the graphics window in
the right screen half.
If you do not wish to have the TNC generate graphics during

programming, set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF.
Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active, graphics are not generated for
program section repeats.
Generating a graphic for an existing program

U
Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the
graphic to be generated, or press GOTO and enter the desired block
number.
U To generate graphics, press the RESET + START soft
key.
Additional functions:
Function
Soft key
Generate a complete graphic

Generate programming graphic blockwise
Generate a complete graphic or complete it after
RESET + START.
Stop the programming graphics. This soft key
only appears while the TNC is generating the
interactive graphics.
Redraw the programming graphics, for example
if lines were deleted by intersections
The programming graphics does not account for tilting

functions; in such cases the TNC generates an error
message (if applicable).
154
Block number display ON/OFF

U
Shift the soft-key row: see figure.
To show block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to SHOW.
To hide block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to OMIT.
Erasing the graphic

U
Shift the soft-key row: see figure.
Erase graphic: Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key.
Magnifying or reducing a detail

You can select the graphics display. by selecting a detail with the
frame overlay. You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail.
U
Select the soft-key row for detail magnification/reduction (second

row, see figure).
The following functions are available:

Function
Soft key
Show and move the frame overlay. Press and

hold the desired soft key to move the frame
overlay
Reduce the frame overlaypress and hold the
soft key to reduce the detail
Enlarge the frame overlaypress and hold the
soft key to magnify the detail
U
Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL

soft key.
With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key, you can restore the original
section.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
155
4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function)
4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2

Function)
Function
Use the 3-D line graphics to have the TNC show the programmed
traverse paths in three dimensions. A powerful zoom function is
available for recognizing details quickly.
You should especially use the 3-D line graphics to inspect programs
created externally for irregularities before machining, in order to avoid
undesirable traces of the machining process on the workpiece. Such
traces of machining can occur when points are output incorrectly by
the postprocessor.
In order to find the error location quickly, the TNC shows the currently
active block of the 3-D line graphics in a different color in the left
window (default setting: red).
You can use the 3-D line graphics in Split-Screen mode or in FullScreen mode:
U
U
To show program blocks to the left and 3-D line graphics to the right,
press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PROGRAM + 3D LINES soft key.
To show the 3-D line graphics on the entire screen, press the SPLIT
SCREEN key and 3D LINES soft key.
Functions of the 3-D line graphics

Function
Soft key
Show and move the zoom frame up. Press and

hold the soft key to move the frame
Show and move the zoom frame down. Press
and hold the soft key to move the frame
Show and move the zoom frame to the left.
Press and hold the soft key to move the frame
Show and move the zoom to the right. Press and
hold the soft key to move the frame
Enlarge the frame overlaypress and hold the
soft key to magnify the detail
Reduce the frame overlaypress and hold the
soft key to reduce the detail
Reset detail magnification so that the workpiece
is displayed as it was programmed with BLK
FORM
Select the isolated detail
156
Function
Soft key
Rotate workpiece clockwise

Rotate workpiece counterclockwise
Tilt workpiece backward
Tilt workpiece forward
Magnify the graphic stepwise. If the view is
magnified, the TNC shows the letter Z in the
footer of the graphic window.
Reduce the graphic stepwise. If the view is
reduced, the TNC shows the letter Z in the footer
of the graphic window.
Show workpiece at original size
Show workpiece in the last active view
Show/hide programmed end points with a dot on
the line
Do or do not highlight the selected NC block of
the 3-D line graphics in the left window
Do or do not show block numbers
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
157
You can also use the mouse with the 3-D line graphics. The following
U
U
U
In order to rotate the wire model shown in three dimensions: Hold

the right mouse button down and move the mouse. The TNC
displays a coordinate system showing the currently active
orientation of the workpiece. After you release the right mouse
button, the TNC orients the workpiece to the defined orientation
In order to shift the wire model shown: Hold the center mouse
button or the wheel button down and move the mouse. The TNC
shifts the workpiece in the corresponding direction. After you
release the center mouse button, the TNC shifts the workpiece to
the defined position
In order to zoom in on a certain area with the mouse: Draw a
rectangular zoom area while holding the left mouse button down.
You can shift the zoom area by moving the mouse horizontally and
vertically as required. After you release the left mouse button, the
TNC zooms in on the defined area of the workpiece
In order to quickly zoom in and out with the mouse: Rotate the
wheel button forward or backward
Double-click with the right mouse button: Select standard view
Highlighting NC blocks in the graphics

U
To highlight the NC block selected in the left window

in the 3-D line graphics in the right window, set the
MARK THIS ELEMENT OFF / ON soft key to ON.
To not highlight the NC block selected in the left

window in the 3-D line graphics in the right window,
set the MARK THIS ELEMENT OFF / ON soft key to
OFF.
Block number display ON/OFF

U
To show block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to SHOW.
To hide block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to OMIT.
Erasing the graphic
158
Erase graphic: Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key.
4.6 Immediate Help for NC Error Messages
4.6 Immediate Help for NC Error

Messages
Displaying error messages
The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects
problems such as
Incorrect data input
Logical errors in the program
Contour elements that are impossible to machine
Incorrect use of touch probes
An error message that contains a program block number was caused
by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block. The TNC
error messages can be canceled with the CE key, after the cause of
the error has been removed. Error messages causing a control crash
must be acknowledged by pressing the END key. The TNC will restart.
If you require more information on a particular error message, press
the HELP key. A pop-up window then appears, in which the cause of
the error is explained and suggestions are made for correcting the
error.
Display HELP
U
To display Help, press the HELP key.
Read the cause of error and any suggestions for

possible remedies. The TNC may show additional
information that can be helpful to trained
HEIDENHAIN personnel during troubleshooting.
Close the Help window with the CE key, thus
canceling the error message.
Remove the cause of the error as described in the

Help window.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
159
4.7 List of All Current Error Messages
4.7 List of All Current Error

Messages
Function
With this function you can show a pop-up window in which the TNC
shows all current error messages. The TNC shows errors both from
the NC as well as those from the machine tool builder.
Show error list

You can call the list as soon as at least one error message is present:
U
To display the list, press the ERR key
You can select one of the current error messages with

the arrow keys
With the CE key or the DEL key you can delete the
error message from the pop-up window momentarily
selected. When you delete the last error message,
the pop-up window closes as well
To close the pop-up window, press the ERR key again.

Current error messages are retained
Parallel to the error list you can also view the respective
help text in a separate window: Press the HELP key.
160
Window contents
Column
Meaning
Number
Error number (1: no error number defined),

issued by HEIDENHAIN or your machine tool
builder
Class
Error class. Defines how the TNC processes

this error.
ERROR
Collective error class for errors that can
cause various error reactions depending on
the condition of the machine or the active
operating mode)
FEED HOLD
The feed-rate release is canceled
PGM HOLD
The program run is interrupted (the controlin-operation symbol blinks)
PGM ABORT
The program run is interrupted (INTERNAL
STOP)
EMERG. STOP
EMERGENCY STOP is set off
RESET
TNC executes a system restart
WARNING
Warning message, program run resumes
INFO
Info message, program run resumes
Group
Group. Specifies from which section of the

operating system software the error message
was generated
OPERATING
PROGRAMMING
PLC
GENERAL
Error message
Respective error text displayed by the TNC
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
161
Calling the TNCguide help system

You can call the TNCs help system via soft key. Immediately the help
system shows you the same error explanation that you receive by
pressing the HELP soft key.
If your machine manufacturer also provides a help
system, the TNC shows an additional MACHINE
MANUFACTURER soft key with which you can call this
separate help system. There you will find further, more
detailed information on the error message concerned.
162
Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages.
Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages, if

available.
Generating service files

You can use this function to save all files relevant to service purposes
in a ZIP file. The appropriate data from the NC and PLC are saved by
the TNC in the file TNC:\service\service<xxxxxxxx>.zip. The TNC
determines the name of the file automatically. The character string
<xxxxxxxx> clearly indicates the system time.
The following possibilities exist for generating a service file:
By pressing the SAVE SERVICE FILES soft key after you have
pressed the ERR key
Externally via the data transmission software TNCremoNT
If the NC software crashes due to a serious error, the TNC
automatically generates a service file
In addition, your machine tool builder can have service files be
generated automatically for PLC error messages
The following data (and other information) is saved in the service file:
Log
PLC log
Selected files (*.H/*.I/*.T/*.TCH/*.D) of all operating modes
*.SYS files
Machine parameters
Information and log files of the operating system (can be partially
activated via MP7691)
Contents of PLC memory
NC macros defined in PLC:\NCMACRO.SYS
Information about the hardware
In addition, the service department can help you save the control file
TNC:\service\userfiles.sys in ASCII format. The TNC will then
include the data defined there in the ZIP file.
The service file contains all NC data needed for
troubleshooting. By passing on the service file you declare
your consent to your machine tool builder or DR.
JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH to use these data for
diagnostic purposes.
The maximum size of a service file is 40 MB
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
163
4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help

System TNCguide (FCL3
Function)
Function
The TNCguide help system is only available if your control
hardware has as least 256 MB RAM and FCL3 is enabled.
The TNCguide context-sensitive help system includes the user

documentation in HTML format. The TNCguide is called with the
HELP key, and the TNC often immediately displays the information
specific to the condition from which the help was called
(context-sensitive call). Even if you are editing an NC block and press
the HELP key, you are usually brought to the exact place in the
documentation that describes the corresponding function.
The English and German documentation is shipped as standard with
each NC software level. HEIDENHAIN provides the remaining
conversational languages for cost-free download as soon as the
respective translations are available (see Downloading current help
files on page 169).
The TNC always tries to start the TNCguide in the
language that you have selected as the conversational
language on your TNC. If the files with this language are
not yet available on your TNC, it automatically opens the
English version.
The following user documentation is available in the TNCguide:
Conversational Programming Users Manual (BHBKlartext.chm)
DIN/ISO Users Manual (BHBIso.chm)
Users Manual for Cycles (BHBcycles.chm)
Users Manual for smarT.NC (BHBSmart.chm) (same format as a
Pilot)
List of All Error Messages (errors.chm)
In addition, the main.chm book file is available, with the contents
of all existing .chm files.
As an option, your machine tool builder can embed
machine-specific documentation in the TNCguide. These
documents then appear as a separate book in the
main.chm file.
164
Working with the TNCguide

Calling the TNCguide
There are several ways to start the TNCguide:
U
U
U
Press the HELP key if the TNC is not already showing an error
message
Click the help symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand,
then click the appropriate soft keys
Use the file manager to open a help file (.chm file). The TNC can
open any .chm file, even if it is not saved on the TNCs hard disk
If one or more error messages are waiting for your
attention, the TNC shows the help directly associated
with the error messages. To start the TNCguide, you first
have to acknowledge all error messages.
When the help system is called on the programming
station or the dual-processor version, the TNC starts the
internally defined standard browser (usually the Internet
Explorer), and on the single-processor version a browser
adapted by HEIDENHAIN.
For many soft keys there is a context-sensitive call through which you
can go directly to the description of the soft keys function. This
functionality requires using a mouse. Proceed as follows:
U
Select the soft-key row containing the desired soft key

Click with the mouse on the help symbol that the TNC displays just
above the soft-key row: The mouse pointer turns into a question
mark
U Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an
explanation, and click: The TNC opens the TNCguide. If no specific
part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key, the TNC opens
the book file main.chm, in which you can use the search function
or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually
Even if you are editing an NC block, context-sensitive help is available:
U
U
U
U
Select any NC block

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the block
Press the HELP key: The TNC starts the help system and shows a
description for the active function (does not apply to miscellaneous
functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool
builder)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
165
Navigating in the TNCguide

Its easiest to use the mouse to navigate in the TNCguide. A table of
contents appears on the left side of the screen. By clicking the
rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections, and by
clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages. It is
operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer.
Linked text positions (cross references) are shown underlined and in
blue. Clicking the link opens the associated page.
Of course you can also operate the TNCguide through keys and soft
keys. The following table contains an overview of the corresponding
key functions.
Function
Soft key
If the table of contents at left is active:

Select the entry above it or below it
If the text window at right is active:
Move the page downward or upward if texts or
graphics are not shown completely
Open a branch of the table of contents. If the
branch is at its end, jump into the window at
right
No function
Close a branch of the table of contents
No function
Use the cursor key to show the selected page
If the cursor is on a link, jump to the linked page
Switch the tab between the display of the table
of contents, display of the subject index, and
the full-text search function and switching to
the screen half at right
Jump back to the window at left
Select the entry above it or below it
Jump to the next link
Select the page last shown
Page forward if you have used the select page
last shown function.
166
Function
Soft key
Move up by one page

Move down by one page
Display or hide table of contents
Switch between full-screen display and reduced
display. With the reduced display you can see
some of the rest of the TNC window
The focus is switched internally to the TNC
application so that you can operate the control
when the TNCguide is open. If the full screen is
active, the TNC reduces the window size
automatically before the change of focus
Close the TNCguide
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
167
Subject index
The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject
index (Index tab). You can select them directly by mouse or with the
cursor keys.
The left side is active.
U
Select the Index tab
Activate the Keyword input field
Enter the word for the desired subject and the TNC
synchronizes the index and creates a list in which you
can find the subject more easily, or
Use the arrow key to highlight the desired keyword.
Use the ENT key to call the information on the

selected keyword.
Full-text search
In the Find tab you can search the entire TNCguide for a specific word.
The left side is active.
U
Select the Find tab
Activate the Find: input field
Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key:
the TNC lists all sources containing the word
Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source
Press the ENT key to go to the selected source
The full-text search only works for single words.

If you activate the Search only in titles function (by
mouse or by using the cursor and the space key), the TNC
searches only through headings and ignores the body
text.
168
Downloading current help files

Youll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN
home page www.heidenhain.de under:
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
Services and Documentation

Documentation / Information
User Documentation
TNCguide
Select the desired language, for example English: You will see a ZIP
file with the appropriate help files
TNC Controls
TNC 500 Series
Desired NC software number, e.g. iTNC 530 (340 49x-06)
Select the desired language version from the Online Help
(TNCguide) table
Download the ZIP file and unzip it
Move the unzipped CHM files to the TNC in the TNC:\tncguide\en
directory or into the respective language subdirectory (see also the
following table)
If you want to use TNCremoNT to transfer the CHM files
to the TNC, then in the
Extras>Configuration>Mode>Transfer in binary
format menu item you have to enter the extension .CHM.
Language
TNC directory
German
TNC:\tncguide\de
English
TNC:\tncguide\en
Czech
TNC:\tncguide\cs
French
TNC:\tncguide\fr
Italian
TNC:\tncguide\it
Spanish
TNC:\tncguide\es
Portuguese
TNC:\tncguide\pt
Swedish
TNC:\tncguide\sv
Danish
TNC:\tncguide\da
Finnish
TNC:\tncguide\fi
Dutch
TNC:\tncguide\nl
Polish
TNC:\tncguide\pl
Hungarian
TNC:\tncguide\hu
Russian
TNC:\tncguide\ru
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
169
Language
TNC directory
Chinese (simplified)
TNC:\tncguide\zh
Chinese (traditional)
TNC:\tncguide\zh-tw
Slovenian (software option)
TNC:\tncguide\sl
Norwegian
TNC:\tncguide\no
Slovak
TNC:\tncguide\sk
Latvian
TNC:\tncguide\lv
Korean
TNC:\tncguide\kr
Estonian
TNC:\tncguide\et
Turkish
TNC:\tncguide\tr
Romanian
TNC:\tncguide\ro
Lithuanian
TNC:\tncguide\lt
170
Programming: Tools
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data

Feed rate F
The feed rate F is the speed (in millimeters per minute or inches per
minute) at which the tool center point moves. The maximum feed
rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine
parameters.
Input
You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every
positioning block (see Creating the program blocks with the path
function keys on page 218). In millimeter-programs you enter the
feed rate in mm/min, and in inch-programs, for reasons of resolution,
in 1/10 inch/min.
S
S
Y
F
Rapid traverse
If you wish to program rapid traverse, enter F MAX. To enter FMAX,
press the ENT key or the FMAX soft key when the dialog question
FEED RATE F = ? appears on the control's screen.
To move your machine at rapid traverse, you can also
program the corresponding numerical value, e.g. F30000.
Unlike FMAX, this rapid traverse remains in effect not only
in the individual block but in all blocks until you program a
new feed rate.
Duration of effect
A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block
with a different feed rate is reached. FMAX is only effective in the block
in which it is programmed. After the block with FMAX is executed, the
feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value.
Changing during program run
You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed-rate
override knob F.
172
Programming: Tools
Spindle speed S
The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute (rpm) in a
TOOL CALL block. Instead, you can also define the cutting speed Vc in
m/min.
Programmed change
In the part program, you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL
block by entering the spindle speed only:
U
To program a tool call, press the TOOL CALL key.
Ignore the dialog question for Tool number ? with the

NO ENT key.
Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis

X/Y/Z ? with the NO ENT key.
Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question

Spindle speed S= ?, and confirm with END, or switch
via the VC soft key to entry of the cutting speed.
Changing during program run

You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindlespeed override knob S.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
173
5.2 Tool Data
5.2 Tool Data

Requirements for tool compensation
You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are
dimensioned in the workpiece drawing. To allow the TNC to calculate
the tool center pathi.e. the tool compensationyou must also enter
the length and radius of each tool you are using.
Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL
DEF or separately in a tool table. In a tool table, you can also enter
additional data for the specific tool. The TNC will consider all the data
entered for the tool when executing the part program.
12
13
18
Tool numbers and tool names

R
Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 30000. If you are

working with tool tables, you can also enter a tool name for each tool.
Tool names can have up to 32 characters.
The tool number 0 is automatically defined as the zero tool with the
length L=0 and the radius R=0. In tool tables, tool T0 should also be
defined with L=0 and R=0.
Tool length L
You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value based
on the tool reference point. The entire tool length is essential for the
TNC in order to perform numerous functions involving multi-axis
machining.
Z
L3
Tool radius R
You can enter the tool radius R directly.
L1
L2
174
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Delta values for lengths and radii

Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool.
A positive delta value describes a tool oversize (DL, DR, DR2>0). If you
are programming the machining data with an allowance, enter the
oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program.
A negative delta value describes a tool undersize (DL, DR, DR2<0). An

undersize is entered in the tool table for wear.
L
Delta values are usually entered as numerical values. In a TOOL CALL

block, you can also assign the values to Q parameters.
DR>0
Input range: You can enter a delta value with up to 99.999 mm.
Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical
representation of the tool. The representation of the
workpiece remains the same in the simulation.
DR<0
DL<0
DL>0
Delta values from the TOOL CALL block change the

represented size of the workpiece during the simulation.
The simulated tool size remains the same.
Entering tool data into the program

The number, length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL
DEF block of the part program.
U
To select tool definition, press the TOOL DEF key.

U Tool number: Each tool is uniquely identified by its tool
number.
U
Tool length: Compensation value for the tool length
Tool radius: Compensation value for the tool radius
In the programming dialog, you can transfer the value for

tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by
pressing the desired axis soft key.
Example
4 TOOL DEF 5 L+10 R+5
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
175
5.2 Tool Data
Entering tool data in the table

You can define and store up to 30 000 tools and their tool data in a tool
table. In Machine Parameter 7260, you can define how many tools are
to be stored by the TNC when a new table is set up. Also see the
Editing Functions later in this chapter. In order to be able to assign
various compensation data to a tool (indexing the tool number),
MP7262 must not be equal to 0.
You must use tool tables if
you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than
one length compensation value (see page 183)
your machine tool has an automatic tool changer
you want to measure tools automatically with the TT 130 touch
probe (see the Touch Probe Cycles Users Manual)
you want to rough-mill the contour with Cycle 22, (see User's
Manual for Cycles, ROUGH-OUT)
you want to work with Cycles 251 to 254 (see User's Manual for
Cycles, Cycles 251 to 254)
you want to work with automatic cutting data calculations.
Tool table: Standard tool data
Abbr.
Inputs
Dialog
Number by which the tool is called in the program (e.g. 5,

indexed: 5.2).
NAME
Name by which you call the tool in the program.
Tool name?
Input range: 32 characters max., only capital letters, no space

characters.
When transferring tool tables to older software versions of the
iTNC 530 or to older TNC controls, you must make sure that tool
names are not longer than 16 characters, because otherwise they
will be truncated accordingly by the TNC when read in. This can
lead to errors in connection with the Replacement Tool function.
L
Compensation value for tool length L
Tool length?
Input range in mm: -99999.9999 to +99999.9999

Input range in inches: -3936.9999 to +3936.9999
R
Compensation value for the tool radius R
Tool radius R?

R2
Tool radius 2 for toroid cutters (only for 3-D radius compensation
or graphical representation of a machining operation with
spherical or toroid cutters)
Tool radius R2?

176
Programming: Tools
Inputs
Dialog
DL
Delta value for tool length L.
Tool length oversize?
5.2 Tool Data
Abbr.

DR
Delta value for tool radius R.
Tool radius oversize?

DR2
Delta value for tool radius R2.
Tool radius oversize R2?

LCUTS
Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22.
Tooth length in the tool axis?
Input range in mm: 0 to +99999.9999

Input range in inches: 0 to +3936.9999
ANGLE
Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge-cut in

Cycles 22 and 208 and 25x.
Maximum plunge angle?
Input range: 0 to 90
TL
Set tool lock (TL: for Tool Locked)

Input range: L or space character
RT
Number of a replacement tool, if available (RT: for Replacement

Tool; see also TIME2).
Tool locked?
Yes = ENT / No = NO ENT
Replacement tool?

TIME1
Maximum tool life in minutes. This function can vary depending

on the individual machine tool. Your machine manual provides
more information.
Maximum tool age?
Input range: 0 to 9999 minutes

TIME2
Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL: If the current tool
age exceeds this value, the TNC changes the tool during the next
TOOL CALL (see also CUR.TIME).
Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL?

CUR.TIME
Current age of the tool in minutes: The TNC automatically counts

the current tool life (CUR.TIME). A starting value can be entered for
used tools.
Current tool life?

DOC
Comment on the tool.
Tool description?
Input range: 16 characters max.

PLC
Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC.
PLC status?
Input range: 8 characters bit-coded
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
177
5.2 Tool Data
Abbr.
Inputs
Dialog
PLC-VAL
Value of this tool that is to be sent to the PLC.
PLC value?
Input range: -99999.9999 to +99999.9999

PTYP
Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table.
Tool type for pocket table?
Input range: 0 to +99

NMAX
Limits the spindle speed for this tool. The programmed value is
monitored (error message) as well as an increase in the shaft
speed via the potentiometer. Function inactive: Enter
Maximum speed [rpm]?
Input range: 0 to +99999, if function not active: enter

LIFTOFF
Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the

direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop or power failure in
order to avoid leaving dwell marks on the contour. If Y is entered,
the TNC retracts the tool from the contour by up to 30 mm,
provided that this function was activated in the NC program with
M148 (see Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC
stop: M148 on page 387)
Retract tool Y/N ?
Input : Y and N
P1 ... P3
Machine-dependent function: Transfer of a value to the PLC.

Refer to your machine manual
Value?
Input range: -99999.9999 to +99999.9999

KINEMATIC
Machine-dependent function: Kinematics description for vertical

milling heads, which the TNC adds to the active machine
kinematics. Assign available kinematic descriptions by using the
ASSIGN KINEMATICS soft key (see also Tool-carrier
kinematics on page 186)
Additional kinematic description?

T-ANGLE
Point angle of the tool. Is used by the Centering cycle (Cycle 240)
in order to calculate the centering depth from the diameter entry
Point angle (Type DRILL+CSINK)?
Input range: -180 to +180

PITCH
Thread pitch of the tool (currently without function)
Thread pitch (only type TAP)?

AFC
Control setting for the adaptive feed control AFC that you have
defined in the NAME column of the AFC.TAB table. Apply the
feedback-control strategy with the ASSIGN AFC CONTROL
SETTING soft key (3rd soft-key row)
Feedback-control strategy?
178
Programming: Tools
Inputs
Dialog
DR2TABLE
3D ToolComp software option: Enter the name of the

compensation value table from which the TNC is to take the
angle-dependent delta radius values DR2 (see also 3-D tool radius
compensation depending on the tools contact angle (3DToolComp software option) on page 515)
Compensation-value table?
LAST_USE
Date and time at which the TNC inserted the tool for the last time
via TOOL CALL.
Date/time of last tool call?
5.2 Tool Data
Abbr.
Input range: 16 characters max., format internally specified: Date

= yyyy.mm.dd, time = hh.mm
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
179
5.2 Tool Data
Tool table: Tool data required for automatic tool measurement

For a description of the cycles for automatic tool
measurement, see the User's Manual for Cycle
Programming.
Abbr.
Inputs
Dialog
CUT
Number of teeth (99 teeth maximum)
Number of teeth?
LTOL
Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection. If the

entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
Wear tolerance: length?

RTOL
Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection. If the

entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Wear tolerance: radius?

R2TOL
Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection. If

the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Wear tolerance: Radius 2?

DIRECT.
Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation
Cutting direction (M3 = )?
TT:R-OFFS
Tool length measurement: Tool offset between stylus center and

tool center. Preset value: Tool radius R (NO ENT means R).
Tool offset: radius?

TT:L-OFFS
Radius measurement: tool offset in addition to MP6530 between

upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool. Default: 0
Tool offset: length?

180
Programming: Tools
Inputs
Dialog
LBREAK
Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection. If

Breakage tolerance: length?
5.2 Tool Data
Abbr.
Input range in mm: 0 to 3.2767

RBREAK
Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection. If

Breakage tolerance: radius?
Input range in mm: 0 to 0.9999

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
181
5.2 Tool Data
Tool table: Tool data for automatic speed/feed rate calculation

Abbr.
Inputs
Dialog
TYPE
Tool type: Press the ASSIGN TYPE soft key (3rd soft-key row); the
TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of
tool. Functions are currently only assigned to the DRILL and MILL
tool types
Tool type?
TMAT
Tool material: Press the ASSIGN MATERIAL soft key (3rd soft-key
row): The TNC superimposes a window where you can select the
type of cutting material
Tool material?

CDT
Cutting data table: Press the SELECT CDT soft key (3rd soft-key
row): The TNC displays a pop-up window where you can select a
cutting data table
Name of cutting data table?

Tool table: Tool data for 3-D touch trigger probe (only when bit 1
is set in MP7411 = 1, also see the Touch Probe Cycles Manual)
Abbr.
Inputs
Dialog
CAL-OF1
During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the center

misalignment in the reference axis of the 3-D probe, if a tool
number is indicated in the calibration menu
Center misalignmt. in ref. axis?

CAL-OF2
During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the center

misalignment in the minor axis of the 3-D probe, if a tool number
is indicated in the calibration menu
Center misalignment minor axis?

CAL-ANG
During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the spindle angle
at which the 3-D probe was calibrated, if a tool number is
indicated in the calibration menu
Spindle angle for calibration?
Input range: 360 to +360
182
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Editing tool tables

The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is
designated as TOOL.T. You can only edit TOOL.T in one of the
machine operating modes. Other tool tables that are to be archived or
used for test runs are given different file names with the extension .T.
To open the tool table TOOL.T:
U
Select any machine operating mode.

U Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool
table
U
Set the EDIT soft key to ON.
To open any other tool table

U
Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation.

U Call the file manager.
U
Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file

type.
To show type .T files, press the SHOW .T soft key.
Select a file or enter a new file name. Conclude your

entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key.
When you have opened the tool table, you can edit the tool data by
moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow
keys or the soft keys. You can overwrite the stored values, or enter
new values at any position. The available editing functions are
illustrated in the table below.
If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen
page, the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the >> or <<
symbols.
Editing functions for tool tables
Soft key
Select beginning of table

Select end of table
Select previous page in table
Select next page in table
Look for the tool name in the table
Show tool information in columns or show all
information on one tool on one screen page
Move to beginning of line
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
183
5.2 Tool Data
Editing functions for tool tables
Soft key
Move to end of line

Copy highlighted field
Insert copied field
Add the entered number of lines (tools) at the
end of the table
Insert a line for the indexed tool number after the
active line. The function is only active if you are
permitted to store multiple compensation data
for a tool (MP7262 not equal to 0). The TNC
inserts a copy of the tool data after the last
available index and increases the index by 1.
Application: e.g. stepped drill with more than one
length compensation value
Delete current line (tool): The TNC will then
delete the content of the line in the table. If the
tool to be deleted has been entered in the pocket
table, the behavior of this function depends on
MP 7263 (see List of general user parameters
on page 681)
Display / Do not display pocket numbers
Display all tools / only those tools that are stored
in the pocket table
Search tool table for tool name of selected tool.
The TNC shows the list with identical names in a
pop-up window if it finds a tool with an identical
name. Double-click the relevant tool in the
window or select it using the arrow keys, confirm
with the ENT key and the TNC highlights the
selected tool
Leaving the tool table
U Call the file manager and select a file of a different type, such as a
part program
184
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Additional notes on tool tables

MP7266.x defines which data can be entered in the tool table and in
which sequence the data is displayed.
You can overwrite individual columns or lines of a tool
table with the contents of another file. Prerequisites:
The target file must exist
The file to be copied must contain only the columns (or
lines) you want to replace
To copy individual columns or lines, press the REPLACE
FIELDS soft key (see Copying a single file on page 126).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
185
5.2 Tool Data
Tool-carrier kinematics
The TNC must be adapted by your machine tool builder to
be able to account for the tool carrier kinematics. In
particular, your machine tool builder must provide the
corresponding carrier kinematics or parameterizable tool
carriers. Refer to your machine manual.
In the KINEMATIC column of the tool table TOOL.T you can assign each
tool with an additional tool carrier kinematic description. In the
simplest case, this carrier kinematics can simulate the taper shank in
order to include it in the dynamic collision monitoring. Also, you can
use this function to very easily integrate angle heads into the machine
kinematic description.
HEIDENHAIN provides tool-carrier kinematics
for HEIDENHAIN touch probes. If required, please
contact HEIDENHAIN.
Assigning the tool-carrier kinematics
Follow the procedure below to assign carrier kinematics to a tool:
U
Select any machine operating mode

U Select the tool table: Press the TOOL TABLE soft key
U
Set the EDIT soft key to ON
Select the last soft key row.
Show the list of available kinematics: The TNC

displays all tool holder kinematics (.TAB files) and all
tool-holder kinematics you have already
parameterized (.CFX files). In addition, the selection
window shows a preview of the currently active
carrier kinematics
Select the desired kinematics configuration with the

arrow keys and confirm your selection with the OK
key.
Please also note the information on tool-carrier

management in combination with Dynamic Collision
Monitoring (DCM): See Tool Holder Management (DCM
Software Option) on page 413.
186
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Using an external PC to overwrite individual tool

data
The HEIDENHAIN data transfer software TNCremoNT provides an
especially convenient way to use an external PC to overwrite tool data
(see Software for data transfer on page 649). This applies when you
measure tool data on an external tool presetter and then want to
transfer the data to the TNC. Follow this procedure:
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
Copy the tool table TOOL.T to the TNC, for example to TST.T
Start the data transfer software TNCremoNT on the PC
Establish a connection with the TNC
Transfer the copied tool table TST.T to the PC
Use any text editor to reduce TST.T to the lines and columns to be
changed (see figure). Make sure that the header is not changed and
the data is always flush in the column. The tool number (column T)
need not be consecutive
In TNCremoNT, select the menu item <Extras> and <TNCcmd>:
This starts TNCcmd
To transfer TST.T to the TNC, enter the following command and
confirm with the return key (see figure):
put tst.t tool.t /m
During transfer, only the tool data defined in the subfile
(e.g. TST.T) is overwritten. All other tool data of the table
TOOL.T remains unchanged.
The procedure for copying tool tables using the TNC file
manager is described in the section on file management
(see Copying a table on page 128).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
187
5.2 Tool Data
Pocket table for tool changer

The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of
the pocket table to the requirements of your machine. The
machine tool manual provides further information.
For automatic tool changing you need the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH.
The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any file names. To
activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it in
the file management of a Program Run mode of operation (status M).
In order to be able to manage various magazines in a tool-pocket table
(indexing the pocket number), Machine Parameters 7261.0 to 7261.3
must not be equal to 0.
The TNC can control up to 9999 magazine pockets in the pocket
table.
Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode
U Select the tool table: Press the TOOL TABLE soft key
188
To select the pocket table, press the POCKET TABLE

soft key.
Set the EDIT soft key to ON. On your machine this

might not be necessary or even possible. Refer to
your machine manual.
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Selecting a pocket table in the Programming and

Editing operating mode
U Call the file manager
U
Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file

type.
Press the soft key TCH FILES (second soft-key row) to

show files of the type .TCH.
Select a file or enter a new file name. Conclude your

entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key
Abbr.
Inputs
Dialog
Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine
Tool number
Tool number?
ST
Special Tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool
magazine. If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its
actual pocket, these additional pockets need to be locked in column L
(status L)
Special tool?
Fixed tool number. The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool
magazine
Fixed pocket? Yes = ENT /

No = NO ENT
Locked pocket (see also column ST)
Pocket locked Yes = ENT /

No = NO ENT
PLC
Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC
PLC status?
TNAME
Display of the tool name from TOOL.T
DOC
Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL.T
PTYP
Tool type. Function is defined by the machine tool builder. The machine tool
documentation provides further information.
Tool type for pocket

table?
P1 ... P5
Function is defined by the machine tool builder. The machine tool

Value?
RSV
Pocket reservation for box magazines
Pocket reserv.: Yes = ENT

/ No = NOENT
LOCKED_ABOVE
Box magazine: Lock the pocket above
Lock the pocket above?
LOCKED_BELOW
Box magazine: Lock the pocket below
Lock the pocket below?
LOCKED_LEFT
Box magazine: Lock the pocket at left
Lock the pocket at left?
LOCKED_RIGHT
Box magazine: Lock the pocket at right
Lock the pocket at right?
S1 ... S5
Function is defined by the machine tool builder. The machine tool

Value?
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
189
5.2 Tool Data
Editing functions for pocket tables
Soft key

Select end of table
Reset pocket table
Reset tool number column T
Go to beginning of next line
Reset column to original state. Only applies to
the columns RSV, LOCKED_ABOVE, LOCKED_BELOW,
LOCKED_LEFT and LOCKED_RIGHT
190
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Calling tool data

A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following
data:
U
Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key.
U Tool number: Enter the number or name of the tool.
The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block
or in the tool table. Press the TOOL NAME soft key to
enter the name. The TNC automatically places the
tool name in quotation marks. The tool name always
refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL.T. If
you wish to call a tool with other compensation
values, also enter the index you defined in the tool
table after the decimal point. There is a SELECT soft
key for calling a window from which you can select a
tool defined in the tool table TOOL.T directly without
having to enter the number or name: See also
Editing tool data in the selection window on page
192.
U
Working spindle axis X/Y/Z: Enter the tool axis.
Spindle speed S: Enter the spindle speed directly or

allow the TNC to calculate the spindle speed if you are
working with cutting data tables. Press the
S CALCULATE AUTOMAT. soft key. The TNC limits
the spindle speed to the maximum value set in MP
3515. Alternatively, you can define the cutting speed
Vc in m/min. Press the VC soft key.
Feed rate F: Enter the feed rate directly or allow the

TNC to calculate the feed rate if you are working with
cutting data tables. Press the F CALCULATE
AUTOMAT. soft key. The TNC limits the feed rate to
the maximum feed rate of the slowest axis (set in
MP1010). F is effective until you program a new feed
rate in a positioning or TOOL CALL block.
Tool length oversize DL: Enter the delta value for

the tool length.
Tool radius oversize DR: Enter the delta value for

the tool radius.
Tool radius oversize DR2: Enter the delta value for

the tool radius 2.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
191
5.2 Tool Data
Editing tool data in the selection window

In the pop-up window for tool selection you can also edit the displayed
tool data:
U
U
U
U
Use the arrow keys to select the line and then the column of the
value to be edited: The light-blue background marks the editable
field
Set the EDIT soft key to ON, enter the desired value and confirm
with the ENT key
If needed, select further columns and repeat the described
procedure
Press the ENT key to load the selected tool into the program
192
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Search for tool names in the selection window

In the pop-up window for tool selection you can search for tool names:
U
U
Press the FIND soft key

Enter the desired tool name and confirm with the ENT key: The TNC
highlights the next line in which the tool name being searched for
occurs
Example: Tool call

Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 2500rpm
and a feed rate of 350mm/min. The tool length is to be programmed
with an oversize of 0.2mm, the tool radius 2 with an oversize of
0.05mm, and the tool radius with an undersize of 1mm.
20 TOOL CALL 5.2 Z S2500 F350 DL+0.2 DR-1 DR2+0.05
The character D preceding L and R designates a delta value.
Tool preselection with tool tables
If you are working with tool tables, use TOOL DEF to preselect the next
tool. Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter, or
type the tool name in quotation marks.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
193
5.2 Tool Data
Tool change
The tool change function can vary depending on the
individual machine tool. The machine tool manual
provides further information.
Tool change position
The tool change position must be approachable without collision. With
the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92, you can enter machinebased (rather than workpiece-based) coordinates for the tool change
position. If TOOL CALL 0 is programmed before the first tool call, the
TNC moves the tool spindle in the tool axis to a position that is
independent of the tool length.
Manual tool change
To change the tool manually, stop the spindle and move the tool to the
tool change position:
U
U
U
U
Move to the tool change position under program control.

Interrupt program run (see "Interrupting machining", page 629)
Change the tool.
Resume program run (see "Resuming program run after an
interruption", page 632)
Automatic tool change

If your machine tool has automatic tool changing capability, the
program run is not interrupted. When the TNC reaches a TOOL CALL it
replaces the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine.
194
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Automatic tool change if the tool life expires: M101

The function of M101 can vary depending on the individual
machine tool. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
An automatic tool change with active radius
compensation is not possible if an NC program is used on
your machine for the tool change. The machine tool
The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME2 expires
during program run. To use this miscellaneous function, activate M101
at the beginning of the program. M101 is reset with M102. When TIME1
is reached, the TNC merely places an internal marker that can be
evaluated via the PLC.
You enter the number of the replacement tool in the RT column of the
tool table. If no tool number is entered there, the TNC inserts a tool
that has the same name as the momentarily active one. The TNC
starts the search from the beginning of the tool table and inserts the
first tool it finds.
The tool is changed automatically
after the next NC block after expiration of the tool life, or
about one minute plus one NC block after tool life expires
(calculation is for a potentiometer setting of 100%)
If the tool life ends during an active M120 (look ahead), the
TNC waits to change the tool until after the block in which
you canceled the radius compensation.
The TNC does not execute any automatic tool change if it
is currently running a cycle. Exception: During the Pattern
Cycles 220 and 221 (circular hole pattern and linear
pattern) the TNC can execute an automatic tool change
between two machining positions, if required.
The TNC does not automatically change the tool as long
as a tool change program is running.
Caution: Danger to the workpiece and tool!

Switch off the automatic tool change with M102 if you are
working with special tools (e.g. side mill cutter) as the
TNC at first always moves the tool away from the
workpiece in tool axis direction.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
195
5.2 Tool Data
Prerequisites for standard NC blocks with radius compensation

RR, RL
The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the
original tool. If the radii are not equal, the TNC displays an error
message and does not replace the tool.
On NC programs without radius compensation the TNC does not
check the tool radius of the replacement tool during the change.
Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface-normal vectors and 3-D
compensation
See Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Software Option 2) on
page 508. The radius of the replacement tool can differ from the radius
of the original tool. The tool radius is not included in program blocks
transmitted from CAM systems. You can enter the delta value (DR)
either in the tool table or in the TOOL CALL block.
If DR is greater than zero, the TNC displays an error message and does
not replace the tool. You can suppress this message with the
M function M107, and reactivate it with M108.
196
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Tool usage test

The tool usage test function must be enabled by your
machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool
manual.
The following are prerequisites for a tool usage test:
Bit 2 of the machine parameter must be set to 7246=1
The machining timer must be active in the Test Run operating mode
A simulation of the plain language program must have been
completed in the Test Run mode
If there is no valid tool usage file available and the
machining time calculation is deactivated, then the TNC
creates a tool usage file with a default time of 10s for each
tool usage.
Settings for the tool usage test
To be able to influence the behavior of the tool usage test, a form is
available, which you can call as follows:
U
U
U
Select the Program Run, Single Block mode or the Program Run, Full
Sequence mode.
Press the Tool Usage soft key: The TNC shows a soft-key row with
functions for the usage test.
Press the SETTINGS soft key: The TNC displays the form with the
available settings.
You can define the following settings separately for Program Run,
Full Sequence / Single Block and the Test Run.
Do not generate tool-usage file setting
The TNC does not generate a tool usage file.
Generate tool-usage file once setting
The TNC generates a tool usage file once with the next NC start or
start of the simulation. Then the TNC automatically deactivates the
Do not generate tool-usage file mode to prevent the usage file
from being overwritten during further NC starts.
Generate new tool usage file after changes or as needed (basic
setting):
The TNC generates a tool usage file with every NC start or every
start of the test run. The setting ensures that the TNC also
generates a new tool-usage file after program changes.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
197
5.2 Tool Data
Applying the tool usage test

With the TOOL USAGE and TOOL USAGE TEST soft keys, you can
check before starting a program in a Program Run operating mode
whether the tools being used in the selected program have enough
service life remaining. Here the TNC compares the actual values for
service life in the tool table with the nominal values from the tool
requirement file.
After you have clicked the TOOL USAGE TEST soft key, the TNC
displays the results of the tool usage test in a pop-up window. Use the
CE key to close the pop-up window.
The TNC saves the usage times in a separate file with the extension
pgmname.H.T.DEP (see Changing the MOD setting for dependent
files on page 658). The generated tool usage file has the following
information:
Column
Meaning
TOKEN
TOOL: Tool usage time per TOOL CALL. The

entries are listed in chronological order.
TTOTAL: Total usage time of a tool
STOTAL: Call of a subprogram (including
cycles). The entries are listed in
chronological order.
TIMETOTAL: The total machining time of the
NC program is entered in the WTIME column.
In the PATH column the TNC saves the path
name of the corresponding NC programs.
The TIME column shows the sum of all TIME
entries (only when the spindle is on, and
without rapid traverse). The TNC sets all
other columns to 0.
TOOLFILE: In the PATH column, the TNC
saves the path name of the tool table with
which you conducted the Test Run. This
enables the TNC during the actual tool
usage test to detect whether you
performed the test run with the TOOL.T.
TNR
Tool number (1: No tool inserted yet)
IDX
Tool index
NAME
Tool name from the tool table
TIME
Tool-usage time in seconds (feed time)
WTIME
Tool-usage time in seconds (total usage time

between tool changes)
RAD
Tool radius R + Oversize of tool radius DR

from the tool table. The unit is 0.1 m.
198
Programming: Tools
Meaning
BLOCK
Block number in which the TOOL CALL block

was programmed
PATH
TOKEN = TOOL: Path name of the active main

program or subprogram
5.2 Tool Data
Column
TOKEN = STOTAL: Path name of the

subprogram
T
Tool number with tool index
OVRMAX
Maximum feed rate override that occurred

during machining. During test run, the TNC
enters the value 100 (%)
OVRMIN
Minimum feed rate override that occurred

during machining. During test run, the TNC
enters the value -1
NAMEPROG
0: The tool number is programmed

1: The tool name is programmed
There are two ways to run a tool usage test for a pallet file:
The highlight is on a pallet entry in the pallet file:
The TNC runs the tool usage test for the entire pallet.
The highlight is on a program entry in the pallet file:
The TNC runs the tool usage test for the selected program.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
199
5.2 Tool Data
Tool management (software option)

Tool management is a machine-dependent function,
which can be partly or completely deactivated. The
machine tool builder defines the exact range of functions,
so refer to your machine manual.
With the tool management, your machine tool builder can provide
many functions with regard to tool handling. Examples:
Easily readable and, if you desired, adaptable representation of the
tool data in fillable forms
Any description of the individual tool data in the new table view
Mixed representation of data from the tool table and the pocket
table
Fast sorting of all tool data by mouse
Use of graphic aids, e.g. color coding of tool or magazine status
Program-specific list of all available tools
Program-specific usage sequence of all tools
Copying and pasting of all tool data pertaining to a tool
Calling tool management
The tool management call can differ as described below;
refer to your machine manual!
200
Select the tool table: Press the TOOL TABLE soft key
Scroll through the soft-key row
Select the TOOL MANAGEMENT soft key: The TNC

goes into the new table view (see figure at right)
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
In the new view, the TNC presents all tool information in the following
four card registers:
Tools:
Tool specific information
Tool pockets:
Pocket-specific information
Tooling list:
List of all tools in the NC program that is selected in the Program
Run mode (only if you have already created a tool usage file, see
"Tool usage test", page 197). The TNC shows the tools missing in
the tooling list in the TOOL INFO column with the not defined dialog
marked in red
T usage order:
List of the sequence of all tools that are inserted in the program
selected in the Program Run mode (only if you have already made a
tool usage file, see "Tool usage test", page 197) The TNC shows the
tools missing in the usage order list in the TOOL INFO column with
the not defined dialog marked in red
You can edit the tool data only in the fillable form view,
which you can activate by pressing the FORM TOOL soft
key or the ENT key for the tool that is highlighted on the
screen.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
201
5.2 Tool Data
Operating the tool management

The tool management can be operated by mouse or with the keys and
soft keys:
Editing functions for tool management
Soft key

Select end of table
Call the fillable form view for the tool or magazine
pocket highlighted in the table. Alternative
function: Press the ENT key
Go to the next tab: Tools, Pockets, Tooling list,
T usage order
Search function (Find): Here you can select the
column to be searched and the search term via a
list or by entering it
Import tool data: Importing of tool data in CSV
format (see Import tool data on page 205)
Export tool data: Exporting of tool data in CSV
format (see Export the tool data on page 206)
Delete marked tool data: See Delete marked
tool data on page 207
Show programmed-tools column (if Pockets tab
is active)
Define the settings:
SORT COLUMN active:
Click the column header to sort the content of
the column
MOVE COLUMN active:
The column can be shifted by drag and drop
Reset manual settings (shifted columns) to
original condition
202
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
In addition, you can perform the following functions by mouse:

Sorting function
By clicking a column of the table head, you sort the data in
ascending or descending order (depending on the active setting).
Moving columns
You can arrange the columns in any sequence you want by clicking
a column of the table head and then moving it with the mouse key
pressed down. The TNC does not save the current column
sequence when you exit the tool management (depending on the
active setting).
Showing additional information in the fillable form view
The TNC displays tool tips when you leave the mouse pointer on an
active input field for more than a second and when you have set the
EDIT ON/OFF soft key to ON.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
203
5.2 Tool Data
If the form view is active, the following functions are available to you:
Editing functions, form view
Soft key
Select the tool data of the preceding tool

Select the tool data of the next tool
Select previous tool index (only active if indexing
is enabled)
Select the next tool index (only active if indexing
is enabled)
Discard all changes made since the form was
called ("Undo" function)
Insert new tool (soft-key row 2)
Delete tool (soft-key row 2)
Insert tool index (soft-key row 2)
Delete tool index (soft-key row 2)
Copy the tool data of the selected tool (2nd softkey row)
Insert the copied tool data in the selected tool
(2nd soft-key row)
Select/deselect check boxes (e.g. for TL line)
Open selection lists of combo boxes (e.g. for AFC
line)
204
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Import tool data

Using this function you can simply import tool data that you have
measured externally on a presetting device, for example. The file to be
imported must have the CSV format (comma separated value). The
CSV file format describes the structure of a text file for exchanging
simply structured data. Accordingly, the import file must have the
following structure:
Line 1:
In the first line you define the column names in which the data
defined in the subsequent lines is to be placed. The column names
are separated from each other by commas.
Other lines:
All the other lines contain the data that you wish to import into the
tool table. The order of the data must match the order of the column
names in Line 1. The data is separated by commas, decimal
numbers are to be defined with a decimal point.
Follow the steps outlined below for importing:
U
U
U
Copy the tool table to be imported to the hard disk of the TNC in the
TNC:\systems\tooltab directory
Start Extended Tool Management
Select the IMPORT TOOL soft key in the Tool Management: The
TNC shows a pop-up window with the CSV files stored in the
TNC:\systems\tooltab directory
Use the arrow keys or mouse to select the file to be imported and
confirm with the ENT key: The TNC shows the content of the CSV
file in a pop-up window
Start import procedure with START soft key.
The CSV file to be imported must be stored in the
TNC:\system\tooltab directory.
If you import the tool data of tools whose numbers are
in the pocket table, the TNC issues an error message.
You can then decide whether you want to skip this data
record or insert a new tool. The TNC inserts a new tool
into the first empty line of the tool table.
Make sure that the column designations are specified
correctly (see Tool table: Standard tool data on page
176).
You can import any tool data, the associated data record
does not have to contain all the columns (or data) of the
tool table.
The column names can be in any order, the data must
be defined in the corresponding order.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
205
5.2 Tool Data
Sample import file:

T,L,R,DL,DR
Line 1 with column names
4,125.995,7.995,0,0
Line 2 with tool data
9,25.06,12.01,0,0
28,196.981,35,0,0
Export the tool data

Using this function you can simply export tool data to read it into the
tool database of your CAM system, for example. The TNC stores the
exported file in the CSV format (comma separated value). The CSV file
format describes the structure of a text file for exchanging simply
structured data. The export file has the following structure:
Line 1:
In the first line the TNC stores the column names of all the relevant
tool data to be defined. The column names are separated from each
other by commas.
Other lines:
All the other lines contain the data of the tools that you have
exported. The order of the data matches the order of the column
names in Line 1. The data is separated by commas, the TNC outputs
decimal numbers with a decimal point.
Follow the steps outlined below for exporting:
U
U
U
U
In the tool management you use the arrow keys or mouse to mark
the tool data that you wish to export
Select the EXPORT TOOL soft key, the TNC shows a pop-up
window: specify the name for the CSV file, confirm with the ENT
key
Start the export procedure with the START soft key: The TNC shows
the status of the export procedure in a pop-up window
Terminate the export procedure by pressing the END key or soft key
The TNC always stores the exported CSV file in the
TNC:\system\tooltab directory.
206
Programming: Tools
5.2 Tool Data
Delete marked tool data

You can use this function you can simply delete tool data that you no
longer need.
Follow the steps outlined below for deleting:
U
U
U
U
In the tool management you use the arrow keys or mouse to mark
the tool data that you wish to delete
Select the DELETE MARKED TOOLS soft key and the TNC shows a
pop-up window listing the tool data to be deleted
Start the delete procedure with the START soft key: The TNC shows
the status of the delete procedure in a pop-up window
Terminate the delete procedure by pressing the END key or soft key
The TNC deletes all the data of all the tools selected.
Make sure that you really no longer need the tool data,
because there is no Undo function available.
You cannot delete the tool data of tools still stored in
the pocket table. First remove the tool from the
magazine.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
207
5.3 Tool Compensation

Introduction
The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the spindle axis by the
compensation value for the tool length. In the working plane, it
compensates the tool radius.
If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC, the tool radius
compensation is effective only in the working plane. The TNC
accounts for up to five axes including the rotary axes.
If a part program generated by a CAM system contains
surface-normal vectors, the TNC can perform threedimensional tool compensation (see "Three-Dimensional
Tool Compensation (Software Option 2)", page 508).
Tool length compensation

Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a
tool is called and the spindle axis moves. To cancel length
compensation, call a tool with the length L=0.
If you cancel a positive length compensation with TOOL
CALL 0 the distance between tool and workpiece will be
reduced.
After TOOL CALL the path of the tool in the spindle axis, as
entered in the part program, is adjusted by the difference
between the length of the previous tool and that of the
new one.
For tool length compensation, the control takes the delta values from
both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account:
Compensation value = L + DLTOOL CALL + DLTAB where
L:
DL TOOL CALL
DL TAB
208
is the tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool

table
is the oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL 0
block (not taken into account by the position
display).
is the oversize for length DL in the tool table.
Programming: Tools
Tool radius compensation

The NC block for programming a tool movement contains:
RL or RR for radius compensation
R+ or R-, for radius compensation in single-axis movements
R0 if there is no radius compensation
RL
R0
Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called

and is moved with a straight line block in the working plane with RL or
RR.
The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation if

you:
program a straight line block with R0

depart the contour with the DEP function
program a PGM CALL
select a new program with PGM MGT.
For radius compensation, the TNC takes the delta values from both the
TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account:
Compensation value = R + DRTOOL CALL + DRTAB where
R
DR TOOL CALL
DR TAB:
Tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool table

Oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block (not
taken into account by the position display)
Oversize for radius DR in the tool table
Contouring without radius compensation: R0

The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed
path or to the programmed coordinates.
Applications: Drilling and boring, pre-positioning.
X
Y
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
209
Contouring with radius compensation: RR and RL

RR
RL
The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour.

The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour.
The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the
radius. Right or left are to be understood as based on the
direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour. See figures.
Between two program blocks with different radius
compensations RR and RL you must program at least one
traversing block in the working plane without radius
compensation (that is, with R0).
RL
The TNC does not put radius compensation into effect

until the end of the block in which it is first programmed.
You can also activate the radius compensation for

secondary axes in the working plane. Program the
secondary axes too in each following block, since
otherwise the TNC will execute the radius compensation
in the principal axis again.
In the first block in which radius compensation is activated
with RR/RL or canceled with R0 the TNC always positions
the tool perpendicular to the programmed starting or end
position. Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the
first or last contour point to prevent the possibility of
damaging the contour.
Entering radius compensation
RR
Radius compensation is entered in an L block: Enter the coordinates

of the target point and confirm your entry with ENT
RADIUS COMP.: RL/RR/NO COMP.?
To select tool movement to the left of the contour,

press the RL soft key, or
To select tool movement to the right of the contour,

press the RR soft key, or
To select tool movement without radius

compensation or to cancel radius compensation,
press the ENT key.
To terminate the block, press the END key.
210
Programming: Tools
Radius compensation: Machining corners

Outside corners:
If you program radius compensation, the TNC moves the tool
around outside corners either on a transitional arc or on a spline
(selectable via MP7680). If necessary, the TNC reduces the feed
rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress, for example at
very great changes of direction.
Inside corners:
The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside
corners under radius compensation. From this point it then starts
the next contour element. This prevents damage to the workpiece.
The permissible tool radius, therefore, is limited by the geometry of
the programmed contour.
RL
Caution: Danger to the workpiece!

To prevent the tool from damaging the contour, be careful
not to program the starting or end position for machining
inside corners at a corner of the contour.
Machining corners without radius compensation
If you program the tool movement without radius compensation, you
can change the tool path and feed rate at workpiece corners with the
miscellaneous function M90. see "Smoothing corners: M90", page 373.
RL
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
RL
211

212
Programming: Tools
Programming:
Programming Contours
Path functions
A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements
such as straight lines and circular arcs. With the path functions, you
can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs.
L
CC
L
L
If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions

given are not sufficient for creating a part program, you can program
the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming. The
TNC calculates the missing data.
With FK programming, you also program tool movements for straight
lines and circular arcs.
Miscellaneous functions M
With the TNC's miscellaneous functions you can affect
The program run, e.g., a program interruption
The machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and
coolant supply on and off
The path behavior of the tool
Subprograms and program section repeats
Y
80
CC
60
R4
0
6.1 Tool Movements
6.1 Tool Movements
40
If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program, you can

save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering
the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program
section repeat. If you wish to execute a specific program section only
under certain conditions, you also define this machining sequence as
a subprogram. In addition, you can have a part program call a separate
program for execution.
10
115
Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is

described in Chapter 8.
Programming with Q parameters

Instead of programming numerical values in a part program, you enter
markers called Q parameters. You assign the values to the Q
parameters separately with the Q parameter functions. You can use
the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that
control program execution or describe a contour.
In addition, parametric programming enables you to measure with the
3-D touch probe during program run.
Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 9.
214
Programming tool movements for workpiece

machining
You create a part program by programming the path functions for the
individual contour elements in sequence. You usually do this by
entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour
elements given in the production drawing. The TNC calculates the
actual path of the tool from these coordinates, and from the tool data
and radius compensation.
Y
X
The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously.
100
Movement parallel to the machine axes

The program block contains only one coordinate. The TNC thus moves
the tool parallel to the programmed axis.
Depending on the individual machine tool, the part program is
executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on
which the workpiece is clamped. Nevertheless, you always program
path contours as if the tool were moving and the workpiece remaining
stationary.
Example:
50 L X+100
50
L
X+100
Block number
Path function straight line at
Coordinate of the end point
50
The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position
X=100. See figure.
70
Movement in the main planes

The program block contains two coordinates. The TNC thus moves the
tool in the programmed plane.
Example:
L X+70 Y+50
The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the
position X=70, Y=50 (see figure).
Y
X
Three-dimensional movement
The program block contains three coordinates. The TNC thus moves
the tool in space to the programmed position.
Example:
L X+80 Y+0 Z-10
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
-10
80
215
6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions
6.2 Fundamentals of Path

Functions
Entering more than three coordinates

The TNC can control up to 5 axes simultaneously (software option).
Machining with 5 axes, for example, moves 3 linear and 2 rotary axes
simultaneously.
Such programs are too complex to program at the machine, however,
and are usually created with a CAM system.
Example:
L X+20 Y+10 Z+2 A+15 C+6 R0 F100 M3
Circles and circular arcs
The TNC moves two axes simultaneously on a circular path relative to
the workpiece. You can define a circular movement by entering the
circle center CC.
When you program a circle, the control assigns it to one of the main
planes. This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle
axis during a TOOL CALL:
Spindle axis
Main plane
XY, also
UV, XV, UY
ZX, also
WU, ZU, WX
YZ, also
VW, YW, VZ
You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main

plane by using the function for tilting the working plane
(see User's Manual for Cycles, Cycle 19, WORKING
PLANE) or Q parameters (see "Principle and Overview",
page 304).
216
YCC
CC
XCC
Clockwise direction of rotation: DRCounterclockwise direction of rotation: DR+

Radius compensation
The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to
the first contour element. You cannot activate radius compensation in
a circle block. Activate it beforehand in a straight-line block (see "Path
ContoursCartesian Coordinates", page 227)or approach block (APPR
block, see "Contour Approach and Departure", page 219).
Z
Y
DR+
DR
CC
CC
Pre-positioning
Before running a part program, always pre-position the tool to prevent
the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
217
Direction of rotation DR for circular movements

When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour
element, enter the direction of rotation as follows:
Creating the program blocks with the path function keys

The gray path function keys initiate the plain language dialog. The TNC
asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the
program block into the part program.
Exampleprogramming a straight line:
Initiate the programming dialog, e.g. for a straight line
COORDINATES?
Enter the coordinates of the straight-line end point,
e.g. 20 in X
COORDINATES?
Enter the coordinates of the straight-line end point,
e.g. 30 in Y, and confirm with the ENT key.
RADIUS COMP.: RL/RR/NO COMP.?
Select the radius compensation (here, press the R0
soft keythe tool moves without compensation).
FEED RATE F=? / F MAX = ENT
100
Enter the feed rate (here, 100 mm/min), and confirm

your entry with ENT. For programming in inches,
enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 ipm
Move at rapid traverse: press the FMAX soft key, or
To traverse with the feed rate defined in the TOOL

CALL block, press the F AUTO soft key.
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M?
3
Enter a miscellaneous function (here, M3), and

terminate the dialog with ENT
The part program now contains the following line:

L X-20 Y+30 R0 FMAX M3
218
6.3 Contour Approach and Departure
6.3 Contour Approach and

Departure
Overview: Types of paths for contour approach
and departure
The functions for contour approach APPR and departure DEP are
activated with the APPR/DEP key. You can then select the desired
path function with the corresponding soft key:
Function
Approach
Departure
Straight line with tangential connection

Straight line perpendicular to a contour
point
to the contour. Approach and departure
to an auxiliary point outside the contour
on a tangentially connecting line.
Approaching and departing a helix
The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in
a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour. You program
helical approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT
functions.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
219
Important positions for approach and departure

Starting point PS
You program this position in the block before the APPR block. PS lies
outside the contour and is approached without radius compensation
(R0).
Auxiliary point PH
Some of the paths for approach and departure go through an
auxiliary point PH that the TNC calculates from your input in the
APPR or DEP block. The TNC moves from the current position to the
auxiliary point PH at the feed rate last programmed. If you have
programmed FMAX (positioning at rapid traverse) in the last
positioning block before the approach function, the TNC also
approaches the auxiliary point PH at rapid traverse.
First contour point PA and last contour point PE
You program the first contour point PA in the APPR block. The last
contour point PE can be programmed with any path function. If the
APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate, the TNC will first move
the tool to PH in the working plane, and then move it to the entered
depth in the tool axis.
End point PN
The position PN lies outside of the contour and results from your
input in the DEP block. If the DEP block also contains a Z axis
coordinate, the TNC will first move the tool to PH in the working
plane, and then move it to the entered height in the tool axis.
Abbreviation
Meaning
APPR
Approach
DEP
Departure
Line
Circle
Tangential (smooth connection)
Normal (perpendicular)
RL
RL
PN R0
PA RL
PE RL
PH RL
PS R0
When moving from the present position to the auxiliary

point PH the TNC does not check whether the
programmed contour will be damaged. Use the test
graphics to check.
With the APPR LT, APPR LN and APPR CT functions, the
TNC moves the tool from the present position to the
auxiliary point PH at the feed rate that was last
programmed. With the APPR LCT function, the TNC
moves to the auxiliary point PH at the feed rate
programmed with the APPR block. If no feed rate is
programmed before the approach block, the TNC
generates an error message.
220
Polar coordinates
You can also program the contour points for the following
approach/departure functions over polar coordinates:
APPR LT becomes APPR PLT
APPR LN becomes APPR PLN
APPR CT becomes APPR PCT
APPR LCT becomes APPR PLCT
DEP LCT becomes DEP PLCT
Select by soft key an approach or departure function, then press the
orange P key.
Radius compensation
The tool radius compensation is programmed together with the first
contour point PA in the APPR block. The DEP blocks automatically
discard the tool radius compensation.
Contour approach without radius compensation: If you program the
APPR block with R0, the TNC will calculate the tool path for a tool
radius of 0 mm and a radius compensation RR! The radius
compensation is necessary to set the direction of contour approach
and departure in the APPR/DEP LN and APPR/DEP CT functions. In
addition, you must program both coordinates in the working plane in
the first traverse block after APPR.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
221
U
U
Use any path function to approach the starting point PS

Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR LT soft key:
U Coordinates of the first contour point PA
U
15
The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point PS to an

auxiliary point PH. It then moves to the first contour point PA on a
straight line that connects tangentially to the contour. The auxiliary
point PH is separated from the first contour point PA by the distance
LEN.
35
20
10
RR
Approaching on a straight line with tangential

connection: APPR LT
PA
RR
PH
PS
R0
RR
LEN: Distance from the auxiliary point PH to the first

contour point PA
20
35
40
Radius compensation RR/RL for machining
Example NC blocks
7 L X+10 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3
Approach PS without radius compensation
8 APPR LT X+20 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100
PA with radius comp. RR, distance PH to PA: LEN=15
9 L X+35 Y+35
End point of the first contour element
10 L ...
Next contour element
Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to

the first contour point: APPR LN
U
U

Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR LN soft key:
U
Length: Distance to the auxiliary point PH. Always

enter LEN as a positive value!
Y
RR

straight line perpendicular to the first contour element. The auxiliary
point PH is separated by the distance LEN plus the tool radius from the
first contour point PA.
35
20
PA
RR
15
10
PH
RR
10
PS
R0
20
40
Example NC blocks
7 L X+10 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3
8 APPR LN X+10 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100
PA with radius comp. RR
9 L X+20 Y+35
10 L ...
222
35
The arc from PH to PA is determined through the radius R and the

center angle CCA. The direction of rotation of the circular arc is
automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element.
U
U
RR

auxiliary point PH. It then moves to the first contour point PA following
a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element.
20
PA
RR
CCA=
180
0
R1
10

Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR CT soft key:
U
Radius R of the circular arc
PH
10
PS
R0
20
40
If the tool should approach the workpiece in the

direction defined by the radius compensation: Enter
R as a positive value
If the tool should approach from the workpiece
side:
Enter R as a negative value
U
Center angle CCA of the arc

CCA can be entered only as a positive value
Maximum input value 360
Example NC blocks
7 L X+10 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3
8 APPR CT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 CCA180 R+10 RR F100
PA with radius comp. RR, radius R=10
9 L X+20 Y+35
10 L ...
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
223
Approaching on a circular path with tangential

connection: APPR CT

circular arc. The feed rate programmed in the APPR block is effective
for the entire path that the TNC traversed in the approach block (path
PS to PA).
If you have programmed the coordinates of all three principal axes X,
Y and Z in the approach block, the TNC moves the tool from the
position defined before the APPR block simultaneously in all three
axes to the auxiliary point PH and then, only in the working plane, from
PH to PA.
The arc is connected tangentially both to the line PSPH as well as to
the first contour element. Once these lines are known, the radius then
suffices to completely define the tool path.
U
U
35
RR
Approaching on a circular arc with tangential

connection from a straight line to the contour:
APPR LCT
20
PA
RR
0
R1
10
PH
PS
R0
RR
10
20
40

Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and APPR LCT soft key:
U
Radius R of the circular arc. Enter R as a positive value
Example NC blocks
7 L X+10 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3
8 APPR LCT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 R10 RR F100
PA with radius comp. RR, radius R=10
9 L X+20 Y+35
10 L ...
224
Y
RR
The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point PE to the
end point PN. The line lies on the extension of the last contour
element. PN is separated from PE by the distance LEN.
Program the last contour element with the end point PE and radius
compensation
Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP LT soft key:
U LEN: Enter the distance from the last contour element
PE to the end point PN
20
PE
RR
12.5
PN
R0
X
Example NC blocks
23 L Y+20 RR F100
Last contour element: PE with radius compensation
24 DEP LT LEN12.5 F100
Depart contour by LEN=12.5 mm
25 L Z+100 FMAX M2
Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program.
Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the

last contour point: DEP LN
The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point PE to the
end point PN. The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last
contour point PE. PN is separated from PE by the distance LEN plus the
tool radius.
U
U
compensation
Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP LN soft key:
U LEN: Enter the distance from the last contour element
to PN.
Always enter LEN as a positive value!
Y
RR
PN
20
R0
PE
20
RR
Example NC blocks
23 L Y+20 RR F100
24 DEP LN LEN+20 F100
Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN=20 mm.
25 L Z+100 FMAX M2
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
225
Departing on a straight line with tangential

connection: DEP LT
Y
RR
The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point PE to the
end point PN. The path is tangentially connected to the last contour
element.
U
U
compensation
Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP CT soft key:
U
Center angle CCA of the arc
Radius R of the circular arc
PN
R0
20
R8
PE
180
RR
If the tool should depart the workpiece in the

direction of the radius compensation (i.e. to the
right with RR or to the left with RL): Enter R as a
positive value
If the tool should depart the workpiece in the
direction opposite to the radius compensation:
Enter R as a negative value
Example NC blocks
23 L Y+20 RR F100
24 DEP CT CCA 180 R+8 F100
Center angle=180,
Arc radius=8 mm
25 L Z+100 FMAX M2
Departing on a circular arc tangentially

connecting the contour and a straight line:
DEP LCT
Y
RR
The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point PE to an
auxiliary point PH. It then moves on a straight line to the end point PN.
The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and
to the line from PH to PN. The radius R uniquely defines the arc.
20
12
compensation
Initiate the dialog with the APPR/DEP key and DEP LCT soft key:
U
Enter the coordinates of the end point PN
Radius R of the circular arc. Enter R as a positive value
R8
Departure on a circular path with tangential

connection: DEP CT
PN
R0
PE
RR
PH
R0
10
Example NC blocks
23 L Y+20 RR F100
24 DEP LCT X+10 Y+12 R+8 F100
Coordinates PN, arc radius=8 mm
25 L Z+100 FMAX M2
226
Overview of path functions

Function
Tool movement
Required input
Page
Line L
Straight line
Coordinates of the end

points of the straight line
Page 228
Chamfer CHF
Chamfer between two

straight lines
Chamfer side length
Page 229
Circle Center CC
None
Coordinates of the circle

center or pole
Page 231
Circle C
Circular arc around a circle

center CC to an arc end
point
Coordinates of the arc end

point, direction of rotation
Page 232
Circular arc CR
Circular arc with a certain

radius

point, arc radius, direction
of rotation
Page 233
Circular arc CT
Circular arc with tangential

connection to the
preceding and subsequent
contour elements

point
Page 235
Corner Rounding RND

connection to the
preceding and subsequent
contour elements
Rounding radius R
Page 230
FK Free Contour
Programming
Straight line or circular path

with any connection to the
preceding contour element
see "Path ContoursFK

Free Contour
Programming", page 248
Page 251
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Path function key
227
6.4 Path ContoursCartesian Coordinates
6.4 Path ContoursCartesian

Coordinates
The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to
the straight-line end point. The starting point is the end point of the
preceding block.
Coordinates of the end point of the straight line, if
necessary
Radius compensation RL/RR/R0
Feed rate F
Miscellaneous function M
40
15
10
Straight line L
Example NC blocks
7 L X+10 Y+40 RL F200 M3
8 L IX+20 IY-15
9 L X+60 IY-10
10
20
60

You can also generate a straight-line block (L block) by using the
ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE key:
U
U
U
In the Manual Operation mode, move the tool to the position you
wish to capture.
Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing.
Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block.
U Press the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE key: The
TNC generates an L block with the actual position
coordinates.
In the MOD function, you define the number of axes that
the TNC saves in a L block (see "Selecting the Axes for
Generating L Blocks", page 666).
228
Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines
Chamfer side length: Length of the chamfer, and if

necessary:
Feed rate F (effective only in CHF block)
Example NC blocks
7 L X+0 Y+30 RL F300 M3
30
12
The line blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same
working plane as the chamfer
The radius compensation before and after the CHF block must be the
same
The chamfer must be machinable with the current tool
12
The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two
straight lines.
40
8 L X+40 IY+5
9 CHF 12 F250
10 L IX+5 Y+0
You cannot start a contour with a CHF block.

A chamfer is possible only in the working plane.
The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part
of the contour.
A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only
in that block. After the CHF block, the previous feed rate
becomes effective again.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
229
Corner rounding RND

The RND function is used for rounding off corners.
The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the

preceding and subsequent contour elements.
The rounding arc must be machinable with the called tool.
U
Rounding radius: Enter the radius, and if necessary:
Feed rate F (effective only in RND block)
40
R5
25
Example NC blocks
5 L X+10 Y+40 RL F300 M3
6 L X+40 Y+25
7 RND R5 F100
8 L X+10 Y+5
10
40
In the preceding and subsequent contour elements, both

coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc. If
you machine the contour without tool-radius
compensation, you must program both coordinates in the
working plane.
The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not
part of the contour.
A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only
in that RND block. After the RND block, the previous feed
rate becomes effective again.
You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour
approach.
230
You can define a circle center for circles that you have programmed
with the C key (circular path C). This is done in the following ways:
Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center in the
working plane, or
Using the circle center defined in an earlier block, or
Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE
key
U
Enter the coordinates for the circle center, or

If you want to use the last programmed position,
enter no coordinates
Example NC blocks
5 CC X+25 Y+25
Z
CC
YCC
X CC
or
10 L X+25 Y+25
11 CC
The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration.
Duration of effect
The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center
is programmed. You can also define a circle center for the secondary
axes U, V and W.
Entering the circle center incrementally
If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates, you have
programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool.
The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle
center: The tool does not move to this position.
The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
231
Circle center CCI
Circular path C around circle center CC

Before programming a circular arc, you must first enter the circle
center CC. The last programmed tool position will be the starting point
of the arc.
U
Move the tool to the circle starting point.

U Enter the coordinates of the circle center
U
Coordinates of the arc end point, and if necessary:
Direction of rotation DR
Feed rate F
CC
The TNC normally makes circular movements in the active

working plane. If you program circular arcs that do not lie
in the active working plane, for example C Z... X... DR+
with a tool axis Z, and at the same time rotate this
movement, then the TNC moves the tool in a spatial arc,
which means a circular arc in 3 axes.
Example NC blocks
5 CC X+25 Y+25
6 L X+45 Y+25 RR F200 M3

7 C X+45 Y+25 DR+
DR+
Full circle
For the end point, enter the same point that you used for the starting
point.
25
CC
DR
The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the
circle.
Input tolerance: up to 0.016 mm (selected with MP7431).
25
45
Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse:

0.0016 m.
232
Circular path CR with defined radius

The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R.
U
Coordinates of the arc end point
Radius R
Note: The algebraic sign determines the size of the
arc!
Note: The algebraic sign determines whether the arc
is concave or convex!
Feed rate F
Full circle
For a full circle, program two blocks in succession:
E1=S
CC
S1=E
The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second.
The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
233
Central angle CCA and arc radius R

The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four
arcs of the same radius:
Smaller arc: CCA<180

Enter the radius with a positive sign R>0
DR
Larger arc: CCA>180

Enter the radius with a negative sign R<0
The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving
outward (convex) or curving inward (concave):
40
R
DR+
ZW
R
2
Convex: Direction of rotation DR (with radius compensation RL)

Concave: Direction of rotation DR+ (with radius compensation RL)
Example NC blocks
40
10 L X+40 Y+40 RL F200 M3
70
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR (ARC 1)

3
or
DR
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR+ (ARC 2)

or
ZW
R
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR (ARC 3)
40
or
11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR+ (ARC 4)
The distance from the starting and end points of the arc
diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc.
4
DR+
40
70
The maximum radius that can be entered directly is

99.9999 m, with Q parameter programming 210 m.
You can also enter rotary axes A, B and C.
234
The tool moves on an arc that starts tangentially to the previously

programmed contour element.
A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when

there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two
contoursthe transition is smooth.
The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be
programmed immediately before the CT block. This requires at least
two positioning blocks.
U
Coordinates of the arc end point, and if necessary:
Feed rate F
Example NC blocks
30
25
20
25
45
7 L X+0 Y+25 RL F300 M3

8 L X+25 Y+30
9 CT X+45 Y+20
10 L Y+0
A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the

coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element
preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc!
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
235
Circular path CT with tangential connection
10
95
10
20
Example: Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates
20
X
9
0 BEGIN PGM LINEAR MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX
5 L X-10 Y-10 R0 FMAX
Pre-position the tool
6 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3
Move to working depth at feed rate F = 1000 mm/min
7 APPR LT X+5 Y+5 LEN10 RL F300
Approach the contour at point 1 on a straight line with

tangential connection
8 L Y+95
Move to point 2
9 L X+95
Point 3: first straight line for corner 3
10 CHF 10
Program chamfer with length 10 mm
11 L Y+5
Point 4: 2nd straight line for corner 3, 1st straight line for corner 4
12 CHF 20
Program chamfer with length 20 mm
13 L X+5
Move to last contour point 1, second straight line for corner 4
14 DEP LT LEN10 F1000
Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection
15 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
16 END PGM LINEAR MM
236
Example: Circular movements with Cartesian coordinates
Y
95
2
3
R10
R3
85
40
5
5
30 40
70
95
0 BEGIN PGM CIRCULAR MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX
5 L X-10 Y-10 R0 FMAX
6 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3
Move to working depth at feed rate F = 1000 mm/min
7 APPR LCT X+5 Y+5 R5 RL F300
Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with

8 L X+5 Y+85
Point 2: first straight line for corner 2
9 RND R10 F150
Insert radius with R = 10 mm, feed rate: 150 mm/min
10 L X+30 Y+85
Move to point 3: Starting point of the arc with CR
11 CR X+70 Y+95 R+30 DR-
Move to point 4: End point of the arc with CR, radius 30 mm
12 L X+95
Move to point 5
13 L X+95 Y+40
Move to point 6
14 CT X+40 Y+5
Move to point 7: End point of the arc, circular arc with tangential
connection to point 6, TNC automatically calculates the radius
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
237
15 L X+5
Move to last contour point 1
16 DEP LCT X-20 Y-20 R5 F1000
Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
18 END PGM CIRCULAR MM
238
Example: Full circle with Cartesian coordinates
50
CC
50
0 BEGIN PGM C-CC MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
4 CC X+50 Y+50
Define the circle center
5 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
6 L X-40 Y+50 R0 FMAX
7 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3
Move to working depth
8 APPR LCT X+0 Y+50 R5 RL F300
Approach the starting point of the circle on a circular arc with

9 C X+0 DR-
Move to the circle end point (= circle starting point)
10 DEP LCT X-40 Y+50 R5 F1000
11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
12 END PGM C-CC MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
239
6.5 Path ContoursPolar Coordinates
6.5 Path ContoursPolar

Coordinates
Overview
With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle
PA and its distance PR relative to a previously defined pole CC.
Polar coordinates are useful with:
Positions on circular arcs
Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees, e.g. bolt hole circles
Overview of path functions with polar coordinates
Function
Path function key
Tool movement
Required input
Page
Straight line LP
Straight line
Polar radius, polar angle of

the straight-line end point
Page 241
Circular arc CP
Circular path around circle

center/pole to arc end point
Polar angle of the arc end

point, direction of rotation
Page 242
Circular arc CTP

connection to the preceding
contour element

the arc end point
Page 243
Helical interpolation
Combination of a circular and

a linear movement

the arc end point, coordinate
of the end point in the tool
axis
Page 244
240
Zero point for polar coordinates: pole CC

You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before
blocks containing polar coordinates. Set the pole in the same way as
you would program the circle center.
U
Coordinates: Enter Cartesian coordinates for the pole

or, if you want to use the last programmed position,
enter no coordinates. Before programming polar
coordinates, define the pole. You can only define the
pole in Cartesian coordinates. The pole remains in
effect until you define a new pole.
YCC
CC
Example NC blocks
12 CC X+45 Y+25
Straight line LP
The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the
straight-line end point. The starting point is the end point of the
preceding block.
Polar coordinate radius PR: Enter the distance from
the pole CC to the straight-line end point
Polar coordinate angle PA: Angular position of the

straight-line end point between 360 and +360
The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis:

If the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise:
PA>0
If the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is clockwise: PA<0
Example NC blocks
12 CC X+45 Y+25
30
XCC
60
25
60
CC
45
13 LP PR+30 PA+0 RR F300 M3

14 LP PA+60
15 LP IPA+60
16 LP PA+180
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
241
Circular path CP around pole CC

The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc. PR is defined
by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC. The last
programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc.
U
Polar-coordinates angle PA: Angular position of

the arc end point between 99 999.9999 and
+99 999.9999
Example NC blocks
25
R2
CC
18 CC X+25 Y+25
19 LP PR+20 PA+0 RR F250 M3
20 CP PA+180 DR+
25
For incremental coordinates, enter the same sign for DR

and PA.
242
The tool moves on a circular path, starting tangentially from a

preceding contour element.
Polar coordinates angle PA: Angular position of the

arc end point
Y
120
Polar coordinate radius PR: Enter the distance from

are end point to the pole CC
0
R3
30
R2
Example NC blocks
12 CC X+40 Y+35
35
CC
13 L X+0 Y+35 RL F250 M3

14 LP PR+25 PA+120
15 CTP PR+30 PA+30
16 L Y+0
40
The pole is not the center of the contour arc!
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
243
Circular path CTP with tangential connection
A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a
linear movement perpendicular to this plane. You program the circular
path in a main plane.
A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates.
Application
Large-diameter internal and external threads
Lubrication grooves
CC
Calculating the helix

To program a helix, you must enter the total angle through which the
tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions, and the total
height of the helix.
For calculating a helix that is to be cut in an upward direction, you need
the following data:
Thread revolutions n
Total height h
Incremental total
angle IPA
Starting coordinate Z
Thread revolutions + thread overrun at

thread beginning and end
Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n
Number of revolutions times 360 + angle for
beginning of thread + angle for thread
overrun
Pitch P times (thread revolutions + thread
overrun at start of thread)
Shape of the helix

The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is
determined by the work direction, direction of rotation and radius
compensation.
Internal thread
Work
direction
Direction of
rotation
Radius
comp.
Right-handed
Left-handed
Z+
Z+
DR+
DR
RL
RR
Right-handed
Left-handed
Z
Z
DR
DR+
RR
RL
Right-handed
Left-handed
Z+
Z+
DR+
DR
RR
RL
Right-handed
Left-handed
Z
Z
DR
DR+
RL
RR
External thread
244
Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of

rotation and the incremental total angle IPA. The tool may
otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour.
CC
270
Polar coordinates angle: Enter the total angle of

tool traverse along the helix in incremental
dimensions. After entering the angle, specify the
tool axis with an axis selection key.
Coordinate: Enter the coordinate for the height of the

helix in incremental dimensions.
Clockwise helix: DR
Counterclockwise helix: DR+
Enter the radius compensation according to the table

above.
R3
For the total angle IPA you can enter a value of

-99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999.
25
40
Example NC blocks: Thread M6 x 1 mm with 4 revolutions

12 CC X+40 Y+25
13 L Z+0 F100 M3
14 LP PR+3 PA+270 RL F50
15 CP IPA-1440 IZ+5 DR-
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
245
Programming a helix
Y
100
3
5
60
R4
Example: Linear movement with polar coordinates
CC
50
5
5
50
100
0 BEGIN PGM LINEARPO MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
4 CC X+50 Y+50
Define the datum for polar coordinates
5 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
6 LP PR+60 PA+180 R0 FMAX
7 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3
8 APPR PLCT PR+45 PA+180 R5 RL F250
Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with

9 LP PA+120
Move to point 2
10 LP PA+60
Move to point 3
11 LP PA+0
Move to point 4
12 LP PA-60
Move to point 5
13 LP PA-120
Move to point 6
14 LP PA+180
Move to point 1
15 DEP PLCT PR+60 PA+180 R5 F1000
16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
17 END PGM LINEARPO MM
246
Example: Helix
50
CC
50
M64 x 1,5
100
100
0 BEGIN PGM HELIX MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
5 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX
6 CC
Transfer the last programmed position as the pole
7 L Z-12.75 R0 F1000 M3
8 APPR PCT PR+32 PA-182 CCA180 R+2 RL F100
Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
9 CP IPA+3240 IZ+13.5 DR+ F200
10 DEP CT CCA180 R+2
11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
12 END PGM HELIX MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
247
Fundamentals
Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often contain
unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray
path function keys. For example:
R2
.5
28
X
45
R4
You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free
contour programming function. The TNC derives the contour from the
known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the
interactive programming graphics. The figure at upper right shows a
workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient
programming method.
88.15
18
Known coordinates on the contour element or in its proximity

Coordinate data can be referenced to another contour element
Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour
36
21
6.6 Path ContoursFK Free Contour Programming
6.6 Path ContoursFK Free

Contour Programming
20
248
10 5 0
The following prerequisites for FK programming must

be observed
The FK free contour programming feature can only be
used for programming contour elements that lie in the
working plane. The working plane is defined in the first BLK
FORM block of the part program.
You must enter all available data for every contour
element. Even the data that does not change must be
entered in every blockotherwise it will not be
recognized.
Q parameters are permissible in all FK elements, except in
elements with relative references (e.g. RX or RAN), or in
elements that are referenced to other NC blocks.
If both FK blocks and conventional blocks are entered in a
program, the FK contour must be fully defined before you
can return to conventional programming.
The TNC needs a fixed point from which it can calculate
the contour elements. Use the gray path function keys to
program a position that contains both coordinates of the
working plane immediately before programming the FK
contour. Do not enter any Q parameters in this block.
If the first block of an FK contour is an FCT or FLT block, you
must program at least two NC blocks with the gray path
function keys to fully define the direction of contour
approach.
Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL
command.
Creating FK programs for TNC 4xx:

For a TNC 4xx to be able to load FK programs created on
an iTNC 530, the individual FK elements within a block
must be in the same sequence as displayed in the soft-key
row.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
249
Graphics during FK programming

If you wish to use graphic support during FK
programming, select the PROGRAM + GRAPHICS screen
layout (see Programming and Editing on page 79).
Incomplete coordinate data often is not sufficient to fully define a
workpiece contour. In this case, the TNC indicates the possible
solutions in the FK graphic. You can then select the contour that
matches the drawing. The FK graphic displays the elements of the
workpiece contour in different colors:
Blue
Green
Red
The contour element is fully defined

The entered data describe a limited number of possible
solutions: select the correct one
The entered data are not sufficient to determine the
contour element: enter further data
If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and

the contour element is displayed in green, select the correct contour
element as follows:
U
Press the SHOW SOLUTION soft key repeatedly until

the correct contour element is displayed. Use the
zoom function (2nd soft-key row) if you cannot
distinguish possible solutions in the standard setting
The contour element shown corresponds to the

drawing: With the SELECT SOLUTION soft key the
TNC inserts the desired solution with the NC block
FSELECTn, where n designates the internal solution
number. You should not change the solution number
n by direct editing, but by restarting the programming
graphics and pressing the SHOW SOLUTION soft key
If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element, press the
END SELECT soft key to continue the FK dialog.
Select the green contour elements as soon as possible
with the SELECT SOLUTION soft key. This way you can
reduce the ambiguity of subsequent elements.
The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK
graphics.
NC blocks from a program that you called with PGM CALL
are displayed in another color.
Show block number in graphic window
To show a block number in the graphic window:
U
250
Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR. soft key to SHOW

(soft-key row 3)
Converting FK programs into HEIDENHAIN

conversational format
The TNC features two possibilities for converting FK programs to
plain-language programs:
Convert the program so that the program structure is maintained
(program-section repeats and subprogram calls). Cannot be applied
if you have used Q-parameter functions in the FK sequence.
Convert the program so that program-section repeats, subprogram
calls and Q-parameter calculations are linearized. For linearization,
instead of the program-section repeats and subprogram calls, the
TNC writes the NC blocks processed internally into the generated
program or calculates values assigned via Q-parameter calculations
within an FK sequence.
U
Select the program you want to convert
Press the Special Functions key
Press the Programming Aids soft key.
Select the soft-key row with functions for converting

programs
Convert the FK blocks of the selected program. The

TNC converts all FK blocks into straight-line blocks
(L) and circular-arc blocks (CC, C), and the program
structure is maintained, or
Convert the FK blocks of the selected program. The

TNC converts all FK blocks into straight-line blocks
(L) and circular-arc blocks (CC, C), and the TNC
linearizes the program
The name of the file created by the TNC consists of the

old file name plus the extension _nc. Example:
File name of the FK program: LEVER.H
File name of the conversational dialog program
converted by the TNC: LEVEL_nc.h
The resolution of the created conversational program is
0.1 m.
After the converted NC blocks, the converted program
includes the comment SNR and a number. The number
indicates the block number of the FK program from which
the respective conversational block was calculated.
Initiating the FK dialog

If you press the gray FK button, the TNC displays the soft keys you can
use to initiate an FK dialogsee the following table. Press the FK
button a second time to deselect the soft keys.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
251
If you initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys, the TNC shows
additional soft-key rows that you can use for entering known
coordinates, directional data and data regarding the course of the
contour.
FK element
Soft key

Straight line without tangential connection
Circular arc without tangential connection
Pole for FK programming
252
Pole for FK programming

U
To display the soft keys for free contour programming,

press the FK key
To initiate the dialog for defining the pole, press the

FPOL soft key. The TNC then displays the axis soft
keys of the active working plane
Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys
The pole for FK programming remains active until you

define a new one using FPOL.
Free programming of straight lines

Straight line without tangential connection
U To display the soft keys for free contour programming,
press the FK key
U
To initiate the dialog for free programming of straight

lines, press the FL soft key. The TNC displays
additional soft keys
Enter all known data in the block by using these soft

keys. The FK graphic displays the programmed
contour element in red until sufficient data is entered.
If the entered data describes several solutions, the
graphic will display the contour element in green (see
"Graphics during FK programming", page 250)

If the straight line connects tangentially to another contour element,
initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key:
U

press the FK key
To initiate the dialog, press the FLT soft key
Enter all known data in the block by using the soft

keys.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
253
Free programming of circular arcs

Circular arc without tangential connection
U To display the soft keys for free contour programming,
press the FK key.
U
To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular

arcs, press the FC soft key. The TNC displays soft
keys with which you can directly enter data on the
circular arc or the circle center.
Enter all known data in the block by using these soft

keys. The FK graphic displays the programmed
contour element in red until sufficient data is entered.
If the entered data describes several solutions, the
graphic will display the contour element in green (see
"Graphics during FK programming", page 250)

If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element,
initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key:
U

press the FK key.
To initiate the dialog, press the FCT soft key.
Enter all known data in the block by using the soft

keys
Input possibilities
End point coordinates
Known data
Soft keys
Cartesian coordinates X and Y

Polar coordinates referenced to FPOL
R15
30
30
20
Example NC blocks
7 FPOL X+20 Y+30
8 FL IX+10 Y+20 RR F100
9 FCT PR+15 IPA+30 DR+ R15
20
254
10
Known data
Length of a straight line
Soft keys
Gradient angle of a straight line
IAN
AN
Chord length LEN of an arc
LEN
0
Gradient angle AN of an entry tangent

Center angle of an arc
Example NC blocks
27 FLT X+25 LEN 12.5 AN+35 RL F200
28 FC DR+ R6 LEN10 AN-45
29 FCT DR- R15 LEN 15
35
5
R1
.5
12
R6
10
15
45
25
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
255
Direction and length of contour elements
Circle center CC, radius and direction of rotation in the FC/FCT

block
The TNC calculates a circle center for free-programmed arcs from the
data you enter. This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK
program block.
If you wish to define the circle center in polar coordinates you must
use FPOL, not CC, to define the pole. FPOL is entered in Cartesian
coordinates and remains in effect until the control encounters a block
in which another FPOL is defined.
A circle center that was calculated or programmed
conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or circle
center for the new FK contour: If you enter conventional
polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you
have defined previously, then you must enter the pole
again in a CC block after the FK contour.
R3
15
FPOL
CC
40
X
20
Known data
Soft keys
Circle center in Cartesian coordinates

Circle center in polar coordinates
Rotational direction of an arc
Radius of an arc
Example NC blocks
10 FC CCX+20 CCY+15 DR+ R15
11 FPOL X+20 Y+15
12 FL AN+40
13 FC DR+ R15 CCPR+35 CCPA+40
256
Closed contours
You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the
CLSD soft key. This reduces the number of possible solutions for the
last contour element.
Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and
last blocks of an FK section.
Beginning of contour:
End of contour:
CLSD+
CLSD
CLSD+
Example NC blocks
12 L X+5 Y+35 RL F500 M3
13 FC DR- R15 CLSD+ CCX+20 CCY+35
...
CLSD
17 FCT DR- R+15 CLSD-
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
257
Auxiliary points
For both free-programmed straight lines and free-programmed circular
arcs, you can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located
on the contour or in its proximity.
Auxiliary points on a contour
The auxiliary points are located on the straight line, the extension of
the straight line, or on the circular arc.
Known data
Soft keys
60.071
53
X coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1 or P2 of a straight line
R10
70
Y coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1 or P2 of a straight line
X coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1, P2 or P3 of a circular arc
50
42.929
Y coordinate of an auxiliary
point
P1, P2 or P3 of a circular arc
Auxiliary points near a contour

Known data
Soft keys
X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near

a straight line
Distance of auxiliary point to straight line
X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near
a circular arc
Distance of auxiliary point to circular arc
Example NC blocks
13 FC DR- R10 P1X+42.929 P1Y+60.071
14 FLT AN-70 PDX+50 PDY+53 D10
258
Data whose values are based on another contour element are called
relative data. The soft keys and program words for entries begin with
the letter R for Relative. The figure at right shows the entries that
should be programmed as relative data.
Y
20
The block number of the contour element on which the

relative data are based can only be located up to 64
positioning blocks before the block in which you program
the reference.
If you delete a block on which relative data are based, the
TNC will display an error message. Change the program
first before you delete the block.
20
45
20
10
R20
The coordinates and angles for relative data are always

programmed in incremental dimensions. You must also
enter the block number of the contour element on which
the data are based.
90
FPOL
10
35
Data relative to block N: End point coordinates

Known data
Soft keys
Cartesian Coordinates
relative to block N
Polar coordinates relative to block N
Example NC blocks
12 FPOL X+10 Y+10
13 FL PR+20 PA+20
14 FL AN+45
15 FCT IX+20 DR- R20 CCA+90 RX 13
16 FL IPR+35 PA+0 RPR 13
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
259
Relative data
Known data
Soft key
Angle between a straight line and another element

or between the entry tangent of the arc and another
element
Straight line parallel to another contour element
220
20
Distance from a straight line to a parallel contour

element
95
12.5
105
Example NC blocks
12.5
17 FL LEN 20 AN+15
15
20
18 FL AN+105 LEN 12.5

19 FL PAR 17 DP 12.5
20 FSELECT 2
21 FL LEN 20 IAN+95
22 FL IAN+220 RAN 18
Data relative to block N: Circle center CC
Known data
Soft key
Cartesian coordinates of the circle center

relative to block N
Polar coordinates of the circle center
relative to block N
20
35
R10
Example NC blocks
12 FL X+10 Y+10 RL
15
Data relative to block N: Direction and distance of the contour

element
CC
10
13 FL ...
14 FL X+18 Y+35
15 FL ...
10
18
16 FL ...
17 FC DR- R10 CCA+0 ICCX+20 ICCY-15 RCCX12 RCCY14
260
Example: FK programming 1
Y
100
5
R1
75
30
R18
R15
20
20
50
75
100
0 BEGIN PGM FK1 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
5 L X-20 Y+30 R0 FMAX
6 L Z-10 R0 F1000 M3
7 APPR CT X+2 Y+30 CCA90 R+5 RL F250
FK contour section:
9 FLT
Program all known data for each contour element
10 FCT DR- R15 CCX+50 CCY+75

11 FLT
13 FLT
14 FCT DR- R18 CLSD- CCX+20 CCY+30
15 DEP CT CCA90 R+5 F1000
16 L X-30 Y+0 R0 FMAX

17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
18 END PGM FK1 MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
261
10
10
R20
55
30
60
R30
30
0 BEGIN PGM FK2 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
5 L X+30 Y+30 R0 FMAX
6 L Z+5 R0 FMAX M3
Pre-position the tool in the tool axis
7 L Z-5 R0 F100
262
9 FPOL X+30 Y+30
FK contour section:
10 FC DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
8 APPR LCT X+0 Y+30 R5 RR F350
11 FL AN+60 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10

12 FSELECT 3
13 FC DR- R20 CCPR+55 CCPA+60
14 FSELECT 2
15 FL AN-120 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
16 FSELECT 3
17 FC X+0 DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
18 FSELECT 2
19 DEP LCT X+30 Y+30 R5
20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
21 END PGM FK2 MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
263
Y
R1
0
R5
R4
R5
30
R6
R6
-10
-25
R1,5
R36
R24
50
R65
0
R5
12
44
65
110
0 BEGIN PGM FK3 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X-45 Y-45 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+120 Y+70 Z+0

Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
5 L X-70 Y+0 R0 FMAX
6 L Z-5 R0 F1000 M3
264
8 FC DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0
FK contour section:
9 FLT
7 APPR CT X-40 Y+0 CCA90 R+5 RL F250

11 FLT
12 FCT DR+ R6 CCX+0 CCY+0
13 FCT DR+ R24
14 FCT DR+ R6 CCX+12 CCY+0
15 FSELECT 2
16 FCT DR- R1.5
17 FCT DR- R36 CCX+44 CCY-10
18 FSELECT 2
19 FCT DR+ R5
20 FLT X+110 Y+15 AN+0
21 FL AN-90
22 FL X+65 AN+180 PAR21 DP30
23 RND R5
24 FL X+65 Y-25 AN-90
25 FC DR+ R50 CCX+65 CCY-75
26 FCT DR- R65
27 FSELECT 1
28 FCT Y+0 DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0
29 FSELECT 4
31 L X-70 R0 FMAX
32 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
33 END PGM FK3 MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
265
266
Programming: Data
Transfer from DXF Files
or Plain-language
Contours
7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
7.1 Processing DXF Files

(Software Option)
Function
DXF files created in a CAD system can be opened directly by the TNC,
in order to extract contours or machining positions, and save them as
conversational programs or as point files. Plain-language programs
acquired in this manner can also be run by older TNC controls, since
these contour programs contain only L and CC/C blocks.
If you process DXF files in the Programming and Editing operating
mode, the TNC generates contour programs with the file extension .H
and point files with the extension .PNT. If you process DXF files in the
smarT.NC operating mode, the TNC generates contour programs with
the file extension .HC and point files with the extension .HP.
The DXF files to be processed must be stored on the hard
disk of your TNC.
Before loading the file to the TNC, ensure that the name
of the DXF file does not contain any blank spaces or illegal
special characters.(see File names on page 116)
The DXF file to be opened must contain at least one layer.
The TNC supports the most common DXF format, R12
(equivalent to AC1009).
The TNC does not support binary DXF format. When
generating the DXF file from a CAD or drawing program,
make sure that you save the file in ASCII format.
The following DXF elements are selectable as contours:
LINE (straight line)
CIRCLE (complete circle)
ARC (circular arc)
POLYLINE
268
Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files or Plain-language Contours
Opening a DXF file

U
Select the Programming and Editing operating mode
In order to see the soft-key menu for selecting the file

type to be displayed, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
In order to show all DXF files, press the SHOW DXF

soft key
Select the directory in which the DXF file is saved
Select the desired DXF file, and load it with the ENT
key. The TNC starts the DXF converter and shows the
contents of the DXF file on the screen. The TNC
shows the layers in the left window, and the drawing
in the right window.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
269
Basic settings
The third soft-key row has various possibilities for settings:
Setting
Soft key
COLOR NORMAL/INVERTED: Changing the

color scheme
3-D MODE/2-D MODE: Change between 2-D
and 3-D mode
UNIT OF MEASURE MM/INCH: Enter the unit of
measurement of the DXF file. The TNC then
outputs the contour program in this unit of
measurement.
The tolerance specifies how far apart
neighboring contour elements may be from each
other. You can use the tolerance to compensate
for inaccuracies that occurred when the drawing
was made. The default setting depends on the
extent of the entire DXF file.
The resolution specifies how many decimal
places the TNC should use when generating the
contour program. Default setting: 4 decimal
places (equivalent to resolution of 0.1 m when
the unit of measure MM is active).
The mode for point transfer on circles and circle
segments determines whether the TNC
automatically loads the circle center point when
selecting machining positions via mouse click
(OFF), or if additional points on the circle should
be shown as well.
OFF
Do not show additional points on the circle.
Assume the circle center point directly when
a circle or arc is clicked.
Enable
Show additional points on the circle.
Assume each desired circle point by
clicking it
Mode for point assumption: Specify whether the
TNC should display the tool path during selection
of machining positions.
Please note that you must set the correct unit of measure,
since the DXF file does not contain any such information.
If you want to generate programs for older TNC controls,
you must limit the resolution to three decimal places. In
addition, you must remove the comments that the DXF
converter inserts into the contour program.
270
Layer settings
As a rule, DXF files contain multiple layers, with which the designer
organizes the drawing. The designer uses the layers to create groups
of various types of elements, such as the actual workpiece contour,
dimensions, auxiliary and design lines, shadings, and texts.
So that as little unnecessary information as possible appears on the
screen during selection of the contours, you can hide all excessive
layers contained in the DXF file.
The DXF file to be processed must contain at least one
layer.
You can even select a contour if the designer has saved it
on different layers.
U
If it has not already been activated, select the mode

for the layer settings. In the left window the TNC
shows all layers contained in the active DXF file
To hide a layer, select the layer with the left mouse

button, and click its check box to hide it
To show a layer, select the layer with the left mouse

button, and click its check box again to show it
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
271
Specifying the reference point

The datum of the drawing for the DXF file is not always located in a
manner that lets you use it directly as a reference point for the
workpiece. Therefore, the TNC has a function with which you can shift
the drawing datum to a suitable location by clicking an element.
You can define a reference point at the following locations:
At the beginning, end or center of a straight line
At the beginning or end of a circular arc
At the transition between quadrants or at the center of a complete
circle
At the intersection between:
A straight line and a straight line, even if the intersection is actually
on the extension of one of the lines
A straight line and circular arc
A straight line and full circle
A circle and circle (regardless of whether a circular arc or a full
circle)
You must use the touchpad on the TNC keyboard or a
mouse attached via the USB port in order to specify a
reference point.
You can also change the reference point once you have
already selected the contour. The TNC does not calculate
the actual contour data until you save the selected
contour in a contour program.
272
Selecting a reference point on a single element

U Select the mode for specifying the reference point
U
Click the element on which you want to set the

reference point with the left mouse button. The TNC
indicates possible locations for reference points on
the selected element with stars
Click the star you want to select as reference point.

The TNC sets the reference-point symbol to the
selected location. Use the zoom function if the
selected element is too small
Selecting a reference point on the intersection of two elements

U Select the mode for specifying the reference point
U
Click the first element (straight line, complete circle or

circular arc) with the left mouse button. The TNC
indicates possible locations for reference points on
the selected element with stars
Click the second element (straight line, complete

circle or circular arc) with the left mouse button. The
TNC sets the reference-point symbol on the
intersection
The TNC calculates the intersection of two elements even

if it is on the extension of one of these elements.
If the TNC calculates multiple intersections, it selects the
intersection nearest the mouse-click on the second
element.
If the TNC cannot calculate an intersection, it rescinds the
marking of the first element.
Element information
At the bottom left of the screen, the TNC shows how far the reference
point you haven chosen is located from the drawing datum.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
273
Selecting and saving a contour

mouse attached via the USB port in order to select a
contour.
If you are not using the contour program in the smarT.NC
operating mode, you must specify the machining
sequence when selecting the contour that it matches the
desired machining direction.
Select the first contour element such that approach
without collision is possible.
If the contour elements are very close to one another, use
the zoom function.
U
Select the mode for choosing a contour. The TNC

hides the layers shown in the left window, and the
right window becomes active for contour selection.
To select a contour element, click the desired contour

element with the left mouse button. The selected
contour element turns blue. At the same time, the
TNC marks the selected element with a symbol
(circle or line) in the left window.
To select the next contour element, click the desired

contour element with the left mouse button. The
selected contour element turns blue. If further
contour elements in the selected machining
sequence are clearly selectable, these elements turn
green. Click on the last green element to assume all
elements into the contour program. The TNC shows
all selected contour elements in the left window. The
TNC displays elements that are still green in the NC
column without a check mark. The TNC does not save
these elements to the contour program. You can also
include the marked elements in the contour program
by clicking in the left window
If necessary you can also deselect elements that you

already selected, by clicking the element in the right
window again, but this time while pressing the CTRL
key.
If you have selected polylines, the TNC shows a two-level

ID number in the left window. The first number is the
serial contour element number, the second element is the
element number of the respective polyline from the DXF
file.
274
To save the selected contour elements in a plainlanguage program, enter any file name in the pop-up
window displayed by the TNC. Default setting: Name
of the DXF file. If the name of the DXF file contains
special characters or spaces, the TNC replaces the
characters with underscores
Confirm the entry: The TNC saves the contour

program in the directory in which the DXF file is also
saved
If you want to select more contours: Press the

CANCEL SELECTED ELEMENTS soft key and select
the next contour as described above
The TNC also transfers two workpiece-blank definitions

(BLK FORM) to the contour program. The first definition
contains the dimensions of the entire DFX file. The
second one, which is the active one, contains only the
selected contour elements, so that an optimized size of
the workpiece blank results.
The TNC only saves elements that have actually been
selected (blue elements), which means that they have
been given a check mark in the left window.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
275
Dividing, extending and shortening contour elements

If contour elements to be selected in the drawing connect poorly, then
you must first divide the contour element. This function is
automatically available if you are in the mode for selecting a contour.
Proceed as follows:
U
U
U
U
U
The poorly connecting contour element is selected, so it is colored

blue.
Click the contour element to be divided: The TNC shows the point
of intersection with a star in a circle, and the selectable end points
with simple stars.
Press the CTRL key and click the point of intersection: The TNC
divides the contour element at the point of intersection and the stars
disappear. If there is a gap, or the elements overlap, the TNC
extends or shortens these poorly connecting contour element to the
point of intersection of the two elements.
Click the divided contour element again: The TNC shows the end
points and points of intersection again.
Click the desired end point: The TNC now colors the divided element
blue.
Select the next contour element.
If the contour element to be extended or shortened is a
straight line, then the TNC extends the contour element
along the same line. If the contour element to be
extended or shortened is a circular arc, then the TNC
extends/shortens the contour element along the same
arc.
In order to use this function, at least two contour
elements must already be selected, so that the direction
is clearly determined.
Element information
At the bottom left of the screen, the TNC displays information about
the contour element that you last selected via mouse click in the left
or right window.
Straight line
End point of the straight line, and the starting point is grayed out
Circle or arc
Circle center point, circle end point, and direction of rotation. Grayed
out: the starting point and circle radius
276
Selecting and storing machining positions

mouse attached via the USB port in order to select a
machining position.
If the positions to be selected are very close to one
another, use the zoom function.
If required, configure the basic settings so that the TNC
shows the tool paths (see Basic settings on page 270).
Three possibilities are available in the pattern generator for defining
machining positions:
Individual selection:
You select the desired machining position through individual mouse
clicks (see Individual selection on page 278)
Quick selection of hole positions in an area defined by the mouse:
By dragging the mouse to define an area, you can select all the hole
positions within it (see Quick selection of hole positions in an area
defined by the mouse on page 279)
Quick selection of hole positions by entering a diameter:
By entering a hole diameter, you can select all hole positions with
that diameter in the DXF file (see Quick selection of hole positions
by entering a diameter on page 280)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
277
Individual selection
U Select the mode for choosing a machining position.
The TNC hides the layers shown in the left window,
and the right window becomes active for position
selection.
278
In order to select a machining position, click the

desired element with the left mouse button. The TNC
indicates possible locations for machining positions
on the selected element with stars. Click one of the
stars: The TNC loads the selected position into the
left window (displays a point symbol). If you click a
circle, the TNC adopts the circle center as machining
position.

already selected, by clicking the element in the right
window again, but this time while pressing the CTRL
key (click inside the marked area).
If you want to specify the machining position at the

intersection of two elements, click the first element
with the right mouse button: the TNC displays stars
at the selectable machining positions.
Click the second element (straight line, complete

circle or circular arc) with the left mouse button. The
TNC loads the intersection of the elements into the
left window (displays a point symbol).
To save the selected machining positions in a points

file, enter any file name in the pop-up window
displayed by the TNC. Default setting: Name of the
DXF file. If the name of the DXF file contains special
characters or spaces, the TNC replaces the
characters with underscores.

saved.
If you want to select more machining positions in

order to save them in a different file, press the
as described above
Quick selection of hole positions in an area defined by the mouse

selection.
U
Press the shift key on the keyboard and drag the left
mouse key to define an area in which the TNC is to
adopt all included circle centers as hole positions: the
TNC opens a window in which you can filter the holes
by size.
Configure the filter settings (see Filter settings on

page 281) and click the Use button to confirm: The
TNC loads the selected positions into the left window
(displays a point symbol).

already selected, by dragging an area open again, but
this time while pressing the CTRL key.


saved.

as described above
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
279
Quick selection of hole positions by entering a diameter

selection.
280
Select the last soft-key row.
Open the dialog for diameter input: enter any diameter

in the pop-up window displayed by the TNC.
Enter the desired diameter and confirm it with the

ENT key: the TNC searches the DXF file for the
entered diameter and then shows a pop-up window
with the diameter selected that is closest to the
diameter you entered. Also, you can retroactively
filter the holes according to size.
If required, configure the filter settings (see Filter

settings on page 281) and click the Use button to
confirm: The TNC loads the selected positions into
the left window (displays a point symbol).

already selected, by dragging an area open again, but
this time while pressing the CTRL key.


saved.

as described above.
Filter settings
After you have used the quick selection function to mark hole
positions, a pop-up window appears in which the smallest diameter
found is to the left and the largest diameter to the right. With the
buttons just below the diameter display you can adjust the smallest
diameter in the left area and largest in the right area so that you can
load the hole diameters that you want.
The following buttons are available:
Filter setting of smallest diameter
Soft key
Display the smallest diameter found (default

setting)
Display the next smaller diameter found
Display the next larger diameter found
Display the largest diameter found. The TNC sets
the filter for the smallest diameter to the value
set for the largest diameter
Filter setting of largest diameter
Soft key
Display the smallest diameter found. The TNC

sets the filter for the largest diameter to the value
set for the smallest diameter
Display the next smaller diameter found
Display the next larger diameter found
Display the largest diameter found (default
setting)
With the apply path optimization option on (default setting), the TNC
sorts the selected machining positions for the most efficient possible
tool path. You can have the tool path displayed by clicking the SHOW
TOOL PATH soft key (see Basic settings on page 270).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
281
Element information
At the bottom left of the screen, the TNC displays the coordinates of
the machining position that you last selected via mouse click in the left
or right window.
Undoing actions
You can undo the four most recent actions that you have taken in the
mode for selecting machining positions. The last soft key row provides
the following soft keys for this purpose:
Function
Soft key
Undo the most recently conducted action

Repeat the most recently conducted action
282
Zoom function
The TNC features a powerful zoom function for easy recognition of
small details during contour or point selection.
Function
Soft key
Magnify workpiece. The TNC always magnifies

the center of the view currently being displayed.
Use the scroll bars to position the drawing in the
window so that the desired section appears after
the soft key has been pressed.
Reduce workpiece
Show workpiece at original size
Move zoomed area upward
Move zoomed area downward
Move zoomed area to the left
Move zoomed area to the right
If you have a wheel mouse, you can use it to zoom in and

out. The zooming center is the location of the mouse
pointer.
Alternatively you can zoom by selecting a zoom area with
the left mouse button.
A double-click with the right mouse button resets the
view to the default setting.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
283
7.2 Data transfer from plain-language programs
7.2 Data transfer from plainlanguage programs

Application
Using this function you can take contour sections or complete
contours from existing plain-language programs, especially those
created with CAM systems. The TNC shows the plain-language
dialogs in two-dimensional or three-dimensional form.
It is particularly efficient to use data transfer in conjunction with the
smartWizard, which provides contour editing UNITs for 2-D and 3-D
processing.
Open plain-language file

U
Select the Programming and Editing operating mode
In order to see the soft-key menu for selecting the file

type to be displayed, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
In order to show all plain-language files, press the

SHOW H soft key
Select the directory in which the file is saved
Select the desired H file
Use the CTRL+O key combination to select the

Open with... dialog
Select Open with Converter, confirm with the ENT

key and the TNC opens the plain-language file and
shows contour elements in graphical form
Define a reference point; select and save

contours
Setting the reference point and selecting the contours is identical to
data transfer from the DXF file:
See "Specifying the reference point" on page 272
See "Selecting and saving a contour" on page 274
284
7.3 Open 3-D CAD data (software option)
7.3 Open 3-D CAD data

(software option)
Application
A new function allows you to open standardized 3-D CAD data formats
directly on the TNC. It is irrelevant whether the file is available on the
hard disk of the iTNC or a connected drive.
The file can simply be selected via the file manager of the TNC, just
like NC programs or other files. This permits you to check quickly and
simply for problems directly in the 3-D model. .
The TNC currently supports the following types of file formats:
STEP files (file extension STP)
IGES files (file extension IGS or IGES)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
285
7.3 Open 3-D CAD data (software option)
Operate CAD viewer

Function
Soft key
Show shaded model.

Show wire model
Show wire model without invisible edges
Adapt display size to screen size
Select standard 3-D view
Select plan view
Select view from below
Select view from left
Select view from right
Select view from front
Select view from behind
Mouse functions
The following functions are available for mouse operation:
U
U
U
In order to rotate the wire model shown in three dimensions you

hold the right mouse button down and move the mouse. After you
release the right mouse button, the TNC orients the model to the
defined orientation
In order to shift the model shown: Hold the center mouse button or
the wheel button down and move the mouse. The TNC shifts the
model in the corresponding direction. After you release the center
mouse button, the TNC shifts the model to the defined position.
286
Programming:
Subprograms and
Program Section
Repeats
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
287
8.1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
8.1 Labeling Subprograms and

Program Section Repeats
Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a
machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired.
Labels
The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are
marked in a part program by labels (LBL).
A LABEL is identified by a number between 1 and 999 or by a name
you define. Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once
in the program with the LABEL SET. The number of label names you
can enter is only limited by the internal memory.
If a label name or number is set more than once, the TNC
sends an error message at the end of the LBL block. With
very long programs, you can limit the number of blocks to
be checked for repeated labels with MP7229.
Label 0 (LBL 0) is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram
and can therefore be used as often as desired.
288
Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
8.2 Subprograms
8.2 Subprograms
Operating sequence
1
2
3
The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which a

subprogram is called with CALL LBL
The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end. The
subprogram end is marked LBL 0
The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the
subprogram call CALL LBL
Programming notes
A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms
You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired
A subprogram cannot call itself
Write subprograms at the end of the main program (behind the block
with M2 or M30)
If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30, they
will be executed at least once even if they are not called
Programming a subprogram
U
To mark the beginning, press the LBL SET key
Enter the subprogram number. If you want to use a

label name, press the LBL NAME soft key to switch
to text entry
To mark the end, press the LBL SET key and enter the
label number 0
Calling a subprogram
U
To call a subprogram, press the LBL CALL key.
Call subprogram /repeat: Enter the label number of

the subprogram you wish to call. If you want to use a
to text entry If you want to enter the number of a
string parameter as target address: Press the QS soft
key; the TNC will then jump to the label name that is
specified in the string parameter defined.
Repeat REP: Ignore the dialog question with the NO

ENT key. Repeat REP is used only for program
section repeats.
CALL LBL 0 is not permitted (Label 0 is only used to mark

the end of a subprogram).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
289
8.3 Program Section Repeats
8.3 Program Section Repeats

Label LBL
The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label LBL.
The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL n REPn.
Operating sequence
1
2
3
0 BEGIN PGM ...
The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program
section (CALL LBL n REPn)
Then the program section between the called LBL CALL LBL n REPn
is repeated the number of times entered for REP
The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition
LBL1
2
2/1
2/2
CALL LBL 1 REP 2

3
Programming notes
END PGM ...
You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession

The total number of times the program section is executed is always
one more than the programmed number of repeats
Programming a program section repeat

U
To mark the beginning, press the LBL SET key and

enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you
wish to repeat. If you want to use a label name, press
the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry
Enter the program section
Calling a program section repeat
290
Press the LBL CALL key.
Call subprogram /repeat: Enter the label number of

the subprogram you wish to call. If you want to use a
to text entry. If you want to enter the number of a
string parameter as target address: Press the QS soft
key; the TNC will then jump to the label name that is
specified in the string parameter defined.
Repeat REP: Enter the number of repeats, then

confirm with the ENT key.
Operating sequence
If you want to program variable program calls in
connection with string parameters, use the SEL PGM
function (see "Define program call" on page 446)
1
2
3
The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which

another program is called with CALL PGM
Then the other program is run from beginning to end
The TNC then resumes the first (calling) part program with the
block after the program call
Programming notes
0 BEGIN PGM A
1
0 BEGIN PGM B
S
2
CALL PGM B
3
END PGM A
END PGM B
No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram

The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions
M2 or M30. If you have defined subprograms with labels in the
called program, you can then use M2 or M30 with the FN 9: IF +0
EQU +0 GOTO LBL 99 jump function to force a jump over this program
section
The called program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling
program, otherwise an infinite loop will result
Calling any program as a subprogram

U
To select the functions for program call, press the

PGM CALL key.
Press the PROGRAM soft key.
Press the WINDOW SELECTION soft key: The TNC

superimposes a window where you can select the
program to be called.
Select a program with the arrow keys or by mouse

click and confirm by pressing ENT: The TNC enters
the complete path name in the CALL PGM block.
Conclude this function with the END key.
Alternatively you can also enter the program name or the complete
path name of the program to be called directly via the keyboard.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
291
8.4 Separate Program as Subprogram
8.4 Separate Program as

Subprogram
8.4 Separate Program as Subprogram
The program you are calling must be stored on the hard

disk of your TNC.
You need only enter the program name if the program you
want to call is located in the same directory as the program
you are calling it from.
If the called program is not located in the same directory
as the program you are calling it from, you must enter the
complete path, e.g. TNC:\ZW35\SCHRUPP\PGM1.H or you can
select the program via the WINDOW SELECTION soft
key.
If you want to call a DIN/ISO program, enter the file type .I
after the program name.
You can also call a program with 12 PGM CALL.
As a rule, Q parameters are effective globally with a PGM
CALL. So please note that changes to Q parameters in the
called program can also influence the calling program.
Coordinate transformations that you define in the called
program remain in effect for the calling program too,
unless you reset them. The setting of machine parameter
MP7300 has no influence on this.
292
8.5 Nesting
8.5 Nesting
Types of nesting
Subprograms within a subprogram
Program section repeats within a program section repeat
Subprograms repeated
Program section repeats within a subprogram
Nesting depth
The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which
program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or
subprograms.
Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 8
Maximum nesting depth for main program calls: 10, where a CYCL
CALL acts like a main program call
You can nest program section repeats as often as desired
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
293
8.5 Nesting
Subprogram within a subprogram

Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM SUBPGMS MM
...
Call the subprogram marked with LBL SP1
17 CALL LBL "SP1"

...
Last program block of the
35 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2
main program (with M2)

Beginning of subprogram SP1
36 LBL "SP1"
...
Call the subprogram marked with LBL 2
39 CALL LBL 2
...
45 LBL 0
End of subprogram 1
46 LBL 2
Beginning of subprogram 2
...
End of subprogram 2
62 LBL 0
63 END PGM SUBPGMS MM
Program execution
1 Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17.
2 Subprogram SP1 is called, and executed up to block 39
3 Subprogram 2 is called, and executed up to block 62. End of
subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it
was called
4 Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45. End of
subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS
5 Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block
35. Return jump to block 1 and end of program
294
8.5 Nesting
Repeating program section repeats

Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM REPS MM
...
15 LBL 1
Beginning of program section repeat 1
...
20 LBL 2
...
27 CALL LBL 2 REP 2
The program section between LBL 2 and this block
...
(block 20) is repeated twice
35 CALL LBL 1 REP 1
...
(block 15) is repeated once
50 END PGM REPS MM

%REPS G71 *
...
N15 G98 L1 *
...
N20 G98 L2 *
...
N27 L2,2 *
Program section between this block and G98 L2
...
(block N20) is repeated twice
N35 L1,1 *
Program section between this block and G98 L1
...
(block N15) is repeated once
N99999999 %REPS G71 *

Program execution
1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27.
2 Program section between block 20 and block 27 is repeated twice
3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35.
4 Program section between block 15 and block 35 is repeated once
(including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27)
5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 (end of
program).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
295
8.5 Nesting
Repeating a subprogram
Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM SUBPGREP MM
...
10 LBL 1
11 CALL LBL 2
Subprogram call
12 CALL LBL 1 REP 2
...
(block 10) is repeated twice
19 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2
Last block of the main program with M2
20 LBL 2
Beginning of subprogram
...
End of subprogram
28 LBL 0
29 END PGM SUBPGREP MM
Program execution
1 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11.
2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed.
3 Program section between block 10 and block 12 is repeated twice.
Subprogram 2 is repeated twice.
4 Main program SPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19. End
of program.
296
8.6 Programming Examples

Example: Milling a contour in several infeeds
Program sequence
Pre-position the tool to the workpiece surface
Enter the infeed depth in incremental values
Contour milling
Repeat infeed and contour-milling
Y
100
5
R1
75
30
R18
R15
20
20
50
75
100
0 BEGIN PGM PGMREP MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
5 L X-20 Y+30 R0 FMAX
Pre-position in the working plane
6 L Z+0 R0 FMAX M3
Pre-position to the workpiece surface
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
297
7 LBL 1
Set label for program section repeat
8 L IZ-4 R0 FMAX
Infeed depth in incremental values (in space)
9 APPR CT X+2 Y+30 CCA90 R+5 RL F250
Contour approach
Contour
11 FLT
13 FLT
15 FLT
16 FCT DR- R18 CLSD- CCX+20 CCY+30
Contour departure
18 L X-20 Y+0 R0 FMAX
Retract tool
19 CALL LBL 1 REP 4
Return jump to LBL 1; section is repeated a total of 4 times
20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
21 END PGM PGMREP MM
298
Example: Groups of holes

Program sequence
Approach the groups of holes in the main
program
Call the group of holes (subprogram 1)
Program the group of holes only once in
subprogram 1
Y
100
2
60
5
20
20
10
15
45
75
100
0 BEGIN PGM SP1 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
Cycle definition: drilling
Q200=2
;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-10
;DEPTH
Q206=250
;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5
;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0
;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0
;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=10
;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
299
6 L X+15 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3
Move to starting point for group 1
7 CALL LBL 1
Call the subprogram for the group
8 L X+45 Y+60 R0 FMAX
9 CALL LBL 1
10 L X+75 Y+10 R0 FMAX
11 CALL LBL 1
12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
End of main program
13 LBL 1
Beginning of subprogram 1: Group of holes
14 CYCL CALL
Hole 1
15 L IX+20 R0 FMAX M99
Move to 2nd hole, call cycle
16 L IY+20 R0 FMAX M99
Move to 3rd hole, call cycle
17 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99
Move to 4th hole, call cycle
18 LBL 0
End of subprogram 1
19 END PGM SP1 MM
300
Example: Group of holes with several tools

Program sequence
Program the fixed cycles in the main program
Call the entire hole pattern (subprogram 1)
Approach the groups of holes in subprogram
1, call group of holes (subprogram 2)
Program the group of holes only once in
subprogram 2
100
2
60
5
10
15
20
20
45
75
100
-15
-20
0 BEGIN PGM SP2 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
Call tool: center drill
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
Cycle definition: CENTERING
Q200=2
;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-3
;DEPTH
Q206=250
Q202=3
;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0
;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0
;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=10
Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH

6 CALL LBL 1
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern
301
Tool change
Call tool: drill
9 FN 0: Q201 = -25
New depth for drilling
10 FN 0: Q202 = +5
New plunging depth for drilling
11 CALL LBL 1
12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M6
Tool change
Call tool: reamer
14 CYCL DEF 201 REAMING
Cycle definition: REAMING
Q200=2
;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-15
;DEPTH
Q206=250
Q211=0.5
Q208=400
;RETRACTION FEED RATE
Q203=+0
;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=10
15 CALL LBL 1
16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
End of main program
17 LBL 1
Beginning of subprogram 1: Entire hole pattern
18 L X+15 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3
19 CALL LBL 2
Call subprogram 2 for the group
20 L X+45 Y+60 R0 FMAX
21 CALL LBL 2
22 L X+75 Y+10 R0 FMAX
23 CALL LBL 2
24 LBL 0
End of subprogram 1
25 LBL 2
Beginning of subprogram 2: Group of holes
26 CYCL CALL
1st hole with active fixed cycle
27 L IX+20 R0 FMAX M99
Move to 2nd hole, call cycle
28 L IY+20 R0 FMAX M99
Move to 3rd hole, call cycle
29 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99
Move to 4th hole, call cycle
30 LBL 0
End of subprogram 2
31 END PGM SP2 MM
302
Programming:
Q-Parameters
9.1 Principle and Overview

You can program entire families of parts in a single part program. You
do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed
numerical values.
Q parameters can represent information such as:
Q6
Coordinate values
Feed rates
Spindle speeds
Cycle data
Q1
Q3
Q4
Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined

with mathematical functions. You can also use Q parameters to make
the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions. In
conjunction with FK programming you can also combine contours that
do not have NC-compatible dimensions with Q parameters.
Q2
Q5
Q parameters are designated by letters and a number between 0 and

1999. Parameters that take effect in different manners are available.
Please refer to the following table:
Meaning
Range
Freely applicable parameters, as long as no

overlapping with SL cycles can occur, globally
effective for all programs stored in the TNC
memory
Q0 to Q99
Parameters for special TNC functions
Q100 to Q199
Parameters that are primarily used for cycles,

globally effective for all programs stored in
the TNC memory
Q200 to Q1199
Parameters that are primarily used for OEM

cycles, and are globally effective for all
programs stored in the TNC memory. This
may require coordination with the machine
manufacturer or supplier
Q1200 to Q1399
Parameters that are primarily used for callactive OEM cycles, globally effective for all
programs that are stored in the TNC memory
Q1400 to Q1499
Parameters that are primarily used for Defactive OEM cycles, globally effective for all
programs that are stored in the TNC memory
Q1500 to Q1599
304
Range
Freely applicable parameters, globally

effective for all programs stored in the TNC
memory
Q1600 to Q1999
Freely usable QL parameters, only effective

locally (within a program)
QL0 to QL499
Freely usable QR parameters that are

nonvolatile, i.e. they remain in effect even
after a power interruption
QR0 to QR499
Meaning
QS parameters (the S stands for string) are also available on the TNC
and enable you to process texts. In principle, the same ranges are
available for QS parameters as for Q parameters (see table above).
Note that for the QS parameters the QS100 to QS199 range
is reserved for internal texts.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
305
Programming notes
You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a
program.
Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 999 999 999
and +999 999 999, meaning that up to nine digits plus the algebraic
sign are permitted. You can set the decimal point at any position.
Internally, the TNC can calculate up to a range of 57 bits before and
7 bits after the decimal point (32-bit data width corresponds to a
decimal value of 4 294 967 296).
You can assign a maximum of 254 characters to QS parameters.
Some Q and QS parameters are always assigned the
same data by the TNC. For example, Q108 is always
assigned the current tool radius (see "Preassigned Q
Parameters", page 353).
If you are using the parameters Q60 to Q99 in encoded
OEM cycles, use MP7251 to define whether the
parameters are only to be used locally in the OEM cycles
(.CYC file), or can be used globally for all programs.
With MP7300 you specify whether the TNC should reset
Q parameters at the end of the program, or if the values
should be saved. Make sure that this setting does not
have any effect on your Q parameter programs!
306
Calling Q-parameter functions

When you are writing a part program, press the Q key (in the
numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection, below the +/
key). The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Function group
Soft key
Page
Basic arithmetic (assign, add,

subtract, multiply, divide, square
root)
Page 309
Trigonometric functions
Page 311
Function for calculating circles
Page 313
If/then conditions, jumps
Page 314
Other functions
Page 317
Entering formulas directly
Page 338
Function for machining complex

contours
Cycles
Manual
Function for string processing
Page 342
The TNC opens the dialog for formula entry directly when
you press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard.
In order to define or assign QL local parameters, first press
the Q key in any dialog, and then press the L on the ASCII
keyboard.
In order to define or assign QR nonvolatile parameters, first
press the Q key in any dialog, and then press the R on the
ASCII keyboard.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
307
9.2 Part FamiliesQ Parameters in Place of Numerical Values
9.2 Part FamiliesQ Parameters in

Place of Numerical Values
Function
The Q parameter function FN 0: ASSIGN assigns numerical values to
Q parameters. This enables you to use variables in the program
instead of fixed numerical values.
Example NC blocks
15 FN O: Q10=25
Assignment
...
Q10 is assigned the value

25
25
L X +Q10
Means L X +25
You need write only one program for a whole family of parts, entering
the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters.
To program a particular part, you then assign the appropriate values to
the individual Q parameters.
Example
Cylinder with Q parameters
Cylinder radius
Cylinder height
Cylinder Z1
Cylinder Z2
R = Q1
H = Q2
Q1 = +30
Q2 = +10
Q1 = +10
Q2 = +50
Q1
Q1
Q2
Q2
308
Z2
Z1
9.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations
9.3 Describing Contours through

Mathematical Operations
Function
The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic
mathematical functions in a part program:
U
Select a Q-parameter function: Press the Q key (in the numerical

keypad at right). The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft
key row
To select the mathematical functions, press the BASIC
ARITHMETIC soft key. The TNC then displays the following soft
keys:
Overview
Function
Soft key
FN 0: ASSIGN
Example: FN 0: Q5 = +60
Assigns a numerical value.
FN 1: ADDITION
Example: FN 1: Q1 = -Q2 + -5
Calculates and assigns the sum of two values.
FN 2: SUBTRACTION
Example: FN 2: Q1 = +10 - +5
Calculates and assigns the difference of two values.
FN 3: MULTIPLICATION
Example: FN 3: Q2 = +3 * +3
Calculates and assigns the product of two values.
FN 4: DIVISION
Example: FN 4: Q4 = +8 DIV +Q2
Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values.
Not permitted: Division by 0
FN 5: SQUARE ROOT
Example: FN 5: Q20 = SQRT 4
Calculates and assigns the square root of a number.
Not permitted: Calculating the square root of a
negative value!
To the right of the = character you can enter the following:
Two numbers
Two Q parameters
A number and a Q parameter
The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be
entered with positive or negative signs.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
309
9.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations
Programming fundamental operations

Example: Program blocks in the TNC
Example:
16 FN 0: Q5 = +10
Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key
17 FN 3: Q12 = +Q5 * +7
To select the mathematical functions, press the

BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key
To select the Q parameter function ASSIGN, press

the FN0 X = Y soft key
PARAMETER NO. FOR RESULT?
5
Enter the number of the Q parameter, e.g. 5
1. VALUE OR PARAMETER?
10
Assign the value 10 to Q5
Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key
To select the mathematical functions, press the

BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key
To select the Q parameter function

MULTIPLICATION, press the FN3 X * Y soft key
12
Enter the number of the Q parameter, e.g. 12
Q5
Enter Q5 for the first value
7
310
Enter 7 for the second value
9.4 Trigonometric Functions

Definitions
Sine, cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of
right triangles. In this case:
Sine:
Cosine:
Tangent:
sin = a / c
cos = b / c
tan = a / b = sin / cos
c
where
c is the side opposite the right angle
a is the side opposite the angle
b is the third side.
The TNC can find the angle from the tangent:

= arc tan (a / b) = arc tan (sin / cos )
Example:
a = 25 mm
b = 50 mm
= arctan (a / b) = arctan 0.5 = 26.57
Furthermore:
a + b = c (where a = a x a)
c =
(a + b)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
311
Programming trigonometric functions

Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the trigonometric
functions. The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Programming: Compare Example: Programming fundamental
operations.
Function
Soft key
FN 6: SINE
Example: FN 6: Q20 = SIN-Q5
Calculates and assigns the sine of an angle in
degrees ()
FN 7: COSINE
Example: FN 7: Q21 = COS-Q5
Calculates and assigns the cosine of an angle in
degrees ()
FN 8: ROOT SUM OF SQUARES
Example: FN 8: Q10 = +5 LEN +4
Calculates and assigns length from two values
FN 13: ANGLE
Example: FN 13: Q20 = +25 ANG-Q1
Calculates the angle from the arc tangent of two sides
or from the sine and cosine of the angle (0 < angle <
360) and assigns it to a parameter
312
9.5 Circle Calculations
9.5 Circle Calculations

Function
The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the
circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the
circle. The calculation is more accurate if four points are used.
Application: These functions can be used if you wish to determine the
location and size of a hole or a pitch circle using the programmable
probing function.
Function
Soft key
FN 23: Determining the CIRCLE DATA from three

points
Example: FN 23: Q20 = CDATA Q30
The coordinate pairs of three points on a circle must be saved in Q30
and the following five parametersin this case, up to Q35.
The TNC then saves the circle center of the reference axis (X if spindle
axis is Z) in parameter Q20, the circle center in the minor axis (Y if
spindle axis is Z) in parameter Q21, and the circle radius in parameter
Q22.
Function
Soft key
FN 24: Determining the CIRCLE DATA from four

points
Example: FN 24: Q20 = CDATA Q30
The coordinate pairs of four points on a circle must be saved in Q30
and the following seven parametersin this case, up to Q37.
The TNC then saves the circle center of the reference axis (X if spindle
axis is Z) in parameter Q20, the circle center in the minor axis (Y if
spindle axis is Z) in parameter Q21, and the circle radius in parameter
Q22.
Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite the
resulting parameter and the two following parameters.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
313
9.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters
9.6 If-Then Decisions with

Q Parameters
Function
The TNC can make logical If-Then decisions by comparing a
Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value.
If the condition is fulfilled, the TNC continues the program at the label
that is programmed after the condition (for information on labels, see
"Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats", page 288). If it
is not fulfilled, the TNC continues with the next block.
To call another program as a subprogram, enter a PGM CALL program
call after the block with the target label.
Unconditional jumps
An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump
whose condition is always true. Example:
FN 9: IF+10 EQU+10 GOTO LBL1
314
9.6 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters
Programming If-Then decisions

There are 3 possibilities to enter the jump address:
Label number, selectable via LBL NUMBER soft key
Label number, selectable via LBL NAME soft key
String number, selectable via QS soft key
Press the JUMP soft key to call the If-Then conditions. The TNC then
displays the following soft keys:
Function
Soft key
FN 9: IF EQUAL, JUMP
Example: FN 9: IF +Q1 EQU +Q3 GOTO LBL UPCAN25
If the two values or parameters are equal, jump to the
given label.
FN 10: IF UNEQUAL, JUMP
Example: FN 10: IF +10 NE Q5 GOTO LBL 10
If the two values or parameters are unequal, jump to
the given label.
FN 11: IF GREATER, JUMP
Example: FN 11: IF+Q1 GT+10 GOTO QS5
If the first value or parameter is greater than the
second, jump to the given label.
FN 12: IF LESS, JUMP
Example: FN 12: IF+Q5 LT+0 GOTO LBL ANYNAME
If the first value or parameter is less than the second,
jump to the given label.
Abbreviations used:
IF
EQU
NE
GT
LT
GOTO
:
:
:
:
:
:
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
If
Equals
Not equal
Greater than
Less than
Go to
315
9.7 Checking and Changing Q Parameters
9.7 Checking and Changing

Q Parameters
Procedure
You can check and edit Q parameters when writing, testing and
running programs in the Programming and Editing, Test Run, Program
Run Full Sequence, and Program Run Single Block modes.
U
If you are in a program run, interrupt it if required (for example, by

pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft
key). If you are in a test run, interrupt it
U To call Q parameter functions: Press the Q key or the
Q INFO soft key in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation.
U
The TNC lists all parameters and their current values.

With the arrow keys or the soft keys, go pagewise to
the desired parameters.
If you would like to change the value, enter a new

value and confirm with the ENT key.
To leave the value unchanged, press the PRESENT

VALUE soft key or end the dialog with the END key.
The parameters used internally or by the TNC in cycles are

provided with comments.
If you want to check or edit local, global or string
parameters, press the SHOW PARAMETERS Q QL QR QS
soft key. The TNC then displays all respective parameters
and the above described also apply.
316
9.8 Additional Functions

Overview
Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional
functions. The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Function
Soft key
Page
FN 14:ERROR
Output of error messages
Page 318
FN 15:PRINT
Unformatted output of texts or
Q parameter values
Page 322
FN 16:F-PRINT
Formatted output of texts or Q parameter
values
Page 323
FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ

Read system data
Page 327
FN 19:PLC
Send values to the PLC
Page 334
FN 20:WAIT FOR
Synchronize NC and PLC
Page 335
FN 25:PRESET
Set the datum during program run
Page 337
FN 26:TABOPEN
Open a freely definable table
Page 464
FN 27:TABWRITE
Write to a freely definable table
Page 465
FN 28:TABREAD
Read from a freely definable table
Page 466
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
317
FN 14: ERROR: Displaying error messages

With the function FN 14: ERROR you can call messages under program
control. The messages are predefined by the machine tool builder or
by HEIDENHAIN. Whenever the TNC comes to a block with FN 14 in
the Program Run or Test Run mode, it interrupts the program run and
displays a message. The program must then be restarted. The error
numbers are listed in the table below.
Range of error numbers
Standard dialog text
0 ... 299
FN 14: Error code 0 .... 299
300 ... 999
Machine-dependent dialog
1000 ... 1099
Internal error messages (see table

at right)
Example NC block
The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254:
180 FN 14: ERROR = 254
Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN
Error number
Text
1000
Spindle?
1001
Tool axis is missing
1002
Tool radius too small
1003
Tool radius too large
1004
Range exceeded
1005
Start position incorrect
1006
ROTATION not permitted
1007
SCALING FACTOR not permitted
1008
MIRROR IMAGE not permitted
1009
Datum shift not permitted
1010
Feed rate is missing
1011
Input value incorrect
1012
Incorrect sign
1013
Entered angle not permitted
1014
Touch point inaccessible
1015
Too many points
318
Text
1016
Contradictory input
1017
CYCL incomplete
1018
Plane wrongly defined
1019
Wrong axis programmed
1020
Wrong rpm
1021
Radius comp. undefined
1022
Rounding-off undefined
1023
Rounding radius too large
1024
Program start undefined
1025
Excessive nesting
1026
Angle reference missing
1027
No fixed cycle defined
1028
Slot width too small
1029
Pocket too small
1030
Q202 not defined
1031
Q205 not defined
1032
Q218 must be greater than Q219
1033
CYCL 210 not permitted
1034
CYCL 211 not permitted
1035
Q220 too large
1036
1037
Q244 must be greater than 0
1038
Q245 must not equal Q246
1039
Angle range must be < 360
1040
1041
Q214: 0 not permitted
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Error number
319
Error number
Text
1042
Traverse direction not defined
1043
No datum table active
1044
Position error: center in axis 1
1045
Position error: center in axis 2
1046
Hole diameter too small
1047
Hole diameter too large
1048
Stud diameter too small
1049
Stud diameter too large
1050
Pocket too small: rework axis 1.A.
1051
Pocket too small: rework axis 2.A.
1052
Pocket too large: scrap axis 1.A.
1053
Pocket too large: scrap axis 2.A.
1054
Stud too small: scrap axis 1.A.
1055
Stud too small: scrap axis 2.A.
1056
Stud too large: rework axis 1.A.
1057
Stud too large: rework axis 2.A.
1058
TCHPROBE 425: length exceeds max
1059
TCHPROBE 425: length below min
1060
TCHPROBE 426: length exceeds max
1061
TCHPROBE 426: length below min
1062
TCHPROBE 430: diameter too large
1063
TCHPROBE 430: diameter too small
1064
No measuring axis defined
1065
Tool breakage tolerance exceeded
1066
Enter Q247 unequal to 0
1067
Enter Q247 greater than 5
1068
Datum table?
1069
Enter Q351 unequal 0
1070
Thread depth too large
320
Text
1071
Missing calibration data
1072
Tolerance exceeded
1073
Block scan active
1074
ORIENTATION not permitted
1075
3-D ROT not permitted
1076
Activate 3-D ROT
1077
Enter a negative value for the depth
1078
Q303 not defined in measuring cycle
1079
Tool axis not allowed
1080
Calculated values incorrect
1081
Contradictory measuring points
1082
Clearance height entered incorrectly
1083
Contradictory type of plunging
1084
Machining cycle not permitted
1085
Line is write-protected
1086
Oversize greater than depth
1087
No point angle defined
1088
Contradictory data
1089
Slot position 0 not permitted
1090
Enter infeed unequal to 0
1091
Switchover of Q399 not allowed
1092
Tool not defined
1093
Tool number not permitted
1094
Tool name not allowed
1095
Software option not active
1096
Kinematics cannot be restored
1097
Function not permitted
1098
Contradictory workpc. blank dim.
1099
Measuring position not allowed
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Error number
321
Error number
Text
1100
Kinematic access not possible
1101
Meas. pos. not in traverse range
1102
Preset compensation not possible
FN 15: PRINT: Output of texts or Q parameter

values
Setting the data interface: In the menu option PRINT or
PRINT-TEST, you must enter the path for storing the texts
or Q parameters. See Assignment on page 648.
The function FN 15: PRINT transfers Q parameter values and error
messages through the data interface, for example to a printer. When
you save the data in the TNC memory or transfer them to a PC, the
TNC stores the data in the file %FN 15RUN.A (output in program run
mode) or in the file %FN15SIM.A (output in test run mode).
The data are transmitted from a buffer. Data output begins at the latest
by program end or when you stop the program. In the Single Block
mode of operation, data transfer begins at block end.
To output dialog texts and error messages with FN 15: PRINT
numerical value
Numerical values from 0 to 99: Dialog texts for OEM cycles
Numerical values 100 and above: PLC error messages
Example: Output of dialog text 20
67 FN 15: PRINT 20
Outputting dialog texts and Q parameters with FN 15: PRINT
Q parameter
Application example: Recording workpiece measurement.
You can transfer up to six Q parameters and numerical values
simultaneously. The TNC separates them with slashes.
Example: Output of dialog text 1 and numerical value for Q1
70 FN 15: PRINT1/Q1
322
FN 16: F-PRINT: Formatted output of text and

Q-parameter values
Setting the data interface: In the menu option PRINT or
PRINT-TEST, you must enter the path for storing the text
file. See Assignment on page 648.
With FN 16, you can also output to the screen any
messages from the NC program. Such messages are
displayed by the TNC in a pop-up window.
The function FN 16: F-PRINT transfers Q parameter values and texts
in a selectable format through the data interface, for example to a
printer. If you save the values internally or send them to a computer,
the TNC saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block.
To output the formatted texts and Q parameter values, create a text
file with the TNCs text editor. In this file you then define the output
format and Q parameters you want to output.
Example of a text file to define the output format:
MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY;
DATE: %2d-%2d-%4d,DAY,MONTH,YEAR4;
TIME: %2d:%2d:%2d,HOUR,MIN,SEC;
NO. OF MEASURED VALUES : = 1;
X1 = %9.3LF, Q31;
Y1 = %9.3LF, Q32;
Z1 = %9.3LF, Q33;
When you create a text file, use the following formatting functions:
Special
characters
Function
...........
Define output format for texts and variables

between the quotation marks
%9.3LF
Define format for Q parameter:

9 total characters (incl. decimal point), of which
3 are after the decimal, Long, Floating (decimal
number)
%S
Format for text variable
Separation character between output format

and parameter
End of block character
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
323
The following functions allow you to include the following additional

information in the protocol log file:
Keyword
Function
CALL_PATH
Gives the path for the NC program where you

will find the FN16 function. Example:
Measuring program: %S,CALL_PATH;
M_CLOSE
Closes the file to which you are writing with

FN16. Example: M_CLOSE;
ALL_DISPLAY
Outputs Q parameter values regardless of

MM/INCH setting of the MOD function
MM_DISPLAY
Outputs Q parameter values in millimeters, if

MM display is set in the MOD function
INCH_DISPLAY
Converts Q parameter values to inches if INCH

display is set in the MOD function
L_ENGLISH
Display text only in English conversational
L_GERMAN
Display text only in German conversational
L_CZECH
Display text only in Czech conversational
L_FRENCH
Display text only in French conversational
L_ITALIAN
Display text only in Italian conversational
L_SPANISH
Display text only in Spanish conversational
L_SWEDISH
Display text only in Swedish conversational
L_DANISH
Display text only in Danish conversational
L_FINNISH
Display text only in Finnish conversational
L_DUTCH
Display text only in Dutch conversational
L_POLISH
Display text only in Polish conversational
L_PORTUGUE
Display text only in Portuguese conversational
L_HUNGARIA
Display text only in Hungarian conversational
L_RUSSIAN
Display text only in Russian conversational
L_SLOVENIAN
Display text only in Slovenian conversational
L_ALL
Display text independently of the

conversational language
HOUR
Number of hours from the real-time clock
MIN
Number of minutes from the real-time clock
SEC
Number of seconds from the real-time clock
324
Function
DAY
Day from the real-time clock
MONTH
Month as a number from the real-time clock
STR_MONTH
Month as a string abbreviation from the realtime clock
YEAR2
Two-digit year from the real-time clock
YEAR4
Four-digit year from the real-time clock
Keyword
In the part program, program FN 16: F-PRINT to activate the

output:
96 FN 16:
F-PRINT TNC:\MASKE\MASKE1.A/RS232:\PROT1.A
The TNC then outputs the file PROT1.A through the serial interface:
MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY
DATE: 27:11:2001
TIME: 8:56:34
NO. OF MEASURED VALUES : = 1
X1 = 149.360
Y1 = 25.509
Z1 = 37.000
The output file is not stored until the TNC reads the END
PGM block, or you press the NC stop button, or you close
the file with M_CLOSE.
In the FN 16 block, program the format file and the log file
with their respective extensions.
If you enter only the file name for the path of the log file,
the TNC saves the log file in the directory in which the NC
program with the FN 16 function is located.
You can output up to 32 Q parameters per line in the
format description file.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
325
Displaying messages on the TNC screen

You can also use the function FN 16 to display any messages from the
NC program in a pop-up window on the TNC screen. This makes it
easy to display explanatory texts, including long texts, at any point in
the program in a way that the user has to react to it. You can also
display Q parameter contents if the protocol description file contains
such instructions.
For the message to appear on the TNC screen, you need only enter
SCREEN: as the name of the protocol file.
96 FN 16:
F-PRINT TNC:\MASKE\MASKE1.A/SCREEN:
If the message has more lines than fit in the pop-up window, you can
use the arrow keys to page in the window.
To close the pop-up window, press the CE key. To have the program
close the window, program the following NC block:
96 FN 16:
F-PRINT TNC:\MASKE\MASKE1.A/SCLR:
All the previously described conventions apply to the

protocol description file.
If you output to the screen more than one text in the
program, the TNC appends all texts to the end of the text
already displayed. To display each text individually on the
screen, program the function M_CLOSE at the end of the
Exporting messages
You can also use the FN 16 function in the NC program in order to
externally save the files generated with FN 16. Two possibilities are
available for this:
Enter the complete target path in the FN 16 function:
96 FN 16:
F-PRINT TNC:\MSK\MSK1.A / PC325:\LOG\PRO1.TXT
Specify the target path in the MOD function under Print or PrintTest if you always want to save to the same directory on the server
(see also Assignment on page 648):
96 FN 16:
F-PRINT TNC:\MSK\MSK1.A / PRO1.TXT
All the previously described conventions apply to the

If you output the same file more than once in the program,
the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts already
output within the target file.
326
With the function FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ you can read system data
and store it in Q parameters. You select the system data through a
group name (ID number), and additionally through a number and an
index.
Group name, ID no.
Number
Index
Meaning
Program information, 10
mm/inch condition
Overlap factor for pocket milling
Number of the active fixed cycle
Number of the active machining cycle (for cycles with

numbers greater than 200)
Active tool number
Prepared tool number
Active tool axis

0=X, 1=Y, 2=Z, 6=U, 7=V, 8=W
Programmed spindle speed
Active spindle status: 1=undefined, 0=M3 active,

1=M4 active, 2=M5 after M3, 3=M5 after M4
Coolant status: 0=off, 1=on
Active feed rate
10
Index of prepared tool
11
Index of active tool
15
Number of logical axis

0=X, 1=Y, 2=Z, 3=A, 4=B, 5=C, 6=U, 7=V, 8=W
17
Number of the current traverse range (0, 1, 2)
Set-up clearance of active fixed cycle
Drilling depth / milling depth of active fixed cycle
Plunging depth of active fixed cycle
Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle
1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle
2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle
1st side length for slot cycle
2nd side length for slot cycle
Radius for circular pocket cycle
Machine status, 20
Cycle parameter, 30
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
327
FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ: Read system data
Group name, ID no.
Data from the tool table, 50
328
Number
Index
Meaning
10
Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle
11
Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle
12
Dwell time for active fixed cycle
13
Thread pitch for Cycles 17, 18
14
Milling allowance for active fixed cycle
15
Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle
Tool no.
Tool length
Tool no.
Tool radius
Tool no.
Tool radius R2
Tool no.
Oversize for tool length DL
Tool no.
Oversize for tool radius DR
Tool no.
Oversize for tool radius DR2
Tool no.
Tool inhibited (0 or 1)
Tool no.
Number of the replacement tool
Tool no.
Maximum tool age TIME1
10
Tool no.
Maximum tool age TIME2
11
Tool no.
Current tool age CUR. TIME
12
Tool no.
PLC status
13
Tool no.
Maximum tooth length LCUTS
14
Tool no.
Maximum plunge angle ANGLE
15
Tool no.
TT: Number of tool teeth CUT
16
Tool no.
TT: Wear tolerance for length LTOL
17
Tool no.
TT: Wear tolerance for radius RTOL
18
Tool no.
TT: Rotational direction DIRECT (0=positive/

1=negative)
19
Tool no.
TT: Offset in plane R-OFFS
20
Tool no.
TT: Offset for length L-OFFS
21
Tool no.
TT: Break tolerance for length LBREAK
22
Tool no.
TT: Break tolerance for RBREAK radius
23
Tool no.
PLC value
Number
Index
Meaning
24
Tool no.
TS: Center misalignment in reference axis
25
Tool no.
TS: Center misalignment in minor axis
26
Tool no.
TS: Spindle angle for calibration
27
Tool no.
Tool type for the pocket table
28
Tool no.
Maximum speed
Group name, ID no.
No index: Data of the currently active tool

Pocket table data, 51
Tool pocket, 52
File information, 56
Position programmed
immediately after TOOL CALL, 70
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Pocket number
Tool number
Pocket number
Special tool: 0=no, 1=yes
Pocket number
Fixed pocket: 0=no, 1=yes
Pocket number
Locked pocket: 0=no, 1=yes
Pocket number
PLC status
Pocket number
Tool type
7 to 11
Pocket number
Value from column P1 to P5
12
Pocket number
Pocket reserved: 0=no, 1=yes
13
Pocket number
Box magazine: Pocket above locked (0=no, 1=yes)
14
Pocket number
Box magazine: Pocket below locked (0=no, 1=yes)
15
Pocket number
Box magazine: Pocket to the left locked (0=no, 1=yes)
16
Pocket number
Box magazine: Pocket to the right locked (0=no,

1=yes)
Tool no.
Pocket number P
Tool no.
Tool magazine number
Number of lines in the tool table TOOL.T
Number of lines in the active datum table
Q parameter
number, as of
which the status
of the axes is
stored. +1: axis
active, -1: axis
inactive
Number of active axes that are programmed in the

active datum table
Position valid / invalid (0/0)
X axis
329
Group name, ID no.
Active tool compensation, 200
Active transformations, 210
Number
Index
Meaning
Y axis
Z axis
Programmed feed rate (1: no feed rate programmed)
Tool radius (including delta values)
Tool length (including delta values)
Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode
Programmed rotation with Cycle 10
Active mirror axis

0: mirroring not active
+1: X axis mirrored
+2: Y axis mirrored
+4: Z axis mirrored
+64: U axis mirrored
+128: V axis mirrored
+256: W axis mirrored
Combinations = sum of individual axes
Path tolerance, 214
330
Active scaling factor in X axis
Active scaling factor in Y axis
Active scaling factor in Z axis
Active scaling factor in U axis
Active scaling factor in V axis
Active scaling factor in W axis
3-D ROT A axis
3-D ROT B axis
3-D ROT C axis
Tilted working plane active / inactive (value not equal to

0/0) in a Program Run operating mode
Tilted working plane active / inactive (value not equal to

0/0) in a Manual operating mode
Tolerance programmed with cycle 32 or MP 1096
Number
Index
Meaning
Active datum shift, 220
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
A axis
B axis
C axis
U axis
V axis
W axis
1 to 9
Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9
1 to 9
Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
A axis
B axis
C axis
U axis
V axis
W axis
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
A axis
B axis
C axis
U axis
V axis
Traverse range, 230
Nominal position in the REF

system, 240
Current position in the active

coordinate system, 270
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Group name, ID no.
331
Group name, ID no.
Index
Meaning
W axis
0: M128 inactive, value not equal to 0: M128 active
Feed rate that was programmed with M128
116
128
144
Current system time of the TNC,

320
System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00

of January 1, 1970
Status of global program

settings GS, 331
0: No global program setting is active, 1: A global

program setting is active
1: Basic rotation active, otherwise 0
1: Swapping axes active, otherwise 0
1: Mirroring axes active, otherwise 0
1: Shifting active, otherwise 0
1: Rotation active, otherwise 0
1: Feed rate factor active, otherwise 0
1: Disabling axes active, otherwise 0
1: Handwheel superimposition active, otherwise 0
Value of basic rotation
1 to 9 (X to W)
Provides the index of the axis on which the queried

axis was swapped: 1=X, 2=Y, 3=Z, 4=Y, 5=B, 6=C,
7=U, 8=V, 9=W
1 to 9 (X to W)
Provides 1 if the queried axis is mirrored
1 to 9 (X to W)
Supplies the shift value of the queried axis
Provides the active rotation angle
Provides the active value of the feed-rate override
1 to 9 (X to W)
Provides 1 if the queried axis is disabled
1 to 10 (X to VT)
Provides the max. value of the handwheel

superimposition in the queried axis
1 to 10 (X to VT)
Provides the actual value of the handwheel

superimposition in the queried axis
Status of M128, 280
Status of M116, 310
Values from global program

settings GS, 332
332
Number
Group name, ID no.
Number
Index
Meaning
TS triggering touch probe, 350
10
Touch probe axis
11
Effective ball radius
12
Effective length
13
Radius setting ring
14
Center offset (reference axis)
Center offset (minor axis)
15
Direction of center misalignment compared with 0

position
20
Center point X axis (REF system)
Center point Y axis (REF system)
Center point Z axis (REF system)
21
Probe contact radius
1 to 9
Position in the active coordinate system in axes 1 to 9
1 to 9
Position in the REF system in axes 1 to 9
TT tool touch probe
Last touch point in TCH PROBE

Cycle 0 or last touch point from
manual operating mode, 360
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
333
Group name, ID no.
Number
Index
Meaning
Value from the active datum

table in the active coordinate
Datum
number
1 to 9
X axis to W axis
REF value from the active datum

table, 501
Datum
number
1 to 9
X axis to W axis
Read value from the preset

table, considering the machine
kinematics, 502
Preset
number
1 to 9
X axis to W axis
Read value directly from the

preset table, 503
Preset
number
1 to 9
X axis to W axis
Read basic rotation from the

preset table, 504
Preset
number
Basic rotation from the ROT column
Datum table selected, 505
Return code = 0: No datum table active

Return code not equal to 0: Datum table active
Data from the active pallet table,

510
Active line
Palette number from PAL/PGM field
Current line of the pallet table
Last line of the NC program of the current pallet
MP
number
MP index
Return value = 0: MP does not exist

Return code not equal to 0: MP exists
Existence of machine
parameter, 1010
Example: Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z
axis to Q25.
55 FN 18: SYSREAD Q25 = ID210 NR4 IDX3
FN 19: PLC: Transfer values to the PLC

The function FN 19: PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q
parameters to the PLC.
Increments and units: 0.1 m or 0.0001
Example: Transfer the numerical value 10 (which means 1 m or
0.001) to the PLC
56 FN 19: PLC=+10/+Q3
334
FN 20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC synchronization

This function may only be used with the permission of
your machine tool builder.
With the FN 20: WAIT FOR function you can synchronize the NC and
PLC during a program run. The NC stops machining until the condition
that you have programmed in the FN 20 block is fulfilled. The TNC can
check the following PLC operands:
PLC
operand
Abbreviation
Address range
Marker
0 to 4999
Input
0 to 31, 128 to 152

64 to 126 (first PL 401 B)
192 to 254 (second PL 401 B)
Output
0 to 30
32 to 62 (first PL 401 B)
64 to 94 (second PL 401 B)
Counter
48 to 79
Timer
0 to 95
Byte
0 to 4095
Word
0 to 2047
Double
word
2048 to 4095
In an FN20 block you can define a condition with a

maximum length of 128 characters.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
335
The following conditions are permitted in the FN 20 block:

Condition
Abbreviation
Equals
==
Less than
<
Greater than
>
Less than or equal
<=
Greater than or equal
>=
In addition, the FN20: WAIT FOR SYNC function is available. WAIT FOR
SYNC is used whenever you read, for example, system data via FN18
that require synchronization with real time. The TNC stops the lookahead calculation and executes the subsequent NC block only when
the NC program has actually reached that block.
Example: Stop program run until the PLC sets marker 4095 to 1
32 FN 20: WAIT FOR M4095==1
Example: Pause internal look-ahead calculation, read current
position in the X axis
32 FN 20: WAIT FOR SYNC
33 FN 18: SYSREAD Q1 = ID270 NR1 IDX1
336
FN 25: PRESET: Setting a new datum

This function can only be programmed if you have entered
the code number 555343 (see "Entering Code Numbers",
page 645).
With the function FN 25: PRESET it is possible to set a new datum in
an axis of your choice during program run.
U
U
U
U
U
U
Select a Q-parameter function: Press the Q key (in the numerical

keypad at right). The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft
key row
To select the additional functions, press the DIVERSE FUNCTIONS
soft key
Select FN 25: Switch the soft-key row to the second level and press
the FN 25 DATUM SET soft key
Axis?: Enter the axis where you wish to set the new datum and
confirm with ENT
Value to be calculated?: Enter the coordinate for the new datum
point in the active coordinate system
New datum?: Enter the coordinate that the value to be converted
should have in the new coordinate system
Example: Set a new datum at the current coordinate X+100

56 FN 25: PRESET = X/+100/+0
Example: The current coordinate Z+50 will have the value 20 in
the new coordinate system
56 FN 25: PRESET = Z/+50/-20
With the miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate

the datum that was last set in the Manual Operation mode
(see Activating the most recently entered datum: M104
on page 372).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
337
9.9 Entering Formulas Directly

Entering formulas
You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations
directly into the part program by soft key.
Press the FORMULA soft key to call the mathematical functions. The
TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft-key rows:
Soft key
Addition
Example: Q10 = Q1 + Q5
Subtraction
Example: Q25 = Q7 Q108
Multiplication
Example: Q12 = 5 * Q5
Division
Example: Q25 = Q1 / Q2
Opening parenthesis
Example: Q12 = Q1 * (Q2 + Q3)
Closing parenthesis
Example: Q12 = Q1 * (Q2 + Q3)
Square of a value
Example: Q15 = SQ 5
Square root
Example: Q22 = SQRT 25
Sine of an angle
Example: Q44 = SIN 45
Cosine of an angle
Example: Q45 = COS 45
Tangent of an angle
Example: Q46 = TAN 45
Arc sine
Inverse of the sine. Determines the angle from the
ratio of the side opposite the hypotenuse.
Example: Q10 = ASIN 0.75
Arc cosine
Inverse of the cosine. Determines the angle from the
ratio of the side adjacent to the hypotenuse.
Example: Q11 = ACOS Q40
338
Soft key
Arc tangent
Inverse of the tangent. Determines the angle from the
ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side.
Example: Q12 = ATAN Q50
Powers of values
Example: Q15 = 3^3
Constant pi (3.14159)
Example: Q15 = PI
Natural logarithm (LN) of a number
Base 2.7183
Example: Q15 = LN Q11
Logarithm of a number, base 10
Example: Q33 = LOG Q22
Exponential function, 2.7183 to the power of n
Example: Q1 = EXP Q12
Negate (multiplication by 1)
Example: Q2 = NEG Q1
Truncate decimal places
Form an integer
Example: Q3 = INT Q42
Absolute value of a number
Example: Q4 = ABS Q22
Truncate places before the decimal point
Form a fraction
Example: Q5 = FRAC Q23
Check algebraic sign of a number
Example: Q12 = SGN Q50
If result for Q12 = 1, then Q50 >= 0
If result for Q12 = 1, then Q50 < 0
Calculate modulo value (division remainder)
Example: Q12 = 400 % 360
Result: Q12 = 40
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
339
Rules for formulas

Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following
rules:
Higher-level operations are performed first
12
Q1 = 5 * 3 + 2 * 10 = 35
1st calculation: 5 * 3 = 15
2ndcalculation: 2 * 10 = 20
3rdcalculation: 15 + 20 = 35
or
13
Q2 = SQ 10 - 3^3 = 73
1st calculation: 10 squared = 100

2ndcalculation: 3 to the power of 3 = 27
3rdcalculation: 100 27 = 73
Distributive law
Law for calculating with parentheses
a * (b + c) = a * b + a * c
340
Programming example
Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side (Q12)
and adjacent side (Q13); then store in Q25.
To select the formula entering function, press the Q
key and the FORMULA soft key, or use the shortcut:
Press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard.

25
Enter the parameter number.
Shift the soft-key row and select the arc tangent

function.
Shift the soft-key row and open the parentheses.
12
Enter Q parameter number 12.
Select division.
13
Enter Q parameter number 13.
Close parentheses and conclude formula entry.
Example NC block
37
Q25 = ATAN (Q12/Q13)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
341
9.10 String Parameters

String processing functions
You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings.
You can output such character strings for example through the FN
16:F-PRINT function to create variable logs.
You can assign a linear sequence of characters (letters, numbers,
special characters and spaces) up to a length of 256 characters to a
string parameter. You can also check and process the assigned or
imported values by using the functions described below. As in Qparameter programming, you can use a total of 2000 QS parameters
(see also Principle and Overview on page 304).
The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA Q parameter functions
contain various functions for processing the string parameters.
STRING FORMULA functions
Soft key
Page
Assigning string parameters
Page 343
Chain-linking string parameters
Page 343
Converting a numerical value to a string

parameter
Page 345
Copying a substring from a string

parameter
Page 346
Copying system data to a string

parameter
Page 347
FORMULA string functions
Soft key
Page
Converting a string parameter to a

numerical value
Page 349
Checking a string parameter
Page 350
Finding the length of a string parameter
Page 351
Comparing alphabetic priority
Page 352
When you use a STRING FORMULA, the result of the

arithmetic operation is always a string. When you use the
FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation
is always a numeric value.
342
Assigning string parameters

You have to assign a string variable before you use it. Use the DECLARE
STRING command to do so.
U
Show the soft-key row with special functions.
Select the menu for defining various plain-language

functions
Select string functions
Select the DECLARE STRING function
Example NC block:
37 DECLARE STRING QS10 = WORKPIECE
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
343
Chain-linking string parameters

With the concatenation operator (string parameter ||) you can make a
chain of two or more string parameters.
U
Show the soft-key row with special functions

functions
Select string functions
Select the STRING FORMULA function
Enter the number of the string parameter in which the

TNC is to save the concatenated string. Confirm with
the ENT key

first substring is saved. Confirm with the ENT key:
The TNC displays the concatenation symbol ||
Confirm your entry with the ENT key

second substring is saved. Confirm with the ENT key
Repeat the process until you have selected all the

required substrings. Conclude with the END key
Example: QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12, QS13 and

QS14
37 QS10 =
QS12 || QS13 || QS14
Parameter contents:
QS12: Workpiece
QS13: Status:
QS14: Scrap
QS10: Workpiece Status: Scrap
344
Converting a numerical value to a string

parameter
With the TOCHAR function, the TNC converts a numerical value to a
string parameter. This enables you to chain numerical values with
string variables.
U
Select Q parameter functions
Select the function for converting a numerical value to

a string parameter
Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be

converted, and confirm with the ENT key
If desired, enter the number of decimal places that the

TNC should convert, and confirm with the ENT key
Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key

and confirm your entry with the END key
Example: Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11, use

3 decimal places
37 QS11 = TOCHAR ( DAT+Q50 DECIMALS3 )
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
345
Copying a substring from a string parameter

With the SUBSTR function you can copy a definable range from a string
parameter.
U
Select Q-parameter functions

TNC is to save the copied string. Confirm with the
ENT key
Select the function for cutting out a substring
Enter the number of the QS parameter from which the

substring is to be copied. Confirm with the ENT key
Enter the number of the place starting from which to

copy the substring, and confirm with the ENT key
Enter the number of characters to be copied, and


Remember that the first character of a text sequence

starts internally with the zeroth place.
Example: A four-character substring (LEN4) is read from the

string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character (BEG2)
37 QS13 = SUBSTR ( SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 )
346
Copying system data to a string parameter

With the SYSSTR function you can copy system data to a string
parameter. At present only reading of the system time is available.
U

TNC is to save the copied string. Confirm with the
ENT key
Select the function for copying system data
Enter the Number of the system key (ID321 for the

system time) that you want to copy, and confirm with
the ENT key
Enter the Index for system key. It defines the format

for the system time to be output. Confirm with the
ENT key (see description below)
Array index of the source to be read has no

function yet. Confirm with the NO ENT key
Number to be converted to text has no function yet.

Confirm with the NO ENT key

This function is prepared for future expansions. The

parameters IDX and DAT currently have no function.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
347
You can use the following formats to display the date:

00: DD.MM.YYYY hh:mm:ss
01: D.MM.YYYY h:mm:ss
02: D.MM.YYYY h:mm
03: D.MM.YY h:mm
04: YYYY-MM-DD- hh:mm:ss
05: YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm
06: YYYY-MM-DD h:mm
07: YY-MM-DD h:mm
08: DD.MM.YYYY
09: D.MM.YYYY
10: D.MM.YY
11: YYYY-MM-DD
12: YY-MM-DD
13: hh:mm:ss
14: h:mm:ss
15: h:mm
Example: read out the current system time in the format
DD.MM.YYYY hh:mm:ss, and save it in parameter QS13.
37 QS13 = SYSSTR ( ID321 NR0)
348
Converting a string parameter to a numerical

value
The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value.
The value to be converted should be only numerical.
The QS parameter must contain only one numerical value.
Otherwise the TNC will output an error message.
Select the FORMULA function

TNC is to save the numerical value. Confirm with the
ENT key
Shift the soft-key row
Select the function for converting a string parameter

to a numerical value
Enter the number of the Q parameter to be converted,


Example: Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical

parameter Q82
37 Q82 = TONUMB ( SRC_QS11 )
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
349
Checking a string parameter

With the INSTR function you can check whether a string parameter is
contained in another string parameter.
U
Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the

TNC is to save the place at which the search text
begins. Confirm with the ENT key
Select the function for checking a string parameter
Enter the number of the QS parameter in which the

searched-for text is saved. Confirm with the ENT key
Enter the number of the QS parameter to be

searched, and confirm with the ENT key
Enter the number of the place starting from which the

TNC is to search the substring, and confirm with the
ENT key

Remember that the first character of a text sequence

starts internally with the zeroth place.
If the TNC cannot find the required substring, it will save
the total length of the string to be searched (counting
starts at 1) in the result parameter.
If the substring is found in more than one place, the TNC
returns the first place at which it finds the substring.
Example: Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter
QS13. Begin the search at the third place.
37 Q50 = INSTR ( SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2 )
350
Finding the length of a string parameter

The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable
string parameter.
U

TNC is to save the ascertained string length. Confirm
with the ENT key
Select the function for finding the text length of a

string parameter
Enter the number of the QS parameter whose length

the TNC is to ascertain, and confirm with the ENT key

Example: Find the length of QS15

37 Q52 = STRLEN ( SRC_QS15 )
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
351
Comparing alphabetic priority

With the STRCOMP function you can compare string parameters for
alphabetic priority.
U

TNC is to save the result of comparison. Confirm with
the ENT key
Select the function for comparing string parameters
Enter the number of the first QS parameter to be

compared, and confirm with the ENT key
Enter the number of the second QS parameter to be

compared, and confirm with the ENT key

The TNC returns the following results:

0: The compared QS parameters are identical.
+1: The first QS parameter precedes the second QS
parameter alphabetically.
1: The first QS parameter follows the second QS
parameter alphabetically.
Example: QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority
37 Q52 = STRCOMP ( SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 )
352
9.11 Preassigned Q Parameters

The Q parameters Q100 to Q199 are assigned values by the TNC. The
following are assigned to Q parameters:
Values from the PLC
Tool and spindle data
Data on operating status
Results of measurements from touch probe cycles etc.
Do not use preassigned Q parameters (or QS parameters)
between Q100 and Q199 (QS100 and QS199) as calculation
parameters in NC programs. Otherwise you might receive
undesired results.
Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107

The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from
the PLC to an NC program.
WMAT block: QS100

The TNC saves the material defined in the WMAT block in parameter
QS100.
Active tool radius: Q108

The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108. Q108 is
calculated from:
Tool radius R (tool table or TOOL DEF block)
Delta value DR from the tool table
Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block
The TNC remembers the current tool radius even if the
power is interrupted.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
353
Tool axis: Q109

The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis:
Tool axis
Parameter value
No tool axis defined
Q109 = 1
X axis
Q109 = 0
Y axis
Q109 = 1
Z axis
Q109 = 2
U axis
Q109 = 6
V axis
Q109 = 7
W axis
Q109 = 8
Spindle status: Q110

The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last
programmed for the spindle.
M function
Parameter value
No spindle status defined
Q110 = 1
M3: Spindle ON, clockwise
Q110 = 0
M4: Spindle ON, counterclockwise
Q110 = 1
M5 after M3
Q110 = 2
M5 after M4
Q110 = 3
Coolant on/off: Q111

M function
Parameter value
M8: Coolant ON
Q111 = 1
M9: Coolant OFF
Q111 = 0
Overlap factor: Q112

The overlap factor for pocket milling (MP7430) is assigned to Q112.
354
Unit of measurement for dimensions in the

program: Q113
During nesting the PGM CALL, the value of the parameter Q113
depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other
programs are called.
Dimensional data of the main program
Parameter value
Metric system (mm)
Q113 = 0
Inch system (inches)
Q113 = 1
Tool length: Q114

The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114.
The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114. Q114 is
calculated from:
The tool length L (tool table or TOOL DEF block)
Delta value DL from the tool table
Delta value DL from the TOOL CALL block
The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the
power is interrupted.
Coordinates after probing during program run

The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle
position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement
with the 3-D touch probe. The coordinates refer to the datum point
that is active in the Manual operating mode.
The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tip are not
compensated in these coordinates.
Coordinate axis
Parameter value
X axis
Q115
Y axis
Q116
Z axis
Q117
4th Axis
depending on MP100
Q118
5th axis
depending on MP100
Q119
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
355
Deviation between actual value and nominal

value during automatic tool measurement with
the TT 130
Deviation of actual from nominal value
Parameter value
Tool length
Q115
Tool radius
Q116
Tilting the working plane with mathematical

angles: rotary axis coordinates calculated by the
TNC
Coordinates
Parameter value
A axis
Q120
B axis
Q121
C axis
Q122
356
Measurement results from touch probe cycles

(see also Users Manual for Touch Probe Cycles)
Measured actual values
Parameter value
Angle of a straight line
Q150
Center in the reference axis
Q151
Center in the minor axis
Q152
Diameter
Q153
Pocket length
Q154
Pocket width
Q155
Length of the axis selected in the cycle
Q156
Position of the centerline
Q157
Angle of the A axis
Q158
Angle of the B axis
Q159
Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle
Q160
Measured deviation
Parameter value
Center in reference axis
Q161
Center in the minor axis
Q162
Diameter
Q163
Pocket length
Q164
Pocket width
Q165
Measured length
Q166
Position of the centerline
Q167
Determined space angle
Parameter value
Rotation about the A axis
Q170
Rotation about the B axis
Q171
Rotation about the C axis
Q172
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
357
Workpiece status
Parameter value
Good
Q180
Rework
Q181
Scrap
Q182
Measured deviation with Cycle 440
Parameter value
X axis
Q185
Y axis
Q186
Z axis
Q187
Markers for cycles
Q188
Tool measurement with the BLUM laser
Parameter value
Reserved
Q190
Reserved
Q191
Reserved
Q192
Reserved
Q193
Reserved for internal use
Parameter value
Markers for cycles
Q195
Markers for cycles
Q196
Markers for cycles (machining patterns)
Q197
Number of the last active measuring cycle
Q198
Status of tool measurement with TT
Parameter value
Tool within tolerance
Q199 = 0.0
Tool is worn (LTOL/RTOL is exceeded)
Q199 = 1.0
Tool is broken (LBREAK/RBREAK is

exceeded)
Q199 = 2.0
358

Example: Ellipse
Program sequence
The contour of the ellipse is approximated by
many short lines (defined in Q7). The more
calculation steps you define for the lines, the
smoother the curve becomes.
The machining direction can be altered by
changing the entries for the starting and end
angles in the plane:
Clockwise machining direction:
starting angle > end angle
Counterclockwise machining direction:
starting angle < end angle
The tool radius is not taken into account.
30
50
50
50
0 BEGIN PGM ELLIPSE MM

1 Q1 = +50
Center in X axis
2 Q2 = +50
Center in Y axis
3 Q3 = +50
Semiaxis in X
4 Q4 = +30
Semiaxis in Y
5 Q5 = +0
Starting angle in the plane
6 Q6 = +360
End angle in the plane
7 Q7 = +40
Number of calculation steps
8 Q8 = +0
Rotational position of the ellipse
9 Q9 = +5
Milling depth
10 Q10 = +100
Feed rate for plunging
11 Q11 = +350
Feed rate for milling
12 Q12 = +2
Set-up clearance for pre-positioning
13 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
17 CALL LBL 10
Call machining operation
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
359
18 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2
19 LBL 10
Subprogram 10: Machining operation
20 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
Shift datum to center of ellipse
21 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+Q1

22 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2
23 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION
Account for rotational position in the plane
24 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+Q8

25 Q35 = (Q6 - Q5) / Q7
Calculate angle increment
26 Q36 = Q5
Copy starting angle
27 Q37 = 0
Set counter
28 Q21 = Q3 * COS Q36
Calculate X coordinate for starting point
29 Q22 = Q4 * SIN Q36
Calculate Y coordinate for starting point
30 L X+Q21 Y+Q22 R0 FMAX M3
Move to starting point in the plane
31 L Z+Q12 R0 FMAX
Pre-position in spindle axis to set-up clearance
32 L Z-Q9 R0 FQ10
33 LBL 1
34 Q36 = Q36 + Q35
Update the angle
35 Q37 = Q37 + 1
Update the counter
36 Q21 = Q3 * COS Q36
Calculate the current X coordinate
37 Q22 = Q4 * SIN Q36
Calculate the current Y coordinate
38 L X+Q21 Y+Q22 R0 FQ11
Move to next point
39 FN 12: IF +Q37 LT +Q7 GOTO LBL 1
Unfinished? If not finished, return to LBL 1
Reset the rotation
41 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+0

Reset the datum shift
43 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0

44 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
45 L Z+Q12 R0 FMAX
Move to set-up clearance
46 LBL 0
End of subprogram
47 END PGM ELLIPSE MM
360
Example: Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter

Program sequence
This program functions only with a spherical
cutter. The tool length refers to the sphere
center.
The contour of the cylinder is approximated by
many short line segments (defined in Q13). The
more line segments you define, the smoother
the curve becomes.
The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts (here:
parallel to the Y axis).
The machining direction can be altered by
changing the entries for the starting and end
angles in space:
Clockwise machining direction:
starting angle > end angle
Counterclockwise machining direction:
starting angle < end angle
The tool radius is compensated automatically.
Z
R4
-50
100
50
100
0 BEGIN PGM CYLIN MM

1 Q1 = +50
Center in X axis
2 Q2 = +0
Center in the Y axis
3 Q3 = +0
Center in Z axis
4 Q4 = +90
Starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
5 Q5 = +270
End angle in space (Z/X plane)
6 Q6 = +40
Cylinder radius
7 Q7 = +100
Length of the cylinder
8 Q8 = +0
Rotational position in the X/Y plane
9 Q10 = +5
Allowance for cylinder radius
10 Q11 = +250
Feed rate for plunging
11 Q12 = +400
12 Q13 = +90
Number of cuts
13 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-50
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
17 CALL LBL 10
18 FN 0: Q10 = +0
Reset allowance
19 CALL LBL 10
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
361
20 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2
21 LBL 10
22 Q16 = Q6 - Q10 - Q108
Account for allowance and tool, based on the cylinder radius
23 Q20 = +1
Set counter
24: Q24 = +Q4
Copy starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
25 Q25 = (Q5 - Q4) / Q13
Calculate angle increment
Shift datum to center of cylinder (X axis)

29 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+Q3
Account for rotational position in the plane

32 L X+0 Y+0 R0 FMAX
Pre-position in the plane to the cylinder center
33 L Z+5 R0 F1000 M3
Pre-position in the tool axis
34 LBL 1
35 CC Z+0 X+0
Set pole in the Z/X plane
36 LP PR+Q16 PA+Q24 FQ11
Move to starting position on cylinder, plunge-cutting obliquely into

the material
37 L Y+Q7 R0 FQ12
Longitudinal cut in Y+ direction
38 Q20 = +Q20 + +1
Update the counter
FN 39: Q24 = +Q24 + +Q25
Update solid angle
40 FN 11: IF +Q20 GT +Q13 GOTO LBL 99
Finished? If finished, jump to end
Move in an approximated arc for the next longitudinal cut
42 L Y+0 R0 FQ12
Longitudinal cut in Y direction
43 Q20 = +Q20 + +1
Update the counter
44: Q24 = +Q24 + +Q25
Update solid angle
Unfinished? If not finished, return to LBL 1
46 LBL 99
Reset the rotation

50 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0

51 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
52 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0
53 LBL 0
End of subprogram
54 END PGM CYLIN
362
Example: Convex sphere machined with end mill

Program sequence
100
R4
5
This program requires an end mill.

The contour of the sphere is approximated by
many short lines (in the Z/X plane, defined in
Q14). The smaller you define the angle
increment, the smoother the curve becomes.
You can determine the number of contour cuts
through the angle increment in the plane
(defined in Q18).
The tool moves upward in three-dimensional
cuts.
The tool radius is compensated automatically.
R4
50
50
100
-50
0 BEGIN PGM SPHERE MM

1 Q1 = +50
Center in X axis
2 Q2 = +50
Center in the Y axis
3 Q4 = +90
Starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
4 Q5 = +0
End angle in space (Z/X plane)
5 Q14 = +5
Stepping angle in space
6 Q6 = +45
Sphere radius
7 Q8 = +0
Starting angle of rotational position in the X/Y plane
8 Q9 = +360
End angle of rotational position in the X/Y plane
9 Q18 = +10
Angle increment in the X/Y plane for roughing
10 Q10 = +5
Allowance in sphere radius for roughing
11 Q11 = +2
Set-up clearance for pre-positioning in the tool axis
12 Q12 = +350
13 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-50
14 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0

Tool call
16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Retract the tool
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
363
17 CALL LBL 10
18 Q10 = +0
Reset allowance
19 Q18 = +5
Angle increment in the X/Y plane for finishing
20 CALL LBL 10
21 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2
22 LBL 10
23 Q23 = +Q11 + +Q6
Calculate Z coordinate for pre-positioning
24 Q24 = +Q4
Copy starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
25 Q26 = +Q6 + +Q108
Compensate sphere radius for pre-positioning
26 Q28 = +Q8
Copy rotational position in the plane
27 Q16 = +Q6 + -Q10
Account for allowance in the sphere radius
Shift datum to center of sphere

31 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z-Q16
Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane

34 LBL 1
Pre-position in the tool axis
35 CC X+0 Y+0
Set pole in the X/Y plane for pre-positioning
36 LP PR+Q26 PA+Q8 R0 FQ12
Pre-position in the plane
37 CC Z+0 X+Q108
Set pole in the Z/X plane, offset by the tool radius
38 L Y+0 Z+0 FQ12
364
Move upward in an approximated arc
41 Q24 = +Q24 - +Q14
Update solid angle
42 FN 11: IF +Q24 GT +Q5 GOTO LBL 2
Inquire whether an arc is finished. If not finished, return to LBL 2.
43 LP PR+Q6 PA+Q5
Move to the end angle in space
44 L Z+Q23 R0 F1000
Retract in the tool axis
45 L X+Q26 R0 FMAX
Pre-position for next arc
46 Q28 = +Q28 + +Q18
Update rotational position in the plane
47 Q24 = +Q4
Reset solid angle
Activate new rotational position

51 FN 9: IF +Q28 EQU +Q9 GOTO LBL 1
Unfinished? If not finished, return to label 1
Reset the rotation

55 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0

56 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
57 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0
58 LBL 0
End of subprogram
59 END PGM SPHERE MM
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
365
39 LBL 2

366
Programming:
Miscellaneous
Functions
10.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP
10.1 Entering Miscellaneous

Functions M and STOP
Fundamentals
With the TNC's miscellaneous functionsalso called M functions
you can affect
the program run, e.g., a program interruption
the machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and
coolant supply on and off
the path behavior of the tool
The machine tool builder may add some M functions that
are not described in this User's Manual. Refer to your
machine tool manual.
You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block
or in a separate block. The TNC displays the following dialog question:
Miscellaneous function M ?
You usually enter only the number of the M function in the
programming dialog. Some M functions can be programmed with
additional parameters. In this case, the dialog is continued for the
parameter input.
In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of
operation, the M functions are entered with the M soft key.
Please note that some M functions become effective at
the start of a positioning block, and others at the end,
regardless of their position in the NC block.
M functions come into effect in the block in which they are
called.
Some M functions are effective only in the block in which
they are programmed. Unless the M function is only
effective blockwise, either you must cancel it in a
subsequent block with a separate M function, or it is
automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the
program.
Entering an M function in a STOP block
If you program a STOP block, the program run or test run is interrupted
at the block, for example for tool inspection. You can also enter an M
function in a STOP block:
U
To program an interruption of program run, press the

STOP key.
Enter a miscellaneous function M
Example NC blocks
87 STOP M6
368
10.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant
10.2 Miscellaneous Functions for

Program Run Control, Spindle
and Coolant
Overview
M
Effect
M0
Stop program run

Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF
M1
Optional program STOP

Spindle STOP if necessary
Coolant OFF if necessary (not
effective during Test Run, function
determined by the machine tool
builder)
M2
STOP program run

Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF
Go to block 1
Clear the status display (depends on
MP7300)
M3
Spindle ON clockwise
M4
Spindle ON counterclockwise
M5
Spindle STOP
M6
Tool change
Spindle STOP
Program run STOP (depends on
MP7440)
M8
Coolant ON
M9
Coolant OFF
M13
Coolant ON
M14
Coolant ON
M30
Same as M2
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Effective at block...
Start
End
369
10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data

Coordinate Data
Programming machine-referenced coordinates:
M91/M92
Scale reference point
On the scale, a reference mark indicates the position of the scale
reference point.
Machine datum
The machine datum is required for the following tasks:
Defining the limits of traverse (software limit switches)
Moving to machine-referenced positions (such as tool change
positions)
Setting the workpiece datum
XMP
X (Z,Y)
The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the
machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine
parameter.
Standard behavior
The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum (see "Datum
Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe", page 565).
Behavior with M91Machine datum
If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to
the machine datum, end the block with M91.
If you program incremental coordinates in an M91 block,
enter them with respect to the last programmed M91
position. If no M91 position is programmed in the active
NC block, then enter the coordinates with respect to the
current tool position.
The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the
machine datum. Switch the display of coordinates in the status display
to REF (see "Status Displays", page 81).
370
Behavior with M92Additional machine datum

In addition to the machine datum, the machine tool builder
can also define an additional machine-based position as a
reference point.
For each axis, the machine tool builder defines the
distance between the machine datum and this additional
machine datum. Refer to the machine manual for more
information.
If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the
additional machine datum, end the block with M92.
Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are
programmed with M91 or M92. The tool length, however,
is not compensated.
Effect
M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are
programmed.
M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block.
Workpiece datum
If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine
datum, you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes.
If datum setting is inhibited for all axes, the TNC no longer displays the
SET DATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode.
The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and
workpiece datum.
M91/M92 in the Test Run mode
In order to be able to graphically simulate M91/M92 movements, you
need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece
blank referenced to the set datum (see "Showing the Workpiece in the
Working Space", page 660).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Z
Y
Y
X
X
M
371
Activating the most recently entered datum:

M104
Function
When processing pallet tables, the TNC may overwrite your most
recently entered datum with values from the pallet table. With M104
you can reactivate the original datum.
Effect
M104 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
M104 becomes effective at the end of block.
The TNC does not change the active basic rotation when
running the M104 function.
Moving to positions in a non-tilted coordinate

system with a tilted working plane: M130
Standard behavior with a tilted working plane
The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted
coordinate system.
Behavior with M130
The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted
coordinate system.
The TNC then positions the (tilted) tool to the programmed
coordinates of the untilted system.
Subsequent positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried
out in a tilted coordinate system. This can lead to problems
in fixed cycles with absolute pre-positioning.
The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working
plane function is active.
Effect
M130 functions blockwise in straight-line blocks without tool radius
compensation.
372
10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior

Contouring Behavior
Smoothing corners: M90
Standard behavior
The TNC stops the tool briefly in positioning blocks without tool radius
compensation. This is called an exact stop.
In program blocks with radius compensation (RR/RL), the TNC

automatically inserts a transition arc at outside corners.
Behavior with M90
The tool moves at corners with constant speed: This provides a
smoother, more continuous surface. Machining time is also reduced.
Application example: Surface consisting of a series of straight line
segments.
Effect
M90 becomes effective at the start of block. Operation with servo lag
must be active.
Insert rounding arc between straight lines: M112

Compatibility
For reasons of compatibility, the M112 function is still available.
However, to define the tolerance for fast contour milling,
HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of the TOLERANCE cycle (see
User's Manual for Cycles, section 32 TOLERANCE).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
373
Do not include points when executing noncompensated line blocks: M124

Standard behavior
The TNC runs all line blocks that have been entered in the active
program.
Behavior with M124
When running non-compensated line blocks with very small point
intervals, you can use parameter T to define a minimum point interval
up to which the TNC will not include points during execution.
Effect
M124 becomes effective at the start of block.
The TNC resets M124 if you enter M124 without the T parameter, or
if you select a new program.
Programming M124
If you enter M124 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
for this block by asking you the minimum distance between points T.
You can also define T through Q parameters (see Principle and
Overview on page 304).
374
Machining small contour steps: M97

Standard behavior
The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners. If the contour steps
are very small, however, the tool would damage the contour.
In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error
message Tool radius too large.
Behavior with M97

The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elementsas at
inside cornersand moves the tool over this point.
Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner.
Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful
function M120 LA (see Calculating the radiuscompensated path in advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120 on
page 381).
Effect
A corner machined with M97 will not be completely
finished. You may wish to rework the contour with a
smaller tool.
13
16
14
15
17
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
375
Example NC blocks
5 TOOL CALL 20 ...
Tool with large tool radius
...
13 L X... Y... R... F... M97
Move to contour point 13
14 L IY-0.5 ... R... F...
Machine small contour step 13 to 14
15 L IX+100 ...
16 L IY+0.5 ... R... F... M97
Machine small contour step 15 to 16
17 L X... Y...
376
Machining open contours corners: M98

Standard behavior
The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside
corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points.
If the contour is open at the corners, however, this will result in
incomplete machining.
Behavior with M98

With the miscellaneous function M98, the TNC temporarily suspends
radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely
machined:
Effect
M98 takes effect at the end of block.
Example NC blocks
Move to the contour points 10, 11 and 12 in succession:
10 L X... Y... RL F
11 L X... IY... M98
12 L IX+ ...
10
11
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
12
377
Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103

Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate, regardless
of the direction of traverse.
Behavior with M103
The feed rate reduction with M103 is only effective if bit 4
in MP7440 has been set to 1.
The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative
direction of the tool axis. The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is
calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor
F%:
FZMAX = FPROG x F%
Programming M103
by asking you the factor F.
Effect
To cancel M103, program M103 once again without a factor.
M103 is also effective in an active tilted working plane.
The feed rate reduction is then effective during traverse in
the negative direction of the tilted tool axis.
Example NC blocks
The feed rate for plunging is to be 20% of the feed rate in the plane.
...
Actual contouring feed rate (mm/min):
17 L X+20 Y+20 RL F500 M103 F20
500
18 L Y+50
500
19 L IZ-2.5
100
20 L IY+5 IZ-5
141
21 L IX+50
500
22 L Z+5
500
378
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution:

M136
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate F in mm/min.
Behavior with M136
In inch-programs, M136 is not permitted in combination
with the new alternate feed rate FU.
The spindle is not permitted to be controlled when M136
is active.
With M136, the TNC does not move the tool in mm/min, but rather at
the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution. If
you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override, the TNC
changes the feed rate accordingly.
Effect
You can cancel M136 by programming M137.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
379
Feed rate for circular arcs: M109/M110/M111

Standard behavior
The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool
center.
Behavior at circular arcs with M109
The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside
contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains
constant.
Caution: Danger to the workpiece and tool!
On very small outside corners the TNC may increase the
feed rate so much that the tool or workpiece cab be
damaged. Avoid M109 with small outside corners.
Behavior at circular arcs with M110
The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside
contours only. At outside contours, the feed rate is not adjusted.
M110 is also effective for the inside machining of circular
arcs using contour cycles (special case).
If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining cycle
with a number greater than 200, the adjusted feed rate is
also effective for circular arcs within these machining
cycles. The initial state is restored after finishing or
aborting a machining cycle.
Effect
M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block. To cancel
M109 and M110, enter M111.
380
Calculating the radius-compensated path in

advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120
Standard behavior
If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined
with radius compensation, the TNC interrupts program run and
generates an error message. M97 (see Machining small contour
steps: M97 on page 375) inhibits the error message, but this results
in dwell marks and will also move the corner.
If the programmed contour contains undercut features, the tool may
damage the contour.
Behavior with M120
The TNC checks radius-compensated paths for contour undercuts and
tool path intersections, and calculates the tool path in advance from
the current block. Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the
tool are not machined (dark areas in figure). You can also use M120 to
calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on
an external programming system. This means that deviations from the
theoretical tool radius can be compensated.
Use LA (Look Ahead) after M120 to define the number of blocks

(maximum: 99) that you want the TNC to calculate in advance. Note
that the larger the number of blocks you choose, the higher the block
processing time will be.
Input
for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be
calculated in advance.
Effect
M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius
compensation RL or RR. M120 is then effective from this block until
radius compensation is canceled with R0
M120 LA0 is programmed, or
M120 is programmed without LA, or
another program is called with PGM CALL
the working plane is tilted with Cycle 19 or the PLANE function
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
381
Restrictions
After an external or internal stop, you can only re-enter
the contour with the function RESTORE POS. AT N.
Before you start the block scan, you must cancel M120
(select program again via PGM MGT, do not use
GOTO 0), otherwise the TNC will output an error
message
When using the path functions RND and CHF, the blocks
before and after RND or CHF must contain only
coordinates in the working plane.
If you enter an LA value that is too great, the edited
contour might change, because the TNC might then
output too many NC blocks
If you want to approach the contour on a tangential
path, you must use the function APPR LCT. The block
with APPR LCT must contain only coordinates of the
working plane.
If you want to depart the contour on a tangential path,
use the function DEP LCT. The block with DEP LCT
must contain only coordinates of the working plane.
Before using the functions listed below, you have to
cancel M120 and the radius compensation:
Cycle 32 Tolerance
Cycle 19 Working plane
PLANE function
M114
M128
M138
M144
TCPM FUNCTION
WRITE TO KINEMATIC
382
Superimposing handwheel positioning during

program run: M118
Standard behavior
In the program run modes, the TNC moves the tool as defined in the
part program.
Behavior with M118
M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run.
Just program M118 and enter an axis-specific value (linear or rotary
axis) in millimeters.
Input
for this block by asking you the axis-specific values. The coordinates
are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII
keyboard.
Effect
Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again
without coordinate input.
Example NC blocks
You want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move
the tool in the working plane X/Y by 1 mm and in the rotary axis B by
5 from the programmed value:
L X+0 Y+38.5 RL F125 M118 X1 Y1 B5
M118 is always effective in the original coordinate system,

even if the working plane is tilted.
In a program with millimeters set as unit of measure, the
TNC interprets M118 values for linear axes in millimeters.
In an inch program it interprets it as inches.
M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation!
M118 in combination with DCM collision monitoring is
only possible in stopped condition (blinking control-inoperation symbol). If you try to move an axis during
handwheel superimposition, the TNC will generate an
error message.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
383
Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis

direction: M140
Standard behavior
In the program run modes, the TNC moves the tool as defined in the
part program.
Behavior with M140
With M140 MB (move back) you can enter a path in the direction of
the tool axis for departure from the contour.
Input
and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour. Enter
the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the
contour, or press the MB MAX soft key to move to the limit of the
traverse range.
In addition, you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses
the entered path. If you do not enter a feed rate, the TNC moves the
tool along the entered path at rapid traverse.
Effect
M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M140 becomes effective at the start of the block.
Example NC blocks
Block 250: Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour.
Block 251: Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range.
250 L X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M140 MB 50 F750
251 L X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M140 MB MAX
M140 is also effective if the tilted-working-plane function,

M114 or M128 is active. On machines with tilting heads,
the TNC then moves the tool in the tilted coordinate
system.
With the FN18: SYSREAD ID230 NR6 function you can find
the distance from the current position to the limit of the
traverse range in the positive tool axis.
With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in positive direction.
Always define a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before
entering M140, otherwise the direction of traverse is not
defined.
384
When dynamic collision monitoring (DCM) is active, the
TNC might move the tool only until it detects a collision
and, from there, complete the NC program without any
error message. This can result in tool paths different from
those programmed!
Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141

Standard behavior
When the stylus is deflected, the TNC outputs an error message as
soon as you attempt to move a machine axis.
Behavior with M141
The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is
deflected. This function is required if you wish to write your own
measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to
retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been
deflected.
If you use M141, make sure that you retract the touch
probe in the correct direction.
M141 functions only for movements with straight-line
blocks.
Effect
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
385
Delete modal program information: M142

Standard behavior
The TNC resets modal program information in the following situations:
Select a new program
Execute a miscellaneous function M2, M30, or an END PGM block
(depending on MP7300)
Defining cycles for basic behavior with a new value
Behavior with M142
All modal program information except for basic rotation, 3-D rotation
and Q parameters is reset.
The function M142 is not permitted during mid-program
startup.
Effect
Delete basic rotation: M143

Standard behavior
The basic rotation remains in effect until it is reset or is overwritten
with a new value.
Behavior with M143
The TNC erases a programmed basic rotation from the NC program.
The function M143 is not permitted during mid-program
startup.
Effect
386
Automatically retract tool from the contour at an

NC stop: M148
Standard behavior
At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements. The tool stops
moving at the point of interruption.
Behavior with M148
The M148 function must be enabled by the machine tool
builder.
The TNC retracts the tool by 0.1 mm in the direction of the tool axis if,
in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table, you set the parameter Y for the
active tool (see Tool table: Standard tool data on page 176).
LIFTOFF takes effect in the following situations:
An NC stop triggered by you
An NC stop triggered by the software, e.g. if an error occurred in the
drive system
When a power interruption occurs. The path that the TNC
withdraws if a power interruption occurs is set by your machine tool
builder in machine parameter 1160
Remember that, especially on curved surfaces, the
surface can be damaged during return to the contour. Back
the tool off before returning to the contour!
Effect
M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149.
M148 becomes effective at the start of block, M149 at the end of
block.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
387
Suppress limit switch message: M150

Standard behavior
The TNC stops program run with an error message if the tool were to
leave the active working space during a positioning block. The error
message is output before the positioning block is executed.
Behavior with M150
If the end point of a positioning block with M150 is outside the current
working space, the TNC moves the tool to the edge of the working
space, and then continues the program run without an error message.
Keep in mind that the approach path to the position
programmed after the M150 block might be changed
significantly!
M150 is also effective on traverse range limits defined
with the MOD function.
M150 is effective even if you have the handwheel
superimposition function active. The TNC then moves the
tool by the defined maximum value of the handwheel
superimposition away from the limit switch.
When dynamic collision monitoring (DCM) is active, the
TNC might move the tool only until it detects a collision
and, from there, complete the NC program without any
error message. This can result in tool paths different from
those programmed!
Effect
M150 is effective only in straight-line blocks and the block in which it
is programmed.
388
10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines

Laser Cutting Machines
Principle
The TNC can control the cutting efficiency of a laser by transferring
voltage values through the S-analog output. You can influence laser
efficiency during program run through the miscellaneous functions
M200 to M204.
Entering miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines
If you enter an M function for laser cutting machines in a positioning
block, the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the required
parameters for the programmed function.
All miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines become
effective at the start of the block.
Output the programmed voltage directly: M200

Behavior with M200
The TNC outputs the value programmed after M200 as the voltage V.
Input range: 0 to 9999 V
Effect
M200 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
Output voltage as a function of distance: M201

Behavior with M201
M201 outputs the voltage in dependence on the distance to be
covered. The TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly
to the value programmed for V.
Input range: 0 to 9999 V
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
389
10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines
Output voltage as a function of speed: M202

Behavior with M202
The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of speed. In the machine
parameters, the machine tool builder defines up to three characteristic
curves FNR in which specific feed rates are assigned to specific
voltages. Use miscellaneous function M202 to select the curve FNR
from which the TNC is to determine the output voltage.
Input range: 1 to 3
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
Output voltage as a function of time (timedependent ramp): M203

Behavior with M203
The TNC outputs the voltage V as a function of the time TIME. The
TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly to the value
programmed for V within the time programmed for TIME.
Input range
Voltage V:
TIME:
0 to 9999 Volt
0 to 1 999 seconds
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
Output voltage as a function of time (timedependent pulse): M204

Behavior with M204
The TNC outputs a programmed voltage as a pulse with a
programmed duration TIME.
Input range
Voltage V:
TIME:
0 to 9999 Volt
0 to 1 999 seconds
Effect
M201, M202, M203 or M204.
390
Programming:
Special Functions
11.1 Overview of Special Functions

The TNC provides the following powerful special functions for a large
number of applications:
Function
Description
Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCMsoftware

option)
Page 396
Global Program Settings (GSsoftware option)
Page 416
Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC

software option)
Page 427
Working with text files
Page 450
Working with cutting data tables
Page 455
Working with freely definable tables
Page 461
Press the SPEC FCT and the corresponding soft keys to access further
special functions of the TNC. The following tables will give you an
overview of which functions are available.
Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions

U
Press the Special Functions key
Function
Soft key
Description
Insert smarT.NC-UNITs in plainlanguage programs
Page 448
Functions for contour and point

machining
Page 393
Define the PLANE function
Page 471
Define different conversational

functions
Page 394
Use programming aids
Page 395
Define structure items
Page 152
392
Program defaults menu

U
Select the program defaults menu
Function
Soft key
Description
Define the workpiece blank
Page 103
Define the material
Page 456
Define global cycle parameters
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Select datum table
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Load fixture
Page 412
Reset fixtures
Page 412
Functions for contour and point machining

menu
U
Select the menu for functions for contour and point

machining.
Function
Soft key
Description
Define a simple contour formula
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Call the menu for complex

contour formula
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Define regular machining pattern
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Select the point file with

machining positions
See Users
Manual for Cycles
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
393
Functions for contour and point machining

menu
U
Select the menu for functions for contour and point

machining
Function
Soft key
Description
Select a contour definition
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Assign contour description
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Define a complex contour

formula
See Users
Manual for Cycles
Menu of various conversational functions

U

functions
Function
Soft key
Description
Define positioning behavior of

rotary axes
Page 493
Define file functions
Page 442
Define program call
Page 446
Define coordinate
transformations
Page 443
Define string functions
Page 342
394
Menu of programming aids

U
Select the programming aids menu
Select the menu for file conversion
Function
Soft key
Description
Structured program conversion

from FK to H
Page 251
Unstructured program
conversion from FK to H
Page 251
Backward program, generating
Page 438
Filter contours
Page 441
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
395
11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring

(Software Option)
Function
The Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) must be
adapted by the machine manufacturer for the TNC and for
the machine. Refer to your machine tool manual.
The machine manufacturer can define any objects that are monitored
by the TNC during all machining operations and even in the Test Run
mode. If two objects monitored for collision come within a defined
distance of each other, the TNC outputs an error message during test
run and machining.
The TNC can display the defined collision objects graphically in all
machining modes and during test run (see Graphic depiction of the
protected space (FCL4 function) on page 400).
The TNC also monitors the current tool with the length and radius
entered in the tool table for collision (assuming a cylindrical tool). TNC
likewise monitors the stepped tool according to the definition in the
tool table and also displays it accordingly.
Provided that you have defined a separate tool holder kinematic
description for the respective tool, including a collision body
description, and have assigned it to the tool in the KINEMATIC
column, the TNC monitors this tool holder also (see Tool-carrier
kinematics on page 186).
Also, you can integrate simple fixtures in the collision monitoring (see
Fixture Monitoring (DCM Software Option) on page 403).
396
Keep these constraints in mind:

DCM helps to reduce the danger of collision. However,
the TNC cannot consider all possible constellations in
operation.
Collisions of defined machine components and the tool
with the workpiece are not detected by the TNC.
DCM can only protect those machine components from
collision that your machine tool builder has correctly
defined with regard to dimensions and position in the
machine coordinate system.
The TNC can monitor the tool only if a positive tool
radius has been defined in the tool table. The TNC
cannot monitor tools with a radius of 0 (as is often used
in drilling tools) and therefore issues an appropriate error
message.
The TNC can only monitor tools for which you have
defined positive tool lengths.
When a touch probe cycle starts, the TNC no longer
monitors the stylus length and ball-tip diameter so that
you can also probe in collision objects.
For certain tools (such as face milling cutters), the
diameter that would cause a collision can be greater
than the dimensions defined in the tool-compensation
data.
The handwheel superimpositioning function (M118 and
global program settings) in combination with collision
monitoring is only possible in stopped condition
(blinking control-in-operation symbol). To be able to use
M118 without limitations, you have to deselect DCM
either by soft key in the Collision Monitoring (DCM)
menu, or activate a kinematics model without collision
monitored objects (CMOs).
With the rigid-tapping cycles, DCM works only if the
exact interpolation of the tool axis with the spindle is
activated through MP7160.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
397
Collision monitoring in the manual operating

modes
In the Manual and Electronic Handwheel operating modes, the TNC
stops a motion if two objects monitored for collision approach each
other within a distance of less than 3 to 5 mm. In this case, the TNC
displays an error message naming the two objects causing collision.
If you have selected a screen layout in which positions are displayed
on the left and collision objects on the right, then the TNC additionally
marks the colliding objects in red.
Once a collision warning is displayed, machine motions via
the direction keys or handwheel are possible only if the
motion increases the distance between the collision
objects. For example, by pressing the axis direction key for
the opposite direction.
Motions that reduce the distance or leave it unchanged are
not allowed as long as collision monitoring is active.
Deactivating Collision Monitoring
If you have to reduce the distance between collision-monitored
objects for lack of space, the collision monitoring function must be
deactivated.
If you have deactivated the collision monitoring, the
symbol for collision monitoring flashes (see following
table).
Function
Symbol
Symbol that appears in the operating mode bar

when collision monitoring is not active.
U
U
Shift the soft-key row if necessary.
Select the menu for deactivating collision monitoring.
Select the Manual Operation menu item.
To deactivate collision monitoring, press the ENT key,

and the symbol for collision monitoring in the
operating mode display starts to blink.
Move axes manually, pay attention to traverse direction

To reactivate the collision monitor: Press the ENT key.
398
Collision monitoring in Automatic operation

The handwheel superimpositioning function with M118 in
combination with collision monitoring is only possible in
stopped condition (blinking control-in-operation symbol).
If collision monitoring is on, the TNC shows the
symbol
in the position display.
If you have deactivated collision monitoring, the symbol
for collision monitoring flashes in the operating-mode bar.
The M140 (see Retraction from the contour in the toolaxis direction: M140 on page 384) and M150 (see
Suppress limit switch message: M150 on page 388)
functions might cause non-programmed movements if the
TNC detects a collision when executing these functions!
The TNC monitors motions blockwise, i.e. it outputs a warning in the
block which would cause a collision, and interrupts program run. A
reduction of the feed rate, as with Manual Operation, does not occur.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
399
Graphic depiction of the protected space (FCL4

function)
You can use the split-screen layout key to have the machine-based
collision objects defined on your machine and measured fixtures be
shown in three dimensions (see Program Run, Full Sequence and
Program Run, Single Block on page 80).
You can switch between the various views via soft key:
Function
Soft key
Switch between wire-frame and solid-object

view
Switch between solid and transparent view
Display/hide the coordinate systems that result
from transformations in the kinematics
description.
Functions for rotating in the X and Z axes, and
magnifying/reducing
You can also use the mouse for the graphics. The following functions
are available:
U
U
U
In order to rotate the wire model shown in three dimensions you

hold the right mouse button down and move the mouse. After you
release the right mouse button, the TNC orients the workpiece to
the defined orientation
In order to shift the model shown: Hold the center mouse button or
the wheel button down and move the mouse. The TNC shifts the
model in the corresponding direction. After you release the center
mouse button, the TNC shifts the model to the defined position.
400
Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of

operation
Application
With this feature you can test for collisions before actual machining.
Prerequisites
The graphic simulation testing must be enabled by your
machine tool builder in order to run.
Conducting a collision test

You specify the datum for the collision test in the
workpiece blank in working space function (see
Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space on page
660)!
U
Select the Test Run operating mode
Select the program that you want to check for collision
Select the screen layout PROGRAM+KINEMATICS or

KINEMATICS
Shift the soft-key row twice
Set the collision testing to ON
Shift the soft-key row back twice
Start the test run
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
401
You can switch between the various views via soft key:
Function
Soft key

view
Display/hide the coordinate systems that result
from transformations in the kinematics
description.
Functions for rotating in the X and Z axes, and
magnifying/reducing
Mouse operation: (see Graphic depiction of the protected space
(FCL4 function) on page 400)
402
11.3 Fixture Monitoring (DCM Software Option)
11.3 Fixture Monitoring

(DCM Software Option)
Fundamentals
Your machine tool builder must define permissible
location points in the kinematic description before you can
use the fixture monitoring. The machine tool manual
Your machine has to feature a 3-D touch probe for
workpiece measurement. Otherwise you cannot locate
the fixture on the machine.
Using the fixture management in the Manual operating mode, you can
place simple fixtures in the working space of the machine in order to
implement collision monitoring between the tool and the fixture.
Several work steps are required to place fixtures
Model the fixture template
On its Web site, HEIDENHAIN provides fixture templates such as
vises or jaw chucks in a fixture template library (see Fixture
templates on page 404), that were created with the PC program
KinematicsDesign. The machine tool builder can model additional
fixture templates and provide you with them. The fixture templates
have the file name extension cft
Set the fixture parameter values: FixtureWizard
With the FixtureWizard you define the exact dimensions of the
fixture by entering parameters values in the fixture template. The
FixtureWizard is available as a component of the TNC fixture
management. It generates a placeable fixture with concrete
dimensions defined by you, (see Setting parameter values for the
fixture: FixtureWizard on page 404). Placable fixture templates
have the file name extension cfx
Place the fixture on the machine
In an interactive menu the TNC guides you through the actual
measurement process. The measurement process consists
essentially of the performance of various probing functions on the
fixture and entering variable sizes, for example the jaw gap of a vise
(see Placing the fixture on the machine on page 406)
Check the position of the measured fixture
After you have placed the fixture, you can have the TNC create a
measuring program as needed with which you can have the actual
position of the placed fixture compared with the nominal position. If
the deviations between the nominal and actual positions are too
large, the TNC issues an error message (see Check the position of
the measured fixture on page 408)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
403
Fixture templates
HEIDENHAIN provides various fixture templates in a fixture library. If
you need any of them, please contact HEIDENHAIN (e-mail address
service.nc-pgm@heidenhain.de) or your machine tool builder.
Setting parameter values for the fixture:

FixtureWizard
With the FixtureWizard you can use a fixture template to create a
fixture with exact dimensions. HEIDENHAIN provides templates for
standard fixtures. Your machine tool builder may also provide fixture
templates.
Before you start the FixtureWizard, you must have copied
the fixture template and its parameters to the TNC!
404
Call the fixture management
Start the FixtureWizard: The TNC opens the menu for

parameterization of fixture templates
Select the fixture template: The TNC opens the

window for selecting a fixture template (files with
extension CFT)
Use the mouse to select the fixture template for

which you want to enter values and confirm with Open
Enter the values of all the fixture parameters shown in

the left window. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the next input field. After value entry, the
TNC updates the 3-D view of the fixture in the
window below. As far as is available, the TNC displays
an illustration in the upper right window graphically
showing the fixture parameter to be entered.
Enter the name of the defined fixture in the Output

file input field and confirm with the Generate file
soft key. It is not necessary to enter the file extension
(CFX for parameterized)
Exit FixtureWizard
Operating FixtureWizard
FixtureWizard is operated primarily with the mouse. You can change
the screen layout by pulling the separator lines so that the Parameters,
Help graphics and 3-D graphic are displayed in the size you prefer.
You can change the depiction of the 3-D graphic as follows:
Enlarge/reduce the model:
Turning the mouse wheel enlarges or reduces the model
Move the model:
Pressing the mouse wheel and moving the mouse at the same
time moves the model
Rotate the model:
Pressing the mouse key and moving the mouse at the same time
rotates the model
In addition, buttons are available that perform the following function
when clicked:
Function
Button
Exit FixtureWizard
Open a fixture template (files with the extension

CFT)
view
Show/hide the designations of the collision

bodies defined in the fixture
Show/hide the test points defined in the fixture
(no function in the ToolHolderWizard)
Show/hide the measurement points defined in
the fixture (no function in the ToolHolderWizard)
Restore the initial position of the 3-D view
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
405
Placing the fixture on the machine

Insert a touch probe before you place a fixture!
Select the fixture: The TNC opens the menu for fixture
selection and shows in the left window all fixtures
available in the active directory. Fixtures have the file
name extension CFX
In the left window, use the mouse or arrow keys to

select a fixture. In the right window the TNC shows a
preview of the respectively selected fixture
Load fixture: The TNC calculates the required

sequence of measurement and displays it in the left
window. In the right window it shows the fixture.
Measurement points are marked with a colored
datum symbol on the fixture. In addition, there is a
sequence of numbers to show you the order for
measuring the fixture
Start the measurement process: The TNC shows a

soft-key row with permitted scanning functions for
the respective measuring process
Select the required probing function: The TNC is in the

menu for manual probing. Description of the probing
functions: See Overview on page 587
At the end of the probing process the TNC displays

the measured values
Load the measured values: The TNC ends the

measuring process, checks it off in the measurement
sequence and places the highlight on the subsequent
task
If input of a value is required in the respective fixture,

the TNC shows a highlight at the lower end of the
screen. Enter the requested value, e.g. jaw width of a
vise, and confirm with the ACCEPT VALUE soft key
When all measuring tasks are checked off by the TNC,

complete the measuring process with the
COMPLETE soft key
The sequence of measurement is specified in the fixture

template. You have to run through the sequence of
measurements step by step from top to bottom.
With multiple setup you have to place each fixture
separately.
406
Editing fixtures
Only value input is editable. The position of the fixture on
the machine table cannot be corrected after placement. To
change the position of the fixture you have to remove it
first and then place it again!
U
Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the fixture

that you want to edit. The TNC highlights the selected
fixture with color
To change the selected fixture, in the measurement

sequence window the TNC shows the fixture
parameters that you can edit
Confirm removal with the YES soft key or cancel it

with NO
Removing fixtures
If you remove a fixture, the TNC no longer monitors it,
even if it is still clamped on the machine table!
U
Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the fixture

that you want to remove. The TNC highlights the
selected fixture with color
Remove selected fixture
Confirm removal with the YES soft key or cancel it

with NO
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
407
Check the position of the measured fixture

To inspect measured fixtures, you can have the TNC generate a test
program. You have to run the inspection program in the Full Sequence
operating mode. The TNC probes test points that are specified by the
fixture designer in the fixture template and evaluates them. It provides
the result of the inspection on screen and in a log file.
The TNC always saves inspection programs in the
TNC:system\Fixture\TpCheck_PGM directory.
408
In the Place fixtures window, use the mouse to

mark the fixture to be inspected. The TNC displays
the marked fixture in a different color in the 3-D view
Start the dialog for generating the inspection program.

The TNC opens the window for entering the Test
program parameters
Manual positioning: Specify whether you want to

position the touch probe manually or automatically
between the individual inspection points:
1: Manual positioning. You have to move to each
inspection point with the axis-direction keys and
confirm the measuring process with NC start
0: After you have manually pre-positioned the touch
probe to clearance height, the test program runs
automatically
Feed rate for measurement:

Touch probe feed rate in mm/min for the measuring
process. Input range 0 to 3000
Feed rate for pre-positioning:

Positioning feed rate in mm/min for moving to the
individual measurement positions. Input range 0 to
99999.999
Set-up clearance:
Setup clearance to the measuring point that the TNC
should maintain during pre-positioning. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Tolerance:
Maximum permissible deviation between nominal
and actual position of the respective test points. Input
range 0 to 99999.999. If the test point is out of
tolerance, the TNC issues an error message
Tool number/tool name:

Tool number (or name) of the touch probe. Input
range 0 to 30000.9 if a number is entered; maximum
16 characters if a name is entered. If entering a tool
name, enter it between single quotation marks
Confirm the entries: The TNC generates the test

program, shows the name of the test program in a
pop-up window and asks whether you want to run the
test program
Answer with NO if you want to run the test program

later, and with YES if you want to run it now
If you have confirmed with YES, the TNC changes to

the Full Sequence mode and automatically selects
the generated program
Start the test program: The TNC prompts you to

manually pre-position the touch probe so that it is
located at clearance height. Follow the instructions in
the pop-up window
Start the measuring process: The TNC moves to each

test point one after the other. With a soft key you
specify the positioning strategy. Conform with NC
start each time
At the end of the test program the TNC displays a popup window with the deviations from the nominal
position. If a test point is out of tolerance, the TNC
issues an error message in the pop-up window
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
409
Manage fixtures
You can save and restore measured fixtures via the Archive function.
This function is especially useful for integrated fixtures and speeds up
the setup procedure considerably.
Functions for managing fixtures
The following functions for fixture management are available:
Function
Soft key
Save fixture
Load saved fixture
Copy saved fixture
Rename saved fixture
Delete saved fixture
410
Saving fixtures
U Call the fixture management, if required
U
With the arrow keys, choose the chucking equipment

you want to save
Select Archive function: The TNC displays a window

and shows the fixtures that have been saved
Save the active chucking equipment to an archive (zip

file): The TNC displays a window in which you can
define the name of the archive
Enter the file name and confirm with the YES soft key:
The TNC saves the zip archive in a fixed archive folder
(TNC:\system\Fixture\Archive)
Manually loading fixtures

U Call the fixture management if required
U
If required, use the arrow keys to select an insertion

point at which you wish to restore a saved fixture
Select Archive function: The TNC displays a window

and shows the fixtures that have been saved
With the arrow keys, select the fixture you wish to

restore
Load the fixture: The TNC activates the selected

fixture and displays and image of the chucking
equipment contained in the fixture
If you restore the fixture to another insertion point, you

have the confirm the corresponding dialog question of the
TNC with the YES soft key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
411
Loading fixtures under program control

You can also activate and deactivate saved fixtures under program
control. Proceed as follows:
U
Select PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS group.
Specify the path and file name of the store fixture and
confirm your entry with ENT
Example: NC block
13 SEL FIXTURE "TNC:\SYSTEM\FIXTURE\F.ZIP"
Stored fixtures are by default in the

TNC:\system\Fixture\Archive directory.
Make sure that the fixture to be loaded has also been
saved with the active kinematics.
Make sure that no other chucking equipment is active
during automatic activation of a fixture. If necessary, make
prior use of the FIXTURE SELECTION RESET function.
You can also activate fixtures via the pallet tables in the
FIXTURE column.
Deactivating fixtures under program control
You can deactivate active fixtures under program control. Proceed as
follows:
412
Select the reset function and confirm with the END

key.
Example: NC block
13 FIXTURE SELECTION RESET
11.4 Tool Holder Management (DCM Software Option)
11.4 Tool Holder Management

(DCM Software Option)
Fundamentals
Your machine tool builder must have prepared the TNC for
this function, refer to the machine tool manual.
Just as fixture monitoring, you can also integrate tool holder in the
collision monitoring.
Several work steps are required to enable tool holders for collision
monitoring:
Model the tool holder
On its Web site, HEIDENHAIN provides tool holder templates that
were created with a PC software (KinematicsDesign). Your machine
tool builder can model additional tool holder templates and provide
you with them. The tool holder templates have the file name
extension cft.
Set the tool holder parameters: ToolHolderWizard
With the ToolHolderWizard you define the exact dimensions of the
tool holder by entering parameter values in the tool holder template.
Call the ToolHolderWizard from the tool table if you wish to assign
tool carrier kinematics to a tool. Tool holder templates with
parameters have the file name extension cfx.
Activate the tool holder
In the tool table TOOL.T, assign the selected tool holder to a tool in
the KINEMATICS column (see Assigning the tool-carrier kinematics
on page 186).
Tool-holder templates
HEIDENHAIN provides various tool holder templates. If you need any
of them, please contact HEIDENHAIN (e-mail address service.ncpgm@heidenhain.de) or your machine tool builder.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
413
Set the tool holder parameters:

ToolHolderWizard
With the ToolHolderWizard you can use a tool-holder template to
create a tool holder with exact dimensions. HEIDENHAIN provides
templates for tool holders. Your machine tool builder may also provide
tool holder templates.
Before you start the ToolHolderWizard, you must have
copied the tool-holder template to be parameterized to the
TNC!
Follow the procedure below to assign carrier kinematics to a tool:
U
Select any machine operating mode.

U Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool
table.
U
Set the EDIT soft key to ON.
Select the last soft key row.
Show the list of available kinematics: The TNC

displays all tool holder kinematics (.TAB files) and all
tool-holder kinematics you have already
parameterized (.CFX files).
Call the ToolHolderWizard
Select the tool-holder template: The TNC opens the

window for selecting a tool-holder template (files with
extension CFT)
Use the mouse to select the tool-holder template for

which you want to enter parameter values and
confirm with Open
Enter all of the parameters shown in the left window.

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the next
input field. After value entry, the TNC updates the 3D view of the tool holder in the window at bottom
right. As far as is available, the TNC displays an
illustration in the upper right window graphically
showing the parameter to be entered.
Enter the name of the defined tool holder in the

Output file input field and confirm with the Generate
file soft key. It is not necessary to enter the file
extension (CFX for parameterized)
Exit the ToolHolderWizard
Operating the ToolHolderWizard

The ToolHolderWizard is operated in the same way as the
FixtureWizards: (see Operating FixtureWizard on page 405)
414
Removing a tool holder

If you remove a tool holder, the TNC no longer monitors it,
even if it is still in the spindle
U
Delete the name of the tool holder from the KINEMATICS column in
the tool table (TOOL.T).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
415
11.5 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
11.5 Global Program Settings

(Software Option)
Application
The global program settings, which are used in particular for large
molds and dies, are available in the Program Run mode and MDI
mode. You can use them to define various coordinate transformations
and settings that are globally effective and are superimposed on the
respectively selected NC program so that you do not need to edit the
NC program.
You can activate and deactivate global program settings, even in midprogram if you have interrupted the program run (see Interrupting
machining on page 629). The TNC immediately accounts for the
values you have defined after you have restarted the NC program. The
control might move to the new position over the reapproach menu
(see Returning to the contour on page 636).
The following global program settings are available:
Functions
Icon
Page
Basic rotation
Page 421
Swapping axes
Page 422
Additional, additive datum shift
Page 423
Page 423
Page 424
Axis locking
Page 424
Definition of a handwheel
superimposition, even in the virtual axis
direction VT
Page 425
Definition of a globally effective feed rate

factor
Page 424
416
You cannot use the following global program run settings

if you have used the M91/M92 function (moving to machinereferenced positions) in your NC program:
Swap axes in the axes in which you approach machinebased positions
Locking axes
You can use the look-ahead function M120 if you have
activated the global program settings before starting the
program. If M120 is active and you change global settings
during the program, the TNC will show an error message
and stop any further machining.
If DCM collision monitoring is active you can only move
with handwheel superimposition if you have interrupted
the machining program with an external stop.
In the fillable form the TNC grays out any axes that are not
active on your machine.
Shift values and values for handwheel superimposition in
the fillable form must always be defined in millimeters;
angle values for rotations must be defined in degrees.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
417
Technical prerequisites
The global program settings function is a software
option and must be enabled by your machine tool builder.
The machine tool builder can provide functions with which
you can set and reset global program settings under
program control, e.g. M functions or manufacturer cycles.
You can use the Q-parameter function to query the status
of the global program settings GS (see "FN 18: SYSDATUM READ: Read system data" page 327 ff).
To be able to use the handwheel superimposition function,
HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of the HR 520 handwheel (see
Traversing with electronic handwheels on page 548). Direct
selection of the virtual tool axis is possible with the HR 520.
In principle, you can then use the HR 410 handwheel, but your
machine tool builder must then assign a function key of the handwheel
to selection of the virtual tool axis and program it in his PLC program.
To be able to use all functions without limits, the following
machine parameters must be set:
MP7641, bit 4 = 1:
Permit selection of the virtual axis on the HR 420
MP7503 = 1:
Traverse in active tool-axis direction is active in the
Manual operating mode and during a program
interruption
MP7682, bit 9 = 1:
Automatic transfer of the tilt status from the automatic
mode to the Move axes during a program
interruption function
MP7682, bit 10 = 1:
Permit 3-D compensation with active tilted working
plane and active M128 (TCPM)
418
Activating/deactivating a function
Global program settings remain active until you manually
reset them. Note that your machine tool builder can
provide functions with which you can set and reset global
program settings also under program control.
If a global program setting is active, the TNC shows
the
symbol in the position display.
If you use the file manager to select a program, the TNC
displays a warning message if global settings are active.
Then you can simply acknowledge the message with the
soft key or call the form directly to make the changes.
Global program settings have no effect in the smarT.NC
operating mode.
U
Select the Program Run or Manual Data Input

operating mode
Call the global program settings form
Activate the desired functions with the corresponding

values
If you activate more than one global program setting, the

TNC calculates the transformations internally in the
following sequence:
1: Basic rotation
2: Axis swapping
3: Mirror image
4: Shift
5: Superimposed rotation
The remaining functions such as axis locking, handwheel
superimposition and feed rate factor act independently.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
419
The following functions help you to navigate in the form. You can also
use the mouse to use the form.
Functions
Key/Soft key
Jump to previous function

Jump to next function
Select the next element
Select the previous element
Axis swapping function: Open the list of available
axes
Switch the function on/off if the cursor is on a
check box
Reset the global program settings:
Deactivate all functions
Set all entered values to 0, set feed rate factor
to 100. Set basic rotation = 0 if no basic rotation
is active in the basic rotation menu or in the ROT
column of the active preset in the preset table.
Otherwise the TNC activates the basic
rotation entered there
Discard all changes since the form was last called
Deactivate all active functions. The entered or
adjusted values remain
Save all changes and close the form
420
Basic rotation
The basic rotation function enables you to compensate a workpiece
misalignment. The effect corresponds to the basic rotation function
that you can define in the manual mode with the probing functions.
The TNC synchronizes the values entered in the basic rotation menu
or the ROT column of the preset table with the fillable form.
You can change the basic rotation values in the form, but the TNC
does not write them back into the basic rotation menu or the preset
table.
If you press the SET STANDARD VALUES soft key, the TNC restores
the basic rotation assigned to the active preset.
Remember that you may have to return to the contour
after activation of this function. The TNC then
automatically calls the return-to-contour menu after the
form is closed (see Returning to the contour on page
636).
Please note that probing cycles with which you measure
and write a basic rotation during program run overwrite the
value defined by you in the fillable form.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
421
Swapping axes
With the axis swapping function you can adapt the axes programmed
in any NC program to your machines axis configuration or to the
respective clamping situation.
After activation of the axis swapping function, all
subsequent transformations are applied to the swapped
axes.
Be sure to swap the axes appropriately. Otherwise the
TNC will display error messages.
Positioning to M91 positions is not permitted for swapped
axes.
636).
U
U
U
U
In the global program settings form, move the cursor to EXCHANGE

ON/OFF, and use the SPACE key to activate the function.
With the downward arrow key, set the cursor to the line showing at
left the axis to be swapped
Press the GOTO key to display the list of axes with which you can
exchange it
With the downward arrow key, select the axes with which you wish
to exchange, and confirm with the ENT key
If you work with a mouse, you can select the desired axis directly by
clicking it in the respective pull-down menu.
422
With the superimposed mirroring function you can mirror all active
axes.
The mirrored axes defined in the form work in addition to
the values already defined in the program through Cycle 8
(mirroring).
636).
U
U
U
In the global program settings form, move the cursor to MIRRORING

ON/OFF, and use the SPACE key to activate the function.
With the downward arrow key, set the cursor to the axis that you
want to mirror
Press the SPACE key to mirror the axis. Pressing the SPACE key
again cancels the function.
clicking it.
Additional, additive datum shift

With the additive datum shift function you can compensate any
offsets in all active axes.
The values defined in the form work in addition to the
values already defined in the program through Cycle 7
(datum shift).
Please note that the shifts defined when the working
plane is tilted are effective in the machine coordinate
system.
636).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
423
Axis locking
With this function you can lock all active axes. Then when you run a
program, the TNC does not move any of the axes you locked.
When you activate this function, ensure that the positions
of the locked axes cannot cause any collisions.
U
U
U
In the global program settings form, move the cursor to LOCK

ON/OFF, and activate the function with the SPACE key
With the downward arrow key, set the cursor to the axis that you
want to lock
Press the SPACE key to lock the axis. Pressing the SPACE key again
cancels the function.
clicking it.
With the superimposed rotation function you can define any rotation
of the coordinate system in the presently active working plane.
The superimposed rotation defined in the form works in
addition to the values already defined in the program
through Cycle 10 (rotation).
636).
Feed rate override

With the feed rate override function, you can decrease or increase the
programmed feed rate by a percentage. The input range is 1% to
1000%.
Remember that the TNC always applies the feed rate
factor to the current feed rate, which you may already
have changed through the feed rate override.
424
Handwheel superimposition
The handwheel superimposition function enables you to use the
handwheel to move the axes while the TNC is running a program.
In the Max. val. column you define the maximum distance by which
you can move the axis by handwheel. As soon as you interrupt the
program run (control-in-operation signal is off), the TNC shows the
distances actually moved in each axis in the actual value column. The
actual value remains saved until you delete it, even after a power
interruption. You can also edit the actual value. If required, the TNC
decreases the value that you entered to the respective Max. val.
If an actual value is entered during activation of the
function, then when the window closes, the TNC calls the
Return to contour function to move by the defined value
(see Returning to the contour on page 636).
The TNC overwrites a maximum traverse distance, already
defined in the NC program with M118 by the value entered
in the form. In turn, the TNC enters distances that have
already been traversed with the handwheel using M118 in
the actual value column of the form so that there is no
jump in the display during activation. If the distance
already traversed with M118 is greater than the maximum
permissible value in the form, then when the window
closes the TNC calls the return to contour function in
order to move by the difference value (see Returning to
the contour on page 636).
If you try to enter a actual value greater than the max.
value, the TNC shows an error message. Never enter an
actual value greater that the Max. value.
Do not enter too large a value for max. value. The TNC
reduces the useable traverse range in positive and
negative direction by the value you enter.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
425
Virtual axis VT
To be able to traverse with the handwheel in the virtual
axis direction VT you have to enable M128 or FUNCTION
TCPM.
You can only move with handwheel superimpositioning in
the virtual axis direction if DCM is inactive.
You can also carry out handwheel superimpositioning in the currently
active tool axis direction. You can use the Virtual Tool axis line (VT).
Values traversed with the handwheel in a virtual axis remain active in
the default setting even after a tool change. Using the Reset VT value
function you can specify that the TNC resets to values traversed in VT
upon tool change:
U
In the global program settings form, move the cursor to Reset VT

value and use the SPACE key to activate the function.
You can select the VT axis via a HR 5xx handwheel in order to traverse
with superimpositioning in the virtual axis direction (see Selecting the
axis to be moved on page 553). Working with the virtual VT axis is
particularly convenient with the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel (see
Traversing with electronic handwheels on page 548).
The TNC also shows the path traversed in the virtual axis in the
additional status display (POS tab) in the separate VT position display.
Your machine tool builder can provide functions with
which the procedure can be influenced by the PLC in the
virtual axis direction.
426
11.6 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
11.6 Adaptive Feed Control

Software Option (AFC)
Application
The AFC feature must be enabled and adapted by the
machine tool builder. Refer to your machine tool manual.
Your machine tool builder may also have specified
whether the TNC uses the spindle power or any other
value as the input value for the feed control.
Adaptive feed control is not intended for tools with

diameters less than 5 mm. This limit diameter might also
be greater if the spindles rated power is very high.
Do not work with adaptive feed control in operations in
which the feed rate and spindle speed must be adapted to
each other, such as tapping.
In adaptive feed control the TNC automatically controls the feed rate
during program run as a function of the current spindle power
consumption. The spindle power required for each machining step is
to be recorded in a teach-in cut and saved by the TNC in a file
belonging to the part program. When each machining step is started,
which is normally when the spindle is switched on, the TNC controls
the feed rate so that it remains within the limits that you have defined.
This makes it possible to avoid negative effects on the tool, the
workpiece, and the machine that might be caused by changing cutting
conditions. Cutting conditions are changed particularly by:
Tool wear
Fluctuating cutting depths that occur especially with cast parts
Fluctuating hardness caused by material flaws
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
427
Adaptive feed control (AFC) offers the following benefits:

Machining time is optimized
By controlling the feed rate, the TNC tries to maintain the recorded
maximum spindle power during the entire machining time. It
shortens the machining time by increasing the feed rate in
machining zones with little material removal.
The tool is monitored
If the spindle power exceeds the recorded maximum value, the TNC
decreases the feed rate until the reference spindle power is
reattained. If the maximum spindle power is exceeded during
machining and at the same time the feed rate falls below the
minimum that you defined, the TNC reacts by shutting down. This
helps to prevent further damage after a tool breaks or is worn out.
The machines mechanical elements are protected
Timely feed rate reduction and shutdown responses help to avoid
machine overload.
428
Defining the AFC basic settings

You enter the settings for the TNC feed rate control in the table
AFC.TAB, which must be saved in the root directory TNC:\.
The data in this table are default values that were copied during a
teach-in cut into a file belonging to the respective program and serve
as the basis for control. The following data are to be defined in this
table:
Column
Function
NR
Consecutive line number in the table (has no further

functions)
AFC
Name of the control setting. You enter this name in the

AFC column of the tool table. It specifies the
assignment of control parameters to the tool.
FMIN
Feed rate at which the TNC is to conduct a shutdown

response. Enter the value in percent with respect to
the programmed feed rate. Input range: 50 to 100%
FMAX
Maximum feed rate in the material up to which the TNC

can automatically increase the feed rate. Enter the
value in percent of the programmed feed rate.
FIDL
Feed rate for traverse when the tool is not cutting (feed
rate in the air). Enter the value in percent of the
programmed feed rate.
FENT
Feed rate for traverse when the tool moves into or out
of the material. Enter the value in percent with respect
to the programmed feed rate. Maximum input value:
100%
OVLD
Desired reaction of the TNC to overload:

M: Execution of a macro defined by the machine tool
builder
S: Immediate NC stop
F: NC stop if the tool has been retracted
E: Just display an error message on the screen
-: No overload reaction
The TNC conducts a shutdown response if the
maximum spindle power is exceeded for more than
one second and at the same time the feed rate falls
below the minimum you defined. Enter the desired
function via the ASCII keyboard.
POUT
Spindle power at which the TNC is to detect tool exit

from the workpiece. Enter the value in percent of the
learned reference load. Recommended input value:
8%
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
429
Column
Function
SENS
Sensitivity (aggressiveness) of regulation. A value

between 50 and 200 can be entered. 50 is for slow
control, 200 for a very aggressive control. An
aggressive control reacts quickly and with strong
changes to the values, but it tends to overshoot.
Recommended value: 100
PLC
Value that the TNC is to transfer to the PLC at the

beginning of a machining step. The machine tool
builder defines the function, so refer to your machine
manual.
In the AFC.TAB table you can define as many control

settings (lines) as desired.
If there is no AFC.TAB table in the TNC:\ directory, the
TNC uses permanently defined internal control settings for
the teach-in cut. It is best, however, to work with the
AFC.TAB table.
Proceed as follows to create the AFC.TAB file (only necessary if the
file does not yet exist):
U
U
U
U
U

Select the TNC:\ directory.
Make the new file AFC.TAB and confirm with the ENT key: The TNC
shows a list of table formats.
Select the AFC.TAB table format and confirm with the ENT key: The
TNC creates a table with the Standard control settings.
430
Recording a teach-in cut

In a teach-in cut, first the TNC copies for each machining step the
basic settings defined in the AFC.TAB table into the <name>.H.AFC.DEP
file. <Name> is the name of the NC program for which you have
recorded the teach-in cut. In addition, the TNC measures the
maximum spindle power consumed during the teach-in cut and saves
this value in the table.
Each line in the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file stands for a machining step that
you start with M3 (or. M4) and end with M5. You can edit all data of the
<name>.H.AFC.DEP file if you wish to optimize them. If you have
optimized the values in comparison with the values in the AFC.TAB
table, the TNC places an asterisk * in front of the control settings in
the AFC column. Besides the data from the AFC.TAB table (see
Defining the AFC basic settings on page 429), the TNC saves the
following additional information in the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file:
Column
Function
NR
Number of the machining step
TOOL
Number or name of the tool with which the machining

step was made (not editable)
IDX
Index of the tool with which the machining step was

made (not editable)
Difference for tool call:

0: Tool was called by its tool number.
1: Tool was called by its tool name.
PREF
Reference load of the spindle. The TNC measures the

value in percent with respect to the rated power of the
spindle.
ST
Status of the machining step

L: In the next program run, a teach-in cut is recorded
for this machining step. The TNC overwrites any
existing values in this line.
C: The teach-in cut was successfully completed. The
next program run can be conducted with automatic
feed control.
AFC
Name of the control setting
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
431
Remember the following before you record a teach-in cut:

If required, adapt the control settings in the AFC.TAB table
Enter the desired control setting for all tools in the AFC column of the
tool table TOOL.T.
Select the program for teach-in.
Activate the adaptive feed control by soft key (see
Activating/deactivating AFC on page 434).
When you are performing a teach-in cut, the TNC shows
the spindle reference power determined until this time in
a pop-up window.
You can reset the reference power at any time by pressing
the PREF RESET soft key. The TNC then restarts the
learning phase.
When you record a teach-in cut, the TNC internally sets
the spindle override to 100%. Then you can no longer
change the spindle speed.
During the teach-in cut, you can influence the measured
reference load by using the feed rate override to make any
changes to the contouring feed rate.
You do not have to run the entire machining step in the
learning mode. If the cutting conditions do not change
significantly, you can switch to the control mode
immediately. Press the EXIT LEARNING soft key, and the
status changes from L to C.
You can repeat a teach-in cut as often as desired. Manually
change the status from ST back to L. It may be necessary
to repeat the teach-in cut if the programmed feed rate is
far too fast, and forces you to sharply decrease the feed
rate override during the machining step.
The TNC changes the status from teach-in (L) to
controlling (C) only when the recorded reference load is
greater than 2%. Adaptive feed control is not possible for
smaller values.
You can teach any number of machining steps for a tool.

Your machine tool builder will either make a function
available for this, or will integrate this possibility in the
functions for switching on the spindle. The machine tool
You machine tool builder can provide a feature with which
the teach-in cut can be automatically ended after a
selectable time. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
In addition, your machine tool builder can integrate a
function with which you can directly enter the reference
power of the spindle, if it is known. In this case an teachin step is not required.
432
Proceed as follows to select and, if required, edit the

<name>.H.AFC.DEP file:
U
Select the Program Run, Full Sequence operating

mode.
Select the table of AFC settings.
Make optimizations if required
Note that the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file is locked against

editing as long as the NC program <name>.H is running. The
TNC then displays the data in the table in red.
The TNC removes the editing lock if one of the following
functions has been executed:
M02
M30
END PGM
You can also edit the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file in the Programming and
Editing mode of operation. If necessary, you can even delete a
machining step (entire line) there.
In order to edit the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file, you must first
set the file manager so that the TNC can display
dependent files (see Configuring PGM MGT on page
657).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
433
Activating/deactivating AFC
U

mode
To activate the adaptive feed control: Set the soft key

to ON, and the TNC displays the AFC symbol in the
position display (see Status Displays on page 81)
To deactivate the adaptive feed control: Set the soft

key to OFF
The adaptive feed control remains active until you

deactivate it by soft key. The TNC remembers the setting
of the soft key even if the power is interrupted.
If the adaptive feed control is active in the control mode,
the TNC internally sets the spindle override to 100%. Then
you can no longer change the spindle speed.
If the adaptive feed control is active in the control mode,
the TNC takes over the feed rate override function:
If you increase the feed rate override, it has no influence
on the control.
If you decrease the feed rate override by more than 10%
with respect to the maximum setting, the TNC switches
the adaptive feed control off. In this case the TNC
displays a window to inform you.
In NC blocks containing FMAX, the adaptive feed control is
not active.
Mid-program startup is allowed during active feed control
and the TNC takes the cut number of the startup point into
account.
In the additional status display, the TNC displays various
information when the adaptive feed control is active (see
Adaptive Feed Control (AFC tab, software option) on
page 90). In addition, the TNC shows the symbol
in the
position display.
434
Log file
In a teach-in cut, the TNC saves for each machining step relevant data
in the <name>.H.AFC2.DEP file. <Name> is the name of the NC program
for which you have recorded the teach-in cut. During control, the TNC
updates the data and makes various evaluations. The following data
are to be saved in this table:
Column
Function
NR
Number of the machining step
TOOL
Number or name of the tool with which the machining

step was made
IDX
Index of the tool with which the machining step was

made
SNOM
Nominal spindle speed [rpm]
SDIF
Maximum difference of the spindle speed in % of the

nominal speed
LTIME
Machining time for the teach-in cut
CTIME
Machining time for the control cut
TDIFF
Time difference in % between the machining time

during teach-in and control
PMAX
Maximum recorded spindle power during machining.

The TNC displays the value in percent with respect to
the rated power of the spindle.
PREF
Reference load of the spindle. The TNC shows the

value as a percent of the spindles rated power.
FMIN
Smallest occurring feed factor. The TNC shows the

value as a percentage of the programmed feed rate.
OVLD
Reaction by the TNC to overload:

M: A macro defined by the machine tool builder has
been run
S: Immediate NC stop was conducted
F: NC stop was conducted after the tool was been
retracted
E: An error message was displayed
-: There was no overload reaction
BLOCK
Block number at which the machining step begins
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
435
The TNC records the total machining time for all teach-in
cuts (LTIME), all control cuts (CTIME) and the total time
difference (TDIFF), and enters it after the keyword TOTAL
in the last line of the log file.
The TNC can only calculate the time difference (TDIFF) if
you have completed the teach-in step. Otherwise the
column remains empty.
Proceed as follows to select the <name>.H.AFC2.DEP file:
436

mode
Select the table of AFC settings
Show the log file.
Tool breakage/tool wear monitoring

This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine
tool builder. Refer to your machine tool manual.
With the breakage/wear monitor, a cut-based tool breakage detection

during active AFC can be realized.
Through the functions that can be defined by the machine tool builder
you can define a percentage value for wear or breakage detection with
respect to the rated power.
When the defined limit spindle power range is not maintained, the
TNC conducts an NC stop.
Spindle load monitoring

This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine
tool builder. Refer to your machine tool manual.
With the spindle load monitoring function you can easily have the
spindle load monitored in order, for example, to detect overloading the
spindle power.
The function is independent of AFC, i.e. it is not cut-based and does
not depend on teach-in steps. Through the functions that can be
defined by the machine tool builder, you only need to define the
percentage value for spindle limit power with respect to the rated
power.
When the defined limit spindle power range is not maintained, the
TNC conducts an NC stop.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
437
11.7 Generate a Backward Program

Function
With this TNC function you can reverse the machining direction of a
contour.
Note that the TNC may need many times more free
memory space on the hard disk than the size of the
program file to be converted.
U
Select the program whose machining direction you

want to reverse.
Press the special functions key

programs.
Generate a forward and backward program.

old file name and the extension _rev. Example:
File name of the program whose machining direction is
to be reversed: CONT1.H
File name of the backward program to be generated by
the TNC: CONT1_rev.h
To be able to generate a backward program, the TNC
must first generate a linearized forward program, i.e. a
program in which all contour elements are resolved. This
program is also executable and has the file name
extension _fwd.h.
438
Prerequisites for the program to be converted

The TNC reverses the sequence of all positioning blocks in the
program. The following functions are not taken into the backward
program.
Tool calls
Coordinate transformation cycles
Fixed cycles and probing cycles
Cycle calls CYCL CALL, CYCL CALL PAT, CYCL CALL POS
Miscellaneous (M) functions
HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends converting only programs
containing a pure contour description. All path functions available on
the TNC are permitted, including FK blocks. RND and CHF blocks are
moved by the TNC so that they can be executed again at the correct
position on the contour.
The TNC also calculates the radius compensation for the other
direction.
If the program included contour approach and departure
functions (APPR/DEP/RND) check the backward program
with the programming graphics. Certain geometric
conditions might result in incorrect contours.
The program to be converted must not contain any NC
blocks with M91 or M92.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
439
Application example
The contour CONT1.H is to be milled in several infeeds. The TNC
generates the forward file CONT1_fwd.h and the backward file
CONT1_rev.h.
NC blocks
...
Tool call
6 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
Retract in the tool axis
7 L X-15 Y-15 R0 F MAX M3
Pre-position in the plane, spindle on
8 L Z+0 R0 F MAX
Approach the starting point in the tool axis
9 LBL 1
Set a mark
10 L IZ-2.5 F1000
Infeed depth in incremental values
11 CALL PGM CONT1_FWD.H
Call the forward program
12 L IZ-2.5 F1000
Infeed depth in incremental values
13 CALL PGM CONT1_REV.H
Call backward program
14 CALL LBL 1 REP3
Repeat program part three times starting with block

9
15 L Z+100 R0 F MAX M2
Retract tool, end of program
440
11.8 Filtering Contours (FCL 2 Function)
11.8 Filtering Contours (FCL 2

Function)
Function
With this TNC function you can filter contours that were created on
offline programming stations and contain only straight line segments.
The filter smoothes the contour, which usually results in faster
machining with less jerk.
After you have entered the filter settings, the TNC generates a new
program, with filtered contours, from the original program.
U
Select the program you want to filter.
Press the Programming Aids soft key

programs.
Select the filter function. The TNC opens a pop-up

window for the definition of the filter settings.
Enter the length of the filter range in mm (inches for

inch programs). Starting from the point in question,
the filter range defines the actual length on the
contour (before and after the point) within which the
TNC is to filter the points. Confirm with the ENT key.
Enter the maximum permitted path deviation in mm

(inches for inch programs). Confirm the tolerance
value, which is the most that the contour may deviate
from the original contour, with ENT the key.
You can only filter plain-language programs. The TNC

does not support filtering of DIN/ISO programs.
Depending on the filter settings, the newly generated file
may contain significantly more points (straight-line blocks)
than the original file.
The maximum permitted path deviation should not
exceed the actual point separation, otherwise the TNC
linearizes the contour excessively.
The program to be filtered must not contain any NC blocks
with M91 or M92.
old file name and the extension _flt. Example:
File name of the program whose machining direction is
to be filtered: CONT1.H
File name of the filtered program generated by the TNC:
CONT1_flt.h
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
441
11.9 File Functions
11.9 File Functions

Application
With the FILE FUNCTION feature you can copy, move and delete files
from within the part program.
You must not use FILE functions on programs or files, to
which you have previously made reference with function
such as CALL PGM or CYCL DEF 12 PGM CALL.
Defining file functions

U
Select the program functions.
Select the file functions. The TNC displays the

available functions.
Function
Meaning
FILE COPY
Copy a file:
Enter the name and path of the file to
be copied, as well as the target path.
FILE MOVE
Move a file:
Enter the name and path of the file to
be moved, as well as the target path.
FILE DELETE
Delete a file:
Enter the path and name of the file to
be deleted.
442
Soft key
11.10 Defining Coordinate Transformations
11.10 Defining Coordinate

Transformations
Overview
As an alternative to the coordinate transformation Cycle 7 DATUM
SHIFT, you can use the TRANS DATUM plain-language function. Just as
in Cycle 7, you can use TRANS DATUM to directly program shift values or
activate a line from a selectable datum table. In addition, there is also
the TRANS DATUM RESET function, which you can easily use to reset a
datum shift.
TRANS DATUM AXIS

You can define a datum shift by entering values in the respective axes
with the TRANS DATUM AXIS function. You can define up to nine
coordinates in one block, and incremental entries are possible.
Proceed as follows for the definition:
U

functions
Select transformations
Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM
Enter the datum shift in the affected axes, confirming

with the ENT key each time
Example: NC block
13 TRANS DATUM AXIS X+10 Y+25 Z+42
Values entered as absolute values refer to the workpiece

datum, which is specified either by datum setting or with
a preset from the preset table.
Incremental values always refer to the datum which was
last valid (this may be a datum which has already been
shifted).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
443
TRANS DATUM TABLE

You can define a datum shift by selecting a datum number from a
datum table with the TRANS DATUM TABLE function. Proceed as follows
for the definition:
U

functions
Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM TABLE
Enter the line number to be activated by the TNC, and

If desired, enter the name of the datum table from

which you want to activate the datum number, and
confirm with the ENT key. If you do not want to define
a datum table, confirm with the NO ENT key
Example: NC block
13 TRANS DATUM TABLE TABLINE25
If you have selected a datum table in the TRANS DATUM

TABLE block, then the TNC uses the programmed line
number only until the next call of a datum number
(blockwise effective datum shift).
If you did not define a datum table in the TRANS DATUM
TABLE block, then the TNC uses the datum table already
selected in the NC program with SEL TABLE, or the datum
table with status M selected in one of the Program Run
modes.
444
TRANS DATUM RESET

Use the TRANS DATUM RESET function to cancel a datum shift. How you
previously defined the datum is irrelevant. Proceed as follows for the
definition:
U

functions
Press the arrow key to move to TRANS AXIS
Select the TRANS DATUM RESET datum shift
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Example: NC block
13 TRANS DATUM RESET
445
Define program call

Using the program selection functions you can select any NC program
with the SEL PGM function and call it later with CALL PGM SELECTED. The
SEL PGM function is also permitted with string parameters, so that you
can dynamically control program calls.
Define the program to be called
U Show the soft-key row with special functions
Example: NC blocks
13 SEL PGM ROT34.H
14 ...
33 CALL PGM SELECTED
34 ...
66 SEL PGM QS35

functions
Select the menu for functions for defining the

program selection
Select the SEL PGM function: enter path names directly

or select the program via the SELECTION WINDOW
soft key. To enter a string parameter you press the Q
key and then enter the string number
65 CALL PGM SELECTED
Calling a selected program

U Show the soft-key row with special functions
U

functions
Select the menu for functions for defining the

program selection
Select the CALL PGM SELECTED function: enter path

names directly or select the program via the
SELECTION WINDOW soft key. To enter a string
parameter you press the Q key and then enter the
string number
If you have selected a datum table in the TRANS DATUM

TABLE block, then the TNC uses the programmed line
number only until the next call of a datum number
(blockwise effective datum shift).
If you did not define a datum table in the TRANS DATUM
TABLE block, then the TNC uses the datum table already
selected in the NC program with SEL TABLE, or the datum
table with status M selected in one of the Program Run
modes.
446
11.11 smartWizard
11.11 smartWizard
Application
The new smart wizard completely unifies the worlds of smarT.NC and
conversational programming. The strengths of both worlds are now
available in a single user interface. You can now combine the full
flexibility of conversational programming, based on NC blocks, at any
location with the fast, form-based workstep programming method of
smarT.NC.
Programming is significantly faster particularly in combination with SL
cycles, the DXF converter or the graphically supported definition of
any machining patterns. All other machining units available in
smarT.NC also simplify the creation of conversational programs.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
447
11.11 smartWizard
Insert UNIT
An overview of all the UNITs available is to be found in the
smarT.NC pilot. The pilot also describes the fundamentals
of working with UNITs and how to navigate in the forms.
Note that the first UNIT in your conversational program

must always be the program header UNIT 700. All UNITs
use data from UNIT 700 as preset default values. If there
are no default values available, the TNC will display an
error message.
The UNIT numbers are based on the cycle number with
which the TNC executes the machining in each case.
U
In your conversational program you select the NC block behind

which you wish to insert a UNIT
U Press the special functions key
448
Select smartWizard: The TNC displays a soft-key row

showing the available UNIT groups
Using the GOTO key you display a list of all the

available UNITs or select the desired machining UNIT
via the soft-key structure: The TNC displays the form
for the selected UNIT in the right part of the screen
and in the left part you continue to see the
conversational program
Enter all the necessary UNIT parameters, quit the

form with the END key: The TNC inserts all the
conversational program blocks belonging to the
selected UNIT
11.11 smartWizard
Edit UNIT
Changes can be made either in the form or directly in the appropriate
conversational program block. Here you can decide yourself which
method you prefer.
If you want to modify the conversational program block concerned,
use the arrow keys to select the value to be corrected.
If you want to make changes via the form, proceed as follows:
U
U
U
Select the initial block of the UNIT you want to edit

Use the arrow key to move the cursor to the right: The TNC opens
the form
Make the desired changes, save the changes with the END key and
quit the form.
If you wish to discard changes and you are still editing the
form, simply press the DEL key. The TNC then resets to
the data stored before you called the form.
Once you have inserted a UNIT for the first time, you can
insert any conversational program blocks in the UNIT. If
you insert conversational program blocks later and then
make changes via the form, then the TNC deletes the
inserted blocks again. In such cases you should always
make the changes via the conversational program editor.
It is not permitted to delete conversational program
blocks in the UNIT as it would lead to error messages and
incorrect machining.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
449
11.12 Creating Text Files

Application
You can use the TNCs text editor to write and edit texts. Typical
applications:
Recording test results
Documenting working procedures
Creating formula collections
Text files are type .A files (ASCII files). If you want to edit other types
of files, you must first convert them into type .A files.
Text files have the extension .A (for ASCII files). If you wish to edit
other files, use the additional Mouse pad tool (see Display or edit
text files on page 142).
Opening and exiting text files

U
U
U
U
Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation

Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager.
To display type .A files, press the SELECT TYPE and then the SHOW
.A soft keys.
Select a file and open it with the SELECT soft key or ENT key, or
create a new file by entering the new file name and confirming your
entry with the ENT key.
To leave the text editor, call the file manager and select a file of a
different file type, for example a part program.
Cursor movements
Soft key
Move cursor one word to the right

Move cursor one word to the left
Go to next screen page
Go to previous screen page
Go to beginning of file
Go to end of file
450
Editing functions
Key
Begin a new line

Erase the character to the left of the cursor
Insert a blank space
Switching between upper and lower case letters
Editing texts
The first line of the text editor is an information headline displaying the
file name, and the location and writing mode of the cursor:
File:
Line:
Column:
INSERT:
OVERWRITE:
Name of the text file

Line in which the cursor is presently located
Column in which the cursor is presently located
Insert new text, pushing the existing text to the
right
Write over the existing text, erasing it by replacing
it with new text
The text is inserted or overwritten at the location of the cursor. You

can move the cursor to any desired position in the text file by pressing
the arrow keys.
The line in which the cursor is presently located is depicted in a
different color. A line can have up to 77 characters. To start a new line,
press the RET key or the ENT key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
451
Deleting and re-inserting characters, words and

lines
With the text editor, you can erase words and even lines, and insert
them at any desired location in the text.
U
U
U
Move the cursor to the word or line that you wish to erase and insert
at a different place in the text
Press the DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft key. The text is
placed in the buffer memory
Move the cursor to the location where you wish to insert the text,
and press the RESTORE LINE/WORD soft key
Function
Soft key
Delete and temporarily store a line

Delete and temporarily store a word
Delete and temporarily store a character
Insert a line or word from temporary storage
452
Editing text blocks

You can copy and erase text blocks of any size, and insert them at
other locations. Before any of these actions, you must first select the
desired text block:
U
To select a text block, move the cursor to the first character of the
text you wish to select
U Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key
U
Move the cursor to the last character of the text you

wish to select You can select whole lines by moving
the cursor up or down directly with the arrow keys
the selected text is shown in a different color
After selecting the desired text block, you can edit the text with the
following soft keys:
Function
Soft key
Delete the selected text and store temporarily

Store marked block temporarily without erasing
(copy)
If desired, you can now insert the temporarily stored block at a
different location:
U
Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the
temporarily stored text block
U Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key for the text block
to be inserted
You can insert the temporarily stored text block as often as desired
To transfer the selected text to a different file
U Select the text block as described previously
U Press the APPEND TO FILE soft key. The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Destination file =
U
Enter the path and name of the destination file. The

TNC appends the selected text to the specified file. If
no target file with the specified name is found, the
TNC creates a new file with the selected text.
To insert another file at the cursor position,

U Move the cursor to the location in the text where you wish to insert
another file
U Press the READ FILE soft key. The TNC displays the
dialog prompt File name =
U
Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
453
Finding text sections

With the text editor, you can search for words or character strings in a
text. Two functions are available:
Finding the current text
The search function is used for finding the next occurrence of the
word in which the cursor is presently located:
U
U
U
U
Move the cursor to the desired word.

To select the search function, press the FIND soft key.
Press the FIND CURRENT WORD soft key.
To leave the search function, press the END soft key.
Finding any text.

U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key. The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Find text:
U Enter the text that you wish to find.
U To find the text, press the EXECUTE soft key.
U To leave the search function, press the END soft key.
454
11.13 Working with Cutting Data Tables
11.13 Working with Cutting Data

Tables
Note
The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool
builder for the use of cutting data tables.
Some functions or additional functions described here
may not be provided on your machine tool. Refer to your
Applications
In cutting data tables containing various workpiece and cutting
material combinations, the TNC can use the cutting speed VC and the
tooth feed Z to calculate the spindle speed S and the feed rate F. This
calculation is only possible if you defined the workpiece material in the
program and various tool-specific features in the tool table.
Before you let the TNC automatically calculate the cutting
data, the tool table from which the TNC is to take the toolspecific data must be first be activated in the Test Run
mode (status S).
Editing function for cutting data tables
Insert line
Soft key
DATEI: TOOL.T
T
R
CUT.
0
...
...
1
...
...
2
+5 4
3
...
...
4
...
...
MM
TMAT
...
...
HSS
...
...
CDT
...
...
PRO1
...
...
DATEI: PRO1.CDT
NR WMAT TMAT
0
...
...
1
...
...
2
ST65
HSS
3
...
...
4
...
...
Vc1
...
...
40
...
...
TYP
...
...
MILL
...
...
F1
...
...
0.06
...
...
0 BEGIN PGM xxx.H MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
2 BLK FORM 0.2 Z X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 WMAT "ST65"
4 ...
5 TOOL CALL 2 Z S1273 F305
Delete line
Sort the table
Copy the highlighted field (2nd soft-key row)
Insert the copied field (2nd soft-key row)
Edit the table format (2nd soft-key row)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
455
Table for workpiece materials

Workpiece materials are defined in the table WMAT.TAB (see figure).
WMAT.TAB is stored in the TNC:\ directory and can contain as many
materials as you want. The name of the material type can have up to
32 characters (including spaces). The TNC displays the contents of the
NAME column when you are defining the workpiece material in the
program (see the following section).
If you change the standard workpiece material table, you
must copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your
changes will be overwritten during a software update by
the HEIDENHAIN standard data. Define the path in the
TNC.SYS file with the code word WMAT= (see
"Configuration file TNC.SYS", page 460).
To avoid losing data, save the WMAT.TAB file at regular
intervals.
Defining the workpiece material in the NC program
In the NC program select the workpiece material from the WMAT.TAB
table using the WMAT soft key:
U
Program the workpiece material: In the Programming

and Editing operating mode, press the WMAT soft
key.
The WMAT.TAB table is superimposed: Press the

SELECTION WINDOW soft key, and in a second
window the TNC displays the list of materials that are
stored in the WMAT.TAB table.
Select your workpiece material by using the arrow

keys to move the highlight onto the material you wish
to select and confirming with the ENT key. The TNC
transfers the selected material to the WMAT block.
To terminate the dialog, press the END key.
If you change the WMAT block in a program, the TNC

outputs a warning. Check whether the cutting data stored
in the TOOL CALL block are still valid.
456
Table for tool cutting materials

Tool cutting materials are defined in the TMAT.TAB table. TMAT.TAB
is stored in the TNC:\ directory and can contain as many material
names as you want (see figure). The name of the cutting material type
can have up to 16 characters (including spaces). The TNC displays the
NAME column when you are defining the tool cutting material in the
TOOL.T tool table.
If you change the standard tool cutting material table, you
must copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your
changes will be overwritten during a software update by
the HEIDENHAIN standard data. Define the path in the
TNC.SYS file with the code word TMAT= (see
"Configuration file TNC.SYS", page 460).
To avoid losing data, save the TMAT.TAB file at regular
intervals.
Table for cutting data

Define the workpiece material/cutting material combinations with the
corresponding cutting data in a file table with the file name extension
.CDT; see figure. You can freely configure the entries in the cutting
data table. Besides the obligatory columns NR, WMAT and TMAT, the
TNC can also manage up to four cutting speed (VC) / feed rate (F)
combinations.
The standard cutting data table FRAES_2.CDT is stored in the
directory TNC:\. You can edit FRAES_2.CDT, or add as many new
cutting-data tables as you wish.
If you change the standard cutting data table, you must
copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your changes will
be overwritten during a software update by the
HEIDENHAIN standard data (see "Configuration file
TNC.SYS", page 460).
All of the cutting data tables must be stored in the same
directory. If the directory is not the standard directory
TNC:\, then behind the code word PCDT= you must enter
the path in which your cutting data is stored.
To avoid losing data, save your cutting data tables at
regular intervals.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
457
Creating a new cutting data table

U Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation
U Select the file manager: Press the PGM MGT key
U Select the directory where the cutting data table is to be stored
U Enter any file name with the file name extension .CDT, and confirm
with ENT
U On the right half of the screen, the TNC opens a standard cutting
data table or displays various table formats (machine-dependent).
These tables differ from each other in the number of cutting
speed/feed rate combinations they allow. In this case use the arrow
keys to move the highlight onto the table format you wish to select
and confirm with ENT. The TNC generates a new, empty cutting
data table
Data required for the tool table

Tool radiuscolumn R (DR)
Number of teeth (only with tools for milling)column CUT
Tool typecolumn TYPE
The tool type influences the calculation of the feed rate:
Milling tool: F = S fZ z
All other tools: F = S fU
S: Spindle speed
fZ: Feed per tooth
fU: Feed per revolution
z: Number of teeth
Tool cutting materialcolumn TMAT
Name of the cutting data table for which this tool will be used
column CDT
In the tool table, select the tool type, tool cutting material and the
name of the cutting data table via soft key (see "Tool table: Tool data
for automatic speed/feed rate calculation", page 182).
458
Working with automatic speed / feed rate

calculation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If it has not already been entered, enter the type of workpiece

material in the file WMAT.TAB.
If it has not already been entered, enter the type of cutting material
in the file TMAT.TAB.
If not already entered, enter all of the required tool-specific data in
the tool table:
Tool radius
Number of teeth
Tool type
Tool material
The cutting data table for each tool
If not already entered, enter the cutting data in any cutting data
table (CDT file).
Test Run operating mode: Activate the tool table from which the
TNC is to take the tool-specific data (status S).
In the NC program, set the workpiece material by pressing the
WMAT soft key.
In the NC program, let the TOOL CALL block automatically calculate
the spindle speed and feed rate via soft key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
459
Data transfer from cutting data tables

If you output a file type .TAB or .CDT via an external data interface, the
TNC also transfers the structural definition of the table. The structural
definition begins with the line #STRUCTBEGIN and ends with the line
#STRUCTEND. The meanings of the individual code words are shown
in the table Structure Command (see "Freely Definable Tables",
page 461). Behind #STRUCTEND the TNC saves the actual content of
the table.
Configuration file TNC.SYS

You must use the configuration file TNC.SYS if your cutting data tables
are not stored in the standard directory TNC:\. In TNC.SYS you must
then define the paths in which you have stored your cutting data
tables.
The TNC.SYS file must be stored in the root directory
TNC:\.
Entries in TNC.SYS
Meaning
WMAT=
Path for workpiece material table
TMAT=
Path for cutting material table
PCDT=
Path for cutting data tables
Example of TNC.SYS
WMAT=TNC:\CUTTAB\WMAT_GB.TAB
TMAT=TNC:\CUTTAB\TMAT_GB.TAB
PCDT=TNC:\CUTTAB\
460
11.14 Freely Definable Tables

Fundamentals
In freely definable tables you can read and save any information from
the NC program. The Q parameter functions FN 26 to FN 28 are
provided for this purpose.
You can change the format of freely definable tables, i.e. the columns
and their properties, by using the structure editor. They enable you to
make tables that are exactly tailored to your application.
You can also switch between table view (default setting) and form
view.
Creating a freely definable table

U
U
To call the file manager, press the PGM MGT key

Enter any file name with the TAB extension and confirm with the
ENT key. The TNC displays a pop-up window with permanently
saved table formats
Use the arrow key to select the table format EXAMPLE.TAB and
confirm with the ENT key. The TNC opens a new table containing
only one line and one column
To adapt the table to your requirements you have to edit the table
format (see Editing the table format on page 462)
If the TNC does not show a pop-up window when you
open a new .tab file, you must first use the COPY
SAMPLE FILES function to generate the table formats. For
more information, contact your machine tool builder or
HEIDENHAIN.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
461
Editing the table format

U
Press the EDIT FORMAT soft key (2nd soft-key level). The TNC
opens the editing window, in which the table structure is shown
rotated by 90. In other words, a line in the editing window defines
a column in the associated table. The meanings of the structure
commands (header entries) are shown in the following table.
Structure
command
Meaning
NR
Column number
NAME
Column name
TYPE
N: Numerical input
C: Alphanumeric input
L: Input value in long format
X: Permanently defined format for date and time:
hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy
WIDTH
Width of column. For type N it includes the

algebraic sign, decimal point and decimal places.
For type X you can decide through the column
width whether the TNC saves the complete date
or only the time
DEC
Number of decimal places (max. 4, effective

only for type N)
ENGLISH
to
HUNGARIA
Language-dependent dialogs (max. 32

characters)
The TNC can process up to 200 characters per row, and

up to 30 columns.
If you insert a column into an existing table, the TNC does
not automatically shift the values already entered.
Exiting the structure editor
Press the END key. The TNC changes data that was already in the
table into the new format. Elements that the TNC could not convert
into the new structure are indicated with a hash mark # (e.g., if you
have narrowed the column width).
462
Switching between table and form view

All tables with the file extension .TAB can be opened in either list view
or form view.
U
Press the FORM LIST soft key. The TNC switches to the view that
is not highlighted in the soft key.
In the form view the TNC lists the line numbers with the contents of
the first column in the left half of the screen.
In the right half you can change the data.
U
U
U
Press the key or click in the ENT entry field with the mouse.
To save any data you have changed, press the END key or the SAVE
soft key.
To discard any changes, press the DEL key or the CANCEL soft key.
The TNC aligns the entry fields on the right side leftjustified according to the longest dialog text. If an entry
field exceeds the greatest width that can be displayed, a
scrollbar appears at the bottom of the window. Use the
mouse or soft keys to scroll.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
463
FN26: TABOPEN: Opening a freely definable

table
With FN 26: TABOPEN you can define a table to be written with FN27,
or to be read from with FN 28.
Only one table can be open in an NC program. A new block
with TABOPEN automatically closes the last opened table.
The table to be opened must have the file name extension
.TAB.
Example: Open the table TAB1.TAB, which is saved in the
directory TNC:\DIR1.
56 FN 26: TABOPEN TNC:\DIR1\TAB1.TAB
464
FN 27: TABWRITE: Writing to a freely definable

table
After you have opened a table with FN 26: TABOPEN, you can use the
function FN 27: TABWRITE to write to it.
You can define and write up to 8 column names in a TABWRITE block.
The column names must be written between quotation marks and
separated by a comma. You define the values that the TNC is to write
to the respective column with Q parameters.
Note that by default the FN 27: TABWRITE function writes
values to the currently open table also in the Test Run
mode. Using the FN18 ID990 NR2 IDX16=1 function you can
specify that the TNC performs the FN27 function only in the
Program Run modes.
You can write only to numerical table fields.
If you wish to write to more than one column in a block,
you must save the values under successive Q parameter
numbers.
Example:
You wish to write to the columns Radius, Depth and D in line
5 of the presently opened table. The values to be written in the table
must be saved in the Q parameters Q5, Q6 and Q7.
53 FN0: Q5 = 3.75
54 FN0: Q6 = -5
55 FN0: Q7 = 7,5
56 FN 27: TABWRITE 5/RADIUS,DEPTH,D = Q5
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
465
FN28: TABREAD: Reading a freely definable table

After you have opened a table with FN26: TABOPEN, you can use
function FN28: TABREAD to read from it.
You can define, i.e. read, up to 8 column names in a TABREAD block.
The column names must be written between quotation marks and
separated by a comma. In the FN 28 block you can define the Q
parameter number in which the TNC is to write the value that is first
read.
You can read only numerical table fields.
If you wish to read from more than one column in a block,
the TNC will save the values under successive Q
parameter numbers.
Example:
You wish to read the values of the columns Radius, Depth and
D from line 6 of the presently opened table. Save the first value in
Q parameter Q10 (second value in Q11, third value in Q12).
56 FN 28: TABREAD Q10 = 6/RADIUS,DEPTH,D
466
Programming:
Multiple Axis Machining
12.1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining
12.1 Functions for Multiple Axis

Machining
The TNC functions for multiple axis machining are described in this
chapter.
TNC function
Description
Page
PLANE
Define machining in the tilted working plane
Page 469
PLANE/M128
Inclined-tool machining
Page 491
FUNCTION TCPM
Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes (improvement of
M128)
Page 493
M116
Feed rate of rotary axes
Page 498
M126
Shortest-path traverse of rotary axes
Page 499
M94
Reduce display value of rotary axes
Page 500
M114
Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes
Page 501
M128
Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes
Page 503
M134
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes
Page 506
M138
Selection of tilted axes
Page 506
M144
Calculate machine kinematics
Page 507
LN blocks
Three-dimensional tool compensation
Page 508
SPL blocks
Spline interpolation
Page 519
468
12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
12.2 The PLANE Function:

Tilting the Working Plane
(Software Option 1)
Introduction
The machine manufacturer must enable the functions for
tilting the working plane!
You can only use the PLANE function on machines which
have at least two rotary axes (head and/or table).
Exception: PLANE AXIAL can also be used if only a single
rotary axis is present or active on your machine.
The PLANE function is a powerful function for defining tilted working
planes in various manners.
All PLANE functions available on the TNC describe the desired working
plane independently of the rotary axes actually present on your
machine. The following possibilities are available:
Function
Required parameters
SPATIAL
Three space angles: SPA,

SPB, and SPC
Page 473
PROJECTED
Two projection angles:

PROPR and PROMIN and a
rotation angle ROT
Page 475
EULER
Three Euler angles:

precession (EULPR),
nutation (EULNU) and
rotation (EULROT)
Page 477
VECTOR
Norm vector for defining

the plane and base vector
for defining the direction of
the tilted X axis
Page 479
POINTS
Coordinates of any three

points in the plane to be
tilted
Page 481
RELATIVE
Single, incrementally
effective spatial angle
Page 483
AXIAL
Up to three absolute or
incremental axis angles
A, B, C
Page 484
RESET
Reset the PLANE function
Page 472
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Soft key
Page
469
In order to make the differences between each definition possibility

more clear even before selecting the function, you can start an
animated sequence via soft key.
The parameter definition of the PLANE function is separated
into two parts:
The geometric definition of the plane, which is different
for each of the available PLANE functions.
The positioning behavior of the PLANE function, which is
independent of the plane definition and is identical for all
PLANE functions (see Specifying the positioning
behavior of the PLANE function on page 486).
The actual-position-capture function is not possible with

an active tilted working plane.
If you use the PLANE function when M120 is active, the TNC
automatically rescinds the radius compensation, which
also rescinds the M120 function.
Always use PLANE RESET to reset PLANE functions. Entering
0 in all PLANE parameters does not completely reset the
function.
470
Define the PLANE function

U
Select the PLANE function: Press the TILT MACHINING

PLANE soft key: The TNC displays the available
definition possibilities in the soft-key row
Selecting the function while animation is active

U
U
Activate animation: Set the SELECT ANIMATION ON/OFF soft key

to ON
Start an animation for one of the definition possibilities: Press one
of the available soft keys. The TNC highlights the soft key with a
different color and begins the appropriate animation
To assume the currently active function: Press the ENT key or press
the soft key of the active function again. The TNC continues the
dialog and requests the required parameters
Selecting the function while animation is inactive

U
Select the desired function directly via soft key. The TNC continues
the dialog and requests the required parameters
Position display
As soon as a PLANE function is active, the TNC shows the calculated
spatial angle in the additional status display (see figure). As a rule, the
TNC internally always calculates with space angles, independent of
which PLANE function is active.
During tilting (MOVE or TURN mode) in the Distance-To-Go mode (DIST),
the TNC shows (in the rotary axis) the distance to go (or calculated
distance) to the final position of the rotary axis.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
471
Reset the PLANE function

U
Select special TNC functions: Press the SPECIAL TNC

FUNCTIONS soft key
Select the PLANE function: Press the TILT

MACHINING PLANE soft key: The TNC displays the
available definition possibilities in the soft-key row
Select the Reset function. This internally resets the

PLANE function, but does not change the current axis
positions
Specify whether the TNC should automatically move

the rotary axes to the default setting (MOVE or TURN) or
not (STAY) (see Automatic positioning:
MOVE/TURN/STAY (entry is mandatory) on page 486).
To terminate entry, press the END key
Example: NC block
25 PLANE RESET MOVE SET-UP50 F1000
The PLANE RESET function resets the current PLANE

functionor an active 19completely (angles = 0 and
function is inactive). It does not need to be defined more
than once.
472
Defining the machining plane with space angles:

PLANE SPATIAL
Function
Space angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations
around the fixed machine coordinate system. The sequence of
rotations is firmly specified: first around the A axis, then B, and then C
(the function corresponds to Cycle 19, if the entries in Cycle 19 are set
to space angles).
Before programming, note the following
You must always define the three space angles SPA, SPB,
and SPC, even if one of them = 0.
The sequence of the rotations described above is
independent of the active tool axis.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function on page 486.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
473
Input parameters
U Spatial angle A?: Rotational angle SPA around the
fixed machine axis X (see figure at top right). Input
range from -359.9999 to +359.9999
U
Spatial angle B?: Rotational angle SPB around the

fixed machine axis Y (see figure at top right). Input
range from -359.9999 to +359.9999
Spatial angle C?: Rotational angle SPC around the

fixed machine axis Z (see figure at center right). Input
range from -359.9999 to +359.9999
Continue with the positioning properties (see

function on page 486)
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
SPATIAL
Spatial = in space
SPA
Spatial A: rotation about the X axis
SPB
Spatial B: rotation about the Y axis
SPC
Spatial C: rotation about the Z axis
Example: NC block
5 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+27 SPB+0 SPC+45 .....
474
Defining the machining plane with projection

angles: PROJECTED PLANE
Function
Projection angles define a machining plane through the entry of two
angles that you determine by projecting the first coordinate plane (Z/X
plane with tool axis Z) and the second coordinate plane (Y/Z with tool
axis Z) onto the machining plane to be defined.
You can only use projection angles if the angle definitions
are given with respect to a rectangular cuboid. Otherwise
distortions could occur on the workpiece.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
475
Input parameters
U Proj. angle 1st coordinate plane?: Projected angle
of the tilted machining plane in the 1st coordinate
plane of the fixed machine coordinate system (Z/X for
tool axis Z, see figure at top right). Input range: from
-89.9999 to +89.9999. The 0 axis is the principal
axis of the active working plane (X for tool axis Z. See
figure at top right for positive direction).
U
Proj. angle 2nd coordinate plane?: Projected angle

in the 2nd coordinate plane of the fixed machine
coordinate system (Y/Z for tool axis Z, see figure at
top right). Input range: from -89.9999 to +89.9999.
The 0 axis is the minor axis of the active machining
plane (Y for tool axis Z).
ROT angle of the tilted plane?: Rotation of the

tilted coordinate system around the tilted tool axis
(corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION).
The rotation angle is used to simply specify the
direction of the principal axis of the working plane
(X for tool axis Z, Z for tool axis Y; see figure at bottom
right). Input range: from 0 to +360.

NC block
5 PLANE PROJECTED PROPR+24 PROMIN+24 ROT+30 .....
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
PROJECTED
Projected
PROPR
Principal plane
PROMIN
Minor plane
ROT
Rotation
476
Defining the machining plane with Euler angles:

EULER PLANE
Function
Euler angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations
about the respectively tilted coordinate system. The Swiss
mathematician Leonhard Euler defined these angles. When applied to
the machine coordinate system, they have the following meanings:
Precession angle
EULPR
Nutation angle
EULNU
Rotation angle
EULROT
Rotation of the coordinate system around the

Z axis
Rotation of the coordinate system around the
X axis already shifted by the precession angle
Rotation of the tilted machining plane around the
tilted Z axis

The sequence of the rotations described above is
independent of the active tool axis.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
477
Input parameters
U Rot. angle main coordinate plane?: Rotary angle
EULPR around the Z axis (see figure at top right).
Please note:
Input range: 180.0000 to +180.0000
The 0 axis is the X axis
U
Tilting angle tool axis?: Tilting angle EULNUT of the

coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the
precession angle (see figure at center right). Please
note:
Input range: 0 to +180.0000
The 0 axis is the Z axis
ROT angle of the tilted plane?: Rotation EULROT of

the tilted coordinate system around the tilted Z axis
(corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION).
Use the rotation angle to simply define the direction
of the X axis in the tilted machining plane (see figure
at bottom right). Please note:
Input range: 0 to 360.0000
The 0 axis is the X axis

NC block
5 PLANE EULER EULPR45 EULNU20 EULROT22 .....
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
EULER
Swiss mathematician who defined these angles
EULPR
Precession angle: angle describing the rotation of

the coordinate system around the Z axis
EULNU
Nutation angle: angle describing the rotation of

the coordinate system around the X axis shifted
by the precession angle
EULROT
Rotation angle: angle describing the rotation of

the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis
478
Defining the working plane with two vectors:

VECTOR PLANE
Function
You can use the definition of a working plane via two vectors if your
CAD system can calculate the base vector and normal vector of the
tilted machining plane. A normalized input is not necessary. The TNC
calculates the normal, so you can enter values between -99.999999
and +99.999999.
The base vector required for the definition of the machining plane is
defined by the components BX, BY and BZ (see figure at right). The
normal vector is defined by the components NX, NY and NZ.
The basis vector defines the direction of the principal axis
in the tilted machining plane, and the normal vector
determines the direction of the working plane, and at the
same time is perpendicular to it.
The TNC calculates standardized vectors from the values
you enter.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
479
Input parameters
U X component of base vector?: X component BX of the
base vector B (see figure at top right). Input range:
-99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U
Y component of base vector?: Y component BY of the

-99.9999999 to +99.9999999
Z component of base vector?: Z component BZ of the

-99.9999999 to +99.9999999
X component of normal vector?: X component NX of

the normal vector N (see figure at center right). Input
range: -99.9999999 to +99.9999999
Y component of normal vector?: Y component NY of

the normal vector N (see figure at center right). Input
range: -99.9999999 to +99.9999999
Z component of normal vector?: Z component NZ of

the normal vector N (see figure at lower right). Input
range: -99.9999999 to +99.9999999

NC block
5 PLANE VECTOR BX0.8 BY-0.4 BZ-0.42 NX0.2 NY0.2 NZ0.92 ..
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
VECTOR
Vector
BX, BY, BZ
Base vector: X, Y and Z components
NX, NY, NZ
Normal vector: X, Y and Z components
480
Function
A machining plane can be uniquely defined by entering any three
points P1 to P3 in this plane. This possibility is realized in the PLANE
POINTS function.
P3
P2

The connection from Point 1 to Point 2 determines the
direction of the tilted main axis (X for tool axis Z).
The direction of the tilted tool axis is determined by the
position of Point 3 relative to the connecting line between
Point 1 and Point 2. Use the right-hand rule (thumb = X
axis, index finger = Y axis, middle finger = Z axis (see
figure at right)) to remember: thumb (X axis) points from
Point 1 to Point 2, index finger (Y axis) points parallel to the
tilted Y axis in the direction of Point 3. Then the middle
finger points in the direction of the tilted tool axis.
+Z
P1
+X
+Y
The three points define the slope of the plane. The

position of the active datum is not changed by the TNC.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
481
Defining the machining plane via three points:

PLANE POINTS
Input parameters
U X coordinate of 1st plane point?: X coordinate P1X
of the 1st plane point (see figure at top right).
U
Y coordinate of 1st plane point?: Y coordinate P1Y

Z coordinate of 1st plane point?: Z coordinate P1Z

X coordinate of 2nd plane point?: X coordinate P2X

of the 2nd plane point (see figure at center right).
Y coordinate of 2nd plane point?: Y coordinate P2Y

Z coordinate of 2nd plane point?: Z coordinate P2Z

X coordinate of 3rd plane point?: X coordinate P3X

of the 3rd plane point (see figure at bottom right).
Y coordinate of 3rd plane point?: Y coordinate P3Y

Z coordinate of 3rd plane point?: Z coordinate P3Z


NC block
5 PLANE POINTS P1X+0 P1Y+0 P1Z+20 P2X+30 P2Y+31 P2Z+20
P3X+0 P3Y+41 P3Z+32.5 .....
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
POINTS
482
Defining the machining plane with a single,

incremental spatial angle: PLANE RELATIVE
Function
Use an incremental space angle when an already active tilted
machining plane is to be tilted by another rotation. Example:
machining a 45 chamfer on a tilted plane.
The defined angle is always in effect in respect to the
active working plane, regardless of the function you have
used to activate it.
You can program any number of PLANE RELATIVE functions
in a row.
If you want to return to the machining plane that was
active before the PLANE RELATIVE function, define the
PLANE RELATIVE function again with the same angle but
with the opposite algebraic sign.
If you use the PLANE RELATIVE function in a non-tilted
working plane, then you simply rotate the non-tilted plane
about the spatial angle defined in the PLANE function.
Input parameters
U Incremental angle?: Space angle about which the
active machining plane is to be rotated additionally
(see figure at right). Use a soft key to select the axis
to be rotated about. Input range: 359.9999 to
+359.9999
U

Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
RELATIVE
Example: NC block
5 PLANE RELATIVE SPB-45 .....
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
483
Tilting the working plane through axis angle:

PLANE AXIAL (FCL 3 function)
Function
The PLANE AXIAL function defines both the position of the working
plane and the nominal coordinates of the rotary axes. This function is
particularly easy to use on machines with Cartesian coordinates and
with kinematics structures in which only one rotary axis is active.
PLANE AXIAL can also be used if you have only one rotary
axis active on your machine.
You can use the PLANE RELATIVE function after PLANE
AXIAL if your machine allows spatial angle definitions. The
machine tool manual provides further information.

Enter only axis angles that actually exist on your machine.
Otherwise the TNC generates an error message.
Rotary axis coordinates defined with PLANE AXIAL are
modally effective. Successive definitions therefore build
on each other. Incremental input is allowed.
Use PLANE RESET to reset the PLANE AXIAL function.
Resetting by entering 0 does not deactivate PLANE AXIAL.
SEQ, TABLE ROT and COORD ROT have no function in
conjunction with PLANE AXIAL.
484
Input parameters
U Axis angle A?: Axis angle to which the A axis is to
be tilted. If entered incrementally, it is the angle by
which the A axis is to be tilted from its current
position. Input range: 99999.9999 to +99999.9999
U
Axis angle B?: Axis angle to which the B axis is to be

tilted. If entered incrementally, it is the angle by
which the B axis is to be tilted from its current
Axis angle C?: Axis angle to which the C axis is to be

tilted. If entered incrementally, it is the angle by
which the C axis is to be tilted from its current

Abbreviations used
Abbreviation
Meaning
Example: NC block
5 PLANE AXIAL B-45 .....
AXIAL
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
485
Specifying the positioning behavior of the

PLANE function
Overview
Independently of which PLANE function you use to define the tilted
machining plane, the following functions are always available for the
positioning behavior:
Automatic positioning
Selection of alternate tilting possibilities
Selection of the Type of Transformation
Automatic positioning: MOVE/TURN/STAY (entry is mandatory)
After you have entered all parameters for the plane definition, you
must specify how the rotary axes will be positioned to the calculated
axis values:
U
The PLANE function is to automatically position the

rotary axes to the calculated position values. The
position of the tool relative to the workpiece is to
remain the same. The TNC carries out a
compensation movement in the linear axes.
The PLANE function is to automatically position the

rotary axes to the calculated position values, but only
the rotary axes are positioned. The TNC does not
carry out a compensation movement in the linear
axes.
You will position the rotary axes later in a separate

positioning block.
If you have selected the MOVE (PLANE function is to position the axes
automatically), the following two parameters must still be defined:
Dist. tool tip center of rot. and Feed rate? F=.
If you have selected the TURN option (PLANE function is to position the
axes automatically without any compensating movement), the
following parameters must still be defined: Retraction length MB and
Feed rate? F=.
As an alternative to defining a feed rate F directly by numerical value,
you can also position with FMAX (rapid traverse) or FAUTO (feed rate from
the TOOL CALL block).
If you use PLANE AXIAL together with STAY, you have to
position the rotary axes in a separate block after the PLANE
function (see Positioning the rotary axes in a separate
block on page 488).
486
Dist. tool tip center of rot. (incremental): The TNC tilts the
tool (or table) relative to the tool tip. The SET UP parameter shifts the
center of rotation of the tilting movement relative to the current
position of the tool tip.
If the tool is already at the given distance to the
workpiece before positioning, then relatively speaking
the tool is at the same position after positioning (see
figure at center right, 1 = SET UP)
If the tool is not at the given distance to the workpiece
before positioning, then relatively speaking the tool is
offset from the original position after positioning (see
figure at bottom right, 1 = SET UP)
U
U
1
1
Feed rate? F=: Contour speed at which the tool should be

positioned
Retraction length in the tool axis?: Retraction path MB is
effective incrementally from the current tool position in the active
tool axis direction that the TNC approaches before tilting. MB MAX
positions the tool just before the software limit switch.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
487
Positioning the rotary axes in a separate block

Proceed as follows if you want to position the rotary axes in a separate
positioning block (option STAY selected):
Pre-position the tool to a position where there is no danger
of collision with the workpiece (clamping devices) during
positioning.
U
Select any PLANE function, and define automatic positioning with the
STAY option. During program execution the TNC calculates the
position values of the rotary axes present on the machine, and
stores them in the system parameters Q120 (A axis), Q121 (B axis)
and Q122 (C axis)
Define the positioning block with the angular values calculated by
the TNC
NC example blocks: Position a machine with a rotary table C and a

tilting table A to a space angle of B+45.
...
12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX
Position at clearance height.
13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+45 SPC+0 STAY
Define and activate the PLANE function
14 L A+Q120 C+Q122 F2000
Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by

the TNC
...
488
Selection of alternate tilting possibilities: SEQ +/

(entry optional)
The orientation you define for the machining plane is used by the TNC
to calculate the appropriate positioning of the rotary axes present on
the machine. In general there are always two solution possibilities.
Use the SEQ switch to specify which possibility the TNC should use:
SEQ+ positions the master axis so that it assumes a positive angle.
The master axis is the 2nd rotary axis from the table, or the 1st axis
from the tool (depending on the machine configuration (see figure at
top right).
SEQ- positions the master axis so that it assumes a negative angle.
If the solution you chose with SEQ is not within the machines range of
traverse, the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error
message.
When the PLANE AXIS function is used, the SEQ switch is
nonfunctional.
If you do not define SEQ, the TNC determines the solution as follows:
1
2
3
4
The TNC first checks whether both solution possibilities are within
the traverse range of the rotary axes.
If they are, then the TNC selects the shortest possible solution.
If only one solution is within the traverse range, the TNC selects
this solution.
If neither solution is within the traverse range, the TNC displays
the Entered angle not permitted error message.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
489
Example for a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A.

Programmed function: PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+45 SPC+0
Limit switch
Starting
position
SEQ
Resulting axis
position
None
A+0, C+0
not prog.
A+45, C+90
None
A+0, C+0
A+45, C+90
None
A+0, C+0
A45, C90
None
A+0, C-105
not prog.
A45, C90
None
A+0, C-105
A+45, C+90
None
A+0, C-105
A45, C90
90 < A < +10
A+0, C+0
not prog.
A45, C90
90 < A < +10
A+0, C+0
Error message
None
A+0, C135
A+45, C+90
Selecting the type of transformation (entry optional)

On machines with C-rotary tables, a function is available for specifying
the type of transformation:
U
COORD ROT specifies that the PLANE function should

only rotate the coordinate system to the defined
tilting angle. The rotary table is not moved; the
compensation is purely mathematical.
TABLE ROT specifies that the PLANE function should

position the rotary table to the defined tilting angle.
Compensation results from rotating the workpiece.
When the PLANE AXIS function is used, COORD ROT and

TABLE ROT are nonfunctional.
If you use the TABLE ROT function in conjunction with a
basic rotation and a tilting angle of 0, then the TNC tilts the
table to the angle defined in the basic rotation.
490
12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the Tilted Plane
12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the

Tilted Plane
Function
In combination with M128 and the new PLANE functions, inclined-tool
machining in a tilted machining plane is now possible. Two
possibilities are available for definition:
Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis
Inclined-tool machining via normal vectors
IB
Inclined-tool machining in a tilted machining plane only

functions with spherical cutters.
With 45 swivel heads and tilting tables you can also
define the incline angle as a space angle. Use the TCPM
FUNCTION (see TCPM FUNCTION (Software Option 2)
on page 493).
Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse

of a rotary axis
U
U
U
U
Retract the tool

Activate M128
Define any PLANE function; consider the positioning behavior
Via a straight-line block, traverse to the desired incline angle in the
appropriate axis incrementally
Example NC blocks:
...
12 L Z+50 R0 FMAX M128
Position at clearance height, activate M128
13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-45 SPC+0 MOVE SET-UP50 F1000
14 L IB-17 F1000
Set the incline angle
...
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
491
12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the Tilted Plane
Inclined-tool machining via normal vectors

Only one directional vector can be defined in the LN block.
This vector defines the incline angle (normal vector NX, NY,
NZ, or tool direction vector TX, TY, TZ).
U
U
U
U
Retract the tool

Activate M128
Define any PLANE function; consider the positioning behavior
Execute program with LN block in which the tool direction is defined
by a vector
Example NC blocks:
...
12 L Z+50 R0 FMAX M128
Position at clearance height, activate M128
13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+45 SPC+0 MOVE SETUP50 F1000
14 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165 NX+0.3 NY+0 NZ+0.9539 F

1000 M3
Set the incline angle with the normal vector
...
492
Function
B
The machine manufacturer must enter the machine

geometry in machine parameters or in kinematics tables.
Z
X
For tilted axes with Hirth coupling:
Only change the position of the tilted axis after retracting
the tool. Otherwise you might damage the contour when
disengaging from the coupling.
Before positioning with M91 or M92: Reset TCPM FUNCTION.

To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical
cutters with TCPM FUNCTION.
The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the

tool tip.
If TCPM FUNCTION is active, the TNC shows the symbol
in the position display.
TCPM FUNCTION is an improvement on the M128 function, with which
you can define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary
axes. In contrast to M128, with TCPM FUNCTION you can define the mode
of action of various functions:
Mode of action of the programmed feed rate: F TCP / F CONT
Interpretation of the rotary axis coordinates programmed in the NC
program: AXIS POS / AXIS SPAT
Type of interpolation between start and target position: PATHCTRL
AXIS / PATHCTRL VECTOR
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
493
12.4 TCPM FUNCTION (Software Option 2)
12.4 TCPM FUNCTION

(Software Option 2)
Define TCPM FUNCTION

U
Press the Special Functions key.
Select the TCPM FUNCTION function.
Mode of action of the programmed feed rate

The TNC provides two functions for defining the mode of action of the
programmed feed rate:
U
F TCP determines that the programmed feed rate is

interpreted as the actual relative velocity between the
tool point (tool center point) and the workpiece.
F CONT determines that the programmed feed rate is

interpreted as the contouring feed rate of the axis
programmed in the respective NC block.
Example NC blocks:
...
13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP ...
Feed rate refers to the tool point
14 FUNCTION TCPM F CONT ...
Feed rate is interpreted as the speed of the tool

along the contour
...
494
Interpretation of the programmed rotary axis

coordinates
Up to now, machines with 45 swivel heads or 45 tilting tables could
not easily set the angle of inclination or a tool orientation with respect
to the currently active coordinate system (space angle). This function
could only be realized through specially written programs with normal
vectors (LN blocks).
The TNC now provides the following function:
U
AXIS POS determines that the TNC interprets the

programmed coordinates of rotary axes as the
nominal position of the respective axis.
AXIS SPAT determines that the TNC interprets the

programmed coordinates of rotary axes as the space
angle.
AXIS POS should be used primarily if your machine is

equipped with Cartesian rotary axes. You can also use
AXIS POS with 45-swivel heads/ tilting tables if it is
ensured that the programmed rotary axis coordinates
define the desired orientation of the working plane
correctly (this can be accomplished with a CAM system,
for example).
AXIS SPAT: The rotary axis coordinates entered in the
positioning block are spatial angles that are given with
respect to the currently active (perhaps tilted) coordinate
system (incremental spatial angle).
After you switch on TCPM FUNCTION with AXIS SPAT, in the
first positioning block you should always program all three
space angles in the inclination angle definition. This also
applies if one or more space angles are 0.
Example NC blocks:
...
13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS ...
Rotary axis coordinates are axis angle
...
18 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT ...
Rotary axis coordinates are space angle
20 L A+0 B+45 C+0 F MAX
Set tool orientation to B+45 degrees (space angle).

Define space angle A and C with 0
...
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
495
Type of interpolation between the starting and

end position
The TNC provides two functions for defining the type of interpolation
between the starting and end position:
U
PATHCTRL AXIS determines that the tool point between

the starting and end position of the respective NC
block moves on a straight line (Face Milling). The
direction of the tool axis at the starting and end
position corresponds to the respective programmed
values, but the tool circumference does not describe
a defined path between starting and end position. The
surface produced by milling with the tool
circumference (Peripheral Milling) depends on the
machine geometry.
PATHCTRL VECTOR determines that the tool point

between the starting and end position of the
respective NC block moves on a straight line and also
that the direction of the tool axis between starting and
end position is interpolated so that a plane results
from machining at the tool circumference (Peripheral
Milling).
With PATHCTRL VECTOR, remember:

Any defined tool orientation is generally accessible
through two different tilting angle positions. The TNC uses
the solution over the shortest available pathstarting
from the current position. Therefore, with 5-axis
machining it may happen that the TNC moves in the rotary
axes to end positions that are not programmed.
To attain the most continuous multiaxis movement
possible, define Cycle 32 with a tolerance for rotary
axes (see Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual, Cycle 32
TOLERANCE). The tolerance of the rotary axes should be
about the same as the tolerance of the contouring
deviation that is also defined in Cycle 32. The greater the
tolerance for the rotary axes is defined, the greater are the
contour deviations during peripheral milling.
Example NC blocks:
...
13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT PATHCTRL AXIS
Tool tip moves along a straight line
14 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS PATHCTRL VECTOR
Tool tip and tool directional vector move in one plane
...
496
Reset TCPM FUNCTION

U
FUNCTION RESET TCPM is to be used if you want to

purposely reset the function within a program.
Example NC block:
...
25 FUNCTION RESET TCPM
Reset TCPM FUNCTION
...
The TNC automatically resets TCPM FUNCTION if you select

a new program in a program run mode.
You can reset the TCPM FUNCTION only if the PLANE function
is inactive. If required, run PLANE RESET before FUNCTION
RESET TCPM.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
497
12.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes

Rotary Axes
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C:
M116 (software option 1)
Standard behavior
The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in
degrees/min (in mm programs and also in inch programs). The feed
rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the
center of axis rotation.
The larger this distance becomes, the greater the contouring feed
rate.
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes with M116
The machine geometry must be specified by the machine
tool builder in the description of kinematics.
M116 works only on rotary tables. M116 cannot be used with
swivel heads. If your machine is equipped with a
table/head combination, the TNC ignores the swivel-head
rotary axes.
M116 is also effective in an active tilted working plane and
in combination with M128 if you used the M138 function to
select rotary axes (see Selecting tilting axes: M138 on
page 506). Then M116 affects only those rotary axes that
were not selected with M138.
The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in
degrees/min (or 1/10 inch/min). In this case, the TNC calculates the
feed for the block at the start of each block. With a rotary axis, the feed
rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool
moves toward the center of the rotary axis.
Effect
M116 is effective in the working plane. With M117 you can reset M116.
M116 is also canceled at the end of the program.
498
Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126

Standard behavior
The behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes
depends on the machine tool The machine tool manual
The behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display
has been reduced to values less than 360 depends on Bit 2 of
Machine Parameter 7682. MP7682 sets whether the TNC should
consider the difference between nominal and actual position, or
whether the TNC should always choose the shortest path to the
programmed position or only when M126 is programmed. Examples
of when the TNC should traverse the rotary axis always along the
number line:
Actual position
Nominal position
Traverse
350
10
340
10
340
+330
Behavior with M126

With M126, the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse
for rotary axes whose display is reduced to values less than 360.
Examples:
Actual position
Nominal position
Traverse
350
10
+20
10
340
30
Effect
To cancel M126, enter M127. At the end of program, M126 is
automatically canceled.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
499
Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less

than 360: M94
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the
programmed angular value.
Example:
Current angular value:
Programmed angular value:
Actual distance of traverse:
538
180
-358
Behavior with M94

At the start of block, the TNC first reduces the current angular value to
a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed
value. If several rotary axes are active, M94 will reduce the display of
all rotary axes. As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94.
The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis.
Example NC blocks
To reduce display of all active rotary axes:
L M94
To reduce display of the C axis only:
L M94 C
To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in
the C axis to the programmed value:
L C+180 FMAX M94
Effect
500
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset
in the linear axes must be calculated by a postprocessor and traversed
in a positioning block. As the machine geometry is also relevant, the
NC program must be calculated separately for each machine tool.
Behavior with M114
If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program, the

TNC automatically compensates the tool offset by a 3-D length
compensation. As the geometry of the individual machine tools is set
in machine parameters, the TNC also compensates machine-specific
offsets automatically. Programs only need to be calculated by the
postprocessor once, even if they are being run on different machines
with TNC control.
B
dx
dz
If your machine tool does not have controlled tilted axes (head tilted
manually or positioned by the PLC), you can enter the current valid
swivel head position after M114 (e.g. M114 B+45, Q parameters
permitted).
The radius compensation must be calculated by a CAD system or by a
postprocessor. A programmed radius compensation RL/RR will result
in an error message.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
dB
501
Automatic compensation of machine geometry

when working with tilted axes: M114 (software
option 2)
If the tool length compensation is calculated by the TNC, the

programmed feed rate refers to the point of the tool. Otherwise it
refers to the tool datum.
If your machine tool is equipped with a swivel head that
can be tilted under program control, you can interrupt
program run and change the position of the tilted axis, for
example with the handwheel.
With the RESTORE POS. AT N function, you can then
resume program run at the block at which the part
program was interrupted. If M114 is active, the TNC
automatically calculates the new position of the tilted axis.
If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position
of the tilted axis during program run, use M118 in
conjunction with M128.
Effect
block. M114 is not effective when tool radius compensation is active.
To cancel M114, enter M115. At the end of program, M114 is
automatically canceled.
502
Standard behavior
in the linear axes must be calculated, and traversed in a positioning
block.
Behavior with M128 (TCPM: Tool Center Point Management)
If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program, the

position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same.
If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position of the tilted
axis during program run, use M128 in conjunction with M118.
Handwheel positioning in a machine-based coordinate system is
possible when M128 is active.
Z
X
Z
Caution: Danger to the workpiece!

For tilted axes with Hirth coupling: Do not change the
position of the tilted axis until after retracting the tool.
Otherwise you might damage the contour when
disengaging from the coupling.
After M128 you can program another feed rate, at which the TNC will
carry out the compensation movements in the linear axes. If you
program no feed rate here, or if you program a larger feed rate than is
defined in MP7471, the feed rate from MP7471 will be effective.
Before positioning with M91 or M92: Reset M128.

To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical
cutters with M128.
The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the
tool tip.
If M128 is active, the TNC shows the symbol
status display.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
in the
503
Maintaining the position of the tool tip when

positioning with tilted axes (TCPM): M128
(software option 2)
M128 on tilting tables

If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active, the TNC
rotates the coordinate system accordingly. If, for example, you rotate
the C axis by 90 (through a positioning command or datum shift) and
then program a movement in the X axis, the TNC executes the
movement in the machine axis Y.
The TNC also transforms the defined datum, which has been shifted
by the movement of the rotary table.
M128 with 3-D tool compensation
If you carry out a 3-D tool compensation with active M128 and active
radius compensation RL/RR, the TNC will automatically position the
rotary axes for certain machine geometrical configurations (Peripheral
milling, see "Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Software Option
2)", page 508).
Effect
M128 becomes effective at the start of block, M129 at the end of block.
M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and remains
active even after a change of mode. The feed rate for the
compensation movement will be effective until you program a new
feed rate or until you cancel M128 with M129.
Enter M129 to cancel M128. The TNC also cancels M128 if you select a
new program in a program run operating mode.
Example NC blocks
Feed rate of 1000 mm/min for compensation movements.
L X+0 Y+38.5 IB-15 RL F125 M128 F1000
Inclined machining with noncontrolled rotary axes
If you have noncontrolled rotary axes (counting axes) on your machine,
then in combination with M128 you can also perform inclined
machining operations with these axes.
Proceed as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
Manually traverse the rotary axes to the desired positions. M128

must not be active!
Activate M128: The TNC reads the actual values of all rotary axes
present, calculates from this the new position of the tool center
point, and updates the position display.
The TNC performs the necessary compensating movement in the
next positioning block.
Carry out the machining operation.
At the end of program, reset M128 with M129, and return the
rotary axes to the initial positions.
As long as M128 is active, the TNC monitors the actual
positions of the noncontrolled rotary axes. If the actual
position deviates from the nominal position by a value
greater than that defined by the machine manufacturer,
the TNC outputs an error message and interrupts program
run.
504
Overlap between M128 and M114

M128 is a new development of function M114.
M114 calculates necessary compensation movements in the
geometry before the respective NC block is executed. The TNC then
processes the compensating movement such that it is performed by
the end of the respective NC block.
M128 calculates all compensating movements in real time. The TNC
performs necessary compensating movements immediately as soon
as they become necessary after movement in a rotary axis.
M114 and M128 may not be active at the same time, since
overlaps of the two functions would occur, which could
lead to damage of the workpiece. The TNC outputs a
corresponding error message.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
505
Exact stop at corners with nontangential

transitions: M134
Standard behavior
The standard behavior of the TNC during positioning with rotary axes
is to insert a transitional element in nontangential contour transitions.
The contour of the transitional element depends on the acceleration,
the rate of acceleration (jerk), and the defined tolerance for contour
deviation.
With MP7440 you can change the standard behavior of the
TNC so that M134 becomes active automatically
whenever a program is selected (see "General User
Parameters", page 680).
Behavior with M134
The TNC moves the tool during positioning with rotary axes so as to
perform an exact stop at nontangential contour transitions.
Effect
block.
You can reset M134 with M135. The TNC also resets M134 if you
select a new program in a program run operating mode.
Selecting tilting axes: M138

Standard behavior
The TNC performs M114 and M128, and tilts the working plane, only
in those axes for which the machine tool builder has set the
appropriate machine parameters.
Behavior with M138
The TNC performs the above functions only in those tilting axes that
you have defined using M138.
Effect
You can reset M138 by reprogramming it without entering any axes.
Example NC blocks
Perform the above-mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C:
L Z+100 R0 FMAX M138 C
506
Compensating the machines kinematics

configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions
at end of block: M144 (software option 2)
Standard behavior
in the linear axes must be calculated, and traversed in a positioning
block.
Behavior with M144
The TNC calculates into the position value any changes in the
machines kinematics configuration which result, for example, from
adding a spindle attachment. If the position of a controlled tilted axis
changes, the position of the tool tip to the workpiece is also changed.
The resulting offset is calculated in the position display.
Positioning blocks with M91/M92 are permitted if M144 is
active.
The position display in the operating modes FULL
SEQUENCE and SINGLE BLOCK does not change until the
tilting axes have reached their final position.
Effect
M144 becomes effective at the start of the block. M144 does not
function in connection with M114, M128 or a tilted working plane.
You can cancel M144 by programming M145.
The machine tool builder determines the behavior in the
automatic and manual operating modes. Refer to your
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
507
12.6 Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Software Option 2)
12.6 Three-Dimensional Tool

Compensation (Software
Option 2)
Introduction
The TNC can carry out a three-dimensional tool compensation (3-D
compensation) for straight-line blocks. Apart from the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the straight-line end point, these blocks must also
contain the components NX, NY and NZ of the surface-normal vector
(see Definition of a normalized vector on page 509).
Z
Y
If, in addition, you want to carry out a tool orientation or a threedimensional radius compensation, these blocks need also a
normalized vector with the components TX, TY and TZ, which
determines the tool orientation (see Definition of a normalized
vector on page 509).
PT
The straight-line end point, the components for the surface-normal

vector as well as those for the tool orientation must be calculated by
a CAM system.
Application possibilities
Use of tools with dimensions that do not correspond with the
dimensions calculated by the CAM system (3-D compensation
without definition of the tool orientation).
Face milling: compensation of the milling machine geometry in the
direction of the surface-normal vector (3-D compensation with and
without definition of the tool orientation). Cutting is usually with the
end face of the tool.
Peripheral milling: compensation of the mill radius perpendicular to
the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction
(3-D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation).
Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool.
NX
NZ
NY
Z
Y
X
TZ
TY
508
TX
Definition of a normalized vector

A normalized vector is a mathematical quantity with a value of 1 and a
direction. The TNC requires up to two normalized vectors for LN
blocks, one to determine the direction of the surface-normal vector,
and another (optional) to determine the tool orientation direction. The
direction of a surface-normal vector is determined by the components
NX, NY and NZ. With an end mill and a radius mill, this direction is
perpendicular from the workpiece surface to be machined to the tool
datum PT, and with a toroid cutter through PT or PT (see figure). The
direction of the tool orientation is determined by the components TX,
TY and TZ.
The coordinates for the X, Y, Z positions and the surfacenormal components NX, NY, NZ, as well as TX, TY, TZ
must be in the same sequence in the NC block.
Always indicate all of the coordinates and all of the
surface-normal vectors in an LN block, even if the values
have not changed from the previous block.
R2
PT
PT
R2
PT'
PT
TX, TY and TZ must always be defined with numerical

values. You cannot use Q parameters.
Always calculate and output normal vectors to seven
decimal places, in order to avoid drops in the feed rate
during machining.
3-D compensation with surface-normal vectors is only
effective for coordinates in the main axes X, Y, Z.
If you insert a tool with oversize (positive delta value), the
TNC outputs an error message. You can suppress the
error message with the M function M107 (see
"Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface-normal vectors
and 3-D compensation", page 196).
The TNC will not display an error message if an entered
tool oversize would cause damage to the contour.
PT
PSP
MP7680 defines whether the CAM system has calculated

the tool length compensation from the center of sphere PT
or the south pole of the sphere PSP (see figure).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
509
Permissible tool forms

You can describe the permissible tool shapes in the tool table via tool
radius R and R2 (see figure):
Tool radius R: Distance from the tool center to the tool
circumference.
Tool radius 2 R2: Radius of the curvature between tool tip and tool
circumference.
The ratio of R to R2 determines the shape of the tool:
R2 = 0: End mill
R2 = R: Radius cutter
0 < R2 < R: Toroid cutter
These data also specify the coordinates of the tool datum PT.
Using other tools: Delta values

If you want to use tools that have different dimensions than the ones
you originally programmed, you can enter the difference between the
tool lengths and radii as delta values in the tool table or TOOL CALL:
Positive delta value DL, DR, DR2: The tool is larger than the original
tool (oversize).
Negative delta value DL, DR, DR2: The tool is smaller than the
original tool (undersize).
The TNC then compensates the tool position by the sum of the delta
values from the tool table and the tool call.
R
L
R2
DR2>0
DL>0
510
3-D compensation without tool orientation

The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface-normal
vectors by the sum of the delta values (tool table and TOOL CALL).
Example: Block format with surface-normal vectors
1 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165
NX+0.2637581 NY+0.0078922 NZ-0.8764339 F1000 M3
LN:
X, Y, Z:
NX, NY, NZ:
F:
M:
Straight line with 3-D compensation

Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point
Components of the surface-normal vector
Feed rate
Miscellaneous function
Face milling: 3-D compensation with and

without tool orientation
The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface-normal
vectors by the sum of the delta values (tool table and TOOL CALL).
If M128 (see "Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning
with tilted axes (TCPM): M128 (software option 2)", page 503) is
active, the TNC maintains the tool perpendicular to the workpiece
contour if no tool orientation is programmed in the LN block.
If there is a tool orientation T defined in the LN block and M128 (or TCPM
FUNCTION) is active at the same time, then the TNC will position the
rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined
orientation. If you have not activated M128 (or TCPM FUNCTION), then the
TNC ignores the direction vector T, even if it is defined in the LN block.
This function is possible only on machines for which you
can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration.
Refer to your machine tool manual.
The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary
axes on all machines. Refer to your machine tool manual.
On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited
traverse, sometimes automatic positioning can require
the table to be rotated by 180. In this case, make sure
that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or
the clamps.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
511
Example: Block format with surface-normal vectors withouttool

orientation
LN X+31,737 Y+21,954 Z+33,165 NX+0,2637581 NY+0,0078922
NZ0,8764339 F1000 M128
Example: Block format with surface-normal vectors andtool
orientation
LN X+31,737 Y+21,954 Z+33,165 NX+0,2637581 NY+0,0078922
NZ0,8764339 TX+0,0078922 TY0,8764339 TZ+0,2590319 F1000
M128
LN:
X, Y, Z:
NX, NY, NZ:
TX, TY, TZ:
F:
M:
512

Components of the normalized vector for workpiece
orientation
Feed rate
The TNC displaces the tool perpendicular to the direction of

movement and perpendicular to the tool direction by the sum of the
delta values DR (tool table and TOOL CALL). Determine the
compensation direction with radius compensation RL/RR (see figure,
traverse direction Y+). For the TNC to be able to reach the set tool
orientation, you need to activate the function M128 (see Maintaining
the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM):
M128 (software option 2) on page 503). The TNC then positions the
rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined
orientation with the active compensation.
This function is possible only on machines for which you
can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration.
RL
RR X
The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary

axes on all machines. Refer to your machine tool manual.
Note that the TNC makes a compensating movement by
the defined delta values. The tool radius R defined in the
tool table has no effect on the compensation.
On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited
traverse, sometimes automatic positioning can require
the table to be rotated by 180. In this case, make sure
that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or
the clamps.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
513
Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation

with workpiece orientation
There are two ways to define the tool orientation:

In an LN block with the components TX, TY and TZ
In an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes
Example: Block format with tool orientation
1 LN X+31,737 Y+21,954 Z+33,165 TX+0,0078922 TY0,8764339
TZ+0,2590319 RR F1000 M128
LN:
X, Y, Z:
TX, TY, TZ:
RR:
F:
M:

orientation
Tool radius compensation
Feed rate
Example: Block format with rotary axes

1 L X+31,737 Y+21,954 Z+33,165 B+12,357 C+5,896 RL F1000
M128
L:
X, Y, Z:
L:
B, C:
RL:
F:
M:
514
Straight line
Straight line
Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orientation
Radius compensation
Feed rate
Software Option 2 is also required to be able to use

Software Option 92, 3-D ToolComp.
The effective sphere radius of a radius cutter deviates from the ideal
form owing to the production process. The maximum form inaccuracy
is specified by the tool manufacturer; common deviations are
between 0.005 and 0.01 mm.
The form inaccuracy can be determined with a laser system and the
corresponding laser cycles on the TNC. It can then be saved as a
compensation value table. This table contains angle values and the
deviation from the nominal radius R2 measured on the respective
angle value.
DR2+0.002
DR20.004
The 3D-ToolComp software option enables the TNC to compensate

the value defined in the compensation value table depending on the
actual contact point of the tool.
Prerequisites
3D-ToolComp software option is enabled
Software option 2, 3-D machining, is enabled
Machine parameter 7680, bit 6 must be set to the value 1: The TNC
takes R2 from the tool table into account during tool length
compensation
The DR2TABLE column in the tool table (TOOL.T) is enabled (MP
7266.42)
The tool was measured with the laser system and the
compensation value table is available in a directory under TNC:\.
Alternatively you can also create the compensation table manually
(see Compensation-value table on page 516)
The tool dimensions L, R and R2 are entered in the tool table
(TOOL.T)
The path name of the compensation value table for the tool to be
compensated is entered (without file extension) in the DR2TABLE
column of the tool table (TOOL.T) (see Tool table: Standard tool
data on page 176)
NC program: NC blocks with surface normal vectors are required
(see NC Program on page 518)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
515
3-D tool radius compensation depending on the

tools contact angle (3D-ToolComp software
option)
Compensation-value table
The laser measuring cycle 598 automatically creates the
compensation value table. In this regard, please note the
documentation for laser measuring cycles.
If you wish to create and fill the compensation value table with data
yourself, proceed as follows:
U
U

Enter any file name with the TAB extension and confirm with the
ENT key. The TNC displays a pop-up window with permanently
saved table formats
Use the arrow key to select the table format 3DTOOLCOMP.TAB and
confirm with the ENT key. The TNC opens a new table containing
only one line and those columns that are required for the function of
3D-ToolComp
The compensation value table is a so-called freely
definable table For further information about working
with freely definable tables, See Freely Definable
Tables on page 461.
If the TNC does not show a pop-up window or the

3DTOOLCOMP table format when you open a new .tab file, you
must first use the COPY SAMPLE FILES function to
generate the table formats. For more information, contact
your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN.
The TNC evaluates the following columns of the compensation value
table:
ANGLE:
Angle at the tool radius which the determined compensation value
NOM-DR2 belongs to. Input range: 0 to 180; for radius cutters the
angle values are between 0 and 90
NOM-R2:
Nominal radius R2 of the tool. The TNC uses the values from NOM-R2
only to determine the end of the compensation value table: The end
of the table is the line where the value=0 is entered in the NOM-R2
column
NOM-DR2:
Deviation from the nominal value (oversize) and negative values
(undersize) are permitted
+180
+90
The TNC evaluates a maximum of 50 lines in a

compensation value table.
The TNC evaluates negative angle values from the ANGLE
column but compensates the compensation values
always in the positive angle range of the tool.
516
In doing so, the TNC takes the compensation value from the
compensation value table defined for the current contact point of the
tool with workpiece into account. If the contact point is between two
compensation points, the TNC interpolates the compensation value
linearly between the two closest angles.
Example:
Angle value
Compensation value
40
+0.03 mm (measured)
50
-0.02 mm (measured)
45 (contact point)
+0.005 mm (interpolated)
The TNC generates an error message if it cannot

determine a compensation value through interpolation.
Programming of M107 (suppress error message for positive
compensation values) is not required even if the
compensation value is positive.
The TNC uses either DR2 from TOOL.T or a compensation
value from the compensation value table. If required, you
can define additional offsets, such as a surface oversize,
via DR2 in the TOOL CALL block.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
NOM - DR2
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
+0.005
0
0.01
40
45
50
ANGLE
0.02
0.03
0.04
517
Function
If you are executing a program with surface normal vectors and
assigned a compensation value table (DR2TABLE column) to the active
tool in the tool table (TOOL.T), the TNC uses the values from the
compensation value table instead of the compensation value DR2 from
TOOL.T.
NC Program
3-D ToolComp works only with programs that contain a surface normal
vector (see Definition of a normalized vector on page 509). The
following must be considered for NC program generation by means of
the CAM system:
If the NC program is calculated with reference to the center of the

sphere, you must define the nominal radius value R2 of the radius
cutter in the tool table (TOOL.T)
If the NC program is calculated with reference to the south pole of
the sphere, you must define the nominal radius value R2 of the
radius cutter and also the R2 value as a negative delta length in the
DL column of the tool table (TOOL.T)
NZ
NX
Example: Three-axis program with surface normal vector
FUNCTION TCPM OFF

LN X+31,737 Y+21,954 Z+33,165 NX+0,2637581 NY+0,0078922
NZ0,8764339 F1000
X, Y, Z:
NX, NY, NZ:
Position of the leading tool point

Example: Five-axis program with surface normal vector

FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS PATHCTRL AXIS
LN X+31,737 Y+21,954 Z+33,165 NX+0,2637581 NY+0,0078922
NZ0,8764339 TX+0,0078922 TY0,8764339 TZ+0,2590319 F1000
X, Y, Z:
NX, NY, NZ:
TX, TY, TZ:
518
Position of the leading tool point

orientation
Z
N
NZ
TZ
TX
NX
12.7 Contour Movements Spline Interpolation (Software Option 2)
12.7 Contour Movements

Spline Interpolation
(Software Option 2)
Application
If you wish to machine contours that are described in a CAM system
as splines, you can transfer them directly to the TNC and execute
them. The TNC features a spline interpolator for executing thirddegree polynomials in two, three, four, or five axes.
You cannot edit spline blocks in the TNC. Exception: Feed
rate F and miscellaneous function M in the spline block.
Example: Block format for three axes

7 L X+28.338 Y+19.385 Z-0.5 FMAX
Spline starting point
8 SPL X24.875 Y15.924 Z-0.5

K3X-4.688E-002 K2X2.459E-002 K1X3.486E+000
K3Y-4.563E-002 K2Y2.155E-002 K1Y3.486E+000
K3Z0.000E+000 K2Z0.000E+000 K1Z0.000E+000 F10000
Spline end point

Spline parameters for X axis
Spline parameters for Y axis
Spline parameters for Z axis
9 SPL X17.952 Y9.003 Z-0.500

K3X5.159E-002 K2X-5.644E-002 K1X6.928E+000
K3Y3.753E-002 K2Y-2.644E-002 K1Y6.910E+000
K3Z0.000E+000 K2Z0.000E+000 K1Z0.000E+000
Spline end point

10 ...
The TNC executes the spline block according to the following thirddegree polynomials:
X(t) = K3X t3 + K2X t2+ K1X t + X
Y(t) = K3Y t3 + K2Y t2 + K1Y t + Y
Z(t) = K3Z t3 + K2Z t2 + K1Z t + Z
whereby the variable t runs from 1 to 0. The incrementation of t
depends on the feed rate and the length of the spline.
Example: Block format for five axes
7 L X+33.909 X-25.838 Z+75.107 A+17 B-10.103 FMAX
Spline starting point
8 SPL X+39.824 Y-28.378 Z+77.425 A+17.32 B-12.75

K3X+0.0983 K2X-0.441 K1X-5.5724
K3Y-0.0422 K2Y+0.1893 1Y+2.3929
K3Z+0.0015 K2Z-0.9549 K1Z+3.0875
K3A+0.1283 K2A-0.141 K1A-0.5724
K3B+0.0083 K2B-0.413 E+2 K1B-1.5724 E+1 F10000
Spline end point

Spline parameters for A axis
Spline parameters for B axis with exponential
notation
9 ...
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
519
12.7 Contour Movements Spline Interpolation (Software Option 2)
The TNC executes the spline block according to the following thirddegree polynomials:
X(t) = K3X t3 + K2X t2 + K1X t + X
Y(t) = K3Y t3 + K2Y t2 + K1Y t + Y
Z(t) = K3Z t3 + K2Z t2 + K1Z t + Z
A(t) = K3A t3 + K2A t2 + K1A t + A
B(t) = K3B t3 + K2B t2 + K1B t + B
whereby the variable t runs from 1 to 0. The incrementation of t
depends on the feed rate and the length of the spline.
For every end-point coordinate in the spline block, the
spline parameters K3 to K1 must be programmed. The
end-point coordinates can be programmed in any
sequence within the spline block.
The TNC always expects the spline parameters K for each
axis in the sequence K3, K2, K1.
Beside the principal axes X, Y and Z, the TNC can also
process the secondary axes U, V and W, and the rotary
axes A, B and C. The respective corresponding axis must
then be programmed in the spline parameter K
(e.g. K3A+0.0953 K2A-0.441 K1A+0.5724).
If the absolute value of a spline parameter K becomes
greater than 9.99999999, then the post processor must
output K in exponential notation (e.g. K3X+1.2750 E2).
The TNC can execute a program with spline blocks even
when the working plane is tilted.
Ensure that the transitions from one spline to the next are
as tangential as possible (directional changes of less than
0.1). The TNC otherwise performs an exact stop if the
filter functions are disabled, resulting in a jolting of the
machine tool. If the filter functions are active, the TNC
decreases the feed rate accordingly at these positions.
The spline starting point can deviate from the end point of
the previous contour by no more than 1 m. Larger
deviations will provoke an error message.
Input ranges
Spline end point: -99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
Spline parameter K: -9.99999999 to +9.99999999
Exponent for spline parameter K: 255 to +255 (whole number)
520
Programming:
Pallet Editor
13.1 Pallet Editor
13.1 Pallet Editor

Application
Pallet table management is a machine-dependent
function. The standard functional range will be described
below. Refer to your machine tool manual for more
information.
Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changers: The
pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different
pallets, and activates datum shifts or datum tables.
You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs
that have different reference points.
Pallet tables contain the following information:
PAL/PGM (entry obligatory):
Identification for pallet or NC program (select with ENT or NO ENT)
NAME (entry obligatory):
Pallet or program name. The machine tool builder determines the
pallet name (see your machine tool manual). The program name
must be stored in the same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise
you must enter the full path name for the program
PALPRES (entry optional):
Preset number from the pallet preset table. The TNC interprets the
preset number defined here as pallet datum (PAL entry in PAL/PGM
column). You can use the pallet preset to compensate mechanical
differences between the pallets. A pallet preset can also be
activated automatically when a pallet is added
PRESET (entry optional):
Preset number from the preset table. The preset number defined
here is interpreted by the TNC either as a pallet datum (PAL entry in
the PAL/PGM column) or as a workpiece datum (PGM entry in PAL/PGM
line). If there is a pallet preset table active on your machine, then use
the PRESET column only for workpiece datums
DATUM (entry optional):
Name of the datum table. The datum table must be stored in the
same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must enter the full
path name for the datum table. Datums from the datum table can be
activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT
522
Position
Meaning
Actual values
Enter the coordinates of the current tool position

referenced to the active coordinate system.
Reference
values

referenced to the machine datum.
ACTL measured
values
Enter the coordinates referenced to the active

coordinate system of the datum last probed in
the Manual operating mode.
REF measured
values
Enter the coordinates referenced to the machine

datum of the datum last probed in the Manual
operating mode.
13.1 Pallet Editor
X, Y, Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):

For pallet names, the programmed coordinates are referenced to
the machine datum. For NC programs, the programmed coordinates
are referenced to the pallet datum. These entries overwrite the
datum that you last set in the Manual mode of operation. With the
miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate the datum that was
last set. With the actual-position-capture key, the TNC opens a
window that enables you to have the TNC enter various points as
datums (see table below):
With the arrow keys and ENT, select the position that you wish to
confirm. Then press the ALL VALUES soft key so that the TNC saves
the respective coordinates of all active axes in the pallet table. With
the PRESENT VALUE soft key, the TNC saves the coordinates of the
axis on which the highlight in the pallet table is presently located.
If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program, the
programmed coordinates are then referenced to the
machine datum. If you do not define an entry, the datum
that was set manually remains active.
Editing function
Soft key

Select end of table
Insert as last line in the table
Delete the last line in the table
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
523
13.1 Pallet Editor
Editing function
Soft key

Add the number of lines that can be entered at
the end of the table
Selecting a pallet table

U
U
U
U
Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program

Run mode: Press the PGM MGT key.
To display all type .P files, press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and
SHOW .P.
Select a pallet table with the arrow keys, or enter a new file name
to create a new table
Confirm your entry with the ENT key.
Leaving the pallet file

U
U
U
To select a different type of file, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
and the soft key for the desired file type, for example SHOW.H.
Select the desired file
524
13.1 Pallet Editor
Pallet datum management with the pallet preset

table
The pallet preset table is configured by your machine tool
builder, see your machine tool manual.
A preset table for managing pallet datums is available in addition to the

preset table for managing workpiece datums. This makes it possible
now to manage the pallet datums independently of the workpiece
datums.
Pallet datums are an easy way to compensate mechanical differences
between individual pallets.
For determining the pallet datums, there is an additional soft key in the
manual probing functions with which you can also store the probing
results in the pallet preset table (see Storing measured values in the
pallet preset table on page 577).
Only one workpiece datum and one pallet datum can be
active at the same time. Both datums are effective in sum.
The TNC displays the number of the active pallet preset in
the additional status display (see General pallet
information (PAL tab) on page 85).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
525
13.1 Pallet Editor
Working with the pallet preset table

Changes to the pallet reset table must always be made in
agreement with your machine tool builder!
If your machine tool builder has enabled the pallet preset table, you
can edit the pallet preset table in Manual mode:
U
U
To select the Manual Operation or El. Handwheel mode of operation

U Open the pallet preset table: Press the PALLET
PRESET TBL soft key. The TNC displays additional
soft keys (see table below)
The following editing functions are available:

Editing function in table mode
Soft key

Select end of table
Insert a single line as last line in the table
Switch editing on/off
Activate the pallet datum of the line currently
selected (2nd soft-key row)
Deactivate the currently active pallet datum (2nd
soft-key row)
526
13.1 Pallet Editor
Executing the pallet file

MP7683 defines whether the pallet table is to be
executed blockwise or continuously.
Provided that Machine Parameter 7246 is set so that the
tool usage test is active, you can monitor the tool service
life for all tools used in a pallet (see Tool usage test on
page 197).
U
U
U
U
Select the file manager in the Program Run, Full Sequence or

Program Run, Single Block operating modes: Press the PGM MGT
key.
SHOW .P.
Select the pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT.
To execute the pallet table: Press the NC Start button. The TNC
executes the pallets as set in MP7683
Screen layout for executing pallet tables

You can have the TNC display the program contents and pallet file
contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout PGM
+ PALLET. During execution, the TNC then shows program blocks to
the left and the pallet to the right. To check the program contents
before execution, proceed as follows:
U
U
U
Select a pallet table

With the arrow keys, choose the program you would like to check
Press the OPEN PGM soft key: the TNC displays the selected
program on the screen. You can now page through the program with
the arrow keys
To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
527
13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
13.2 Pallet Operation with ToolOriented Machining

Application
Pallet management in combination with tool-oriented
machining is a machine-dependent function. The standard
functional range will be described below. Refer to your
machine tool manual for more information.
Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changers: The
pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different
pallets, and activates datum shifts or datum tables.
You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs
that have different reference points.
Pallet tables contain the following information:
PAL/PGM (entry obligatory):
The entry PAL identifies the pallet, FIX marks the fixture level and PGM
is used to enter the workpiece.
W-STATUS :
Current machining status. The machining status is used to
determine the current stage of machining. Enter BLANK for an
unmachined (raw) workpiece. During machining, the TNC changes
this entry to INCOMPLETE, and after machining has finished, to
ENDED. The entry EMPTY is used to identify a space at which no
workpiece is to be clamped. With the SKIP entry, you specify that a
workpiece is not to be machined by the TNC
METHOD (entry obligatory):
Entry that determines the method of program optimization.
Machining is workpiece-oriented if WPO is entered. Machining of the
piece is tool-oriented if TO is entered. In order to include subsequent
workpieces in the tool-oriented machining, you must enter CTO
(continued tool oriented). Tool-oriented machining is also possible
with pallet fixtures, but not for multiple pallets.
NAME (entry obligatory):
Pallet or program name. The machine tool builder determines the
pallet name (see your machine tool manual). Programs must be
stored in the same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must
enter the full path and name for the program.
528
Position
Meaning
Actual values

referenced to the active coordinate system.
Reference
values

referenced to the machine datum.
ACTL measured
values
Enter the coordinates referenced to the active

coordinate system of the datum last probed in
the Manual operating mode.
REF measured
values
Enter the coordinates referenced to the machine

datum of the datum last probed in the Manual
operating mode.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
PALPRESET (entry optional):

Preset number from the pallet preset table. The TNC interprets the
preset number defined here as pallet datum (PAL entry in PAL/PGM
column). You can use the pallet preset to compensate mechanical
differences between the pallets. A pallet preset can also be
activated automatically when a pallet is added
PRESET (entry optional):
Preset number from the preset table. The preset number defined
here is interpreted by the TNC either as a pallet datum (PAL entry in
the PAL/PGM column) or as a workpiece datum (PGM entry in the
PAL/PGM line). If there is a pallet preset table active on your machine,
then use the PRESET column only for workpiece datums
DATUM (entry optional):
Name of the datum table. The datum table must be stored in the
same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must enter the full
path name for the datum table. Datums from the datum table can be
activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT
X, Y, Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):
For pallets and fixtures, the programmed coordinates are referenced
to the machine datum. For NC programs, the programmed
coordinates are referenced to the pallet or fixture datum. These
entries overwrite the datum that you last set in the Manual mode of
operation. With the miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate
the datum that was last set. With the actual-position-capture key,
the TNC opens a window that enables you to have the TNC enter
various points as datums (see table below):
529
With the arrow keys and ENT, select the position that you wish to
confirm. Then press the ALL VALUES soft key so that the TNC saves
the respective coordinates of all active axes in the pallet table. With
the PRESENT VALUE soft key, the TNC saves the coordinates of the
axis on which the highlight in the pallet table is presently located.
If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program, the
programmed coordinates are then referenced to the
machine datum. If you do not define an entry, the datum
that was set manually remains active.
SP-X, SP-Y, SP-Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):
Safety positions can be entered for the axes. These positions can be
read with SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 6 from NC macros. SYSREAD
FN18 ID510 NR 5 can be used to determine if a value was
programmed in the column. The positions entered are only
approached if these values are read and correspondingly
programmed in the NC macros.
CTID (entered by the TNC):
The context ID number is assigned by the TNC and contains
instructions about the machining progress. Machining cannot be
resumed if the entry is deleted or changed.
FIXTURE
In this column you can enter a fixture archive (ZIP file), that the TNC
is to automatically activate during machining of the pallet table. You
have to use the fixture management to archive fixture archives (see
Manage fixtures on page 410)
Soft key

Select end of table
Insert as last line in the table
Add the number of lines that can be entered at
the end of the table
Edit the table format
530
Editing function in entry-form mode
Soft key
Select previous pallet

Select next pallet
Select previous fixture
Select next fixture
Select previous workpiece
Select next workpiece
Switch to pallet level
Switch to fixture level
Switch to workpiece level
Select standard pallet view
Select detailed pallet view
Select standard fixture view
Select detailed fixture view
Select standard workpiece view
Select detailed workpiece view
Insert pallet
Insert fixture
Insert workpiece
Delete pallet
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
531
Editing function in entry-form mode
Soft key
Delete fixture
Delete workpiece
Delete buffer memory contents
Tool-optimized machining
Workpiece-optimized machining
Connect or separate the types of machining
Mark level as being empty
Mark level as being unmachined
532
Selecting a pallet file

U
U
U
U
Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program

Run mode: Press the PGM MGT key.
SHOW .P.
Select a pallet table with the arrow keys, or enter a new file name
to create a new table
Confirm your entry with the ENT key.
Setting up the pallet file with the entry form

Pallet operation with tool- or workpiece-oriented machining is divided
into three levels:
Pallet level PAL
Fixture level FIX
Workpiece level PGM
You can switch to a detail view in each level. Set the machining
method and the statuses for the pallet, fixture and workpiece in the
standard view. If you are editing an existing pallet file, the updated
entries are displayed. Use the detail view for setting up the pallet file.
Set up the pallet file according to the machine
configuration. If you only have one fixture with multiple
workpieces, then defining one fixture FIX with the
workpieces PGM is sufficient. However, if one pallet
contains several fixtures, or if a fixture is machined from
more than one side, you must define the pallet PAL with
the corresponding fixture levels FIX.
Use the screen layout button to switch between table
view and form view.
Graphic support for form entry is not yet available.
The various levels of the entry form can be reached with the
appropriate soft keys. The current level is highlighted in the status line
of the entry form. When you switch to table view with the screen
layout button, the cursor is placed in the same level as it was in the
form view.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
533
Setting up the pallet level

Pallet ID: The pallet name is displayed
Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and the
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. The selected method is
assumed for the workpiece level and overwrites any existing
entries. In tabular view, WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO and
TOOL ORIENTED appears as TO.
The TOOL/WORKPIECE ORIENT entry cannot be made via soft
key. It only appears when different machining methods
were chosen for the workpieces in the workpiece or
machining level.
If the machining method was determined in the fixture
level, the entries are transferred to the workpiece level,
where they overwrite any existing entries.
Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the pallet and the
corresponding fixtures and workpieces as not yet having been
machined, and enters BLANK in the Status field. Use the EMPTY
POSITION or OMIT soft key if you want to skip the pallet during
machining. EMPTY or SKIP appears in the status field.
Setting up details in the pallet level
Pallet ID: Enter the pallet name
Preset No.: Enter the preset number for the pallet
Datum: Enter the pallet datum
Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table of the
workpiece. The data is transferred to the fixture and workpiece
levels
Safe height (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the pallet. The positions entered are only approached
if these values were read and correspondingly programmed in the
NC macros.
534
Setting up the fixture level

Fixture: The number of the fixture is displayed. The number of
fixtures within this level is shown after the slash.
Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and the
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. The selected method is
assumed for the workpiece level and overwrites any existing
entries. In tabular view, WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO and
TOOL ORIENTED appears as TO.
Use the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key to mark fixtures that are to be
included for calculating the machining process for tool-oriented
machining. Connected fixtures are indicated by a dashed line,
whereas separated fixtures are indicated by a solid line. Connected
workpieces are marked in tabular view with the entry CTO in the
METHOD column.
The TOOL/WORKPIECE ORIENTED entry cannot be made via
soft key. It only appears when different machining
methods were chosen for the workpieces in the
workpiece level.
If the machining method was determined in the fixture
level, the entries are transferred to the workpiece level,
where they overwrite any existing entries.
Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the fixture and the
corresponding workpieces as not yet having been machined, and
enters BLANK in the Status field. Use the EMPTY POSITION or OMIT
soft key if you want to skip the fixture during machining. EMPTY or
SKIP appears in the status field.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
535
Setting up details in the fixture level

Fixture: The number of the fixture is displayed. The number of
fixtures within this level is shown after the slash.
Datum: Enter the fixture datum.
Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table valid for
machining the workpiece. The data is transferred to the workpiece
level.
NC macro: In tool-oriented machining, the macro TCTOOLMODE is
carried out instead of the normal tool-change macro.
Safe height (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the fixture.
Safety positions can be entered for the axes. These
positions can be read with SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 6
from NC macros. SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 5 can be used
to determine if a value was programmed in the column.
The positions entered are only approached if these values
are read and correspondingly programmed in the NC
macros.
536
Setting up the workpiece level

Workpiece: The number of the workpiece is displayed. The number
of workpieces within this fixture level is shown after the slash.
Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. In tabular view,
WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO, and TOOL ORIENTED
appears as TO.
Use the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key to mark workpieces that are to
be included for calculating the machining process for tool-oriented
machining. Connected workpieces are indicated by a dashed line,
whereas separated workpieces are indicated by a solid line.
Connected workpieces are marked in tabular view with the entry
CTO in the METHOD column.
Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the workpiece as not yet
having been machined, and enters BLANK in the Status field. Use
the EMPTY POSITION or OMIT soft key if you want to skip a workpiece
during machining. EMPTY or SKIP appears in the status field.
Enter the method and status in the pallet or fixture level.
Then the entry will be assumed for all corresponding
workpieces.
For several workpiece variants within one level, the
workpieces of one variant should be entered together.
This way, the workpieces of each variant can be marked
with the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key, and can be
machined in groups.
Setting up details in the workpiece level
Workpiece: The number of the workpiece is displayed. The number
of workpieces within this fixture or pallet level is shown after the
slash.
Datum: Enter the workpiece datum.
Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table valid for
machining the workpiece. If you use the same datum table for all
workpieces, enter the name and path in the pallet or fixture levels.
The data is automatically transferred to the workpiece level.
NC program: Enter the path of the NC program that is necessary for
machining the workpiece.
Cl. height (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the workpiece. The positions entered are only
approached if these values were read and correspondingly
programmed in the NC macros.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
537
Sequence of tool-oriented machining

The TNC only carries out tool-oriented machining if the
TOOL ORIENTED method was selected, and TO or CTO is
entered in the table.
The entry TO or CTO in the Method field tells the TNC that the
oriented machining is valid beyond these lines.
The pallet management starts the NC program given in the line with
the entry TO.
The first workpiece is machined until the next tool call is pending.
Departure from the workpiece is coordinated by a special toolchange macro.
The entry in the column W-STATUS is changed from BLANK to
INCOMPLETE, and the TNC enters a hexadecimal value in the field
CTID.
The value entered in the field CTID is a unique identifier of
the machining progress for the TNC. If this value is deleted
or changed, machining cannot be continued, nor is midprogram startup or resumption of machining possible.
All lines in the pallet file that contain the entry CTO in the Method
field are machined in the same manner as the first workpiece.
Workpieces in several fixtures can be machined.
The TNC uses the next tool for the following machining steps again
from the line with the entry TO if one of the following situations
applies:
If the entry PAL is in the PAL/PGM field in the next line.
If the entry TO or WPO is in the Method field in the next line.
If in the lines already machined there are entries under Method
which do not have the status EMPTY or ENDED.
The NC program is continued at the stored location based on the
value entered in the CTID field. Usually the tool is changed for the
first piece, but the TNC suppresses the tool change for the following
workpieces.
The entry in the CTID field is updated after every machining step. If
an END PGM or M2 is executed in an NC program, then an existing
entry is deleted and ENDED is entered in the Machining Status field.
538
If the entries TO or CTO for all workpieces within a group contain the
status ENDED, the next lines in the pallet file are run.
In mid-program startup, only one tool-oriented machining
operation is possible. Subsequent pieces are machined
according to the method entered.
The value entered in the CT-ID field is stored for a
maximum of 2 weeks. Within this time the machining
process can be continued at the stored location. After this
time the value is deleted, in order to prevent large
amounts of unnecessary data on the hard disk.
The operating mode can be changed after executing a
group of entries with TO or CTO.
The following functions are not permitted:
Switching the traverse range
PLC datum shift
M118
Leaving the pallet file

U
U
U
To select a different type of file, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
and the soft key for the desired file type, for example SHOW.H.
Select the desired file
Executing the pallet file

In MP7683, set whether the pallet table is to be executed
blockwise or continuously (see General User
Parameters on page 680).
Provided that Machine Parameter 7246 is set so that the
tool usage test is active, you can monitor the tool service
life for all tools used in a pallet (see Tool usage test on
page 197).
U
U
U
U
Select the file manager in the Program Run, Full Sequence or

Program Run, Single Block operating modes: Press the PGM MGT
key.
SHOW .P.
Select the pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT.
To execute the pallet table: Press the NC Start button. The TNC
executes the pallets as set in MP7683
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
539
Screen layout for executing pallet tables

You can have the TNC display the program contents and pallet file
contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout PGM
+ PALLET. During execution, the TNC then shows program blocks to
the left and the pallet to the right. To check the program contents
before execution, proceed as follows:
U
U
U
Select a pallet table

With the arrow keys, choose the program you would like to check
Press the OPEN PGM soft key: the TNC displays the selected
program on the screen. You can now page through the program with
the arrow keys
To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key
540
Manual Operation and

Setup
14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off

Switch-on
Switch-on and crossing over the reference points can vary
depending on the machine tool. Refer to your machine
tool manual.
Switch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC then
displays the following dialog:
MEMORY TEST
The TNC memory is checked automatically.
POWER INTERRUPTED
TNC message that the power was interruptedclear
the message.
COMPILE A PLC PROGRAM
The PLC program of the TNC is compiled automatically.
RELY EXT. DC VOLTAGE MISSING
Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the
functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit.
MANUAL OPERATION
TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS
Cross the reference points manually in the displayed
sequence: For each axis press the machine START
button, or
Cross the reference points in any sequence: Press

and hold the machine axis direction button for each
axis until the reference point has been traversed.
542
If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders, you

can leave out crossing the reference marks. In such a
case, the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the
machine control voltage is switched on.
If your machine is equipped with incremental encoders,
you can activate traverse range monitoring even before
reference mark traverse by pressing the SW LIMIT
MONITORING soft key. Your machine tool builder can
provide this function axis-specifically. Remember that by
pressing the soft key, traverse range monitoring is not
necessarily active in all axes. The machine tool manual
The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode.
The reference points need only be crossed if the machine
axes are to be moved. If you intend only to write, edit or
test programs, you can select the Programming and
Editing or Test Run modes of operation immediately after
switching on the control voltage.
You can cross the reference points later by pressing the
PASS OVER REFERENCE MARK soft key in the Manual
Operation mode.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
543
Crossing the reference point in a tilted working plane

The reference point of a tilted coordinate system can be crossed by
pressing the machine axis direction buttons. The tilting the working
plane function must be active in the Manual Operation mode, see
"Activating manual tilting", page 600. The TNC then interpolates the
corresponding axes.
Make sure that the angle values entered in the menu for
tilting the working plane match the actual angles of the
tilted axis.
If available, you can also traverse the axes in the direction of the
current tool axis (see Setting the current tool-axis direction as the
active machining direction (FCL 2 function) on page 601).
If you use this function, then for non-absolute encoders
you must confirm the positions of the rotary axes, which
the TNC displays in a pop-up window. The position
displayed is the last active position of the rotary axes
before switch-off.
If one of the two functions that were active before is active now, the
NC START button has no function. The TNC outputs a corresponding
error message.
544
Switch-off
To prevent data from being lost at switch-off, you need to shut down
the operating system of the TNC as follows:
U
Select the Manual Operation mode

U Select the function for shutting down, confirm again
with the YES soft key
U
When the TNC displays the message Now you can

switch off the TNC in a pop-up window, you may cut
off the power supply to the TNC
Inappropriate switch-off of the TNC can lead to data loss!

Remember that pressing the END key after the control
has been shut down restarts the control. Switch-off
during a restart can also result in data loss!
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
545
14.2 Moving the Machine Axes

Note
Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can
vary depending on the machine tool. The machine tool
Moving the axis using the machine axis direction

buttons
Select the Manual Operation mode.
Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as

long as you wish the axis to move, or
Move the axis continuously: Press and hold the

machine axis direction button, then press the
machine START button.
To stop the axis, press the machine STOP button.
You can move several axes at a time with these two methods. You can
change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft
key, see "Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions
M", page 558.
546
Incremental jog positioning

With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a
preset distance.
Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel

mode.
Select incremental jog positioning: Switch the

INCREMENT soft key to ON.
16
JOG INCREMENT =
Enter the jog increment in mm, and confirm with the
ENT key.
Press the machine axis direction button as often as

desired.
The maximum permissible value for infeed is 10 mm.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
547
Traversing with electronic handwheels

The iTNC supports traversing with the following new electronic
handwheels:
HR 520:
Handwheel compatible for connection to HR 420 with display, data
transfer per cable
HR 550 FS:
Handwheel with display, radio data transmission
In addition to this, the TNC continues to support the cable handwheels
HR 410 (without display) and HR 420 (with display).
Caution: Danger to the operator and handwheel!
All of the handwheel connectors may only be removed by
authorized service personnel, even if it is possible without
any tools!
Ensure that the handwheel is plugged in before you
switch on the machine!
If you wish to operate your machine without the
handwheel, disconnect the cable from the machine and
secure the open socket with a cap!
Your machine tool builder can make additional functions

of the HR 5xx available. Refer to your machine tool
manual.
A HR 5xx handwheel is recommended if you want to use

the handwheel superimposition in virtual axis function
(see Virtual axis VT on page 426).
The portable HR 5xx handwheels feature a display on which the TNC
shows information. In addition, you can use the handwheel soft keys
for important setup functions, e.g. datum setting or entering and
running M functions.
548
The HR 5xx handwheels feature the following operating elements:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
EMERGENCY STOP button

Handwheel display for status display and function selection, for
further information, See Handwheel display on page 550.
Soft keys
Axis selection keys; can be exchanged by the machine
manufacturer depending on the axis configuration
Permissive button
Arrow keys for defining handwheel sensitivity
Handwheel activation key
Key for TNC traverse direction of the selected axis
Rapid traverse superimposition for direction key
Spindle switch-on (machine-dependent function, key can be
exchanged by the machine manufacturer)
"Generate NC block" key (machine-dependent function, key can
be exchanged by the machine manufacturer)
Spindle switch-off (machine-dependent function, key can be
exchanged by the machine manufacturer)
CTRL key for special functions (machine-dependent function, key
can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer)
NC start (machine-dependent function, key can be exchanged by
the machine manufacturer)
NC stop (machine-dependent function, key can be exchanged by
the machine manufacturer)
Handwheel
Spindle speed potentiometer
Feed rate potentiometer
Cable connection, not available with the HR 550 FS wireless
handwheel
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
3
4
4
5
6
8
7
8
9
10
14
11
12
15
13
16
17
18
19
549
As soon as you have activated the handwheel with the handwheel

activation key, the operating panel is locked. This is indicated by a popup window on the TNC screen.
Handwheel display
The handwheel display (see image) consists of a header and 6 status
lines in which the TNC shows the following information:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
550
Only HR 550 FS wireless handwheel:

Shows wether the handwheel is in the docking station or
whether wireless operation is active
Shows the field strength, 6 bars = maximum field strength
Shows the charge status of the rechargeable battery, 6 bars =
fully charged A bar moves from the left to the right during
recharging
ACTL: Type of position display
Y+129.9788: Position of the selected axis
*: STIB (control in operation); program run has been started or
axis is in motion
S0:: Current spindle speed
F0: Feed rate at which the selected axis is moving
E: Error message
3D: Tilted-working-plane function is active
2D: Basic rotation function is active
RES 5.0: Active handwheel resolution. Distance in mm/rev (/rev
for rotary axes) that the selected axis moves for one handwheel
revolution
STEP ON or OFF: Incremental jog active or inactive. If the function
is active, the TNC also displays the active jog increment
Soft-key row: Selection of various functions, described in the
following sections
1
3
4
5
5
7
12
6
2
8
10
11
2
13
14
Special features of the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel

Due to various potential sources of interference, a
wireless connection is not as reliable as a cable
connection. Before you use the wireless handwheel it
must therefore be checked whether there are any other
radio users in the surroundings of the machine. This
inspection for presence of radio frequencies or channels
is recommended for all industrial radio systems.
When the HR 550 is not needed, always put it in the
handwheel holder. This way you can ensure that via the
contact strip on the rear side of the wireless handwheel
the accumulators are always ready for use due to a
recharge control and there is a direct contact connection
for the emergency stop circuit.
If an error (interruption of the radio connection, poor
reception quality, defective handwheel component)
occurs, the handwheel always reacts with an emergency
stop.
Please read the notes on the configuration of the HR 550
FS wireless handwheel (see Configuring the HR 550 FS
Wireless Handwheel on page 676)
Caution: Danger to the operator and machine!

Due to safety reasons you must switch off the wireless
handwheel and the handwheel holder after an operating
time of 120 hours at the latest so that the TNC can run a
functional test when it is restarted!
If you use several machines with wireless handwheels in
your workshop you have to mark the handwheels and
holders that belong together so that their respective
associations are clearly identifiable (e.g. by color stickers
or numbers). The markings on the wireless handwheel
and the handwheel holder must be clearly visible to the
user!
Before every use, make sure that the correct handwheel
for your machine is active.
1
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
551
The HR 550 FS wireless handwheel features a rechargeable battery.

The battery is recharged when you put the handwheel in the holder
(see figure).
You can operate the HR 550 FS with the accumulator for up to 8 hours
before it must be recharged again. It is recommended, however, that
you always put the handwheel in its holder when you are not using it.
As soon as the handwheel is in its holder, it switches internally to
cable operation. In this way you can use the handwheel even if it were
completely discharged. The functions are the same as with wireless
operation.
When the handwheel is completely discharged, it takes
about 3 hours until it is fully recharged in the handwheel
holder.
Clean the contacts 1 in the handwheel holder and of the

handwheel regularly to ensure their proper functioning.
The transmission range is amply dimensioned. If you should
nevertheless happen to come near the edge of the transmission area,
which is possible with very large machines, the HR 550 FS warns you
in time with a plainly noticeable vibration alarm. If this happens you
must reduce the distance to the handwheel holder, into which the
radio receiver is integrated.
Caution: Danger to the tool and workpiece!
If interruption-free operation is no longer possible within
the transmission range the TNC automatically triggers an
emergency stop. This can also happen during machining.
Try to stay as close as possible to the handwheel holder
and put the handwheel in its holder when you are not
using it.
552
If the TNC has triggered an emergency stop you must reactivate the
handwheel. Proceed as follows:
U
U
U
Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation.

Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.
U Select the configuration menu for the wireless
handwheel: Press the SET UP WIRELESS
HANDWHEEL soft key.
U
Reactivate the wireless handwheel via the Start

handwheel button.
To save the configuration and exit the configuration

menu, press the END button.
The MOD mode of operation includes a function for initial operation

and configuration of the handwheel (see Configuring the HR 550 FS
Wireless Handwheel on page 676).
Selecting the axis to be moved
You can activate directly through the axis address keys the principal
axes X, Y, Z and three other axes defined by the machine tool builder.
Your machine tool builder can also place the virtual axis VT directly on
one of the free axis keys. If the virtual axis VT is not on one of the axis
selection keys, proceed as follows:
U
U
Press the handwheel soft key F1 (AX): The TNC displays all active
axes on the handwheel display. The currently active axis blinks
Select the desired axis (e.g. the VT axis) with the handwheel soft
keys F1 (->) or F2 (<-) and confirm with the handwheel soft key F3
(OK)
Setting the handwheel sensitivity

The handwheel sensitivity specifies the distance an axis moves per
handwheel revolution. The sensitivity levels are pre-defined and are
selectable with the handwheel arrow keys (unless incremental jog is
not active).
Selectable sensitivity levels: 0.01/0.02/0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5/1/2/5/10/20
[mm/revolution or degrees/revolution]
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
553
Moving the axes

Activate the handwheel: Press the handwheel key on
the HR 5xx: Now you can only operate the TNC via
the HR 5xx; the TNC shows a pop-up window
containing information on the TNC screen.
Select the desired operating mode via the OPM soft key if necessary
(see Changing Modes of Operation on page 556).
If required, press and hold the permissive buttons.
Use the handwheel to select the axis to be moved.

Select the additional axes via soft key, if required.
Move the active axis in the positive direction, or
Move the active axis in the negative direction.
Deactivate the handwheel: Press the handwheel key

on the HR 5xx : Now you can operate the TNC again
via the operating panel.
554
Potentiometer settings
The potentiometers of the machine operating panel continue to be
active after you have activated the handwheel. If you want to use the
potentiometers on the handwheel, proceed as follows:
U
Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys on the HR 5xx. The TNC
shows the soft-key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the
handwheel display.
Press the HW soft key to activate the handwheel potentiometers.
If you have activated the potentiometers on the handwheel, you must

reactivate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel before
deselecting the handwheel. Proceed as follows:
U
Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys on the HR 5xx. The TNC
shows the soft-key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the
handwheel display.
Press the KBD soft key to activate the potentiometers of the
machine operating panel.
Incremental jog positioning

With incremental jog positioning the TNC moves the currently active
handwheel axis by a preset distance defined by you.
U
U
U
U
U
Press the handwheel soft key F2 (STEP).

Activate incremental jog positioning: Press handwheel soft key 3
(ON).
Select the desired jog increment by pressing the F1 or F2 key. If you
press and hold the respective key, each time it reaches a decimal
value 0 the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10.
If in addition you press the CTRL key, the counting increment
increases to 1. The smallest possible jog increment is 0.0001 mm.
The largest possible is 10 mm.
Confirm the selected jog increment with soft key 4 (OK).
With the + or handwheel key, move the active handwheel axis in
the corresponding direction.
Entering miscellaneous functions M

U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (MSF).
U Press the handwheel soft key F1 (M).
U Select the desired M function number by pressing the F1 or F2 key.
U Execute the M function with the NC start key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
555
Entering the spindle speed S

U Press the handwheel soft key F2 (S).
U Select the desired speed by pressing the F1 or F2 key. If you press
and hold the respective key, each time it reaches a decimal value 0
the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10. If in
addition you press the CTRL key, the counting increment increases
to 1000.
U Activate the new speed S with the NC start key.
Entering the feed rate F
U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (F).
U Select the desired feed rate by pressing the F1 or F2 key. If you
press and hold the respective key, each time it reaches a decimal
value 0 the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10.
If in addition you press the CTRL key, the counting increment
increases to 1000.
U Confirm the new feed rate F with the handwheel soft key F3 (OK).
Datum setting
U Press the handwheel soft key F4 (PRS).
U If required, select the axis in which the datum is to be set.
U Reset the axis with the handwheel soft key F3 (OK), or with F1 and
F2 set the desired value and then confirm with F3 (OK). By also
pressing the CTRL key, you can increase the counting increment to
10.
Changing Modes of Operation
With the handwheel soft key F4 (OPM), you can use the handwheel to
switch the mode of operation, provided that the current status of the
control allows a mode change.
U
U
Press the handwheel soft key F4 (OPM).

Select the desired operating mode by handwheel soft key
MAN: Manual Operation
MDI: Positioning with Manual Data Input
SGL: Program Run, Single Block
RUN: Program Run, Full Sequence
556
Generating a complete L Block

Your machine tool builder can assign any function to the
"Generate NC block" handwheel key; refer to your
machine manual.
Use the MOD function to define the axis values to be

taken into an NC block (see Selecting the Axes for
Generating L Blocks on page 666).
If no axes are selected, the TNC displays the error
message No axes selected.
U
U
U
U
Select the Positioning with MDI operating mode

If required, use the arrow keys on the TNC keyboard to select the
NC block after which the new L block is to be inserted
Activate the handwheel
Press the Generate NC block handwheel key: The TNC inserts a
complete L block containing all axis positions selected through the
MOD function
Features in the Program Run modes of operation

You can use the following functions in the Program Run modes of
operation:
NC start (handwheel NC-start key)
NC stop (handwheel NC-stop key)
After the NC-stop key has been pressed: Internal stop (handwheel
soft keys MOP and then STOP)
After the NC-stop key has been pressed: Manual axis traverse
(handwheel soft keys MOP and then MAN)
Returning to the contour after the axes were moved manually during
a program interruption (handwheel soft keys MOP and then REPO).
Operation is by handwheel soft keys, which function similarly to the
control-screen soft keys (see Returning to the contour on page
636)
On/off switch for the Tilted Working Plane function (handwheel soft
keys MOP and then 3D)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
557
14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M
14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F

and Miscellaneous Functions M
Function
In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes,
you can enter the spindle speed S, feed rate F and the miscellaneous
functions M with soft keys. The miscellaneous functions are
described in Chapter 7 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions.
The machine tool builder determines which
miscellaneous functions M are available on your control
and what effects they have.
Entering values
Spindle speed S, miscellaneous function M
To enter the spindle speed, press the S soft key.
SPINDLE SPEED S =
1000
Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm your

entry with the machine START button.
The spindle speed S with the entered rpm is started with a

miscellaneous function M. Proceed in the same way to enter a
miscellaneous function M.
Feed rate F
After entering a feed rate F, you must confirm your entry with the ENT
key instead of the machine START button.
The following is valid for feed rate F:
If you enter F=0, then the lowest feed rate from MP1020 is effective
F is not lost during a power interruption
558
14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M
Changing the spindle speed and feed rate

With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed
rate F from 0% to 150% of the set value.
The override knob for spindle speed is only functional on
machines with infinitely variable spindle drive.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
559
14.4 Functional Safety FS (Option)

General Information
Every machine tool operator is exposed to certain risks. Although
protective devices can prevent access to dangerous points, the
operator must also be able to work on the machine without this
protection (e.g. protective door opened). Several guidelines and
regulations to minimize these risks have been developed within the
last few years.
The HEIDENHAIN safety concept integrated in the TNC controls
complies with Performance Level d as per EN 13849-1 and SIL 2 as
per IEC 61508, features safety-related modes of operation in
accordance with EN 12417, and assures extensive operator
protection.
The basis of the HEIDENHAIN safety concept is the dual-channel
processor structure, which consists of the main computer (MC) and
one or more drive controller modules (CC= control computing unit). All
monitoring mechanisms are designed redundantly in the control
systems. Safety-relevant system data are subject to a mutual cyclic
data comparison. Safety-relevant errors always lead to safe stopping
of all drives through defined stop reactions.
Defined safety functions are triggered and safe operating statuses are
achieved via safety-relevant inputs and outputs (dual-channel
implementation), which have an influence on the system in all
operating modes.
In this chapter you will find explanations of the functions that are
additionally available on a TNC with functional safety.
You machine tool builder adapts the HEIDENHAIN safety
concept to your machine. Refer to your machine tool
manual for more information.
560
Explanation of terms
Safety-related operating modes
Designation
Short description
SOM_1
Safe operating mode 1: automatic operation,

production mode
SOM_2
Safe operating mode 2: set-up mode
SOM_3
Safe operating mode 3: manual intervention;

only for qualified operators
SOM_4
Safe operating mode 4: Advanced manual

intervention, process monitoring
Safety functions
Designation
Short description
SS0, SS1, SS1F,

SS2
Safe stop: safe stopping of all drives using

different methods
STO
Safe torque off: energy supply to the motor is

interrupted. Provides protection against
unexpected start of the drives
SOS
Safe operation stop: safe operating stop.

Provides protection against unexpected start
of the drives
SLS
Safety-limited speed. Prevents the drives

from exceeding the specified speed limits
when the protective door is opened
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
561
Check axis positions

This function must be adapted to the TNC by your
machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool
After switch-on the TNC checks whether the position of an axis
matches the position directly after switch-off. If it differs, the TNC
marks this axis in the position display with a warning triangle after the
position value. Axes that are marked with a warning triangle can no
longer be moved while the door is opened.
In such cases you must approach a test position for the axes in
question. Proceed as follows:
U
U
U

Scroll through the soft-key row until you see a row listing all axes
that you have to move to the test position
Via soft key, select an axis that you want to move to the test position
Approach the test positions successively in such a way
that no collision between tool and the workpiece or the
clamping devices can occur. If necessary, pre-position the
axes manually.
U
U
Approach with NC start

When the test position has been reached, the TNC asks whether the
position was approached correctly: Confirm with the YES soft key if
the TNC approached the test position correctly, and with NO if the
position was not approached correctly
If you confirmed with YES, you must confirm the correctness of the
test position again with the permissive button on the machine
operating panel
Repeat this procedure for all axes that you want to move to the test
position
The location of the test position is specified by your
machine tool builder. Refer to your machine tool manual
for more information.
562
Overview of permitted feed rates and speeds

The TNC provides an overview of the permitted speeds and feed rates
for all axes depending on the active mode of operation.
U
Scroll to the last soft-key row
Press the INFO SOM soft key: The TNC opens the
window containing the overview of permitted speeds
and feed rates
Column
Meaning
SLS2
Safely limited speeds in the safety-related

operating mode 2 (SOM_2) for the respective
axes
SLS3

axes
SLS4

axes
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
563
Activating feed-rate limitation

When the F LIMITED soft key is set to ON, the TNC limits the
maximum permissible axis speeds to the specified, safely limited
speed. The valid speeds for the active mode of operation are shown
in the Safety-MP table (see Overview of permitted feed rates and
speeds on page 563).
U
Scroll to the last soft-key row
Switch on/off feed rate limit
Additional Status displays

On a control with functional safety FS, the general status display
contains additional information about the current status of safety
functions. The TNC shows this information as operating statuses of
the status displays T, S and F
Status display
Short description
STO
Energy supply to the spindle or a feed drive is

interrupted.
SLS
Safety-limited speed: A safely limited speed

is active.
SOS
Safe operation stop: Safe operating stop is

active.
STO
Safe torque off: Energy supply to the motor is

interrupted.
The TNC shows the active safety-related mode of operation with an

icon in the header to the right of the operating mode text. If the SOM_1
mode is active, the TNC does not display any icon.
Button
Safety-related operating mode

SOM_2 mode active
SOM_3 mode active
SOM_4 mode active
564
14.5 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
14.5 Datum Setting without a

3-D Touch Probe
Note
Datum setting with a 3-D touch probe: (see page 587).
You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates
of a known position on the workpiece.
Preparation
U
U
U
Clamp and align the workpiece

Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle
Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
565
Workpiece presetting with axis keys

Y
Protective measure
If the workpiece surface must not be scratched, you can
lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it. Then enter a
tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum
by the value d.
Z
Y
-R
-R
X
Move the tool slowly until it touches (scratches) the
workpiece surface
Select an axis (all axes can also be selected via the

ASCII keyboard)
DATUM SETTING Z=
Zero tool in spindle axis: Set the display to a known
workpiece position (here, 0) or enter the thickness d
of the shim. In the tool axis, offset the tool radius
Repeat the process for the remaining axes.

If you are using a preset tool, set the display of the tool axis to the
length L of the tool or enter the sum Z=L+d
566
Datum management with the preset table

You should definitely use the preset table if:
Your machine is equipped with rotary axes (tilting table
or swivel head) and you work with the function for tilting
the working plane
Your machine is equipped with a spindle-head changing
system
Up to now you have been working with older TNC
controls with REF-based datum tables
You wish to machine identical workpieces that are
differently aligned
The preset table can contain any number of lines
(datums). To optimize the file size and the processing
speed, you should use only as many lines as you need for
datum management.
For safety reasons, new lines can be inserted only at the
end of the preset table.
Saving the datums in the preset table
The preset table has the name PRESET.PR, and is saved in the directory
TNC:\. PRESET.PR is editable only in the Manual Operation and
Electronic Handwheel modes. In the Programming and Editing mode
you can only read the table, not edit it.
It is permitted to copy the preset table into another directory (for data
backup). Lines that were written by your machine tool builder are also
always write-protected in the copied tables. You therefore cannot edit
them.
Never change the number of lines in the copied tables! That could
cause problems when you want to reactivate the table.
To activate a preset table copied to another directory you have to copy
it back to the directory TNC:\.
There are several methods for saving datums and/or basic rotations in
the preset table:
Through probing cycles in the Manual Operation or El. Handwheel
modes (see Chapter 14)
Through the probing cycles 400 to 402 and 410 to 419 in automatic
mode (see Users Manual, Cycles, Chapters 14 and 15)
Manual entry (see description below)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
567
Basic rotations from the preset table rotate the coordinate

system about the preset, which is shown in the same line
as the basic rotation.
When setting a preset, the TNC checks whether the
positions of the tilting axes match the corresponding
values of the 3D ROT menu (depending on the setting in
the kinematics table). Therefore:
If the Tilt working plane function is not active, the
position display for the rotary axes must be = 0 (zero
the rotary axes if necessary).
If the Tilt working plane function is active, the
position displays for the rotary axes must match the
angles entered in the 3D ROT menu.
The machine manufacturer can lock any lines in the preset
table in order to place fixed datums there (e.g. a center
point for a rotary table). Such lines in the preset table are
shown in a different color (default: red).
The line 0 in the preset table is write protected. In line 0,
the TNC always saves the datum that you most recently
set manually via the axis keys or via soft key. If the datum
set manually is active, the TNC displays the text MAN(0) in
the status display
If you automatically set the TNC display with the touchprobe cycles for presetting, then the TNC does not store
these values in line 0.
Keep in mind that moving an indexing feature on your
machine table (realized by changing the kinematics
description) requires you to redefine any workpiece-based
presets.
568
Manually saving the datums in the preset table

In order to set datums in the preset table, proceed as follows:
Move the tool slowly until it touches (scratches) the

workpiece surface, or position the measuring dial
correspondingly.
Display the preset table: The TNC opens the preset

table and sets the cursor to the active table row
Select functions for entering the presets: The TNC

displays the available possibilities for entry in the softkey row. See the table below for a description of the
entry possibilities.
Select the line in the preset table that you want to

change (the line number is the preset number).
If needed, select the column (axis) in the preset table

that you want to change.
Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry

possibilities (see the following table).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
569
Function
Soft key
Directly transfer the actual position of the tool

(the measuring dial) as the new datum: This
function only saves the datum in the axis which
is currently highlighted.
Assign any value to the actual position of the tool
(the measuring dial): This function only saves the
datum in the axis which is currently highlighted.
Enter the desired value in the pop-up window.
Incrementally shift a datum already stored in the
table: This function only saves the datum in the
axis which is currently highlighted. Enter the
desired corrective value with the correct sign in
the pop-up window. If inch display is active: enter
the value in inches, and the TNC will internally
convert the entered values to mm.
Directly enter the new datum without calculation
of the kinematics (axis-specific). Only use this
function if your machine has a rotary table, and
you want to set the datum to the center of the
rotary table by entering 0. This function only
saves the datum in the axis which is currently
highlighted. Enter the desired value in the pop-up
window. If inch display is active: enter the value
in inches, and the TNC will internally convert the
entered values to mm.
Write the currently active datum to a selectable
line in the table: This function saves the datum in
all axes, and then activates the appropriate row in
the table automatically. If inch display is active:
enter the value in inches, and the TNC will
internally convert the entered values to mm.
570
Editing the preset table

Soft key

Select end of table
Select the functions for preset entry
Activate the datum of the selected line of the
preset table
Add the entered number of lines to the end of the
table (2nd soft-key row)
Reset the selected line: The TNC entersin all
columns (2nd soft-key row)
Insert a single line at the end of the table (2nd
soft-key row)
Delete a single line at the end of the table (2nd
soft-key row)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
571
Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation

mode
When activating a datum from the preset table, the TNC
resets the active datum shift.
However, a coordinate transformation that was
programmed in Cycle19 Tilted Working Plane, or through
the PLANE function, remains active.
If you activate a preset that does not contain values in all
coordinates, the last effective reference point remains
active in these axes.
Display the preset table.
Select the datum number that you want to activate, or
With the GOTO key, select the datum number that

you want to activate. Confirm with the ENT key.
Activate the preset.
Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the

display andif definedthe basic rotation.
Leave the preset table.
Activating a datum from the preset table in an NC program

To activate datums from the preset table during program run, use
Cycle 247. In Cycle 247 you define the number of the datum that you
want to activate (see User's Manual, Cycles, Cycle 247 SET DATUM).
572
14.6 Using the 3-D Touch Probe

Overview
Note that HEIDENHAIN generally does not accept liability
for the function of the touch probe cycles unless you use
HEIDENHAIN touch probes!
The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation
mode:
Function
Soft key
Page
Calibrating the effective length
Page 578
Calibrating the effective radius
Page 579
Measuring a basic rotation using a line
Page 583
Setting the datum in any axis
Page 587
Setting a corner as datum
Page 588
Setting a circle center as datum
Page 589
Setting a center line as datum
Page 590
Measuring a basic rotation using two

holes/cylindrical studs
Page 591
Setting the datum using four

Page 591
Setting a circle center using three

Page 591
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
573
Selecting probe cycles

U
To select the Manual Operation or El. Handwheel mode of operation

U Select the touch probe functions by pressing the
TOUCH PROBE soft key. The TNC displays additional
soft keys: see table above.
U
To select the probe cycle, press the appropriate soft

key, for example PROBING ROT, and the TNC
displays the associated menu.
Recording measured values from the touchprobe cycles

builder for use of this function. Refer to your machine tool
After executing any selected probe cycle, the TNC displays the soft
key PRINT. If you press this soft key, the TNC will record the current
values determined in the active touch probe cycle. You can then use
the PRINT function in the menu for setting the data interface (see the
User's Manual Chapter 12, MOD Functions, Setting the Data
Interfaces) to define whether the TNC is to
print the measuring result,
store the measuring results on the TNCs hard disk, or
store the measuring results on a PC.
If you store the measuring results, the TNC creates the ASCII file
%TCHPRNT.A. Unless you define a specific path and interface in the
interface configuration menu, the TNC will store the %TCHPRNT file
in the main directory TNC:\.
When you press the PRINT soft key, the %TCHPRNT.A
file must not be active in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation. The TNC will otherwise display an error
message.
The TNC stores the measured data in the %TCHPRNT.A
file only. If you execute several touch probe cycles in
succession and want to store the resulting measured data,
you must make a backup of the contents stored in
%TCHPRNT.A between the individual cycles by copying
or renaming the file.
Format and contents of the %TCHPRNT file are preset by
the machine tool builder.
574
Writing the measured values from touch probe

cycles in datum tables
This function is active only if you have datum tables active
on your TNC (bit 3 in Machine Parameter 7224.0 =0).
Use this function if you want to save measured values in
the workpiece coordinate system. If you want to save
measured values in the fixed machine coordinate system
(REF coordinates), press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE
soft key (see Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table on page 576).
With the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key, the TNC can write the
values measured during a touch probe cycle in a datum table:
Note that during an active datum shift the TNC always
bases the probed value on the active preset (or on the
reference point most recently set in the Manual operating
mode), although the datum shift is included in the position
display.
U
U
U
U
U
Select any probe function

Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input
boxes (depends on the touch probe cycle being run)
Enter the datum number in the Number in table= input box
Enter the name of the datum table (complete path) in the Datum
table input box
Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key. The TNC saves the
datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
575
Writing the measured values from touch probe

cycles in the preset table
Use this function if you want to save measured values in
the machine-based coordinate system (REF coordinates).
If you want to save measured values in the workpiece
coordinate system, press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE
soft key (see Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in datum tables on page 575).
With the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key, the TNC can write the
values measured during a probe cycle in the preset table. The
measured values are then stored referenced to the machine-based
coordinate system (REF coordinates). The preset table has the name
PRESET.PR, and is saved in the directory TNC:\.
display.
U
U
U
U

Enter the preset number in the Number in table: input box
Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key. The TNC saves the
datum in the preset table under the entered number
If you overwrite the active datum, the TNC shows a
warning. If you really want to overwrite it, press the ENT
key. If not, press the NO ENT key.
576
Storing measured values in the pallet preset

table
You use this function for determining pallet datums. This
function must be enabled by your machine tool builder.
In order to store a measured value in the pallet preset
table, you must activate a zero preset before probing. A
zero preset consists of the entry 0 in all axes of the preset
table!
U
U
U
U

Enter the preset number in the Number in table: input box
Press the ENTER IN PALLET PRES. TAB. soft key. The TNC saves
the datum in the preset table under the number entered
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
577
14.7 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe

Introduction
In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3-D touch
probe, you must calibrate the touch probe, otherwise the TNC cannot
provide precise measuring results.
Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases:
Commissioning
Stylus breakage
Stylus exchange
Change in the probe feed rate
Irregularities caused, for example, when the machine
heats up
Change of active tool axis
During calibration, the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus
and the effective radius of the ball tip. To calibrate the 3-D touch
probe, clamp a ring gauge of known height and known internal radius
to the machine table.
Calibrating the effective length

The effective length of the touch probe is always
referenced to the tool datum. The machine tool builder
usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum.
U
Set the datum in the spindle axis such that for the machine tool table
Z=0.
U To select the calibration function for the touch probe
length, press the TOUCH PROBE and CAL. L soft
keys. The TNC then displays a menu window with
four input fields.
578
Enter the tool axis (with the axis key).
Datum: Enter the height of the ring gauge.
The menu items Effective ball radius and Effective

length do not require input.
Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring

gauge.
To change the traverse direction (if necessary), press

a soft key or an arrow key.
To probe the upper surface, press the NC Start button
Z
Y
5
Calibrating the effective radius and

compensating center misalignment
After the touch probe is inserted, it normally needs to be aligned
exactly with the spindle axis. The calibration function determines the
misalignment between touch probe axis and spindle axis and
computes the compensation.
The calibration routine varies depending on the setting of Machine
Parameter 6165 (spindle orientation active/inactive). If the function for
orienting the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction
is active, the calibration cycle is executed after you have pressed NC
Start once. If the function is not active, you can decide whether you
want to compensate the center misalignment by calibrating the
effective radius.
The TNC rotates the 3-D touch probe by 180 for calibrating the center
misalignment. The rotation is initiated by a miscellaneous function that
is set by the machine tool builder in Machine Parameter 6160.
Z
Y
X
10
Proceed as follows for manual calibration:

U
In the Manual Operation mode, position the ball tip in the bore of the
ring gauge
U To select the calibration function for the ball-tip radius
and the touch probe center misalignment, press the
CAL. R soft key
U
Select the tool axis and enter the radius of the ring
gauge
Probing: press the NC Start button four times. The 3D touch probe contacts a position on the hole in each
axis direction and calculates the effective ball-tip
radius
If you want to terminate the calibration function at this

point, press the END soft key
In order to be able to determine ball-tip center

misalignment, the TNC needs to be specially prepared by
the machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool
U
If you want to determine the ball-tip center

misalignment, press the 180 soft key. The TNC
rotates the touch probe by 180
Probing: press the NC Start button four times. The 3D touch probe contacts a position on the hole in each
axis direction and calculates the ball-tip center
misalignment
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
579
Displaying calibration values

The TNC stores the effective length and radius, as well as the center
misalignment, for use when the touch probe is needed again. You can
display the values on the screen with the soft keys CAL. L and CAL. R.
If you want to use several touch probes or calibration data
blocks: See Managing more than one block of calibrating
data on page 580.
Managing more than one block of calibrating

data
If you use several touch probes or measuring contacts arranged in a
cross shape on your machine, you must also use several blocks of
calibration data.
To be able to use more than one block of calibration data, you must set
Machine Parameter 7411=1. To find the calibration data, proceed in
the same way as is done with one single touch probe. When exiting
the Calibration menu, press the ENT key to confirm the entry of the
calibration data in the tool table and for the TNC to save the calibration
data in the tool table. The line of the tool table, to which the TNC saves
the data, is determined by the active tool number.
Make sure that you have activated the correct tool number
before using the touch probe, regardless of whether you
wish to run the touch probe cycle in automatic mode or
manual mode.
If MP 7411=1 is set, the TNC shows the tool number and
name in the calibration menu.
580
Introduction
The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by
computing a basic rotation.
For this purpose, the TNC sets the rotation angle to the desired angle
with respect to the reference axis in the working plane. See figure at
right.
As an alternative, you can also compensate the misalignment by

rotating the rotary table.
Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle
reference axis when measuring workpiece misalignment.
To ensure that the basic rotation is calculated correctly
during program run, program both coordinates of the
working plane in the first positioning block.
PA
You can also use a basic rotation in conjunction with the

PLANE function. In this case, first activate the basic
rotation and then the PLANE function.
If you change the basic rotation, the TNC asks you if you
also want to save the changed basic rotation in the active
line of the Preset table when you exit the menu. In this
case, confirm with the ENT key.
If your machine has been prepared for it, the TNC can also
conduct a real, three-dimensional set-up compensation. If
necessary, contact your machine tool builder.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
581
14.8 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe
14.8 Compensating Workpiece

Misalignment with a 3-D Touch
Probe
Overview
Cycle
Soft key
Basic rotation using 2 points:

The TNC measures the angle between the line
connecting the two holes and a nominal position
(angle reference axis).
Basic rotation using 2 holes/studs:
connecting the centers of two holes/studs and a
nominal position (angle reference axis).
Workpiece alignment using 2 points:
connecting the two points and a nominal position
(angle reference axis) and compensates the
misalignment by turning the rotary table.
582
Basic rotation using 2 points:

U
Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING

ROT soft key.

touch point.

reference axis: Select the axis by soft key
Probing: press the NC Start button
Position the touch probe at a position near the second

touch point.
Probing: press the NC Start button. The TNC

determines the basic rotation and displays the angle
after the dialog Rotation angle =
Saving the basic rotation in the preset table

U After the probing process, enter the preset number in which the
TNC is to save the active basic rotation in the Number in table:
input box
U Press the ENTRY IN PRESET TABLE soft key to save the basic
rotation in the preset table
Saving the basic rotation in the pallet preset table
In order to store a basic rotation in the pallet preset table,
you must activate a zero preset before probing. A zero
preset consists of the entry 0 in all axes of the preset
table!
U
After the probing process, enter the preset number in which the
input box
Press the ENTRY IN PALLET PRES. TAB. soft key to save the basic
The TNC shows an active pallet preset in the additional status display
(see General pallet information (PAL tab) on page 85).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
583
Displaying a basic rotation

The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE
whenever PROBING ROT is selected. The TNC also displays the
rotation angle in the additional status display (STATUS POS.)
In the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever
the TNC is moving the axes according to a basic rotation.
Canceling a basic rotation
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key
U Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the ENT key.
U Terminate the probe function by pressing the END key.
584
Determining basic rotation using 2 holes/studs:

U

ROT soft key (soft-key row 2)
Circular studs are to be probed. Define by soft key.
Holes are to be probed. Define by soft key
Probing holes
Pre-position the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole.
After you have pressed the NC Start key, the TNC automatically
probes four points on the wall of the hole.
Move the touch probe to the next hole repeat the probing process. and
have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have
been probed to set reference points.
Probing cylindrical studs
Position the ball tip at a starting position near the first touch point of
the stud. Select the probing direction by soft key and press the
machine START button to start probing. Perform the above procedure
four times.
Saving a basic rotation in the preset table
input box
U Press the ENTRY IN PRESET TABLE soft key to save the basic
U
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
585
Workpiece alignment using 2 points

U

ROT soft key (soft-key row 2)

touch point

reference axis: Select the axis by soft key
Position the touch probe near the second touch point
Probing: press the NC Start button. The TNC

determines the basic rotation and displays the angle
after the dialog Rotation angle =
Workpiece alignment:
Retract the touch probe before alignment so as to exclude
a collision with the fixtures or workpieces.
U
U
U
Press the POSITION ROTARY TABLE soft key. The TNC will show
a warning that the touch probe must be retracted.
Start alignment with NC Start: The TNC will position the rotary table.
input box
Saving the misalignment in the preset table

U After the probing process, enter the preset number in which the
TNC is to save the measured misalignment in the Number in table:
input box.
U Press the ENTRY IN PRESET TABLE soft key to save the angle value
as displacement in the rotary axis in the preset table
586
14.9 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
14.9 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch

Probe
Overview
The following soft-key functions are available for setting the datum on
an aligned workpiece:
Soft key
Function
Page
Datum setting in any axis
Page 587
Setting a corner as datum
Page 588
Setting a circle center as datum
Page 589
Center line as datum
Page 590
display.
Datum setting in any axis

U

POS soft key.
Move the touch probe to a position near the touch

point.
Use the soft keys to select the probe axis and

direction in which you want to set the datum, such as
Z in direction Z.
Datum: Enter the nominal coordinate and confirm your

entry with the SET DATUM soft key, or write the
value to a table (see "Writing the measured values
from touch probe cycles in datum tables", page 575,
or see "Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table", page 576, or see
"Storing measured values in the pallet preset table",
page 577).
To terminate the probe function, press the END key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Z
Y
X
587
Corner as datum using points that were

already probed for a basic rotation
U
Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING P

soft key.
Touch points of basic rotation ?: Press ENT to

transfer the touch point coordinates.

touch point of the side that was not probed for basic
rotation.
Select the probe direction by soft key.

on the same workpiece edge.
Datum: Enter both coordinates of the datum in the

menu window, confirm with the SET DATUM soft
key, or write the values to a table (see "Writing the
measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables", page 575, or see "Writing the measured
values from touch probe cycles in the preset table",
page 576, or see "Storing measured values in the
pallet preset table", page 577).
To terminate the probe function, press the END key
Y=?
P
X=?
Corner as datumwithout using points that

were already probed for a basic rotation.
U
U
U
U
Select the probe function: Press the PROBING P soft key

Touch points of basic rotation?: Press NO ENT to ignore the
previous touch points. (The dialog question only appears if a basic
rotation was made previously.)
Probe both workpiece sides twice.
Datum: Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry
with the SET DATUM soft key, or write the values to a table (see
"Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables", page 575, or see "Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table", page 576, or see "Storing
measured values in the pallet preset table", page 577)
588
With this function, you can set the datum at the center of bore holes,
circular pockets, cylinders, studs, circular islands, etc.
Inside circle:
The TNC automatically probes the inside wall in all four coordinate axis
directions.
Y+
For incomplete circles (circular arcs) you can choose the appropriate
probing direction.
U
X+
Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle.

U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
CC soft key.
U
Probing: press the NC Start button four times. The

touch probe touches four points on the inside of the
circle.
If you are probing to find the stylus center (only
available on machines with spindle orientation,
depending on MP6160), press the 180 soft key and
probe another four points on the inside of the circle.
If you are not probing to find the stylus center, press

the END key.
Datum: In the menu window, enter both coordinates of

the circle center, confirm with the SET DATUM soft
page 576)
Y
X+
Y+
Outside circle:
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point
outside of the circle.
U Select the probe direction by soft key.
U Probing: press the NC Start button
U Repeat the probing process for the remaining three points. See
figure at lower right.
U Datum: Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry
with the SET DATUM soft key, or write the values to a table (see
"Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables", page 575, or see "Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table", page 576, or see "Storing
measured values in the pallet preset table", page 577)
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key.
After the probing procedure is completed, the TNC displays the
coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
589
Circle center as datum
Center line as datum

U

soft key.
Position the touch probe near the first touch point
Select the probing direction by soft key.
Datum: Enter the coordinate of the datum in the menu

window, confirm with the SET DATUM soft key, or
write the value to a table (see "Writing the measured
values from touch probe cycles in datum tables", page
575, or see "Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table", page 576, or see
"Storing measured values in the pallet preset table",
page 577)
X+
X+
590
Setting datum points using holes/cylindrical

studs
A second soft-key row provides soft keys for using holes or cylindrical
studs to set a reference point
Define whether a hole or stud is to be probed
The default setting is for probing holes.
U
Select the probe function by pressing the TOUCH

PROBE soft key, shift the soft-key row.
Select the probe function: For example, press the

PROBING P soft key.
Circular studs are to be probed. Define by soft key.
Holes are to be probed. Define by soft key.
Probing holes
Pre-position the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole.
After you have pressed the NC Start key, the TNC automatically
probes four points on the wall of the hole.
Move the touch probe to the next hole repeat the probing process. and
have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have
been probed to set reference points.
Probing cylindrical studs
Position the ball tip at a starting position near the first touch point of
the stud. Select the probing direction by soft key and press the
machine START button to start probing. Perform the above procedure
four times.
Overview
Cycle
Soft key
Basic rotation using 2 holes:

connecting the centers of two holes and a nominal
position (angle reference axis).
Datum using 4 holes:
The TNC calculates the intersection of the line
connecting the first two probed holes with the line
connecting the last two probed holes. You need to
probe diagonally opposite holes one after another (as
shown on the soft key), as otherwise the datum
calculated by the TNC will be incorrect.
Circle center using 3 holes:
The TNC calculates a circle that intersects the centers
of all three holes, and finds the center.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
591
Measuring workpieces with a 3-D touch probe

You can also use the touch probe in the Manual Operation and El.
Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the
workpiece. Numerous programmable probe cycles are available for
complex measuring tasks (see User's Manual, Cycles, Chapter 16,
Checking workpieces automatically). With a 3-D touch probe you can
determine:
Position coordinates, and from them,
Dimensions and angles on the workpiece.
To find the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece:
POS soft key.
U
Move the touch probe to a position near the touch

point.
Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate.

Use the corresponding soft keys for selection.
To start probing, press the NC Start button
The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as reference point.
Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane
Find the coordinates of the corner point: See Corner as datum
without using points that were already probed for a basic rotation. on
page 588. The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as
reference point.
592

touch point A.
Select the probing direction by soft key
If you will need the current datum later, write down

the value that appears in the Datum display.
Datum: Enter 0.

POS soft key.
Position the touch probe at a position near the second

touch point B.
Select the probe direction with the soft keys: Same

axis but from the opposite direction.
The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points
on the coordinate axis.
To return to the datum that was active before the length
measurement:
U
U
U
U
Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key
Probe the first touch point again.
Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously.
Measuring angles
You can use the 3-D touch probe to measure angles in the working
plane. You can measure
the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge,
or
the angle between two sides
The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
593
Measuring workpiece dimensions

POS soft key
Finding the angle between the angle reference axis and a

workpiece edge
ROT soft key
U
Rotation angle: If you need the current basic rotation

later, write down the value that appears under
Rotation angle.
Make a basic rotation with workpiece edge to be

compared (see Compensating Workpiece
Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe on page 581)
Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle

between the angle reference axis and the workpiece
edge as the rotation angle.
Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic

rotation.
This is done by setting the rotation angle to the value

that you previously wrote down.
PA
To measure the angle between two workpiece sides:

U
U
U
U
U
U
Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key
Rotation angle: If you need the current basic rotation later, write
down the displayed rotation angle.
Make a basic rotation with first workpiece edge (see
Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe
on page 581)
Probe the second edge as for a basic rotation, but do not set the
rotation angle to zero!
Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle PA between
the sides as the rotation angle.
Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic rotation by
setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down
previously.
594
Z
L?
Y
a?
100
a?
10
100
Using touch probe functions with mechanical

probes or dial gauges
If you do not have an electronic 3-D touch probe on your machine, you
can also use all the previously described manual touch probe functions
(exception: calibration function) with mechanical probes or by simply
touching the workpiece with the tool.
In place of the electronic signal generated automatically by a 3-D touch
probe during probing, you can manually initiate the trigger signal for
capturing the probing position by pressing a key. Proceed as follows:
U
Select any touch probe function by soft key
Move the mechanical probe to the first position to be

captured by the TNC
Confirm the position: Press the actual-positioncapture key for the TNC to save the current position
Move the mechanical probe to the next position to be

captured by the TNC
Confirm the position: Press the actual-positioncapture key for the TNC to save the current position
If required, move to additional positions and capture

as described previously
Datum: In the menu window, enter the coordinates of

the new datum, confirm with the SET DATUM soft
page 576)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
595
14.10 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
14.10 Tilting the Working Plane

(Software Option 1)
Application, function
The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to
the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder.
With some swivel heads and tilting tables, the machine
tool builder determines whether the entered angles are
interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular
components of a tilted plane. Refer to your machine tool
manual.
The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel
heads and/or tilting tables. Typical applications are, for example,
oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane. The working plane is
always tilted around the active datum. The program is written as usual
in a main plane, such as the X/Y plane, but is executed in a plane that
is tilted relative to the main plane.
Z
B
10
There are three functions available for tilting the working plane:
Manual tilting with the 3-D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation
mode and El. Handwheel mode, see "Activating manual tilting", page
600
Tilting under program control, Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part
program (see Users Manual, Cycles, Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE)
Tilting under program control, PLANE function in the part program
(see The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software
Option 1) on page 469)
The TNC functions for "tilting the working plane" are coordinate
transformations. The working plane is always perpendicular to the
direction of the tool axis.
596
When tilting the working plane, the TNC differentiates between two
machine types:
Machine with tilting table
You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for
machining by positioning the tilting table, for example with an L
block.
The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in
relation to the machine-based coordinate system. Thus if you
rotate the tableand therefore the workpieceby 90 for
example, the coordinate system does not rotate. If you press the
Z+ axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode, the tool
moves in Z+ direction.
In calculating the transformed coordinate system, the TNC
considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the
particular tilting table (the so-called translational components).
Machine with swivel head
You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by
positioning the swivel head, for example with an L block.
The position of the transformed tool axis changes in relation to the
machine-based coordinate system. Thus if you rotate the swivel
head of your machineand therefore the toolin the B axis by
90 for example, the coordinate system rotates also. If you press
the Z+ axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode, the
tool moves in X+ direction of the machine-based coordinate
system.
In calculating the transformed coordinate system, the TNC
considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the
particular swivel head (the so-called translational components)
and offsets caused by tilting of the tool (3-D tool length
compensation).
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
597
Traversing the reference points in tilted axes

With tilted axes, you use the machine axis direction buttons to cross
over the reference points. The TNC interpolates the corresponding
axes. Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane is active in
the Manual Operation mode and that the actual angle of the tilted axis
was entered in the menu field.
Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system

After you have positioned the rotary axes, set the datum in the same
manner as for a non-tilted system. The behavior of the TNC during
datum setting depends on the settings of Machine Parameter 7500 in
your kinematics table:
MP 7500, bit 5=0
With an active tilted working plane, the TNC checks during datum
setting in the X, Y and Z axes whether the current coordinates of the
rotary axes agree with the tilt angles that you defined (3D-ROT
menu). If the tilted working plane function is not active, the TNC
checks whether the rotary axes are at 0 (actual positions). If the
positions do not agree, the TNC will display an error message.
MP 7500, bit 5=1
The TNC does not check whether the current coordinates of the
rotary axes (actual positions) agree with the tilt angles that you
defined.
Always set a reference point in all three reference axes.
If your machine tool is not equipped with axis control, you
must enter the actual position of the rotary axis in the
menu for manual tilting: The actual positions of one or
several rotary axes must match the entry. Otherwise the
TNC will calculate an incorrect datum.
598
Datum setting on machines with rotary tables

If you use a rotary table to align the workpiece, for example with
probing cycle 403, you must set the table position value to zero after
alignment and before setting the datum in the linear axes X, Y and Z.
Otherwise, the TNC generates an error message. Cycle 403 provides
you with an input parameter for this purpose (see Users Manual for
Touch Probe Cycles, Basic Rotation Compensation via Rotary Axis).
Datum setting on machines with spindle-head

changing systems
If your machine is equipped with a spindle head changer, you should
use the preset table to manage your datums. Datums saved in preset
tables account for the active machine kinematics (head geometry). If
you exchange heads, the TNC accounts for the new head dimensions
so that the active datum is retained.
Position display in a tilted system

The positions displayed in the status window (ACTL. and NOML.) are
referenced to the tilted coordinate system.
Limitations on working with the tilting function

The probing function for basic rotation is not available if you have
activated the working plane function in the Manual Operation mode.
The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the tilted
working plane function is active.
PLC positioning (determined by the machine tool builder) is not
possible.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
599
Activating manual tilting

To select manual tilting, press the 3-D ROT soft key.
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the

Manual Operation menu item.
To activate manual tilting, press the ACTIVE soft key.
Use the arrow keys to position the highlight on the

desired rotary axis.
Enter the tilt angle
To conclude entry, press the END key.
To reset the tilting function, set the desired operating modes in the
menu Tilt working plane to inactive.
If the tilted working plane function is active and the TNC moves the
machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes, the status display
shows the
symbol.
If you activate the Tilt working plane function for the Program Run
operating mode, the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active in
the first block of the part program. If you use Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE
or the PLANE function in the part program, the angle values defined
there are in effect. Angle values entered in the menu will be
overwritten.
600
Setting the current tool-axis direction as the

active machining direction (FCL 2 function)
This function must be enabled by your machine
manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool manual.
In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of

operation you can use this function to move the tool via the external
direction keys or with the handwheel in the direction that the tool axis
is currently pointed. Use this function if
You want to retract the tool in the direction of the tool axis during
program interrupt of a 5-axis machining program.
You want to machine with an inclined tool using the handwheel or
the external direction keys in the Manual Operation mode.
To select manual tilting, press the 3-D ROT soft key
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the

Manual Operation menu item
To activate the current tool-axis direction as the active

machining direction, press the TOOL AXIS soft key.
To conclude entry, press the END key
To reset the tilting function, set the Manual Operation menu item in
the Tilt working plane menu to inactive.
The
symbol appears in the status display when the Move in toolaxis direction function is active.
This function is even available when you interrupt
program run and want to move the axes manually.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
601
602
Positioning with
Manual Data Input
15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations
15.1 Programming and Executing

Simple Machining Operations
The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is
particularly convenient for simple machining operations or to preposition the tool. It enables you to write a short program in
HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in ISO format, and
execute it immediately. Fixed cycles, touch-probe cycles and special
functions (SPEC FCT key) of the TNC are also available in the MDI
mode of operation. The TNC saves the program automatically in the
$MDI file. In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation, the
additional status displays can also be activated.
Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)

Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation.
Program the $MDI file with the available functions.
To start program run, press the machine START key.
Constraints:
FK free contour programming, programming graphics and
program run graphics cannot be used.
The $MDI file must not contain a program call (PGM CALL).
604
First you pre-position the tool with straight-line blocks to the hole
center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece
surface. Then drill the hole with Cycle 200 DRILLING.
Z
Y
50
50
0 BEGIN PGM $MDI MM

Call tool: tool axis Z

Spindle speed 2000 rpm
2 L Z+200 R0 FMAX
Retract tool (FMAX = rapid traverse)
3 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3
Move the tool at FMAX to a position above the hole,

spindle on
Define DRILLING cycle
Q200=5
;SETUP CLEARANCE
Setup clearance of the tool above the hole
Q201=-15
;DEPTH
Total hole depth (algebraic sign=working direction)
Q206=250
;FEED RATE FOR PLNGN
Feed rate for drilling
Q202=5
;PLUNGING DEPTH
Depth of each infeed before retraction
Q210=0
;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Dwell time after every retraction in seconds
Q203=-10
;SURFACE COORDINATE
Coordinate of the workpiece surface
Q204=20
;2ND SETUP CLEARANCE
Setup clearance of the tool above the hole
Q211=0.2
Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom
5 CYCL CALL
Call DRILLING cycle
Retract the tool
7 END PGM $MDI MM
End of program
Straight-line function: See Straight line L on page 228, DRILLING

cycle: See Users Manual, Cycles, Cycle 200 DRILLING.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
605
Example 1
A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece.
After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum, you
can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines.
Example 2: Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines

with rotary tables
Use the 3-D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system. See Touch
Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating
Modes, section Compensating workpiece misalignment, in the
Touch Probe Cycles Users Manual.
Write down the rotation angle and cancel the basic rotation.
Select operating mode: Positioning with MDI.
Select the rotary table axis, enter the rotation angle

and feed rate you wrote down, for example: L
C+2.561 F50
Conclude the entry.
Press the NC Start button: The rotation of the table

corrects the misalignment.
606
Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI

The $MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only
needed temporarily. Nevertheless, you can store a program, if
necessary, by proceeding as described below:
Select the Programming and Editing mode of
operation.

(program management).
Mark the $MDI file.
To select the file copying function, press the COPY

soft key.
DESTINATION FILE =
HOLE
Enter the name under which you want to save the

current contents of the $MDI file.
Copy the file.
To close the file manager, press the END soft key.
Erasing the contents of the $MDI file is done in a similar way: Instead
of copying the contents, however, you erase them with the DELETE
soft key. The next time you select the Positioning with MDI operating
mode, the TNC will display an empty $MDI file.
If you wish to delete $MDI, then
you must not have selected the Positioning with MDI
mode (not even in the background)
you must not have selected the $MDI file in the
Programming and Editing mode.
For more information: see "Copying a single file", page 126.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
607
608
Test Run and

Program Run
16.1 Graphics
16.1 Graphics
Application
In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run
mode, the TNC graphically simulates the machining of the workpiece.
Using soft keys, select whether you desire:
Plan view
3-D view
The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined
with a cylindrical end mill. If a tool table is active, you can also simulate
the machining operation with a spherical cutter. For this purpose,
enter R2 = R in the tool table.
The TNC will not show a graphic if
the current program has no valid blank form definition
no program is selected
Using the new 3-D graphics in the Test Run mode, you can
now also graphically display machining operations in the
tilted working plane as well as multi-sided machining
operations, provided that you have already simulated the
program in another view. You need at least the MC 422 B
hardware in order to use this function. In order to increase
the speed of the test graphics on older hardware versions,
bit 5 of MP7310 should be set to 1. This deactivates
functions which were implemented specifically for the 3D graphics.
The TNC graphic does not show a radius oversize DR that
has been programmed in the TOOL CALL block.
Graphic simulation for special applications
NC programs usually contain a tool call with a defined tool number,
which automatically determines the tool data for graphic simulation.
For special applications that do not require any tool data (e.g. laser
cutting, laser drilling or waterjet cutting), you can set Machine
Parameters 7315 to 7317 such that the TNC will run a graphic
simulation even if no tool data are activated. However, you always
need a tool call with the definition of the tool axis orientation (e.g. TOOL
CALL Z). The tool number does not need to be entered.
610
16.1 Graphics
Setting the speed of the test run

You can set the speed of the test run only if the Display
of machining time function is active (see Activating the
stopwatch function on page 619). Otherwise, the TNC
always performs the test run at the maximum possible
speed.
The most recently set speed remains active, even if the
power is interrupted, until you change it.
After you have started a program, the TNC displays the following soft
keys with which you can set the simulation speed.
Functions
Soft key
Execute test run at the same speed at which the

program will be run (programmed feed rates are
taken into account).
Increase the test speed incrementally.
Decrease the test speed incrementally.
Test run at the maximum possible speed (default
setting).
You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program:
U
Switch to the next soft-key row
Select the function for setting the simulation speed
Select the desired function by soft key, e.g.

incrementally increasing the test speed
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
611
16.1 Graphics
Overview of display modes

The control displays the following soft keys in the Program Run and
Test Run modes of operation:
View
Soft key
Plan view
3-D view
Limitations during program run

A graphical representation of a running program is not
possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already
occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large
areas are being machined. Example: Multipass milling
over the entire workpiece blank with a large tool. The TNC
interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the
graphics window. The machining process is continued,
however.
In the test run graphics, the TNC does not depict multi-axis
operations during machining. The error message Axis
cannot be shown appears in the graphics window in such
cases.
Plan view
This is the fastest of the graphic display modes.
If your machine has a mouse, the status bar shows the
depth of any location on the workpiece when you move
the mouse pointer over it.
612
Press the soft key for plan view
Regarding depth display, remember: The deeper the

surface, the darker the shade
16.1 Graphics
Projection in 3 planes
Similar to a workpiece drawing, the part is displayed with a plan view
and two sectional planes. A symbol to the lower left indicates whether
the display is in first-angle or third-angle projection method according
to ISO 128 (selected with MP7310).
Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification (see
"Magnifying details", page 617).
In addition, you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding
soft keys:
U
Select the soft key for projection in three planes
Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for the
functions for shifting the sectional plane appears
Select the functions for shifting the sectional plane.

The TNC offers the following soft keys:
Function
Soft keys
Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right

or left
Shift the vertical sectional plane forward or
backward
Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards
or downwards
The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting.
The default setting of the sectional plane is selected such that it lies in
the working plane in the workpiece center and in the tool axis on the
top surface.
Coordinates of the line of intersection
At the bottom of the graphics window, the TNC displays the
coordinates of the line of intersection, referenced to the workpiece
datum. Only the coordinates of the working plane are shown. This
function is activated with MP7310.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
613
16.1 Graphics
3-D view
The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions. If you have the
appropriate hardware, then with its high-resolution 3-D graphics the
TNC can also display machining operations in the tilted working plane
as well as multi-sided machining operations.
You can rotate the 3-D display about the vertical and horizontal axes
via soft keys. If there is a mouse attached to your TNC, you can also
perform this function by holding down the right mouse button and
dragging the mouse.
The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay
at the beginning of the graphic simulation.
In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for
magnification, see "Magnifying details", page 617.
U
Press the soft key for 3-D view. Press the soft key
twice to switch to the high-resolution 3-D graphics.
This switch is only possible once the simulation has
finished. The high-resolution graphics show more
surface details of the workpiece being machined.
The speed of the 3-D graphics depends on the tooth

length (LCUTS column in the tool table). If LCUTS is defined
as 0 (basic setting), the simulation calculates an infinitely
long tooth length, which leads to a long processing time.
If you do not want to define LCUTS, then set MP7312 to a
value between 5 and 10. This way the TNC internally limits
the tooth length to a value which is calculated from
MP7312 times the tool diameter.
614
16.1 Graphics
Rotating and magnifying/reducing the 3-D view

U Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for the rotating
and magnification/reduction appears
U
Select functions for rotating and magnifying/reducing:
Function
Soft keys
Rotate in 5 steps about the vertical axis

Tilt in 5 steps about the horizontal axis
Magnify the graphic stepwise. If the view is
magnified, the TNC shows the letter Z in
the footer of the graphic window.
Reduce the graphic stepwise. If the view is
reduced, the TNC shows the letter Z in the
footer of the graphic window.
Reset image to programmed size
You can also use the mouse with the 3-D graphics. The following
U
U
U
In order to rotate the graphic shown in three dimensions: Hold the

right mouse button down and move the mouse. The TNC displays a
coordinate system showing the currently active orientation of the
workpiece. After you release the right mouse button, the TNC
orients the workpiece to the defined orientation
In order to shift the graphic shown: Hold the center mouse button
or the wheel button down and move the mouse. The TNC shifts the
workpiece in the corresponding direction. After you release the
center mouse button, the TNC shifts the workpiece to the defined
position
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
615
16.1 Graphics
Switch the frame overlay display for the workpiece blank on/off:
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for the rotating and
magnification/reduction appears
U Select functions for rotating and magnifying/reducing:
616
Show the frame for the BLK FORM: Set the highlight
in the soft key to SHOW
Hide the frame for the BLK FORM: Set the highlight in
the soft key to OMIT
16.1 Graphics
Magnifying details
You can magnify details in all display modes in the Test Run mode and
a Program Run mode.
The graphic simulation or the program run, respectively, must first
have been stopped. A detail magnification is always effective in all
display modes.
Changing the detail magnification
The soft keys are listed in the table
U
U
Interrupt the graphic simulation, if necessary

Shift the soft-key row in the Test Run mode, or in a Program Run
mode, respectively, until the soft key for detail enlargement appears
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft-key for the detail
magnification functions appears
U
Select the functions for detail magnification
Press the corresponding soft key to select the

workpiece surface (see table below)
To reduce or magnify the workpiece blank, press and

hold the MINUS or PLUS soft key, respectively
Restart the test run or program run by pressing the

START soft key (RESET + START returns the
workpiece blank to its original state).
Function
Soft keys
Select the left/right workpiece surface

Select the front/back workpiece surface
Select the top/bottom workpiece surface
Shift the sectional plane to reduce or
magnify the workpiece blank
Select the isolated detail
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
617
16.1 Graphics
Cursor position during detail magnification

During detail magnification, the TNC displays the coordinates of the
axis that is currently being isolated. The coordinates describe the area
determined for magnification. To the left of the slash is the smallest
coordinate of the detail (MIN point), to the right is the largest (MAX
point).
If a graphic display is magnified, this is indicated with MAGN at the lower
right of the graphics window.
If the workpiece blank cannot be further enlarged or reduced, the TNC
displays an error message in the graphics window. To clear the error
message, reduce or enlarge the workpiece blank.
Repeating graphic simulation

A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired, either
with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it.
Function
Soft key
Restore workpiece blank to the detail magnification in

which it was last shown.
Reset detail magnification so that the machined
workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it was
programmed with BLK FORM.
With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key, you return the
displayed workpiece blank to its originally programmed
dimensions, even after isolating a detail without
TRANSFER DETAIL.
Displaying the tool

You can display the tool during simulation in the plan view and in the
projection in 3 planes. The TNC depicts the tool in the diameter
defined in the tool table.
Function
Soft key
Do not display the tool during simulation

Display the tool during simulation
618
16.1 Graphics
Measuring the machining time

Program Run modes of operation
The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program
end. The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted.
Test Run
The TNC takes the following into account for the time calculation:
Traverse movements at feed rate
Dwell times
Machine dynamics settings (accelerations, filter settings, motion
control)
The time calculated by the TNC does not include rapid-traverse
movements and times depending on the individual machine tool (e.g.
tool change).
If you have switched the "calculate machining time" function on, you
can generate a file listing the usage times of all tools used in the
program (see Tool usage test on page 197).
Activating the stopwatch function
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft-key for the
stopwatch functions appears.
U
Select the stopwatch functions.
Select the desired function by soft key, e.g. saving the

displayed time.
Stopwatch functions
Soft key
Enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the "calculate the

machining time" function.
Store displayed time
Display the sum of stored time
and displayed time
Clear displayed time
During the Test Run, the TNC resets the machining time
as soon as a new BLK FORM is evaluated.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
619
16.2 Functions for Program Display
16.2 Functions for Program Display

Overview
In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run
mode, the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part
program in pages:
Functions
Soft key
Go back in the program by one screen

Go forward in the program by one screen
Go to the beginning of the program
Go to the end of the program
620
16.3 Test Run
16.3 Test Run

Application
In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and
program sections to reduce programming errors during program run.
The TNC checks the programs for the following:
Geometrical incompatibilities
Missing data
Impossible jumps
Violation of the machines working space
Collisions between collision-monitored components (DCM software
option is required, see "Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of
operation", page 401)
The following functions are also available:
Blockwise test run
Interrupt test at any block
Optional block skip
Functions for graphic simulation
Calculating the machining time
Additional status display
If your machine has the DCM (Dynamic Collision
Monitoring) software option, you can check for collisions
in the Test Run mode before actually machining a part,
(see Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of
operation on page 401)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
621
16.3 Test Run
The TNC cannot graphically simulate all traverse motions
actually performed by the machine. These include
traverse motions during tool change, if the machine
manufacturer defined them in a tool-change macro or via
the PLC,
positioning movements that the machine manufacturer
defined in an M-function macro,
positioning movements that the machine manufacturer
performs via the PLC.
positioning movements that lead to a pallet change.
HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends proceeding with
caution for every new program, even when the program
test did not output any error message, and no visible
damage to the workpiece occurred.
After a tool call, the TNC always starts a Test Run at the
following position:
In working plane in the center of the defined workpiece
blank
In the tool axis, 1 mm above the MAX point defined in the
BLK FORM.
If you call the same tool, the TNC resumes program
simulation from the position last programmed before the
tool call.
In order to ensure unambiguous behavior during program
run, after a tool change you should always move to a
position from which the TNC can position the tool for
machining without causing a collision.
Your machine tool builder can also define a tool-change

macro for the Test Run operating mode. This macro will
simulate the exact behavior of the machine. Please refer
to your machine tool manual.
622
16.3 Test Run
Executing a test run

If the central tool file is active, a tool table must be active (status S) to
perform a test run. Select a tool table via the file manager (PGM MGT)
in the Test Run mode of operation.
With the MOD function BLANK IN WORK SPACE, you can activate
work space monitoring for the test run (see "Showing the Workpiece
in the Working Space", page 660).
U
Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and
select the file you wish to test, or
Go to the program beginning: Select line 0 with the

GOTO key and confirm your entry with the ENT key.
The TNC then displays the following soft keys:

Functions
Soft key
Reset the blank form and test the entire program

Test the entire program
Test each program block individually
Halt test run (soft key only appears once you have
started the test run)
You can interrupt the test run and continue it again at any pointeven
within a machining cycle. In order to continue the test, the following
actions must not be performed:
Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key
Making changes to the program
Switching the operating mode
Selecting a new program
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
623
16.3 Test Run
Executing a test run up to a certain block

With the STOP AT N function the TNC does a test run only up to the
block with block number N.
U
U
Go to the beginning of program in the Test Run mode of operation.

Select "Test Run up to a specific block": Press the STOP AT N soft
key
624
Stop at N: Enter the block number at which you wish

the test to stop
Program: Enter the name of the program that contains

the block with the selected block number. The TNC
displays the name of the selected program. If the test
run is to be interrupted in a program that was called
with PGM CALL, you must enter this name
Start-up at: P: If you want to start in a point table,

enter here the line number at which you want to start
Table (PNT): If you want to start in a point table, enter

here the name of the point table in which you want to
start
Repetitions: If N is located in a program section

repeat, enter the number of repeats that you want to
run
To test a program section, press the START soft key.

The TNC will test the program up to the entered block
16.3 Test Run
Selecting the kinematics for test run

manufacturer.
You can use this function to test programs whose kinematics does not
match the active machine kinematics (e.g. on machines with head
change or traverse range switchover).
If your machine manufacturer saved different kinematic configurations
in your machine, you can activate one of these kinematics
configurations with the MOD function and use it for a test run. The
active machine kinematics will remain unchanged.
U
Show the available kinematics configurations in a popup window (shift the soft-key row, if necessary).
Select the desired kinematics configuration with the

arrow keys and confirm your selection with the ENT
key.
After switching on the control, the machine kinematics is

always active in the Test Run mode. After switching on
the control, select the desired kinematics for the test run.
If you select a kinematics configuration with the keyword
kinematic, the TNC switches the machine kinematics and
the test kinematics.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
625
16.3 Test Run
Setting a tilted working plane for the test run

manufacturer.
You can use this function on machines, where you want to define the
working plane by manually setting the machine axes.
U
Select the menu for defining the working plane
To activate or deactivate the function, press the ENT

key
Use the active rotary axis coordinates from the

machine mode of operation, or
Position the highlight on the desired rotary axis with

the arrow keys and enter the rotary-axis value to be
used by the TNC in the simulation
If the function has been enabled by your machine

manufacturer, then the TNC does not deactivate the Tilt
the working plane function when you select a new
program.
If you simulate a program that does not contain a TOOL
CALL block, then the axis you have activated for manual
probing in the Manual Operation mode is used by the TNC
as tool axis.
Ensure that the active kinematics in the test run is suitable
for the program you want to test. Otherwise, the TNC may
issue an error message.
626
16.4 Program Run
16.4 Program Run

Application
In the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC
executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program
stop.
In the Program Run, Single Block mode of operation you must start
each block separately by pressing the machine START button.
The following TNC functions are available in the program run modes
of operation:
Interrupt program run
Start program run from a certain block
Optional block skip
Editing the tool table TOOL.T
Check and change Q parameters
Superimpose handwheel positioning
Functions for graphic simulation
Additional status display
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
627
16.4 Program Run
Running a part program

Preparation
1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table.
2 Set the datum.
3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files (status M).
4 Select the part program (status M).
You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the
override knobs.
It is possible to reduce the feed rate when starting the NC
program using the FMAX soft key. The reduction applies
to all rapid traverse and feed rate movements. The value
you enter is no longer in effect after the machine has been
turned off and on again. In order to re-establish the
respectively defined maximum feed rate after switch-on,
you need to re-enter the corresponding value.
U Start the part program with the machine START button
U Start each block of the part program individually with the machine
START button
628
16.4 Program Run
Interrupting machining
There are several ways to interrupt a program run:
Programmed interruptions
Pressing the machine STOP button
Switching to "Single Block program run
Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes)
If the TNC registers an error during program run, it automatically
interrupts the machining process.
Programmed interruptions
You can program interruptions directly in the part program. The TNC
interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following
entries:
STOP (with and without miscellaneous function)
Miscellaneous functions M0, M2 or M30
Miscellaneous function M6 (defined by the machine tool builder)
Interrupting the machining process with the machine STOP
button
U Press the machine STOP button: The block which the TNC is
currently executing is not completed. The asterisk in the status
display blinks
U If you do not wish to continue the machining process, you can reset
the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key. The asterisk in the
status display goes out. In this case, the program must be restarted
from the program beginning
Interrupting the machining process by switching to the Program
Run, Single Block mode of operation
You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run, Full
Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run, Single
Block mode. The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of
the current block.
Jumps within the program after an interruption
If program run is interrupted with the INTERNAL STOP function, the
TNC memorizes the current machining status. You can usually resume
machining with NC start. If you select other program lines with the
GOTO key, the TNC does not reset modally effective functions (e.g.
M136). This may have undesired effects, such as incorrect feed rates.
Please note that program jumps with the GOTO function
do not reset modal functions.
If you want to restart a program after an interruption,
always select the program with the PGM MGT key.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
629
16.4 Program Run
Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes)

This function must be adapted by your machine
manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool manual.
The TNC automatically interrupts the program run as soon as an axis

is programmed in a positioning block that was defined by the machine
tool builder as an open-loop axis (counter axis). In this condition you
can move the open-loop axis manually to the desired position. In the
left window, the TNC shows all nominal positions programmed in this
block. For open-loop axes the TNC additionally displays the distance
remaining.
As soon as all axes are in the correct position, you can use NC Start to
resume program run.
630
Select the desired axis sequence and start each with

NC Start. Manually position the open-loop axes. The
TNC shows the distance remaining to the nominal
position in this axis (see Returning to the contour
on page 636).
If required, choose whether the closed-loop axes are

to be moved in the tilted or non-tilted coordinate
system.
If required, move the closed-loop axes by handwheel

or with the axis-direction buttons.
16.4 Program Run
Moving the machine axes during an interruption

You can move the machine axes during an interruption in the same
way as in the Manual Operation mode.
If you interrupt program run while the working plane is
tilted, you can switch the coordinate system between
tilted and non-tilted, as well as to the active tool axis
direction, by pressing the 3-D ROT soft key.
The functions of the axis direction buttons, the electronic
handwheel and the positioning logic for returning to the
contour are then evaluated by the TNC. When retracting
the tool make sure the correct coordinate system is active
and the angular values of the tilt axes are entered in the 3D ROT menu, if necessary.
Application example:
Retracting the spindle after tool breakage
U Interrupt machining
U Enable the external direction keys: Press the MANUAL TRAVERSE
soft key.
U If necessary, press the 3-D ROT soft key in order to activate the
coordinate system in which you want to traverse.
U Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons
On some machines you may have to press the machine
START button after the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key to
enable the axis direction buttons. Refer to your machine
tool manual.
Your machine tool builder can define whether in a program
interruption you always move the axes in the currently
active (tilted or non-tilted) coordinate system. Refer to
your machine tool manual.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
631
16.4 Program Run
Resuming program run after an interruption

If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle, the
program must be resumed from the beginning of the
cycle. This means that some machining operations will be
repeated.
If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or
program section repeat, use the RESTORE POS AT N function to
return to the position at which the program run was interrupted.
When a program run is interrupted, the TNC stores:
The data of the last defined tool
Active coordinate transformations (e.g. datum shift, rotation,
mirroring)
The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined
Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset
(e.g. if you select a new program).
The TNC uses the stored data for returning the tool to the contour after
manual machine axis positioning during an interruption (RESTORE
POSITION soft key).
Resuming program run with the machine START button
You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button
if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways:
The machine STOP button was pressed
Programmed interruption
Resuming program run after an error
U Remove the cause of the error
U To clear the error message from the screen, press the CE key
U Restart the program, or resume program run where it was
interrupted
After a control software crash,
U Press and hold the END key for two seconds. This induces a TNC
system restart
U Remove the cause of the error
U Start again
If you cannot correct the error, write down the error message and
contact your repair service agency.
632
16.4 Program Run
Mid-program startup (block scan)

The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and
adapted by the machine tool builder. Refer to your
With the RESTORE POS AT N feature (block scan) you can start a part
program at any block you desire. The TNC scans the program blocks
up to that point. Machining can be graphically simulated.
If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP, the
TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid-program
startup.
If the program was interrupted by one of the conditions listed below,
the TNC saves the point of interruption.
EMERGENCY STOP
Power interruption
Control software crash
After you have called the mid-program startup function, you can press
the soft key SELECT LAST N to reactivate the point of interruption and
approach it with an NC start. After switch-on the TNC shows the
message NC program cancelled.
Mid-program startup must not begin in a subprogram.
All necessary programs, tables and pallet files must be
selected in a program run mode of operation (status M).
If the program contains a programmed interruption before
the startup block, the block scan is interrupted. Press the
machine START button to continue the block scan.
After a block scan, return the tool to the calculated position
with RESTORE POSITION.
Tool length compensation does not take effect until after
the tool call and a following positioning block. This applies
if you have only changed the tool length.
The additional functions M142 (delete modal program
information) and M143 (delete basic rotation) are not
permitted during a mid-program startup.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
633
16.4 Program Run
If you are working with nested programs, you can use

MP7680 to define whether the block scan is to begin at
block 0 of the main program or at block 0 of the last
interrupted program.
With the 3-D ROT soft key you can switch the coordinate
system between tilted and non-tilted in order to move to
the start-up position.
If you want to use the block scan feature in a pallet table,
select the program in which a mid-program startup is to be
performed from the pallet table by using the arrow keys.
Then press the RESTORE POS AT N soft key.
The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid-program
startup. Result parameters that are written to from these
cycles might therefore remain empty.
The M142, M143 and M120 functions are not allowed during
a mid-program startup.
Before beginning the mid-program start-up, the TNC
deletes traverse movements that you performed during
the program with M118 (handwheel superimpositioning).
For safety reasons always check the distance to go to the
startup position after a block scan!
If you perform a mid-program startup in a program
containing M128, then the TNC performs any
compensation movements necessary. The compensation
movements are superimposed over the approach
movement!
634
16.4 Program Run
To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan,

enter GOTO 0.
U To select block scan, press the BLOCK SCAN soft key,
or
U
Start-up at N: Enter the block number N at which the

block scan should end
Program: Enter the name of the program containing

block N
Start-up at P: Enter the number P at which the block

scan should end if you want to start in a point table or
at a CYCL CALL PAT block
Table (PNT): Enter the name of the point table in

which the block scan should end
Repetitions: If block N is located in a program section

repeat or in a subprogram that is to be run repeatedly,
enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the
block scan
To start the block scan, press the machine START

button
Contour approach (see following section)
Entering a program with the GOTO key

If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a
program, neither the TNC nor the PLC will execute any
functions that ensure a safe start.
If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a
subprogram, the TNC will skip the end of the subprogram
(LBL 0)! In such cases you must always use the
mid-program startup function.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
635
16.4 Program Run
Returning to the contour

With the RESTORE POSITION function, the TNC returns to the
workpiece contour in the following situations:
Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a
program interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL
STOP function.
Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT N,
for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP.
Depending on the machine, if the position of an axis has changed
after the control loop has been opened during a program
interruption.
If an open-loop axis is also programmed in a positioning block (see
Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes) on page 630)
U
U
U
U
To select a return to contour, press the RESTORE POSITION soft

key.
Restore machine status, if required.
To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the
screen, press the NC Start button, or
To move the axes in any sequence, press the soft keys RESTORE
X, RESTORE Z, etc., and activate each axis with the machine START
button.
To resume machining, press the machine START button.
636
16.5 Automatic Program Start
16.5 Automatic Program Start

Application
builder for use of the automatic program start function.
In a Program Run operating mode, you can use the AUTOSTART soft
key (see figure at upper right) to define a specific time at which the
program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started:
U
Show the window for entering the starting time (see

figure at center right).
Time (h:min:sec): Time of day at which the program

is to be started.
Date (DD.MM.YYYY): Date at which the program is to

be started.
To activate the start, set the AUTOSTART soft key to

ON.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
637
16.6 Optional Block Skip
16.6 Optional Block Skip

Application
In a test run or program run, the control can skip over blocks that begin
with a slash /:
U
To run or test the program without the blocks

preceded by a slash, set the soft key to ON.
To run or test the program with the blocks preceded

by a slash, set the soft key to OFF.
This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks.

After a power interruption the control returns to the most
recently selected setting.
Erasing the / character

U
In the Programming and Editing mode you select the block in which
the character is to be erased
U Erase the / character
638
16.7 Optional Program-Run Interruption
16.7 Optional Program-Run

Interruption
Application
The TNC optionally interrupts program run at blocks containing M1. If
you use M1 in the Program Run mode, the TNC does not switch off the
spindle or coolant, if necessary. Your machine tool manual provides
more information.
U
Do not interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks

containing M1: Set soft key to OFF
Interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks

containing M1: Set soft key to ON
M1 is not effective in the Test Run mode of operation.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
639
640
16.7 Optional Program-Run Interruption
MOD Functions
17.1 Selecting MOD Functions

The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays.
The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode.
Selecting the MOD functions

Call the operating mode in which you wish to change the MOD
functions.
U
To select the MOD functions, press the MOD key.

The figures at right show typical screen menus in
Programming and Editing mode (figure at upper right),
Test Run mode (figure at lower right) and in a machine
operating mode (see figure on next page).
Changing the settings

U
Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the
arrow keys
There are three possibilities for changing a setting, depending on the

function selected:
Enter a numerical value directly, e.g. when determining the traverse
range limit
Change a setting by pressing the ENT key, e.g. when setting
program input
Change a setting via a selection window. If more than one possibility
is available for a particular setting, you can superimpose a window
listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key. Select
the desired setting directly by pressing the corresponding numerical
key (to the left of the colon), or by using the arrow keys and then
confirming with ENT. If you dont want to change the setting, close
the window again with END
Exiting the MOD functions

U
To exit the MOD functions, press the END key or END soft key
642
MOD Functions
Overview of MOD functions

The functions available depend on the momentarily selected operating
mode:
Programming and Editing:
Display software numbers
Enter code number
Set data interface
Diagnostic functions, if applicable
Machine-specific user parameters, if applicable
Display HELP files (if provided)
Select machine kinematics, if applicable
Load service packs
Set the time zone
Start file-system check
Configure the HR 550 wireless handwheel
License info
Host computer operation
Test run:
Enter code number
Set the data interface
Show the workpiece in the working space
Machine-specific user parameters, if applicable
Set 3-D ROT function, if applicable
Set the time zone
License info
Host computer operation
In all other modes:
Display code digits for installed options
Select position display
Define unit of measurement (mm/inches)
Set the programming language for MDI
Select the axes for actual position capture
Set the axis traverse limits
Display reference points
Display operating times
Set the time zone
License info
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
643
17.2 Software Numbers
17.2 Software Numbers

Application
The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen
after the MOD functions have been selected:
NC: Number of the NC software (managed by HEIDENHAIN)
PLC: Number and name of the PLC software (managed by your
machine tool builder)
Feature Content Level (FCL): Development level of the software
installed on the control (see Feature content level (upgrade
functions) on page 11). The TNC displays --- on the
programming station, since there is no Feature Content Level
there.
DSP1 to DSP3: Number of the speed controller software
(managed by HEIDENHAIN)
ICTL1 and ICTL3: Number of the current controller software
(managed by HEIDENHAIN)
644
MOD Functions
17.3 Entering Code Numbers
17.3 Entering Code Numbers

Application
The TNC requires a code number for the following functions:
Function
Code number
Select user parameters
123
Configure an Ethernet card (not

iTNC 530 with Windows XP)
NET123
Enable special functions for Q

parameter programming
555343
In addition, you can use the keyword version to create a file containing
all current software numbers of your control:
U
U
U
Enter the keyword version and confirm with the ENT key
The TNC displays all current software numbers on the screen
To terminate the version overview, press the END key
If necessary, you can output the file version.a saved in
the directory TNC:, and send it to your machine
manufacturer or HEIDENHAIN for diagnostic purposes.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
645
17.4 Loading Service Packs
17.4 Loading Service Packs

Application
We strongly recommend contacting your machine tool
builder before you install a service pack.
The TNC restarts the system after the installation
procedure is completed. Before loading the service pack,
put the machine in the EMERGENCY STOP condition.
Connect the network drive from which you want to import
the service pack (if not already done).
This function provides a simple way of updating the software of your
TNC
U
U
U
U
U

Press the MOD key.
To start the software update, press the Load Service Pack soft
key. The TNC then displays a pop-up window for selecting the
update file.
Use the arrow keys to select the directory in which the service pack
is stored. The respective subdirectories can be shown by pressing
the ENT key.
To select the file: Press the ENT key twice on the selected directory.
The TNC switches from the directory window to the file window.
To start the updating process, press the ENT key to select the file.
The TNC unpacks all required files and then restarts the control. This
process may take several minutes.
646
MOD Functions
17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces

Application
To set up the data interfaces, press the RS-232 / RS-422 SETUP soft
key to call a menu for setting the data interfaces:
Setting the RS-232 interface

The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS-232 interface are
entered in the upper left of the screen.
Setting the RS-422 interface

The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS-422 interface are
entered in the upper right of the screen.
Setting the OPERATING MODE of the external

device
The functions Transfer all files, Transfer selected file,
and Transfer directory are not available in the operating
mode EXT.
Setting the baud rate

You can set the BAUD RATE (data transfer speed) from 110 to 115 200
baud.
External device
PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer
software TNCremoNT
HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units
FE 401 B
FE 401 from program no.
230 626-03
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices such as
printers, scanners, punchers, PC
without TNCremoNT
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Operating
mode
Symbol
FE1
FE1
FE1
EXT1, EXT2
647
Assignment
This function sets the destination for the transferred data.
Applications:
Transferring values with Q parameter function FN15
Transferring values with Q parameter function FN16
The TNC mode of operation determines whether the PRINT or PRINT
TEST function is used:
TNC mode of operation
Transfer function
PRINT
PRINT
Test Run
PRINT TEST
You can set PRINT and PRINT TEST as follows:

Function
Path
Output data via RS-232
RS232:\....
Output data via RS-422
RS422:\....
Save data to the TNCs hard disk
TNC:\....
Save data to a server connected

to the TNC
servername:\....
Save the data in the same

directory as the program with
FN15/FN16.
Vacant
File names
Data
Operating mode
File name
Values with FN15
Program Run
%FN15RUN.A
Values with FN15
Test Run
%FN15SIM.A
648
MOD Functions
Software for data transfer

For transfer of files to and from the TNC, we recommend using the
HEIDENHAIN TNCremoNT data transfer software. With TNCremoNT,
data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial
interface or the Ethernet interface.
You can download the current version of TNCremoNT free
of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase
(www.heidenhain.de, <Services and Documentation>,
<Software>, <PC Software>, <TNCremoNT>).
System requirements for TNCremoNT:
PC with 486 processor or higher
Operating system Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista
16 MB RAM
5 MB free memory space on your hard disk
An available serial interface or connection to the TCP/IP network
Installation under Windows
Start the SETUP.EXE installation program with the File Manager
(Explorer)
U Follow the setup program instructions
U
Starting TNCremoNT under Windows

U Click <Start>, <Programs>, <HEIDENHAIN Applications>,
<TNCremoNT>
When you start TNCremoNT for the first time, TNCremoNT
automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
649
Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremoNT

Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC,
you must make absolutely sure that you have already
saved the program currently selected on the TNC. The
TNC saves changes automatically when you switch the
mode of operation on the TNC, or when you select the file
manager via the PGM MGT key.
Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your
PC or to the network.
Once you have started TNCremoNT, you will see a list of all files that
are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main
window 1. Using the menu items <File> and <Change directory>, you
can change the active directory or select another directory on your PC.
If you want to control data transfer from the PC, establish the
connection with your PC in the following manner:
U
Select <File>, <Setup connection>. TNCremoNT now receives the

file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the
bottom left of the main window 2
To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC, select the file in the TNC
window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file
into the PC window 1
To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC, select the file in the PC
window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file
into the TNC window 2
If you want to control data transfer from the TNC, establish the
connection with your PC in the following manner:
U
U
Select <Extras>, <TNCserver>. TNCremoNT is now in server mode.

It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC
You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by
pressing the PGM MGT key (see Data transfer to or from an
external data medium on page 144) and transfer the desired files
Exiting TNCremoNT
Select the menu items <File>, <Exit>
Refer also to the TNCremoNT context-sensitive help texts
where all of the functions are explained in more detail. The
help texts must be called with the F1 key.
650
MOD Functions
17.6 Ethernet Interface

Introduction
The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the
control as a client in your network. The TNC transmits data via the
Ethernet card with
the smb protocol (server message block) for Windows operating
systems, or
the TCP/IP protocol family (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol) and with support from the NFS (Network File System). The
TNC also supports the NFS V3 protocol, which permits higher data
transfer rates
Connection possibilities
You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network
through the RJ45 connection (X26, 100BaseTX or 10BaseT), or directly
to a PC. The connection is metallically isolated from the control
electronics.
For a 100BaseTX or 10BaseT connection you need a Twisted Pair
cable to connect the TNC to your network.
The maximum cable length between TNC and a node
depends on the quality grade of the cable, the sheathing
and the type of network (100BaseTX or 10BaseT).
If you connect the TNC directly with a PC, you must use a
crossed cable.
TNC
PC
10BaseT / 100BaseTx
Configuring the TNC

Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a
network specialist.
Please note that the TNC performs an automatic restart if
you change the IP address of the TNC.
U
In the Programming and Editing mode of operation, press the MOD

key. Enter the keyword NET123. The TNC will then display the main
screen for network configuration
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
651
General network settings

U Press the DEFINE NET soft key to enter the general network
settings. The Computer name tab is active:
Setting
Meaning
Primary
interface
Name of the Ethernet interface to be integrated

in your company network. Only active if a
second, optional Ethernet interface is available
on the control hardware
Computer name
Name displayed for the TNC in your company

network
Host file
Only required for special applications: Name

of a file in which the assignments of IP
addresses to computer names is defined
Select the Interfaces tab to enter the interface settings:

Setting
Meaning
Interface list
List of the active Ethernet interfaces. Select one

of the listed interfaces (via mouse or arrow
keys)
Activate button:
Activate the selected interface (an X appears
in the Active column)
Deactivate button:
Deactivate the selected interface (a hyphen
(-) appears in the Active column)
Configuration button:
Open the Configuration menu
Allow IP
forwarding
652
This function must be kept deactivated.

Only activate this function if external access via
the second, optional Ethernet interface of the
TNC is necessary for diagnostic purposes. Only
do so after instruction by our Service
department
MOD Functions
Press the Configuration button to open the Configuration menu:

Setting
Meaning
Status
Interface active:
Connection status of the selected Ethernet
interface
Name:
Name of the interface you are currently
configuring
Plug connection:
Number of the plug connection of this
interface on the logic unit of the control.
Profile
Here you can create or select a profile in which

all settings shown in this window are stored.
HEIDENHAIN provides two standard profiles:
DHCP-LAN:
Settings for the standard TNC Ethernet
interface, should work in a standard company
network.
MachineNet:
Settings for the second, optional Ethernet
interface; for configuration of the machine
network
Press the corresponding buttons to save, load
and delete profiles
IP address
Automatically procure IP address option:

The TNC is to procure the IP address from the
DHCP server
Set the IP address manually option:
Manually define the IP address and subnet
mask. Input: Four numerical values separated
by points, in each field, e.g. 160.1.180.20 and
255.255.0.0
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
653
Setting
Meaning
Domain Name
Server (DNS)
Automatically procure DNS option:

The TNC is to automatically procure the IP
address of the domain name server
Manually configure the DNS option:
Manually enter the IP addresses of the
servers and the domain name
Default
gateway
Automatically procure default gateway

option:
The TNC is to automatically procure the
default gateway
Manually configure the default gateway
option:
Manually enter the IP addresses of the default
gateway
Apply the changes with the OK button, or discard them with the
Cancel button
Select the Internet tab:

Setting
Meaning
Proxy
Direct connection to Internet/NAT:

The control forwards Internet inquiries to
the default gateway and from there they
must be forwarded through network
address translation (e.g. if a direct
connection to a modem is available)
Use proxy:
Define the Address and Port of the Internet
router in your network, ask your network
administrator for the correct address and
port
Telemaintenance
The machine manufacturer configures the

server for telemaintenance here. Changes
must always be made in agreement with your
machine tool builder.
654
MOD Functions
Select the Ping/Routing tab to enter the ping and routing settings:
Setting
Meaning
Ping
In the Address: field, enter the IP number for

which you want to check the network
connection. Input: Four numerical values
separated by periods, e.g. 160.1.180.20. As an
alternative, you can enter the name of the
computer whose connection you want to check
Press the Start button to begin the test. The
TNC shows the status information in the Ping
field
Press the Stop button to conclude the test
Routing
For network specialists: Status information of

the operating system for the current routing
Update button:
Update routing
Select the NFS UID/GID tab to enter the user and group
identifications:
Setting
Meaning
Set UID/GID
for NFS shares
User ID:
Definition of which user identification the end
user uses to access files in the network. Ask
your network specialist for the proper value.
Group ID:
Definition of the group identification with
which you access files in the network. Ask
your network specialist for the proper value.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
655
Network settings specific to the device

U Press the DEFINE MOUNT soft key to enter the network settings
for a specific device. You can define any number of network
settings, but you can manage only seven at one time
Setting
Meaning
Network drive
List of all connected network drives. The

TNC shows the respective status of the
network connections in the columns:
Mount:
Network drive connected / not connected
Auto:
Network drive is to be connected
automatically /manually
Type:
Type of network connection. cifs and nfs
are possible.
Drive:
Designation of the drive on the TNC
ID:
Internal ID that identifies if a mount point
has been used for more than one
connection.
Server:
Name of the server
Share name:
Name of the directory on the server that
the TNC is to access
User:
User name with which the user logs on to
the network
Password:
Network drive password protected / not
protected
Ask for password?:
Request / Do not request password during
connection
Options:
Display additional connection options
To manage the network drives, use the
screen buttons.
To add network drives, use the Add button:
The TNC then starts the connection wizard,
which guides you by dialog through the
required definitions.
Status log
Display of status information and error

messages.
Press the Clear button to delete the
contents of the Status Log window.
656
MOD Functions
17.7 Configuring PGM MGT

Application
Use the MOD functions to specify which directories or files are to be
displayed by the TNC:
PGM MGT setting: Choose the new, mouse-operated file manager, or
the old file manager
Dependent files setting: Specify whether dependent files are
displayed. The Manual setting shows dependent files, the Automatic
setting does not
For more information: See Working with the File
Manager on page 118.
Changing the PGM MGT setting

U
U
U

Press the SETUP RS232 RS422 soft key.
To select the PGM MGT setting: Using the arrow keys, move the
highlight onto the PGM MGT setting and use the ENT key to switch
between ENHANCED 1 and ENHANCED 2
The new file manager (Enhanced 2 setting) offers the following

benefits:
The mouse can be used for all operations, in addition to the
keyboard
Sorting function available
Text input moves the cursor to the next possible file name
Favorites management.
Possibility of configuring the information to be displayed
The date format can be set
Flexible setting of window sizes
Keyboard commands for easy operation
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
657
Dependent files
In addition to the file extension, dependent files also have the
extension .SEC.DEP (SECtion, DEPendent). The following different
types are available:
.H.SEC.DEP
The TNC creates files with the .SEC.DEP extension if you work with
the structure function. The file contains information needed by the
TNC to rapidly jump from one structure point to the next.
.T.DEP: Tool usage file for individual conversational-format
programs (see Tool usage test on page 197)
.P.T.DEP: Tool usage file for a complete pallet
The TNC creates files with the .P.T.DEP ending if, in a Program Run
mode, you run the tool usage test (see Tool usage test on page
197) for a pallet entry of the active pallet file. This file then lists the
sum of all tool usage times of all tools that you use within a pallet.
.H.AFC.DEP: File in which the TNC saves the control parameters for
the adaptive feed control (AFC) (see Adaptive Feed Control
Software Option (AFC) on page 427).
.H.AFC2.DEP: File in which the TNC saves the statistical data of the
adaptive feed control (AFC) (see Adaptive Feed Control Software
Option (AFC) on page 427).
Changing the MOD setting for dependent files
To select the file manager in the Programming and Editing mode of
operation, press the PGM MGT key.
U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.
U To select the Dependent files setting: Using the arrow keys, move
the highlight onto the Dependent files setting and use the ENT key
to switch between AUTOMATIC and MANUAL.
U
Dependent files are only visible in the file manager if you

selected the MANUAL setting.
If dependent files exist for a file, then the TNC displays a +
character in the status column of the file manager (only if
Dependent files is set to AUTOMATIC).
658
MOD Functions
17.8 Machine-Specific User Parameters
17.8 Machine-Specific User

Parameters
Application
To enable you to set machine-specific functions, your machine tool
builder can define up to 16 machine parameters as user parameters.
This function is not available on all TNCs. Refer to your
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
659
17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space
17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the

Working Space
Application
This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the
workpiece blank in the machines working space and to activate work
space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation.
The TNC displays a transparent cuboid for the working space. Its
dimensions are shown in the Traverse range table (default color is
green). The TNC takes the dimensions for the working space from the
machine parameters for the active traverse range. Since the traverse
range is defined in the reference system of the machine, the datum of
the cuboid is also the machine datum. You can see the position of the
machine datum in the cuboid by pressing the soft key M91 in the 2nd
soft-key row (default color is white).
Another transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank. Its
dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table (default color is blue). The
TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the
selected program. The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate
system for input. Its datum lies within the traverse-range cuboid. You
can view the position of the active datum within the traverse range by
pressing the Show workpiece datum soft key (2nd soft-key row).
For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank
is located within the working space. However, if you test programs
that contain movements with M91 or M92, you must graphically shift
the workpiece blank to prevent contour damage. Use the soft keys
shown in the following table.
If you want to perform a graphical collision test (software
option), you may need to graphically shift the reference
point in such a manner that no collision warnings are
generated.
Press the Show the workpiece datum in the working
space soft key to see the position of the workpiece blank
in the machine coordinate system. You must then place
your workpiece at these coordinates on the machine table
in order to ensure the same conditions during machining
as during the collision test.
660
MOD Functions
You can also activate the working-space monitor for the Test Run
mode in order to test the program with the current datum and the
active traverse ranges (see table below, last line).
Function
Soft key
Move workpiece blank to the left

Move workpiece blank to the right
Move workpiece blank forward
Move workpiece blank backward
Move workpiece blank upward
Move workpiece blank downward
Display workpiece blank with reference to the datum
set: The TNC assumes the active datum (Preset) and
the active limit switch positions from the machine
operating mode in the Test Run
Show the entire traversing range referenced to the
displayed workpiece blank
Show the machine datum in the working space
Show a position determined by the machine tool
builder (e.g. tool change position) in the working
space
Show the workpiece datum in the working space
Enable (ON) or disable (OFF) working-space
monitoring during test run
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
661
Rotate the entire image

The third soft-key row provides functions with which you can rotate
and tilt the entire image:
Function
Soft keys
Rotate the image about the vertical axis

Tilt the image about the horizontal axis
662
MOD Functions
Application
In the Manual Operation mode and in the Program Run modes of
operation, you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed.
NOML.
The figure at right shows the different tool positions:

1
2
3
4
ACTL.
Starting position
Target position of the tool
Workpiece datum
Machine datum
REF
The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates:

Function
Display
Actual position; current tool position
ACTL.
Reference position; the actual position relative to

the machine datum
REF
Servo lag; difference between nominal and actual

positions (following error)
LAG
Nominal position: the value presently

commanded by the TNC
NOML
Distance remaining to the programmed position

in the machine coordinate system; difference
between actual and target positions
DIST.
Distance remaining to the programmed position

in the active (tilted, where appropriate)
coordinate system; difference between actual
and target positions
DG 3D
Traverses that were carried out with handwheel

superimpositioning (M118)
(only Position display 2)
M118
21
DIST
31
41
With the MOD function Position display 1, you can select the position
display in the status display.
With Position display 2, you can select the position display in the
additional status display.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
663
17.10 Position Display Types
17.10 Position Display Types
17.11 Unit of Measurement
17.11 Unit of Measurement

Application
This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed
in millimeters (metric system) or inches.
To select the metric system (e.g. X = 15.789 mm), set the Change
mm/inches function to mm. The value is displayed to 3 decimal
places.
To select the inch system (e.g. X = 0.6216 inches), set the Change
mm/inches function to inches. The value is displayed to 4 decimal
places.
If you would like to activate the inch display, the TNC shows the feed
rate in inch/min. In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger
by a factor of 10.
664
MOD Functions
17.12 Selecting the Programming Language for $MDI
17.12 Selecting the Programming

Language for $MDI
Application
The Program input MOD function lets you decide whether to program
the $MDI file in HEIDENHAIN conversational dialog or in ISO format.
To program the $MDI.H file in conversational dialog,
set the Program input function to HEIDENHAIN
To program the $MDI.I file according to ISO,
set the Program input function to ISO
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
665
17.13 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks
17.13 Selecting the Axes for

Generating L Blocks
Application
The axis selection input field enables you to define the current tool
position coordinates that are transferred to the G01 block To generate
a separate L block, press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key. The
axes are selected by bit-oriented definition similar to programming the
machine parameters:
Axis selection %11111: Transfer the X, Y, Z, IV, and V axes
Axis selection %01111: X, Y, Z, IV. Transfer the axis
Axis selection %00111: Transfer the X, Y and Z axes
Axis selection %00011: Transfer the X and Y axes
Axis selection %00001: Transfer the X axis
666
MOD Functions
Application
The AXIS LIMIT MOD function allows you to set limits to axis traverse
within the machines actual working envelope.
Possible application: Protecting an indexing fixture against tool

collision.
The maximum range of traverse of the machine tool is defined by
software limit switches. This range can be additionally limited through
the TRAVERSE RANGE MOD function. With this function, you can
enter the maximum and minimum traverse positions for each axis,
referenced to the machine datum. If several traverse ranges are
possible on your machine, you can set the limits for each range
separately using the soft keys TRAVERSE RANGE (1) to TRAVERSE
RANGE (3).
Working without additional traverse limits
Z max
Z min
Y
Xmin
Ymax
Xmax
Ymin
To allow a machine axis to use its full range of traverse, enter the
maximum traverse of the TNC (+/- 99 999 mm) as the TRAVERSE
RANGE.
Find and enter the maximum traverse

U
U
U
U
Set the Position display MOD function to REF.

Move the spindle to the positive and negative end positions of the
X, Y and Z axes
Write down the values, including the algebraic sign
To select the MOD functions, press the MOD key.
U Enter the limits for axis traverse: Press the TRAVERSE
RANGE soft key and enter the values that you wrote
down as limits in the corresponding axes
U
To exit the MOD function, press the END soft key.
Active tool radius compensations are not taken into

account in the axis traverse limit values.
The traverse range limits and software limit switches
become active as soon as the reference points are
traversed.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
667
17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse Limits, Datum Display
17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse

Limits, Datum Display
17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse Limits, Datum Display
Datum display
The values shown at the top right of the screen define the currently
active datum. The datum can have been set manually or can have been
activated from the preset table. The datum cannot be changed in the
screen menu.
The displayed values depend on your machine
configuration.
668
MOD Functions
17.15 Displaying HELP Files
17.15 Displaying HELP Files

Application
Help files can aid you in situations in which you need clear instructions
before you can continue (for example, to retract the tool after an
interruption of power). The miscellaneous functions may also be
explained in a help file. The figure at right shows the screen display of
a help file.
HELP files are not provided on every machine. Your
machine tool builder can provide you with further
information on this feature.
Selecting HELP files

U

U To select the last active HELP file, press the HELP soft
key.
U
Call the file manager (PGM MGT key) and select a

different help file, if necessary.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
669
17.16 Displaying Operating Times
17.16 Displaying Operating Times

Application
The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to see various types of
operating times:
Operating time
Meaning
Control on
Operating time of the control since being

put into service
Machine on
Operating time of the machine tool since

being put into service
Program run
Duration of controlled operation since being

put into service
The machine tool builder can provide further operating

time displays. Refer to your machine tool manual.
At the bottom of the screen you can enter a code number
to have the TNC reset the displayed times. The machine
tool builder defines exactly which times the TNC resets,
so refer to your machine manual for more information.
670
MOD Functions
17.17 Checking the Data Carrier
17.17 Checking the Data Carrier

Application
Press the CHECK THE FILE SYSTEM soft key to check the TNC and
PLC partitions on the hard disk, and have them automatically be
repaired if necessary.
The TNCs system partition is automatically checked each
time the control is started. If any errors are found on the
system partition, the TNC reports this with an error
message.
Performing the data carrier check

Before starting the data carrier check, put the machine in
the EMERGENCY STOP condition. The TNC restarts the
software before performing the check!
U

U To select the diagnostic functions, press the
DIAGNOSIS soft key
U
To start the data carrier test, press the CHECK THE

FILE SYSTEM soft key
Press the YES soft key again to confirm that the check
should be started. This function shuts down the TNC
software and starts checking the data carrier. This
check can take some time, depending on the number
and size of the files that you have stored on the hard
disk
At the end of the test the TNC displays a window with

the results of the test. The TNC also writes the results
to the system log
In order to restart the TNC software, press the ENT

key
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
671
17.18 Setting the System Time
17.18 Setting the System Time

Application
You can set the time zone, the date and the system time with the SET
DATE/TIME soft key.
Selecting appropriate settings

The TNC must be reset after you change the time zone,
date or system time. In such cases the TNC displays a
warning when the window closes.
U
U

U To display the time zone window, press the SET TIME
ZONE soft key.
672
In the right side under time zone, click your correct

time zone.
In the left of the pop-up window you select whether

you want to set the time manually (activate the Set
the time manually option), or whether the TNC is to
synchronize the time through a server (activate the
Synchronize the time over NTP server option).
If required, edit the time of day through the keyboard.
To save the settings, click the OK button.
To discard the changes and cancel the dialog, click the

Cancel button.
MOD Functions
17.19 TeleService
17.19 TeleService
Application
The TeleService functions are enabled and adapted by the
machine tool builder. Refer to your machine tool manual
for more information.
The TNC provides two soft keys for TeleService, making it
possible to configure two different service agencies.
The TNC allows you to carry out TeleService. To be able to use this
feature, your TNC should be equipped with an Ethernet card which
achieves a higher data transfer rate than the serial RS232-C interface.
With the HEIDENHAIN TeleService software, your machine tool
builder can then establish a connection to the TNC via an ISDN modem
and carry out diagnostics. The following functions are available:
On-line screen transfer
Polling of machine states
Data transfer
Remote control of the TNC
Calling/exiting TeleService
U
U
Select any machine mode of operation

U Establish a connection to the service agency: Set the
SERVICE or SUPPORT soft key to ON. The TNC
breaks the connection automatically if no new data
have been transferred for a time set by the machine
tool builder (default: 15 min)
U
To break the connection to the service agency: Set the

SERVICE or SUPPORT soft key to OFF. The TNC
terminates the connection after approx. one minute
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
673
17.20 External Access
17.20 External Access

Application
The machine tool builder can configure teleservice
settings with the LSV-2 interface. Refer to your machine
tool manual for more information.
The soft key SERVICE can be used to grant or restrict access through
the LSV-2 interface.
With an entry in the configuration file TNC.SYS you can protect a
directory and its subdirectories with a password. The password is
requested when data from this directory is accessed from the LSV-2
interface. Enter the path and password for external access in the
configuration file TNC.SYS.
The TNC.SYS file must be stored in the root directory
TNC:\.
If you only supply one entry for the password, then the
entire drive TNC:\ is protected.
You should use the updated versions of the HEIDENHAIN
software TNCremo or TNCremoNT to transfer the data.
Entries in TNC.SYS
Meaning
REMOTE.PERMISSION=
Permit LSV-2 access only for

defined computers. Define the
list of computer names.
REMOTE.TNCPASSWORD=
Password for LSV-2 access
REMOTE.TNCPRIVATEPATH=
Path to be protected
Example of TNC.SYS
REMOTE.PERMISSION=PC2225;PC3547
REMOTE.TNCPASSWORD=KR1402
REMOTE.TNCPRIVATEPATH=TNC:\RK
Permitting/Restricting external access
U Select any machine mode of operation
U Permit a connection to the TNC: Set the EXTERNAL
ACCESS soft key to ON. The TNC will then permit
data access through the LSV-2 interface. The
password is requested when a directory that was
entered in the configuration file TNC.SYS is accessed
U
674
Block connections to the TNC: Set the EXTERNAL

ACCESS soft key to OFF. The TNC will then block
access through the LSV-2 interface
MOD Functions
17.21 Host computer operation
17.21 Host computer operation

Application
The machine tool builder defines the behavior and
functionality of the host computer operation. The machine
tool manual provides further information.
With the HOST COMPUTER OPERATION soft key you transfer the
command to an external host computer in order to transfer data to the
control, for example.
Permitting/Restricting external access
U Select the Programming and Editing operating mode or Test Run
mode
U Scroll through the soft-key row
U Activate Host computer operation: The TNC shows an
empty screen.
U
Terminate Host computer operation: Press the END

soft key
Note that your machine tool builder can specify that you
may not terminate host computer operation manually;
refer to the relevant machine tool manual.
Note that your machine tool builder can specify that the
host computer operation can also be automatically
activated externally; refer to the relevant machine tool
manual.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
675
17.22 Configuring the HR 550 FS Wireless Handwheel
17.22 Configuring the HR 550 FS

Wireless Handwheel
Application
Press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key to configure the
HR 550 FS wireless handwheel. The following functions are available:
Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel holder
Setting the transmission channel
Analyzing the frequency spectrum for determining the optimum
transmission channel
Selecting the transmitter power
Statistical information on the transmission quality
Assigning the handwheel to a specific

handwheel holder
U
U
U
U
Make sure that the handwheel holder is connected to the control

hardware.
Place the wireless handwheel you want to assign to the handwheel
holder in the handwheel holder
HANDWHEEL soft key.
676
Click the Connect HR button: The TNC saves the serial

number of the wireless handwheel located in the
handwheel holder and shows it in the configuration
window to the left of the Connect HR button.

MOD Functions
Setting the transmission channel

If the wireless handwheel is started automatically, the TNC tries to
select the transmission channel supplying the best transmission
signal. If you want to set the transmission channel manually, proceed
as follows:
U
U

HANDWHEEL soft key.
U
Click the Frequency spectrum tab.
Click the Stop HR button: The TNC stops the

connection to the wireless handwheel and
determines the current frequency spectrum for all of
the 16 available channels.
Memorize the number of the channel with the least

amount of radio traffic (smallest bar)
Click the Start handwheel button to reactivate the

wireless handwheel.
Click the Properties tab.
Click the Select channel button: The TNC shows all

available channel numbers. Click the channel number
for which the TNC determined the least amount of
radio traffic.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
677
Selecting the transmitter power

Please keep in mind that the transmission range of the
wireless handwheel decreases when the transmitter
power is reduced.
U
U

HANDWHEEL soft key.
U
Click the Set power button: The TNC shows the three
available power settings. Click the desired setting.

Statistics
Under Statistics, the TNC displays information about the
transmission quality.
If the reception quality is poor so that a proper and safe stop of the
axes cannot be ensured anymore, an emergency-stop reaction of the
wireless handwheel is triggered.
The displayed value Max. successive lost indicates whether
reception quality is poor. If the TNC repeatedly displays values greater
than 2 during normal operation of the wireless handwheel within the
desired range of use, then there is a risk of an undesired
disconnection. This can be corrected by increasing the transmitter
power or by changing to another channel with less radio traffic.
If this occurs, try to improve the transmission quality by selecting
another channel (see Setting the transmission channel on page 677)
or by increasing the transmitter power (see Selecting the transmitter
power on page 678).
To display the statistical data, proceed as follows:
U
U

U To select the configuration menu for the wireless
handwheel, press the SET UP WIRELESS
HANDWHEEL soft key: The TNC displays the
configuration menu with the statistical data.
678
MOD Functions
18.1 General User Parameters

General user parameters are machine parameters affecting TNC
settings that the user may want to change in accordance with his
requirements.
Some examples of user parameters are:
Dialog language
Interface behavior
Traversing speeds
Sequence of machining
Effect of overrides
Input possibilities for machine parameters

Machine parameters can be programmed as
Decimal numbers
Enter only the number
Pure binary numbers
Enter a percent sign (%) before the number
Hexadecimal numbers
Enter a dollar sign ($) before the number
Example:
Instead of the decimal number 27 you can also enter the binary
number %11011 or the hexadecimal number $1B.
The individual machine parameters can be entered in the different
number systems.
Some machine parameters have more than one function. The input
value for these machine parameters is the sum of the individual
values. For these machine parameters the individual values are
preceded by a plus sign.
Selecting general user parameters

General user parameters are selected with code number 123 in the
MOD functions.
The MOD functions also include machine-specific user
parameters.
680
External data transfer

Adjusting TNC interfaces EXT1 (5020.0) and
EXT2 (5020.1) to an external device
MP5020.x
7 data bits (ASCII code, 8th bit = parity): Bit 0 = 0
8 data bits (ASCII code, 9th bit = parity): Bit 0 = 1
Block Check Character (BCC) any: Bit 1 = 0
Block Check Character (BCC) control character not permitted: Bit 1 = 1
Transmission stop through RTS active: Bit 2 = 1
Transmission stop through RTS inactive: Bit 2 = 0
Transmission stop through DC3 active: Bit 3 = 1
Transmission stop through DC3 inactive: Bit 3 = 0
Character parity even: Bit 4 = 0
Character parity odd: Bit 4 = 1
Character parity undesired: Bit 5 = 0
Character parity desired: Bit 5 = 1
Number of stop bits that are transmitted at the end of a character:
1 stop bit: Bit 6 = 0
2 stop bits: Bit 6 = 1
Example:
Use the following setting to adjust the TNC interface EXT2 (MP 5020.1) to
an external non-HEIDENHAIN device:
8 data bits, any BCC, transmission stop through DC3, even character
parity, character parity desired, 2 stop bits
Input for MP 5020.1: %01101001
Interface type for EXT1 (5030.0) and

EXT2 (5030.1)
MP5030.x
Standard transmission: 0
Interface for blockwise transfer: 1
3-D touch probes

Select signal transmission
MP6010
Touch probe with cable transmission: 0
Touch probe with infrared transmission: 1
Probing feed rate for triggering touch

probes
MP6120
1 to 3 000 [mm/min]
Maximum traverse to first touch point
MP6130
0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Safety clearance to probing point during

automatic measurement
MP6140
0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
681
List of general user parameters
3-D touch probes

Rapid traverse for triggering touch probes
MP6150
1 to 300 000 [mm/min]
Pre-position at rapid traverse
MP6151
Pre-position with speed from MP6150: 0
Pre-position at rapid traverse: 1
Measure center misalignment of the stylus

when calibrating a triggering touch probe
MP6160
No 180 rotation of the 3-D touch probe during calibration: 0
M function for 180 rotation of the touch probe during calibration: 1 to 999
M function for orienting the infrared sensor

before each measuring cycle
MP6161
Function inactive: 0
Orientation directly through the NC: -1
M function for orienting the touch probe: 1 to 999
Angle of orientation for the infrared sensor
MP6162
0 to 359.9999 []
Difference between the current angle of

orientation and the angle of orientation set
in MP 6162; when the entered difference is
reached, an oriented spindle stop is to be
carried out.
MP6163
0 to 3.0000 []
Automatic operation: Automatically orient

the infrared sensor before probing to the
programmed probing direction
MP6165
Orient infrared sensor: 1
Manual operation: Compensate the probe

direction taking an active basic rotation into
account
MP6166
Take basic rotation into account: 1
Multiple measurement for programmable

probe function
MP6170
1 to 3
Confidence range for multiple

measurement
MP6171
0.001 to 0.999 [mm]
Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the

calibration ring in the X axis referenced to
the machine datum
MP6180.0 (traverse range 1) to MP6180.2 (traverse range 3)

0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the

calibration ring in the Y axis referenced to
the machine datum
MP6181.x (traverse range 1) to MP6181.2 (traverse range 3)

0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Automatic calibration cycle: Upper edge of

the calibration ring in the Z axis referenced
to the machine datum

0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Automatic calibration cycle: Distance below

the upper edge of the ring where the
calibration is carried out by the TNC

0.1 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
682
3-D touch probes

Radius measurement with the TT 130 touch
probe: Probing direction
MP6505.0 (traverse range 1) to 6505.2 (traverse range 3)

Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis (0 axis): 0
Positive probing direction in the +90 axis: 1
Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis (0 axis): 2
Negative probing direction in the +90 axis: 3
Probing feed rate for second measurement

with TT 130, stylus shape, corrections in
TOOL.T
MP6507
Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 130,
with constant tolerance: Bit 0 = 0
Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 130,
with variable tolerance: Bit 0 = 1
Constant feed rate for second measurement with TT 130: Bit 1 = 1
Maximum permissible measuring error

with TT 130 during measurement with
rotating tool
MP6510.0
0.001 to 0.999 [mm] (recommended input value: 0.005 mm)
Required for calculating the probing feed rate in

connection with MP6570
MP6510.1
0.001 to 0.999 [mm] (recommended input value: 0.01 mm)
Feed rate for probing a stationary tool with

the TT 130
MP6520
1 to 3 000 [mm/min]
Radius measurement with the TT 130:

Distance from lower edge of tool to upper
edge of stylus
MP6530.0 (traverse range 1) to MP6530.2 (traverse range 3)

0.001 to 99.9999 [mm]
Set-up clearance in the tool axis above the

stylus of the TT 130 for pre-positioning
MP6540.0
0.001 to 30 000.000 [mm]
Clearance zone in the machining plane

around the stylus of the TT 130 for prepositioning
MP6540.1
0.001 to 30 000.000 [mm]
Rapid traverse for TT 130 in the probe cycle
MP6550
10 to 10 000 [mm/min]
M function for spindle orientation during

individual tooth measurement
MP6560
0 to 999
1: Function inactive
Measuring rotating tools: Permissible

rotational speed at the circumference of the
milling tool
MP6570
1.000 to 120.000 [m/min]
Required for calculating rpm and probe feed

rate
Measuring rotating tools: Permissible
rotational rpm
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
MP6572
0.000 to 1000.000 [rpm]
If you enter 0, the speed is limited to 1000 rpm
683
3-D touch probes

Coordinates of the TT 120 stylus center
relative to the machine datum
MP6580.0 (traverse range 1)

X axis
Y axis
Z axis
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Monitoring the position of rotary axes and

parallel axes
MP6585
Monitor axis positions, definable bit-coded for each axis: 1
Defining the rotary axes and parallel axes to

be monitored
MP6586.0
Do not monitor the position of the A axis: 0
Monitor the position of the A axis: 1
MP6586.1
Do not monitor the position of the B axis: 0
Monitor the position of the B axis: 1
MP6586.2
Do not monitor the position of the C axis: 0
Monitor the position of the C axis: 1
MP6586.3
Do not monitor the position of the U axis: 0
Monitor the position of the U axis: 1
MP6586.4
Do not monitor the position of the V axis: 0
Monitor the position of the V axis: 1
MP6586.5
Do not monitor the position of the W axis: 0
Monitor the position of the W axis: 1
KinematicsOpt: Tolerance limit for error

message in Optimization mode
684
MP6600
0.001 to 0.999
KinematicsOpt: Maximum permitted

deviation from entered calibration sphere
radius
MP6601
0.01 to 0.1
KinematicsOpt: M function for positioning

rotary axes
MP6602
Function inactive: -1
Position the rotary axis with a defined miscellaneous function: 0 to 9999
TNC displays, TNC editor

Cycles 17, 18 and 207:
Oriented spindle stop
at beginning of cycle
MP7160
Oriented spindle stop: 0
No oriented spindle stop: 1
Programming station
MP7210
TNC with machine: 0
TNC as programming station with active PLC: 1
TNC as programming station with inactive PLC: 2
Acknowledgment of
POWER INTERRUPTED
after switch-on
MP7212
Acknowledge with key: 0
Acknowledge automatically: 1
ISO programming: Set

the block number
increment
MP7220
0 to 150
Disabling the selection

of file types
MP7224.0
All file types selectable via soft key: %0000000
Disable selection of HEIDENHAIN programs (soft key SHOW .H): Bit 0 = 1
Disable selection of DIN/ISO programs (soft key SHOW .I): Bit 1 = 1
Disable selection of tool tables (soft key SHOW .T): Bit 2 = 1
Disable selection of datum tables (soft key SHOW .D): Bit 3 = 1
Disable selection of pallet tables (soft key SHOW .P): Bit 4 = 1
Disable selection of text files (soft key SHOW .A): Bit 5 = 1
Disable selection of point tables (soft key SHOW .PNT): Bit 6 = 1
Disabling the editor for

certain file types
MP7224.1
Do not disable editor: %0000000
Disable editor for
Note:
If a particular file type is
inhibited, the TNC will
erase all files of this type.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
HEIDENHAIN programs: Bit 0 = 1

ISO programs: Bit 1 = 1
Tool tables: Bit 2 = 1
Datum tables: Bit 3 = 1
Pallet tables: Bit 4 = 1
Text files: Bit 5 = 1
Point tables: Bit 6 = 1
685
3-D touch probes

Locking soft key for
tables
MP7224.2
Do not lock the EDITING ON/OFF soft key: %0000000
Lock the EDITING ON/OFF soft key for
Without function: Bit 0 = 1
Tool tables: Bit 2 = 1
Datum tables: Bit 3 = 1
Pallet tables: Bit 4 = 1
Point tables: Bit 6 = 1
Configure pallet files
MP7226.0
Pallet table inactive: 0
Number of pallets per pallet table: 1 to 255
Configure datum files
MP7226.1
Datum table inactive: 0
Number of datums per datum table: 1 to 255
Program length up to
which the LBL
numbers are checked
MP7229.0
Blocks 100 to 9999
Program length up to
which FK blocks are
checked
MP7229.1
Blocks 100 to 9999
Dialog language
MP7230.0 to MP7230.3
English: 0
German: 1
Czech: 2
French: 3
Italian: 4
Spanish: 5
Portuguese: 6
Swedish: 7
Danish: 8
Finnish: 9
Dutch: 10
Polish: 11
Hungarian: 12
Reserved: 13
Russian (Cyrillic character set): 14 (only on the MC 422 B onwards)
Chinese (simplified): 15 (only on the MC 422 B onwards)
Chinese (traditional): 16 (only on the MC 422 B onwards)
Slovenian: 17 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Norwegian: 18 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Slovak: 19 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Latvian: 20 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Korean: 21 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Estonian: 22 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Turkish: 23 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Romanian: 24 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Lithuanian: 25 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
686
Configure tool tables
MP7260
Inactive: 0
Number of tools generated by the TNC when a new tool table is opened: 1 to 254
If you require more than 254 tools, you can expand the tool table with the function APPEND N
LINES see "Tool Data", page 174
Configure pocket
tables
MP7261.0 (magazine 1)
Inactive: 0
Number of pockets in the tool magazine: 1 to 9999
If the value 0 is entered in MP7261.1 through MP7261.7, the TNC uses only one tool magazine.
Index tool numbers in

order to be able to
assign different
compensation data to
each tool number
MP7262
Do not index: 0
Number of permissible indices: 1 to 9
Configuration of tool
table and pocket table
MP7263
Configuration settings for tool table and pocket table: %0000
Show the POCKET TABLE soft key in the tool table: Bit 0 = 0
Do not show the POCKET TABLE soft key in the tool table: Bit 0 = 1
External data transmission: Only transmit displayed columns: Bit 1 = 0
External data transmission: Transmit all columns: Bit 1 = 1
Show the EDIT ON/OFF soft key in the pocket table: Bit 2 = 0
Do not show the EDIT ON/OFF soft key in the pocket table: Bit 2 = 1
RESET COLUMN T and RESET POCKET TABLE soft keys active: Bit 3 = 0
RESET COLUMN T and RESET POCKET TABLE soft keys not active: Bit 3 = 1
Do not allow the deletion of tools if they are contained in the pocket table: Bit 4 = 0
Allow the deletion of tools if they are contained in the pocket table, deletion must be confirmed
by the user: Bit 4 = 1
Deletion of tools contained in the pocket table is possible with confirmation: Bit 5 = 0
Deletion of tools contained in the pocket table is possible without confirmation: Bit 5 = 1
Delete indexed tools without confirmation: Bit 6 = 0
Delete indexed tools with confirmation: Bit 6 = 1
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
687

Configure tool table
(To omit from the
table: enter 0); Column
number in the tool
table for
688
MP7266.0
Tool name NAME: 0 to 42; column width: 32 characters
MP7266.1
Tool length L: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.2
Tool radius R: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.3
Tool radius 2 R2: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.4
Oversize length DL: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.5
Oversize radius DR: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.6
Oversize radius 2 DR2: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.7
Tool locked TL: 0 to 42; column width: 2 characters
MP7266.8
Replacement tool RT: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.9
Maximum tool life TIME1: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.10
Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME2: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.11
Current tool life CUR. TIME: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.12
Tool comment DOC: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.13
Number of teeth CUT.: 0 to 42; column width: 4 characters
MP7266.14
Tolerance for wear detection in tool length LTOL: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.15
Tolerance for wear detection in tool radius RTOL: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.16
Cutting direction DIRECT.: 0 to 42; column width: 7 characters
MP7266.17
PLC status PLC: 0 to 42; column width: 9 characters
MP7266.18
Offset of the tool in the tool axis in addition to MP6530 TT:L-OFFS: 0 to 42
column width: 11 characters
MP7266.19
Offset of the tool between stylus center and tool center TT:R-OFFS: 0 to 42
column width: 11 characters
Configure tool table

(To omit from the
number in the tool
table for
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
MP7266.20
Tolerance for break detection in tool length LBREAK: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.21
Tolerance for break detection in tool radius RBREAK: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.22
Tooth length (Cycle 22) LCUTS: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.23
Maximum plunge angle (Cycle 22) ANGLE.: 0 to 42; column width: 7 characters
MP7266.24
Tool type TYP: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.25
Tool material TMAT: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.26
Cutting data table CDT: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.27
PLC value PLC-VAL: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.28
Center misalignment in reference axis CAL-OFF1: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.29
Center misalignment in minor axis CAL-OFF2: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.30
Spindle angle for calibration CALL-ANG: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.31
Tool type for the pocket tablePTYP: 0 to 42; column width: 2 characters
MP7266.32
Limitation of spindle speed NMAX: 0 to 42; Column width: 6 characters
MP7266.33
Retraction at NC stop LIFTOFF: 0 to 42; column width is 1 character
MP7266.34
Machine-dependent function P1: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.35
MP7266.36
MP7266.37
Tool-specific kinematics description KINEMATIC: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.38
Point angle T_ANGLE: 0 to 42; column width: 9 characters
MP7266.39
Thread pitch PITCH: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.40
Adaptive feed control AFC: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.41
Tolerance for wear detection in tool radius 2 R2TOL: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.42
Name of the compensation-value table for 3-D tool radius compensation depending on the tool's
contact angle
MP7266.43
Date/Time of the last tool call
689

Configure tool pocket
table (to omit from the
number in the pocket
table for
MP7267.0
Tool number T: 0 to 20
MP7267.1
Special tool ST: 0 to 20
MP7267.2
Fixed pocket F: 0 to 20
MP7267.3
Pocket locked L: 0 to 20
MP7267.4
PLC status PLC: 0 to 20
MP7267.5
Tool name from tool table TNAME: 0 to 20
MP7267.6
Comment from tool table DOC: 0 to 20
MP7267.7
Tool type PTYP: 0 to 20
MP7267.8
Value for PLC P1: 0 to 20
MP7267.9
MP7267.10
MP7267.11
MP7267.12
MP7267.13
Reserved pocket RSV: 0 to 20
MP7267.14
Pocket above locked LOCKED_ABOVE: 0 to 20
MP7267.15
Pocket below locked LOCKED_BELOW: 0 to 20
MP7267.16
Pocket at left locked LOCKED_LEFT: 0 to 20
MP7267.17
Pocket at right locked LOCKED_RIGHT: 0 to 20
MP7267.18
S1 value for PLC P6: 0 to 20
MP7267.19
S2 value for PLC P7: 0 to 20
Manual Operation
mode: Display of feed
rate
MP7270
Display feed rate F only if an axis direction button is pressed: 0
Display feed rate F even if no axis direction button is pressed (feed rate defined via soft key F or
feed rate of the slowest axis): 1
Decimal character
MP7280
The decimal character is a comma: 0
The decimal character is a point: 1
Select the
"Programming and
Editing" mode of
operation: Display of
multi-tiered NC blocks
MP7281.0
Always show all NC blocks completely: 0
Only show current block completely: 1
Only show NC block completely when editing: 2
690

Select the "Program
Run" mode of
operation: Display of
multi-tiered NC blocks
MP7281.1
Always show all NC blocks completely: 0
Only show current block completely: 1
Only show NC block completely when editing: 2
Position display in the

tool axis
MP7285
Display is referenced to the tool datum: 0
Display in the tool axis is referenced to the
tool face: 1
Display step for the

spindle position
MP7289
0,1 : 0
0,05 : 1
0,01 : 2
0,005 : 3
0,001 : 4
0,0005 : 5
0,0001 : 6
Display step
MP7290.0 (X axis) to MP7290.13 (14th axis)

0.1 mm: 0
0.05 mm: 1
0.01 mm: 2
0.005 mm: 3
0.001 mm: 4
0.0005 mm: 5
0.0001 mm: 6
Disable datum setting

in the preset table
MP7294
Do not disable datum setting: %00000000000000
Disable datum setting in the X axis: Bit 0 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Y axis: Bit 1 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Z axis: Bit 2 = 1
Disable datum setting in the IVth Disable axis: Bit 3 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Vth axis: Bit 4 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 6th axis: Bit 5 = 1
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
691

MP7295
Do not disable datum setting: %00000000000000
Disable datum setting in the X axis: Bit 0 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Y axis: Bit 1 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Z axis: Bit 2 = 1
Disable datum setting in the IVth Disable axis: Bit 3 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Vth axis: Bit 4 = 1

with the orange axis
keys
MP7296
Do not disable datum setting: 0
Disable datum setting with the orange axis keys: 1
Reset status display,

Q parameters, tool
data and machining
time
MP7300
Reset all when a program is selected: 0
Reset all when a program is selected and with M2, M30, END PGM: 1
Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected: 2
Reset only status display, machining time and tool data when a program is selected and with M2,
M30, END PGM: 3
Reset status display, machining time and Q parameters when a program is selected: 4
Reset status display, machining time, and Q parameters when a program is selected and with
M2, M30, END PGM: 5
Reset status display and machining time when a program is selected: 6
Reset status display and machining time when a program is selected and with M2, M30, END
PGM: 7
Graphic display mode
MP7310
Projection in three planes according to ISO 128, projection method 1: Bit 0 = 0
Projection in three planes according to ISO 128, projection method 2: Bit 0 = 1
Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the old datum: Bit 2 = 0
Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the new datum: Bit 2 = 1
Do not show cursor position during projection in three planes: Bit 4 = 0
Show cursor position during projection in three planes: Bit 4 = 1
Software functions of the new 3-D graphics active: Bit 5 = 0
Software functions of the new 3-D graphics not active: Bit 5 = 1
Limitation of a tools
tooth length to be
simulated. Only
effective if LCUTS is
not defined.
MP7312
0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Factor by which the tool diameter is multiplied in order to increase the simulation speed. If 0 is
entered, the TNC assumes an infinitely long tooth length, which significantly increases the time
required for the simulation.
Graphic simulation
without programmed
tool axis: Tool radius
MP7315
0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
692

Graphic simulation
without programmed
tool axis: Penetration
depth
MP7316
0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
Graphic simulation
without programmed
tool axis: M function
for start
MP7317.0
0 to 88 (0: Function inactive)
Graphic simulation
without programmed
tool axis: M function
for end
MP7317.1
0 to 88 (0: Function inactive)
Screen saver
MP7392.0
0 to 99 [min]
Time in minutes until the screen saver switches on (0: Function not active)
MP7392.1
No screen saver is active: 0
Standard screensaver of the X server: 1
3-D line pattern: 2
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
693
Machining and program run

Effect of Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR
MP7410
SCALING FACTOR effective in 3 axes: 0
SCALING FACTOR effective in the working plane only: 1
Manage tool data/calibration data
MP7411
The TNC saves the calibrated data for the 3-D touch probe internally: +0
The TNC uses the compensation values for the touch probe from the tool
table as calibration data for the 3-D touch probe: +1
SL cycles
MP7420
The following applies to Cycles 21, 22, 23, 24:
Mill channel around the contourclockwise for islands and
counterclockwise for pockets: Bit 0 = 0
Mill channel around the contourclockwise for pockets and
counterclockwise for islands: Bit 0 = 1
First mill the channel, then rough out the contour: Bit 1 = 0
Rough out the contour, then mill the channel: Bit 1 = 1
Combine compensated contours: Bit 2 = 0
Combine uncompensated contours: Bit 2 = 1
Rough out to each pocket depth: Bit 3 = 0
Mill pocket and rough-out for each infeed depth before continuing to the
next depth: Bit 3 = 1
The following applies to Cycles 6, 15, 16, 21, 22, 23, and 24:
At the end of the cycle, move the tool to the position that was last
programmed before the cycle call: Bit 4 = 0
At the end of the cycle, retract the tool in the spindle axis only: Bit 4 = 1
Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and

Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING:
Overlap factor
MP7430
0.1 to 1.414
Permissible deviation of circle radius

between circle end point and circle starting
point
MP7431
0.0001 to 0.016 [mm]
Limit switch tolerance for M140 and M150
MP7432
Tolerance for the distance by which the software limit switch may be
exceeded with M140/M150: 0.0001 to 1.0000
694
Machining and program run

Operation of various miscellaneous
functions M
Note:
The kV factors for position loop gain are set by
the machine tool builder. Refer to your machine
tool manual.
MP7440
Program stop with M6: Bit 0 = 0
No program stop with M6: Bit 0 = 1
No cycle call with M89: Bit 1 = 0
Cycle call with M89: Bit 1 = 1
Program stop with M functions: Bit 2 = 0
No program stop with M functions: Bit 2 = 1
kV factors cannot be switched through M105 and M106: Bit 3 = 0
kV factors can be switched through M105 and M106: Bit 3 = 1
Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F..
Function inactive: Bit 4 = 0
Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F..
Function active: Bit 4 = 1
Reserved: Bit 5
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes inactive: Bit 6 = 0
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes active: Bit 6 = 1
Error message during cycle call
MP7441
Display error message if M3/M4 not active: Bit 0 = 0
Suppress error message if M3/M4 not active: Bit 0 = 1
Reserved: Bit 1
Suppress error message if positive depth programmed: Bit 2 = 0
Display error message if positive depth programmed: Bit 2 = 1
M function for spindle orientation in the

fixed cycles
MP7442
Orientation directly through the NC: -1
M function for orienting the spindle: 1 to 999
Maximum contouring speed at feed rate

override setting of 100% in the Program Run
modes
MP7470
0 to 99 999 [mm/min]
Feed rate for rotary-axis compensation

movements
MP7471
0 to 99 999 [mm/min]
Compatibility machine parameters for

datum tables
MP7475
Datum shifts are referenced to the workpiece datum: 0
If the value 1 was entered in older TNC controls or in controls with
software 340 420-xx, datum shifts were referenced to the machine datum.
This function is no longer available. You must now use the preset table
instead of datum tables referenced to REF (see Datum management with
the preset table on page 567).
Time to be added when calculating the tool

usage time
MP7485
0 to 100 [%]
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
695
18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces
18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting

Cables for the Data Interfaces
RS-232-C/V.24 interface for HEIDENHAIN
devices
The interface complies with the requirements of
EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation.
Please note that pins 6 and 8 of the connecting cable
274 545 are bridged.
When using the 25-pin adapter block:
TNC
Connecting cable 365 725-xx
Adapter block
310 085-01
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Color
Female
White/Brown
Male
Assignment
Do not assign 1
RXD
Yellow
Yellow
TXD
Green
Green
DTR
Brown
20
20
20
20
Brown
Signal GND
Red
Red
DSR
Blue
RTS
Gray
Gray
CTS
Pink
Pink
Do not assign 9
Violet
20
Hsg.
Ext. shield
Hsg.
External shield
Hsg.
696
Hsg.
Color
External shield
Hsg.
Hsg.
Hsg.
When using the 9-pin adapter block:

TNC
Adapter block
363 987-02
Male
Assignment
Female
Color
Male
Female
Male
Female
Color
Female
Do not assign
Red
Red
RXD
Yellow
Yellow
TXD
White
White
DTR
Brown
Brown
Signal GND
Black
Black
DSR
Violet
Violet
RTS
Gray
Gray
CTS
White/Green
White/Green
Do not assign
Green
Green
Hsg.
External shield Hsg.
External shield
Hsg.
Hsg.
Hsg.
Hsg.
External shield
Hsg.
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices
The connector layout of a non-HEIDENHAIN device may substantially
differ from the connector layout of a HEIDENHAIN device.
It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer. The table below
shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block.
Adapter block 363 987-02 Connecting cable 366 964-xx
Female
Male
Female
Color
Female
Red
Yellow
White
Brown
Black
Violet
Gray
White/Green 7
Green
Hsg.
Hsg.
Hsg.
Ext. shield
Hsg.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
697
RS-422/V.11 interface
Only non-HEIDENHAIN devices are connected to the RS-422
interface.
The interface complies with the requirements of
EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation.
The pin layouts on the TNC logic unit (X28) and on the
adapter block are identical.
TNC
Connecting cable
355 484-xx
Adapter block
363 987-01
Female
Pin layout
Male Color
Female
Male
Female
RTS
Red
DTR
Yellow
RXD
White
TXD
Brown
Signal GND
Black
CTS
Violet
DSR
Gray
RXD
White /
Green
TXD
Green
Hsg.
Ext. shield
Hsg.
External Hsg.
shield
Hsg.
Hsg.
698
Ethernet interface RJ45 socket

Maximum cable length:
Unshielded: 100 m
Shielded: 400 m
Pin
Signal
Description
TX+
Transmit Data
TX
Transmit Data
REC+
Receive Data
Vacant
Not assigned
REC
Not assigned
Not assigned
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Receive Data
699
18.3 Technical Information

Explanation of symbols
Standard
Axis option
Software option 1
z Software option 2
User functions
Short description
Basic version: 3 axes plus spindle

16 additional axes or 15 additional axes plus 2nd spindle
Digital current and shaft speed control
Program entry
HEIDENHAIN conversational format, with smarT.NC and as per ISO
Position data
Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates
Incremental or absolute dimensions
Display and entry in mm or inches
Display of the handwheel path during machining with handwheel superimpositioning
Tool compensation
Tool radius in the working plane and tool length

Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks (M120)
z Three-dimensional tool-radius compensation for subsequent changing of tool data
without having to recalculate the program
Tool tables
Multiple tool tables with up to 30 000 tools
Cutting-data tables
Cutting data tables for automatic calculation of spindle speed and feed rate from toolspecific data (cutting speed, feed per tooth)
Constant contour speed
With respect to the path of the tool center

With respect to the cutting edge
Parallel operation
Creating a program with graphical support while another program is being run
3-D machining
(software option 2)
z 3-D compensation through surface normal vectors

z Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program
run without affecting the position of the tool point (TCPM = Tool Center Point
Management)
z Keeping the tool normal to the contour
z Tool radius compensation normal to the direction of traverse and the tool direction
z Spline interpolation
Rotary table machining

(software option 1)
Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes

Feed rate in distance per minute
700
User functions
Contour elements
Straight line
Chamfer
Circular path
Circle center point
Circle radius
Tangentially connected arc
Corner rounding
Approaching and departing

the contour
Via straight line: tangential or perpendicular

Via circular arc
FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic

support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC
Program jumps
Subroutines
Program-section repeat
Any desired program as subroutine
Fixed cycles
Drilling cycles for drilling, pecking, reaming, boring, tapping with a floating tap holder,
rigid tapping
Cycles for milling internal and external threads
Milling and finishing rectangular and circular pockets
Cycles for clearing level and inclined surfaces
Cycles for milling linear and circular slots
Linear and circular point patterns
Contour pocketsalso with contour-parallel machining
Contour train
OEM cycles (special cycles developed by the machine tool builder) can also be
integrated
Coordinate transformation
Datum shift, rotation, mirroring

Scaling factor (axis-specific)
Tilting the working plane (software option 1)
Q parameters
Programming with variables
Mathematical functions =, +, , *, /, sin , cos

Logical comparisons (=, =/ , <, >)
Calculating with parentheses
tan , arc sin, arc cos, arc tan, an, en, ln, log, absolute value of a number, the constant
, negation, truncation of digits before or after the decimal point
Functions for calculation of circles
String parameters
Programming aids
Calculator
Context-sensitive help function for error messages
The context-sensitive help system TNCguide (FCL 3 function)
Graphic support for the programming of cycles
Comment blocks in the NC program
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
701
User functions
Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program
Program verification graphics

Display modes
Graphic simulation before program run, even while another program is being run
Programming graphics
In the Programming and Editing mode, the contours of the NC blocks are drawn on
screen while they are being entered (2-D pencil-trace graphics), even while another
program is running
Program Run graphics

Display modes
Graphic simulation of real-time machining in plan view / projection in 3 planes /

3-D view
Machining time
Calculating the machining time in the Test Run mode of operation

Display of the current machining time in the Program Run modes
Returning to the contour
Mid-program startup in any block in the program, returning the tool to the calculated
nominal position to continue machining
Program interruption, contour departure and return
Datum tables
Multiple datum tables
Pallet tables
Pallet tables (with as many entries as desired for the selection of pallets, NC programs
and datums) can be machined workpiece by workpiece or tool by tool
Touch probe cycles
Calibrate touch probe

Compensation of workpiece misalignment, manual or automatic
Datum setting, manual or automatic
Automatic workpiece measurement
Cycles for automatic tool measurement
Cycles for automatic kinematics measurement
Plan view / projection in 3 planes / 3-D view

Magnification of details
Specifications
Components
MC 7222, MC 6241 or MC 66341 main computers

CC 6106, 6108 or 6110 controller unit
Keyboard
15.1-inchor 19-inch TFT color flat-panel display with soft keys
IPC 6341 Industrial PC with Windows 7 (option)
Program memory
At least 21 GB, up to 130 GB depending on main computer
Input resolution and display

step
Up to 0.1 m for linear axes

Up to 0.0001 for angular axes
Input range
Maximum 99 999.999 mm (3.937 inches) or 99 999.999
702
Specifications
Interpolation
Linear in 4 axes
Linear in 5 axes (subject to export permit) (software option 1)
Circular in 2 axes
Circular in 3 axes with tilted working plane (software option 1)
Helix:
Combination of circular and linear motion
Spline:
Execution of splines (3rd degree polynomials)
Block processing time

3-D straight line without radius
compensation
0.5 ms
Axis feedback control
Position loop resolution: Signal period of the position encoder/1024

Cycle time of position controller: 1.8 ms
Cycle time of speed controller: 600 s
Cycle time of current controller: minimum 100 s
Range of traverse
Maximum 100 m (3937 inches)
Spindle speed
Maximum 40 000 rpm (with 2 pole pairs)
Error compensation
Linear and nonlinear axis error, backlash, reversal peaks during circular movements,
thermal expansion
Stick-slip friction
Data interfaces
One each RS-232-C /V.24 and RS-422 / V.11 max. 115 kilobaud
Expanded interface with LSV-2 protocol for external operation of the TNC over the
interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo.
Ethernet interface 100BaseT
Approx. 2 to 5 megabaud (depending on file type and network load)
USB 2.0 interface
For pointing (mouse) devices and block devices (memory sticks, hard disks, CD-ROM
drives)
Surrounding temperature
Operation: 0 C to +45 C
Storage: 30 C to +70 C
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
703
Accessories
Electronic handwheels
One HR 550 FS portable wireless handwheel with display or

One HR 520 portable handwheel with display, or
One HR 420 portable handwheel with display, or
One HR 410 portable handwheel, or
One HR 130 panel-mounted handwheel, or
Up to three HR 150 panel-mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter
Touch probes
TS 220: 3-D touch trigger probe with cable connection, or

TS 440: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 444: Battery-free 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 640: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 740: High-precision 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TT 140: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement
704
Rotary table machining
Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes

Feed rate in distance per minute
Coordinate transformation
Tilting the working plane
Interpolation
Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane
Software option 2
3-D machining
z 3-D tool compensation through surface normal vectors

z Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program
run without affecting the position of the tool point (TCPM = Tool Center Point
Management)
z Keeping the tool normal to the contour
z Tool radius compensation normal to the direction of traverse and the tool direction
z Spline interpolation
Interpolation
z Linear in 5 axes (subject to export permit)
DXF Converter software option

Extracting contour programs
and machining positions from
DXF data and from
conversational programs.
Supported DXF format: AC1009 (AutoCAD R12)

For plain-language and smarT.NC
Simple and convenient specification of reference points
Select graphical features of contour sections from conversational programs
Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) software option

Collision monitoring in all
machine operating modes
The machine manufacturer defines objects to be monitored

Fixture monitoring is also possible
Three warning levels in manual operation
Program interrupt during automatic operation
Includes monitoring of 5-axis movements
Program simulation before machining for possible collisions
Additional conversational language software option

Additional conversational
languages
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Slovenian
Norwegian
Slovak
Latvian
Korean
Estonian
Turkish
Romanian
Lithuanian
705
Software option 1
Global Program Settings software option

Function for superimposing
coordinate transformations in
the Program Run modes
Swapping axes
Superimposed datum shift
Axis locking
Handwheel superimposition
Superimposed basic rotation and datum-based rotation
Feed rate factor
Adaptive Feed Control software option (AFC)

Function for adaptive feedrate control for optimizing the
machining conditions during
series production
Recording the actual spindle power by means of a teach-in cut

Defining the limits of automatic feed rate control
Fully automatic feed control during program run
KinematicsOpt software option

Touch-probe cycles for
automatic testing and
optimization of the machine
kinematics
Backup/restore active kinematics

Test active kinematics
Optimize active kinematics
3D-ToolComp software option

3-D tool radius compensation
depending on the tools
contact angle
Compensate the delta radius of the tool depending on the tool's contact angle at the
workpiece
Prerequisite: LN blocks
Compensation values can be defined in a separate table
Extended Tool Management software option

Tool management that can be
changed by the machine
manufacturer using Python
scripts.
Mixed display of data from tool and pocket tables

Form-based editing of tool data
Tool usage and sequence list: component location diagram
Interpolation Turning software option

Interpolation turning
Finishing of rotation-symmetrical shoulders through interpolation of the spindle with

the axes of the working plane
CAD Viewer software option

Opening of 3-D models on the
NC control.
706
Opening of IGES files

Opening of STEP files
Remote operation of external

computer units (e.g. a
Windows PC) via the user
interface of the TNC
Windows on a separate computer unit

Incorporated in the TNC interface
Cross Talk Compensation software option (CTC)

Compensation of axis
couplings
Determination of dynamically caused position deviation through axis acceleration

Compensation of the TCP
Position Adaptive Control (PAC) software option

Changing control parameters
Changing of the control parameters depending on the position of the axes in the
working space
Changing of the control parameters depending on the speed or acceleration of an axis
Load Adaptive Control (LAC) software option

Dynamic changing of control
parameters
Automatic determination of workpiece weight and frictional forces

Continuous adaptation of the parameters of the adaptive precontrolling to the actual
weight of the workpiece during machining
FCL 2 upgrade functions

Enabling of significant
improvements
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Virtual tool axis

Touch probe cycle 441, Rapid Probing
Offline CAD point filter
3-D line graphics
Contour pocket: Assign a separate depth to each subcontour
smarT.NC: Coordinate transformation
smarT.NC: PLANE function
smarT.NC: Graphically supported block scan
Expanded USB functionality
Network attachment via DHCP and DNS
707
Remote Desktop Manager software option

improvements
Touch probe cycle for 3-D probing

Touch Probe Cycles 408 and 409 (Units 408 and 409 in smarT.NC) for setting a
reference point in the center of a slot or a ridge
PLANE function: Axis angle input
User documentation as context-sensitive help right on the TNC
Feed-rate reduction for the machining of contour pockets with the tool being in full
contact with the workpiece
smarT.NC: Contour pocket on pattern
smarT.NC: Parallel programming is possible
smarT.NC: Preview of contour programs in the file manager
smarT.NC: Positioning strategy for machining point patterns

improvements
708
Graphical depiction of the protected space when DCM collision monitoring is active
Handwheel superimposition in stopped condition when DCM collision monitoring is
active
3-D basic rotation (set-up compensation, must be adapted by the machine tool builder)
Positions, coordinates, circle radii, chamfer

lengths
99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999

(5.4: places before and after the decimal point) [mm]
Circle radii
99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 if values are entered directly, radii up to

210 m possible via Q parameter programming
(5.4: places before and after the decimal point) [mm]
Tool numbers
0 to 32 767.9 (5.1)
Tool names
32 characters, enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL. Permitted

special characters: #, $, %, &, -
Delta values for tool compensation
-999,9999 to +999,9999 (3, 4) [mm]
Spindle speeds
0 to 99 999.999 (5.3) [rpm]
Feed rates
0 to 99 999.999 (5.3) [mm/min] or [mm/tooth] or [mm/rev]
Dwell time in Cycle 9
0 to 3600.000 (4.3) [s]
Thread pitch in various cycles
99.9999 to +99.9999 (2.4) [mm]
Angle of spindle orientation
0 to 360.0000 (3.4) []
Angle for polar coordinates, rotation, tilting

the working plane
360.0000 to +360.0000 (3.4) []
Polar coordinate angle for helical

interpolation (CP)
99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 (5.4) []
Datum numbers in Cycle 7
0 to 2999 (4.0)
Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26
0.000 001 to 99.999 999 (2.6)
Miscellaneous functions M
0 to 999 (3.0)
Q parameter numbers
0 to 1999 (4.0)
Q parameter values
999 999 999 to +999 999 999 (9 digits, floating point)
Labels (LBL) for program jumps
0 to 999 (3.0)
Labels (LBL) for program jumps
Any text string in quotes ()
Number of program section repeats REP
1 to 65 534 (5.0)
Error number with Q parameter function

FN14
0 to 1099 (4.0)
Spline parameter K
9.999 9999 to +9.999 9999 (1.7)
Exponent for spline parameter
255 to 255 (3.0)
Surface-normal vectors N and T with 3-D

compensation
9.9999999 to +9.9999999 (1.7)
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
709
Input format and unit of TNC functions
18.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery
18.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery

A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in
RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off.
If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery, then
you must replace the battery:
Caution: Danger of life!
To exchange the buffer battery, first switch off the TNC!
The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained
service personnel.
Battery type:1 Lithium battery, type CR 2450N (Renata) ID 315 878-01
1
2
The backup battery is at the back of the MC 422 D

Exchange the battery. The battery contact accepts a new battery
only in the correct orientation
710
Industrial PC 6341 with

Windows 7 (Option)
19.1 Introduction
19.1 Introduction
Functionality
The software option 133 must be enabled in order to be
able to operate a Windows computer unit via the TNC.
With the HEIDENHAIN IPC 6341 Windows computer you can start
and remotely operate Windows-based applications via the iTNC user
interface. The user interface is displayed on the control screen.
The IPC 6341 is usually mounted in the electrical cabinet
of your machine tool. It is configured and commissioned
by your machine tool builder. The TNC is also configured
by your machine tool builder; see your machine tool
manual.
Since Windows runs on a separate computer, it does not influence the
NC machining process. The Windows computer is connected to the
TNC main computer via Ethernet.
Specifications of the IPC 6341

Specifications
Processor
Pentium Dual Core with 2.2 GHz
RAM
2 GB
Hard disk memory
160 GB, of which 140 GB are available
Interfaces
2 x Ethernet 100BaseT
2 x USB 2.0
1 x RS-232C
712
19.1 Introduction
End User License Agreement (EULA) for

Windows 7
Please pay attention to the Microsoft End User License
Agreement (EULA), which is included with your machine
documentation.
Switch to Windows interface

Your machine tool builder configures the TNC and
Windows. The machine tool builder determines the
control desktop on which Windows runs.
Usually Windows runs on the third desktop of the TNC:
U
Use the Split Screen key to switch to the third desktop
Exiting Windows
Before shutting down the TNC you must terminate
Windows 7 on the IPC. Direct switch-off via the master
switch of the machine tool can cause data loss or a defect
in the Windows system.
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
713
19.1 Introduction
714
Overview Tables
Machining cycles
Cycle
number
Cycle designation
DEF
active
Datum shift
Mirror image
Dwell time
10
Rotation
11
Scaling factor
12
Program call
13
Oriented spindle stop
14
Contour definition
19
Tilting the working plane
20
SL II contour data
21
SL II pilot drilling
22
SL II rough out
23
Floor finishing SL II
24
Side finishing SL II
25
Contour train
26
Axis-specific scaling
27
Cylinder surface
28
Cylindrical surface slot
29
Cylinder surface ridge
30
Run 3-D data
32
Tolerance
39
Cylinder surface external contour
200
Drilling
201
Reaming
202
Boring
203
Universal drilling
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
CALL
active
715
Cycle
number
Cycle designation
204
Back boring
205
Universal pecking
206
Tapping with a floating tap holder, new
207
Rigid tapping, new
208
Bore milling
209
Tapping with chip breaking
220
Circular point pattern
221
Linear point pattern
230
Multipass milling
231
Ruled surface
232
Face milling
240
Centering
241
Single-fluted deep-hole drilling
247
Datum setting
251
Rectangular pocket (complete machining)
252
Circular pocket (complete machining)
253
Slot milling
254
Circular slot
256
Rectangular stud (complete machining)
257
Circular stud (complete machining)
262
Thread milling
263
Thread milling/countersinking
264
Thread drilling/milling
265
Helical thread drilling/milling
267
Outside thread milling
270
Contour train data
275
Trochoidal slot
716
DEF
active
CALL
active
Miscellaneous functions
M
Effect
M0
Effective at block... Start
End
Page
Program run STOP/Spindle STOP if necessary/Coolant OFF if necessary
Page 369
M1
Optional program STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF (machine-dependent)
Page 639
M2
Program run STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF/Clear status display

(depending on machine parameter)/Go to block 1
Page 369
M3
M4
M5
Spindle STOP
M6
Tool change/Stop program run (depending on machine parameter)/Spindle STOP
M8
M9
Coolant ON
Coolant OFF
M13
M14
Spindle ON clockwise/Coolant ON
Spindle ON counterclockwise/Coolant ON
M30
Same function as M2
M89
Vacant miscellaneous function or

Cycle call, modally effective (depending on machine parameter)
Page 369
Page 369
Page 369
Page 369
Page 369
Cycles
Manual
Page 373
M90
Only in lag mode: Constant contouring speed at corners
M91
Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to machine datum
Page 370
M92
Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to position defined by

machine tool builder, such as tool change position
Page 370
M94
Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360
Page 500
M97
Machine small contour steps
Page 375
M98
Machine open contours completely
Page 377
M99
Blockwise cycle call
Cycles
Manual
Page 195
M101 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired
M102 Reset M101
M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F (percentage)
Page 378
M104 Reactivate the datum as last defined
Page 372
M105 Machining with second kv factor

M106 Machining with first kv factor
Page 680
M107 Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize

M108 Reset M107
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Page 195
717
Effect
Effective at block... Start
End
Page
M109 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge

(increase and decrease feed rate)
M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge
(feed rate decrease only)
M111 Reset M109/M110
M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes
M115 Reset M114
M116 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm/min

M117 Reset M116
M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run
Page 383
M120 Pre-calculate radius-compensated contour (LOOK AHEAD)
Page 381
M124 Do not include points when executing non-compensated line blocks
Page 374
M126 Shortest-path traverse of rotary axes

M127 Reset M126
M128 Retain position of tool tip when positioning tilting axes (TCPM)
M129 Reset M128
M130 Moving to position in an untilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane
M134 Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes
M135 Reset M134
M136 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution

M137 Reset M136
M138 Selection of tilted axes
Page 506
M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction
Page 384
M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring
Page 385
M142 Delete modal program information
Page 386
M143 Delete basic rotation
Page 386
M144 Compensating the machines kinematics configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL

positions at end of block
M145 Reset M144
Page 507
M148 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop

M149 Reset M148
M150 Suppress limit switch message (function effective blockwise)
Page 388
Page 389
M200
M201
M202
M203
M204
718
Laser cutting: Output programmed voltage directly

Laser cutting: Output of voltage as a function of distance
Laser cutting: Output of voltage as a function of speed
Laser cutting: Output of voltage as a function of time (ramp)
Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of time (pulse)
Page 380
Page 501
Page 498
Page 499
Page 503
Page 372
Page 506
Page 379
Page 387
3-D compensation ... 508

Delta values ... 510
Delta values via DR2TABLE ... 515
Depending on the contact
angle ... 515
Face milling ... 511
Normalized vector ... 509
Peripheral milling ... 513
Tool forms ... 510
Tool orientation ... 511
3-D touch probes
Calibrating
Triggering ... 578
Managing more than one block of
calibration data ... 580
3-D view ... 614
CAD data, filtering ... 441

Calculating with parentheses ... 338
Calculator ... 153
CAM Programming ... 508
Chamfer ... 229
Check axis positions ... 562
Circle calculations ... 313
Circle center point ... 231
Circular path ... 232, 233, 235, 242, 243
Code numbers ... 645
Collision monitoring ... 396
Comments, adding ... 150
Compensating workpiece misalignment
By measuring two points of a
line ... 581
Over two holes ... 582, 591
Over two studs ... 585, 591
Constant contouring speed M90 ... 373
Context-sensitive help ... 164
Contour approach ... 219
With polar coordinates ... 221
Contour departure ... 219
With polar coordinates ... 221
Contour, selecting from DXF ... 274
Conversational programming ... 106
Converting
Backward program,
generating ... 438
FK programs ... 251
Converting FK programs ... 251
Coordinate transformation ... 443
Copying program sections ... 112
Corner rounding ... 230
Cutting data calculation ... 455
Cutting-data table ... 455
Cylinder ... 361
Data carrier, checking ... 671

Data interface
Assigning ... 648
Pin layout ... 696
setting ... 647
Data transfer rate ... 647
Data transfer software ... 649
Datum management ... 567
Datum setting ... 565
During program run ... 337
without a 3-D touch probe ... 565
Datum setting, manual
Center line as datum ... 590
Circle center as datum ... 589
Corner as datum ... 588
In any axis ... 587
Using holes/studs ... 591
Datum shift ... 443
Coordinate input ... 443
Resetting ... 445
Via datum table ... 444
Datum table
Confirming probed values ... 575
Datum, setting the ... ... 102
DCM ... 396
Deactivating fixtures ... 412
Dependent files ... 658
Dialog ... 106
Directory ... 118, 125
Copying ... 129
Creating ... 125
Deleting ... 130
DR2TABLE ... 515
DXF data, processing ... 268
Basic settings ... 270
Contour selection ... 274
Filter for hole positions ... 281
Layer settings ... 271
Machining positions,
selecting ... 277
Selecting hole positions
Diameter input ... 280
Individual selection ... 278
Mouse over ... 279
Workpiece presetting ... 272
Dynamic Collision Monitoring ... 396
Test Run ... 401
Tool holders ... 186
A
Accessories ... 94
Actual position capture ... 108
Adaptive feed control ... 427
AFC ... 427
Animation, PLANE function ... 471
Archive files ... 137, 138
ASCII files ... 450
Automatic cutting data
calculation ... 182, 455
Automatic program start ... 637
Automatic tool measurement ... 180
B
Backup ... 117
Basic rotation
Measuring in the Manual Operation
mode ... 583, 585, 586
Baud rate, setting the ... ... 647
Block
Deleting ... 110
Inserting, editing ... 110
Blocks
BMP files, opening ... 143
Buffer battery exchange ... 710
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
719
Index
SYMBOLE
Index
Ellipse ... 359

Error list ... 160
Error messages ... 159, 160
Help with ... 159
Ethernet interface
Configuring ... 651
Connecting and disconnecting
network drives ... 146
Connection possibilities ... 651
Introduction ... 651
Excel files, opening ... 140
External access ... 674
External data transfer
iTNC 530 ... 144
File management ... 118

Calling ... 121
Configuring via MOD ... 657
Copying a file ... 126
Copying a table ... 128
Deleting a file ... 130
Dependent files ... 658
Directories ... 118
Copying ... 129
Creating ... 125
External data transfer ... 144
File
Creating ... 125
File name ... 116
File selection ... 122
File type ... 115
External file types ... 117
Marking files ... 131
Overview of functions ... 119
Overwriting files ... 127
Protecting a file ... 134
Renaming a file ... 133
Shortcuts ... 136
File status ... 121
Filter for hole positions during DXF data
transfer ... 281
Fixture monitoring ... 403
Fixture placement ... 406
Fixture position, checking ... 408
Fixture templates ... 404, 413
Fixture Wizard ... 414
Fixtures, editing ... 407
Fixtures, removing ... 407
FixtureWizard ... 404
FK free contour programming ... 248
Fundamentals ... 248
Graphics ... 250
FK Programming
Circular paths ... 254
Converting to conversational
dialog ... 251
Dialog initiation ... 251
Input possibilities
Auxiliary points ... 258
Circle data ... 256
Closed contours ... 257
Direction and length of contour
elements ... 255
End points ... 254
Relative data ... 259
Straight lines ... 253
FK programming
Input possibilities
FN 25: PRESET: Set a new
datum ... 337
FN14: ERROR: Displaying error
messages ... 318
FN15: PRINT: Formatted output of
texts ... 323
FN15: PRINT: Unformatted output of
texts ... 322
FN18: SYSREAD: Read system
data ... 327
FN19: PLC: Transfer values to the
PLC ... 334
FN20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC
synchronization ... 335
FN23: CIRCLE DATA: Calculating a
circle from 3 points ... 313
FN24: CIRCLE DATA: Calculating a
circle from 4 points ... 313
FN26: TABOPEN: Opening a freely
definable table ... 464
FN27: TABWRITE: Writing to a freely
FN28: TABREAD: Reading a freely
Form view ... 463
FS, Functional safety ... 560
FSELECT ... 250
Full circle ... 232
Fundamentals ... 98
F
FCL ... 644
FCL function ... 11
Feature content level ... 11
Feed control, automatic ... 427
Feed rate ... 558
Changing ... 559
for rotary axes, M116 ... 498
Input possibilities ... 107
Feed rate factor for plunging
movements M103 ... 378
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle
revolution M136 ... 379
File
Creating ... 125
720
Generate a Backward Program ... 438

GIF files, opening ... 143
Global program settings ... 416
GOTO during program
interruption ... 629
Graphic selection of contour
sections ... 284
Graphic simulation ... 618
Tool, displaying the ... ... 618
Graphics
Display modes ... 612
During programming ... 154, 156
Detail enlargement ... 155
Magnification of details ... 617
JPG files, opening ... 143
NC and PLC synchronization ... 335

NC error messages ... 159, 160
Nesting ... 293
Network connection ... 146
Network settings ... 651
Nonvolatile Q parameters,
defining ... 307
Normal vector ... 479, 492, 508, 509
M functions
See Miscellaneous functions
M91, M92 ... 370
Machine axes, moving the ... 546
In increments ... 547
With the machine axis direction
buttons ... 546
Machine parameters
For 3-D touch probes ... 681
For external data transfer ... 681
For machining and program
run ... 694
For TNC displays and TNC
editor ... 685
Machining time, measuring the... ... 619
Manage fixtures ... 410
Mid-program startup ... 633
After power failure ... 633
Miscellaneous Functions
Miscellaneous functions
Entering ... 368
For contouring behavior ... 373
For coordinate data ... 370
For laser cutting machines ... 389
For program run control ... 369
for Rotary Axes ... 498
For spindle and coolant ... 369
MOD function
Exiting ... 642
Overview ... 643
Select ... 642
Monitoring
Collision ... 396
Monitoring for tool breakage ... 437
Multiaxis machining ... 493
Handwheel ... 548

Hard disk ... 115
Hard disk, checking ... 671
Helical interpolation ... 244
Helix ... 244
Help files, displaying ... 669
Help files, downloading ... 169
Help system ... 164
Help with error messages ... 159
Host computer operation ... 675
HTML files, displaying ... 140
I
IGES files ... 285
Image files, opening ... 143
Inclined-tool machining in a tilted
plane ... 491
Indexed tools ... 184
Information on formats ... 709
INI files, opening ... 142
Internet files, displaying ... 140
Interrupt machining ... 629
iTNC 530 ... 74
with Windows 7 ... 712
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
K
Keyboard ... 77
L
Laser cutting machines, miscellaneous
functions ... 389
L-block generation ... 666
List of error messages ... 160
Loading fixtures ... 411, 412
Local Q parameters, defining ... 307
Look-ahead ... 381
O
Open contour corners M98 ... 377
Operating modes ... 78
Operating times ... 670
Option number ... 644
Output of data to the server ... 326
P
Pallet datum ... 525
Pallet preset ... 525
Pallet table
Application ... 522, 528
Entering coordinates ... 523, 529
Executing ... 527, 539
Selecting and leaving ... 524, 533
Parametric programming: See Q
parameter programming
Part families ... 308
Path ... 118
Path contours
Cartesian coordinates
connection ... 235
Circular path around circle center
CC ... 232
Circular path with defined
radius ... 233
Overview ... 227
Straight line ... 228
Polar coordinates
connection ... 243
Circular path around pole
CC ... 242
Overview ... 240
Straight line ... 241
721
Index
Index
Path functions
Circles and circular arcs ... 216
Pre-position ... 217
PDF viewer ... 139
Pin layout for data interfaces ... 696
Plan view ... 612
PLANE function ... 469
Animation ... 471
Automatic positioning ... 486
Axis angle definition ... 484
Euler angle definition ... 477
Inclined-tool machining ... 491
Incremental definition ... 483
Points definition ... 481
Positioning behavior ... 486
Projection angle definition ... 475
Reset ... 472
Selection of possible
solutions ... 489
Space-angle definition ... 473
Vector definition ... 479
PLC and NC synchronization ... 335
PNG files, opening ... 143
Pocket table ... 188
Polar coordinates
Approach/depart contour ... 221
Programming ... 240
Positioning
With a tilted working
plane ... 372, 507
with manual data input (MDI) ... 604
Positions, selecting from DXF ... 277
Preset table ... 567
Confirming probed values ... 576
For pallets ... 525
Principal axes ... 99
Probe cycles
See Users Manual for Touch Probe
Cycles
Probing cycles
Program
Editing ... 109
Open new ... 104
-Structure ... 103
Structuring ... 152
Program call
Any desired program as
subroutine ... 291
Program defaults ... 393

Program jumps with GOTO ... 629
Program management: see File
management
Program name:See File management,
File name
Program Run
Global program settings ... 416
Interrupting ... 629
Program run
Executing ... 628
Mid-program startup ... 633
Optional block skip ... 638
Overview ... 627
Resuming after an
interruption ... 632
Program sections, copying ... 112
Programming aids ... 395
Programming graphics ... 250
Programming tool movements ... 106
Program-section repeat ... 290
Projection in three planes ... 613
Radius compensation ... 209

Input ... 210
Outside corners, inside
corners ... 211
Rapid traverse ... 172
Reference points, crossing over ... 542
Reference system ... 99
Replacing texts ... 114
Retraction from the contour ... 384
Returning to the contour ... 636
Rotary axis
Reducing display M94 ... 500
Shorter-path traverse: M126 ... 499
722
Q
Q parameter programming ... 304, 342
Additional functions ... 317
Basic arithmetic (assign, add,
subtract, multiply, divide, square
root) ... 309
Circle calculations ... 313
If/then decisions ... 314
Programming
notes ... 306, 344, 345, 346, 350,
352
Trigonometric functions ... 311
Q parameters
Checking ... 316
Formatted output ... 323
Local QL parameters ... 304
Nonvolatile QR parameters ... 304
Preassigned ... 353
Transferring values to the
PLC ... 334
Unformatted output ... 322
S
Saving fixtures ... 411
Screen ... 75
Screen layout ... 76
Screen output of data ... 326
Search for tool names ... 193
Search function ... 113
Secondary axes ... 99
Service pack, installing a ... ... 646
Software number ... 644
Software options ... 705
Software update ... 646
SPEC FCT ... 392
Special functions ... 392
Specifications ... 700
Sphere ... 363
Spindle load monitoring ... 437
Spindle speed, changing the ... 559
Spindle speed, entering ... 191
Spline interpolation ... 519
Block format ... 519
Input range ... 520
Status display ... 81
Additional ... 83
General ... 81
STEP files ... 285
Straight line ... 228, 241
String parameters ... 342
Structuring programs ... 152
Subprogram ... 289
Superimposed transformations ... 416
Superimposing handwheel positioning
M118 ... 383
Swapping axes ... 422

Switch between upper and lower case
letters ... 451
Switch-off ... 545
Switch-on ... 542
Swivel axes ... 501, 503
System time, reading the... ... 347
System time, setting ... 672
Tool data
Calling ... 191
Delta values ... 175
Entering into tables ... 176
Entering them into the
program ... 175
Indexing ... 184
Tool length ... 174
Tool management ... 200
Tool material ... 182, 457
Tool measurement ... 180
Tool name ... 174
Tool number ... 174
Tool radius ... 174
Tool table
Editing functions ... 183, 202, 204
Editing, exiting ... 183
Input possibilities ... 176
Tool type, selecting ... 182
Tool usage file ... 197
Tool usage test ... 197
Tool-carrier kinematics ... 186
Touch probe cycles
Manual Operation mode ... 573
Touch probe functions, use with
mechanical probes or dial
gauges ... 595
Touch probe monitoring ... 385
TRANS DATUM ... 443
Traversing machine axes
with the handwheel ... 548
Trigonometric functions ... 311
Trigonometry ... 311
Variable program call with QS ... 446

Version numbers ... 645
View CAD data ... 285
Virtual axis VT ... 426
Virus protection ... 93
ZIP archive ... 141

ZIP files ... 137, 138
T
T vector ... 509
TCPM ... 493
Resetting ... 497
Teach in ... 108, 228
Teach-in cut ... 431
TeleService ... 673
Test Run
Overview ... 620
Test run
Executing ... 623
Speed setting ... 611
Up to a certain block ... 624
Text file
Delete functions ... 452
Editing functions ... 451
Opening and exiting ... 450
Text sections, finding ... 454
Text files, opening ... 142
Text variables ... 342
Tilting the working plane ... 469, 596
Manually ... 596
Time zone, setting the... ... 672
TNC software, updating the ... ... 646
TNCguide ... 164
TNCremo ... 649
TNCremoNT ... 649
Tool change ... 194
Tool compensation
Length ... 208
Radius ... 209
Three-dimensional ... 508
HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530
Unit of measure, selection ... 104

USB devices,
connecting/removing ... 147
User parameters ... 680
General
For 3-D touch probes ... 681
For external data transfer ... 681
For machining and program
run ... 694
For TNC displays, TNC
editor ... 685
Machine-specific ... 659
W
Windows 7 ... 712
Wireless handwheel ... 551
Configuring ... 676
Handwheel holder, assigning
... ... 676
Statistical data ... 678
Transmission channel,
setting... ... 677
Transmitter power,
selecting... ... 678
WMAT.TAB ... 456
Workpiece blank, defining a ... ... 104
Workpiece material, defining ... 456
Workpiece measurement ... 592
Workpiece positions
Absolute ... 101
Incremental ... 101
Workspace monitoring ... 623, 660
Writing probed values in datum
tables ... 575
Writing probed values in preset
table ... 576
X
XT files, opening ... 142
723
Index
724
Index
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

Dr.-Johannes-Heidenhain-Strae 5
83301 Traunreut, Germany
{ +49 8669 31-0
| +49 8669 5061
E-mail: info@heidenhain.de
Technical support | +49 8669 32-1000
Measuring systems { +49 8669 31-3104
E-mail: service.ms-support@heidenhain.de
TNC support
{ +49 8669 31-3101
E-mail: service.nc-support@heidenhain.de
NC programming { +49 8669 31-3103
E-mail: service.nc-pgm@heidenhain.de
PLC programming { +49 8669 31-3102
E-mail: service.plc@heidenhain.de
Lathe controls
{ +49 8669 31-3105
E-mail: service.lathe-support@heidenhain.de
www.heidenhain.de
3-D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN

help you to reduce non-cutting time:
For example in
workpiece alignment
datum setting
workpiece measurement
digitizing 3-D surfaces
with the workpiece touch probes

TS 220 with cable
TS 640 with infrared transmission
tool measurement
wear monitoring
tool breakage monitoring
with the tool touch probe

TT 140
737 759-21 Ver01 SW02 Printed in Germany 12/2011 H

Heidenhain Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heidenhain Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heidenhain Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of the TNC?

What are the main components of the TNC?

What are some of the functions of the keys on the TNC?

What are some of the functions of the keys on the TNC?

Users Manual

Controls of the TNC

Program/file management, TNC functions

Select or delete programs and files,

Split screen layout

Define program call, select datum and

Toggle the display between machining

Select MOD functions

Soft keys for selecting functions on

Display help text for NC error messages,

Shifts between soft-key rows

Display all current error messages

Machine operating modes

Go directly to blocks, cycles and

Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed

Positioning with Manual Data Input

Program Run, Single Block

Define and call cycles

Programming and Editing

Enter and call labels for

Coordinate axes and numbers: Entering and editing

Programming path movements

Select coordinate axes or

Polar coordinate input / Incremental

FK free contour programming

Save actual position or values from

Circle center/pole for polar coordinates

Special functions / smarT.NC

Skip dialog questions, delete words

About this Manual

About this Manual

This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the

This symbol indicates that the described function must be

This symbol indicates that you can find detailed

Would you like any changes, or have you found

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530

TNC Model, Software and Features

TNC Model, Software and Features

iTNC 530, HSCI and HeROS 5

iTNC 530, HSCI and HeROS 5

iTNC 530 Programming

TNC Model, Software and Features

Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer

smarT.NC user documentation:

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530

TNC Model, Software and Features

Function that monitors areas defined by the

DXF Converter software option

Extract contours and machining positions

Additional dialog language software

Function for superimposing coordinate

AFC software option

Function for adaptive feed-rate control for

KinematicsOpt software option

Touch-probe cycles for inspecting and

Users Manual for